<!DOCTYPE ETS PUBLIC "-//UMDLPS//DTD EEBOPROOF 2.0//EN">
<ETS>
<TEMPHEAD>
<REVDESCR>
<CHANGE>
<DATE>2007-11-01</DATE>
<RESPSTMT>
<NAME>Jonathan Blaney</NAME>
<RESP>MURP</RESP>
</RESPSTMT>
<ITEM>proofed text and revised markup</ITEM>
</CHANGE>
</REVDESCR>
</TEMPHEAD>
<EEBO>
<IDG S="marc" R="OX" ID="A81992">
<STC T="W">D422</STC>
<STC T="T">E1601_2</STC>
<BIBNO T="umi">99867819</BIBNO>
<VID>170142</VID>
</IDG>
<TEXT LANG="eng">
<FRONT>
<DIV1 TYPE="title page">
<PB REF="1" MS="y">
<P>&Sgr;&egr;&igr;&sgr;&mgr;&ogr;&sfgr; &Mgr;&egr;&ggr;&agr;&sfgr;. OR HEAVEN &amp; EARTH SHAKEN.</P>
<P>A Treati&s;e &s;hewing how Kings, Princes, and their Governments are turned and changed By <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t</HI> as King of Kings, and King of Saints.</P>
<Q><BIBL><HI>Hagg.</HI> 2. 6.</BIBL>
<P><GAP DESC="foreign"></P>
<P>Thus &s;aith the Lord of Ho&s;ts. Yet once, it is a little while and I will &s;hake the Heavens and the Earth, and the Sea and the dry Land. And I will &s;hake all Nations.</P></Q>
<P>By JOHN DAVIS, <HI>M. A.</HI> &s;ometime <HI>Lecturer</HI> at <HI>Chri&s;t Church</HI> in <HI>LONDON,</HI> and now Pa&s;tour of a Congregation in <HI>Dover.</HI></P>
<P>LONDON. Printed by <HI>T. C.</HI> for <HI>Nathaniel Brooke</HI> at the Angel in <HI>Cornhill.</HI> 1655.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 TYPE="to the reader">
<PB REF="2">
<HEAD><PB REF="2">
The Epi&s;tle of the Author to the Reader.</HEAD>
<OPENER><SALUTE>Chri&s;tian Reader,</SALUTE></OPENER>
<P>_ALl men in the world are natu|rally acted by a principle, either of <HI>Love, or Feare;</HI> and there is &s;omething in the <HI>en&s;uing Treati&s;e</HI> to meet with <HI>both.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Natura hominis Novita|tis a|vida.</NOTE> Men are greedily addicted to <HI>No|velty,</HI> new fa&s;hions and opinions, new &s;traines and modes, new matters and methods; yea <HI>Pamphlets of news</HI> are <HI>taking,</HI> and I feare me <HI>too much.</HI></P>
<P>The Title tells you of a <HI>Great Earth|quake,</HI> or <HI>Heaven and Earth &s;haken,</HI> which denotes the great and &s;uddain turne and change of things: Now while things are turning and changing they appeare <HI>new</HI> to us; they have not the &s;ame face <HI>now</HI> they had <HI>before.</HI> And &s;urely men are more obliged to
<PB REF="3">
conver&s;e with <HI>News in things,</HI> then <HI>News in Books; Men</HI> compile your <HI>News-books,</HI> but <HI>God</HI> makes <HI>News in things.</HI></P>
<P>If what is here pre&s;ented were <HI>for|reigne,</HI> and &s;uch as did not relate to you, you might ju&s;tly pa&s;&s;e it by, and pitch on that which is of more concern|ment to you. But let me tell you, there is no <HI>Turne</HI> or <HI>Change</HI> mentioned <HI>here,</HI> but that which relates to you, and wherein you are <HI>concerned,</HI> and have been <HI>Actors</HI> one way or other, for <HI>good</HI> or <HI>evil;</HI> either <HI>provoking</HI> by your <HI>&s;ins,</HI> or <HI>interceding</HI> by your <HI>prayers:</HI> and therefore (me thinks) you &s;hould <HI>love</HI> to read <HI>your &s;elves</HI> over, and the <HI>new things</HI> that you have made.</P>
<P><HI>Turnes and Changes,</HI> e&s;pecially in great bodies of <HI>Kingdoms</HI> and <HI>Com|mon-wealthes,</HI> are <HI>great Turnes,</HI> turnes of great and publick intere&s;t; but not alwayes <HI>pro&s;perous,</HI> and &s;o makes way for your <HI>feare.</HI></P>
<P>The greate&s;t <HI>State&s;-men</HI> have &s;tudi|ou&s;ly avoided (as much as they could) all <HI>Innovations,</HI> knowing the trouble and danger that follows thereon; le&s;t
<PB REF="3">
while they de&s;igne the <HI>common good; dregs</HI> &s;hould be &s;tirred up in the &s;pirits of people, that they could not ea&s;ily &s;et|tle and allay again.</P>
<P>I heartily wi&s;h you the increa&s;e of a <HI>godly feare,</HI> that amid&s;t all the <HI>Turnes</HI> and <HI>Changes</HI> which you read of, you may yet more and more experi|ence that <HI>ble&s;&s;ed turne</HI> and change of heart, from <HI>darkne&s;&s;e to light,</HI> from things <HI>below,</HI> to things <HI>above,</HI> from <HI>creatures</HI> to <HI>Chri&s;t;</HI> and then all <HI>the&s;e Turnes</HI> &s;hall not onely not <HI>hurt</HI> you, but do you much <HI>good.</HI></P>
<P><HI>The Method</HI> I have ob&s;erved and &s;tudied, hath been to <HI>informe</HI> you as <HI>plainely,</HI> and to <HI>apply</HI> that informa|tion as <HI>clo&s;ly</HI> as I could.</P>
<P>I have laid things down by way of <HI>Propo&s;itions;</HI> and tho&s;e Propo&s;itions <HI>&s;uch</HI> as might make way for, and give light to <HI>one another,</HI> the <HI>foregoing</HI> to the <HI>following</HI> Propo&s;itions; and all of them put together, might acquaint you with that which was intended in this worke.</P>
<P>That you might the better take in, and retaine things in your minde, I have in every <HI>Chapter</HI> perfixed the
<PB REF="4">
&s;everal <HI>Propo&s;itions</HI> therein opened; and mo&s;t of them are (all &s;hould have been) in a differing letter from the bo|dy of the Book.</P>
<P>The <HI>XXI. Chapter</HI> makes mention of <HI>twelve Sections,</HI> which I confe&s;&s;e I intended for the heads of twelve &s;e|veral <HI>Chapters,</HI> with &s;uch application as are in the other parts of the Book: but I was afraid of being <HI>tedious.</HI> I know uot how that which is here done will &s;uite with the &s;pirits of the <HI>godly|wi&s;e;</HI> to whom I de&s;ire to approve my &s;elfe in this bu&s;ine&s;&s;e. And if I might receive any incouragement from them, it might ea&s;ily draw forth my thoughts which I have had, of the Turnes of <HI>Councils and Armies,</HI> of <HI>Laws and Trading,</HI> of <HI>Continents and I&s;lands;</HI> The great turnes at <HI>Sea,</HI> as well as up|on the <HI>Land;</HI> of affairs concerning the <HI>Church</HI> as well as the <HI>State.</HI> But I &s;hall adde no more <HI>now</HI> but this pe|tition: That the God of all wi&s;dome would wi&s;e us <HI>to know the Times,</HI> and our <HI>duties</HI> in them; and help us to <HI>&s;erve our generation,</HI> and to do the worke of the day in the day; <HI>To live by faith,</HI> and by <HI>faith and patience</HI>
<PB REF="4">
<HI>to po&s;&s;e&s;&s;e our &s;oules,</HI> until the coming of our Lord Je&s;us Chri&s;t, in whom I am,</P>
<CLOSER><SIGNED>Your truely affectionate Brother to &s;erve you in his Go&s;pel IOHN DAVIS.</SIGNED></CLOSER>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 TYPE="errata">
<HEAD>Errata.</HEAD>
<P><HI>PAge 20.</HI> l. <HI>2. for</HI> eight r. &s;eventh. <HI>Page 43. for</HI> three r. third. <HI>Page 75. for</HI> underpowers r. undercowers.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 TYPE="to the reader">
<PB REF="5">
<HEAD>To the Reader.</HEAD>
<P>REader, this is a booki&s;h-age, and whereas Learning was heretofore graced by judicious Schollars, it is now much vilified by illiterate &s;criblers. What <HI>Scaliger</HI> &s;aid of France, <HI>omni|bus &s;cribendi datur libertas, paucis facultas;</HI> All men may write, but few are able to write; is verified here in England: All have liberty to write, but few ability. Hence it is that &s;o many leane pamphlets and peices come forth daily, treating of Inferiour and incon&s;iderate things. This Author ac|quaints you with the great <HI>Shakings,</HI> the great <HI>Alterations,</HI> which <HI>God</HI> and <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> do make in Heaven and Earth upon performance of divine Promi&s;es: He treats of the u&s;e and mini&s;tration of Angels therein; he &s;heweth that all power is Chri&s;ts; that the Princes of the earth have all their power from him; he informes of what u&s;e Govern|ment and Governours are, how &s;ubject
<PB REF="5">
to change; whats the evil of abu&s;ing power, whats the cau&s;e of Civil Wars and Fatal Turnes; He tells you how &s;e|verely the Lord Chri&s;t will deale with the Potentates of the earth, who&s;e power is erected again&s;t him and his; which are things of an high nature, and well handled. Though <HI>Galen</HI> &s;aid of <HI>Mo&s;es</HI> workes, <HI>Multa dicit, nil probat;</HI> and <HI>Augu&s;tine</HI> of <HI>Manichaeus, dixit &amp; abiit,</HI> he gave no rea&s;on of what he &s;aid; yet it is far otherwi&s;e with this Author, who judiciou&s;ly and &s;olidly makes good what he hath a&s;&s;erted. The Matter, Method, and Compo&s;ition, are waters from his own Ci&s;tern, and hony from his own Hive. He hath not lar|ded his book <HI>alieno adipe,</HI> with the fat of other men. The work &s;peakes for it &s;elfe, being elaborate, well compacted, and weighty through words of truth; and doubtle&s;&s;e will finde acceptance a|mong&s;t tho&s;e who have their &s;en&s;es ex|ercis'd to di&s;cern of &s;uch things. Its mo&s;t true which <HI>Era&s;mus</HI> &s;aith, <HI>Nihil moro&s;ius hominum judiciis;</HI> nothing is more peevi&s;h then the judgements of men: what one magnifies, another vi|lifies; and what is vilified by one, is
<PB REF="6">
magnified by another; yet it is &s;ome comfort that mens judgements are like their pallats; what &s;uites not with one doth with another; and where the wine is good, few will di&s;ta&s;te it. Reader, buy and try; if thou be plea&s;ured or pro|fited, the Author hath his aime; if nei|ther, he will not be provoked, knowing <HI>Nunquam tam bene agitur cum rebus humanis ut meliora placeant plurimis;</HI> Such is the di&s;po&s;ition of humane affairs, that the be&s;t things ever plea&s;e fewe&s;t.</P>
<CLOSER><SIGNED>W. Gr.</SIGNED></CLOSER>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 TYPE="table of contents">
<PB REF="6">
<HEAD>The Contents of the Book.</HEAD>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. I.</HEAD>
<ITEM>SHeweth the occa&s;ion and Scope of this Treati&s;e.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. II.</HEAD>
<ITEM>HHandleth the&s;e eight Propo&s;als.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> God delivers his Prophe&s;ies in way of a Promi&s;e. <HI>2.</HI> New-Te&s;ta|ment Promi&s;es are &s;et forth in Old-Te&s;tament language. <HI>3.</HI> Both Pro|phe&s;ies and Promi&s;es, are to be taken in the large&s;t &s;en&s;e. <HI>4.</HI> That both Prophe&s;ies and Promi&s;es admit of di|vers Degrees, Sea&s;ons, Manners of fullfilling. <HI>5.</HI> That under one Per|&s;on or things named, a whole Series both of per&s;ons and things, is to be un|der&s;tood. <HI>6.</HI> God performes his Promi&s;es in the&s;e latter Ages, in a way of proportion to his former glorious workings. <HI>7.</HI> The inflicting of judge|ment on the Adver&s;aries of his Church, is &s;ubordinate to the performance of
<PB REF="7">
his Promi&s;es. <HI>8.</HI> That the time of fullfilliug Prophe&s;ies and working great changes is at, or before the com|ing of Chri&s;t.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. III.</HEAD>
<ITEM>SHeweth the Meaning, Doctrines, and Method of Haggai <HI>2. 6, 7, 8.</HI></ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. IV.</HEAD>
<ITEM>HAndleth this Doctrine, In the great Turnes of Ages, God di&s;|pen&s;eth him&s;elfe in the way of a Pro|mi&s;e.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> This holds out God as a Father. <HI>2.</HI> Exalts the honour of Chri&s;t the Son. <HI>3.</HI> Honours God in the per&s;on of the Spirit. <HI>4.</HI> Makes notably for the &s;ecurity and improvement of grace. <HI>5.</HI> Notably confounds the men of the World. <HI>6.</HI> Greatens our e&s;tate.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> of In&s;truction, &s;hewing</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> In great Turnes, are great wants. <HI>2.</HI> It &s;hewes the vanity of the crea|tures. <HI>3.</HI> That Gods wayes are in the deeps.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>2.</HI> of Exhortation to &s;earch out
<PB REF="7">
the Promi&s;es of the latter Age. The Motives are &s;ix.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> This renders you children of wi&s;|dome. <HI>2.</HI> Its a ble&s;&s;ed pre&s;ervative again&s;t the infection of &s;in. <HI>3.</HI> It ad|vanceth your faith and love. <HI>4.</HI> Its proper to conquer difficulties and di&s;|couragements. <HI>5.</HI> Its apt to make you watchful and dutiful. <HI>6.</HI> It ad|vanceth your heart in prai&s;es.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. V.</HEAD>
<ITEM>SHeweth that when Chri&s;t is about to performe his Promi&s;es, he cau|&s;eth Changes in Natural bodies. How?</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Je&s;us Chri&s;t hath given a being and con&s;tant cour&s;e to Heaven and Earth. <HI>2.</HI> He maintaines what he hath given. <HI>3.</HI> The creatures thus made and maintained, are at his becke. <HI>4.</HI> That it is his plea&s;ure they &s;hould &s;ome|times &s;tep a&s;ide from their ordinary con&s;tant cour&s;e. <HI>5.</HI> Chri&s;t governes them in all their turnings a&s;ide. <HI>6.</HI> That the&s;e turnes carry the nature of Signes, yet favour not A&s;trological Predictions. Why? becau&s;e,</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> This is the beginning of taking
<PB REF="8">
to him&s;elf his great power. <HI>2.</HI> By this meanes he &s;peaks to all the World. <HI>3.</HI> By this way of working, he minds us that the creatures are not in that &s;tate he intends for them. <HI>4.</HI> By the&s;e turns in Natural bodies, he knows how to draw forth &s;piritual actings in his peo|ple.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> of In&s;truction.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> To &s;ee Chri&s;ts excellency.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> In that he cau&s;eth the&s;e turnes. <HI>2.</HI> In that he can doe more.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>2.</HI> Its a vain thing to &s;et again&s;t Chri&s;t. <HI>3.</HI> Its ea&s;ie hence to conceive the Promi&s;es of this life &s;hall be per|formed.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>2.</HI> of Exhortation.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> To con&s;ider Chri&s;t in all the&s;e Changes. <HI>2.</HI> To feare before him. <HI>3.</HI> To advance your faith. <HI>4.</HI> To ex|alt him above man, or meanes.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. VI.</HEAD>
<ITEM>SHeweth the change of Angels, and this Doctrine, That Je&s;us Chri&s;t in the great turning Providences, im|ployes the mini&s;tration of Angels. For clearing of which Doctrine, take
<PB REF="8">
notice of the&s;e nine things.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Je&s;us Chri&s;t, God-man, is head of Angels. <HI>2.</HI> Angels are to &s;erve him; not in his per&s;on alone, but in &s;erving of his Saints. <HI>3.</HI> Angels are to &s;erve Chri&s;t and his Saints, in the de&s;truction of their enemies. <HI>4.</HI> An|gels are to have more apparent decla|ration made of their &s;ervice toward Chri&s;t and his world. <HI>5.</HI> Angels are brought in in the vi&s;ions, and &s;o in the execution of tho&s;e vi&s;ions. <HI>6.</HI> An|gels have worke deputed to them, con|cerning Kingdomes and Nations. <HI>7.</HI> Angels and Saints &s;hall be joyned to|gether hereafter; and therefore they are conjoyned in the worke here. <HI>8.</HI> Chri&s;ts la&s;t di&s;pen&s;ations are his great|e&s;t, wherein he u&s;eth Angels.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> In the working of his wi&s;dome. <HI>2.</HI> When he takes to him&s;elfe his great power. <HI>3.</HI> &V;pon more immediate ad|mini&s;tration of Saints. <HI>4.</HI> Shewing forth his unchangablene&s;&s;e.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>9.</HI> Chri&s;t mu&s;t have his Angels, as well as the Dragon his.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> of In&s;truction.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> To &s;ee Chri&s;t his excellency who is far above Angels; becau&s;e they are
<PB REF="9">
but his &s;ervants: where <HI>Heb. 1.</HI> is breifely opened.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>2.</HI> Of Exhortation.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> To behold tho&s;e glorious works. <HI>2.</HI> To draw forth your faith and love. <HI>3.</HI> To provoke you to come forth in the &s;ervice of the&s;e latter dayes; to be fel|low-&s;ervants with the Angels.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. VII.</HEAD>
<ITEM>COntains the &s;hake of Kings, for four Rea&s;ons; becau&s;e,</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> They make the great turnes in the Earth. <HI>2.</HI> They pretend to be ex|empt from mans power. <HI>3.</HI> Dea|ling with them, is a compendious way of dealing with the world. <HI>4.</HI> They are decked&punc;with all worldly power, and &s;eem to be the fitte&s;t match for Chri&s;t.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e of In&s;truction to &s;ee that there is</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> A meane&s;&s;e in their Maje&s;ty. <HI>2.</HI> That the management of particular places mu&s;t be reckoned for. <HI>3.</HI> He will &s;urely account with meaner men. <HI>4.</HI> Its lawful to appe ale from Princes to Chri&s;t. <HI>5.</HI> Judicial proceedings again&s;t Princes, is &s;tamped with
<PB REF="9">
remarkable Characters of Chri&s;t.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e of Exhortation.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> to meditate on the&s;e dealings of Chri&s;t. <HI>2.</HI> to give unto Chri&s;t the honour due to his Name.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. VIII.</HEAD>
<ITEM><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 1.</NOTE> SHewes, Po&s;. <HI>1.</HI> All power is given to Chri&s;t in Heaven and Earth; Where ob&s;erve,</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> All power is in Chri&s;t. <HI>2.</HI> All power is his due, upon the taking of our nature. <HI>3.</HI> though it be his due, 'tis rightly &s;aid to be <HI>given</HI> to him. <HI>4.</HI> Je&s;us Chri&s;t hath had but little honour of all his power. <HI>5,</HI> Chri&s;t will ex|alt him&s;elfe in &s;uch turnes upon Kings, as that they &s;hall honour him in their con&s;ciences.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> Of In&s;truction to teach us,</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> the riches of Gods love to Chri&s;t. <HI>2.</HI> that the Father is fully &s;atisfied in the power laid on him. <HI>3.</HI> the plea&s;ure of the Lord &s;hall pro&s;per in Chri&s;ts hand. <HI>4.</HI> Chri&s;t returnes all his power to the Father.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>2.</HI> of Exhortation:</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> To flocke about Chri&s;t in love. <HI>2.</HI> to come with re&s;olvedne&s;&s;e to be
<PB REF="10">
at his di&s;po&s;al. <HI>3.</HI> tremble ye wic|ked ones, though the mighty of the Earth. <HI>4.</HI> The Lord reigneth, let the earth be glad.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. IX.</HEAD>
<ITEM><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 2.</NOTE> SHewes that Kings reigne by Chri&s;t.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> They are, or are not, by him. <HI>2.</HI> He ble&s;&s;eth or bla&s;teth them, in the worke of Government. <HI>3.</HI> What wi&s;dome or power they have, they can|not put forth without him. <HI>4.</HI> the continuation, or &s;ucce&s;&s;ion of them, is from him. <HI>5.</HI> Bad Kings, as well as good, are from him: where ob&s;erve</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Good men may be bad Kings. 2. the badne&s;&s;e of Kings is not from Chri&s;t: for,</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Its not by his command. <HI>2.</HI> Its not by his working. <HI>3.</HI> He doth not &s;tirre them up to any wickedne&s;&s;e. <HI>4.</HI> though Chri&s;t be no cau&s;e of their bad|ne&s;&s;e, yet he permits it. <HI>5.</HI> In per|mitting them he puts forth a righteous judgement. <HI>6.</HI> He orders their bad|ne&s;&s;e for good.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e of In&s;truction.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> that their being Creatures of
<PB REF="10">
Chri&s;ts making; &s;tamps Authority on them. <HI>2.</HI> When we ri&s;e again&s;t Go|vernment, we ri&s;e again&s;t Chri&s;t. <HI>3.</HI> A&s;cribe the good of Government to Chri&s;t. <HI>4.</HI> Hence take a ground of patience under evil Governours. <HI>5.</HI> Chri&s;t mu&s;t needs be glorious.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e of Exhortation in &s;ixe pa&s;&s;ages out of <HI>P&s;al. 2.</HI></ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> To be wi&s;e. <HI>2.</HI> To be in&s;tructed. <HI>3.</HI> to be in feare. <HI>4.</HI> To &s;erve him. <HI>5.</HI> to rejoyce with trembling. <HI>6.</HI> To ki&s;&s;e the Son.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. X. <NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 3.</NOTE></HEAD>
<ITEM>OPens that &s;etting up of Govern|ment is for the worlds good: as appears,</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> In that it is &s;et to keep the world in order. <HI>2.</HI> Per&s;ons &s;o &s;et, and kept, enjoy propriety. <HI>3.</HI> Government pro|motes the increa&s;e of good things in our propriety. <HI>4.</HI> Government protects your Peace <HI>5.</HI> Setting up of Govern|ment is, when God makes &s;ome men able and willing to manage Publicke Affairs, and draws others to con&s;ent and &s;ubject. <HI>6.</HI> This is notably for the
<PB REF="11">
good of not &s;ome but all ranks of men. <HI>7.</HI> Its exten&s;ive to the whole life of all tho&s;e men. <HI>8.</HI> There is honour due to them, who are thus &s;et up for Go|vernment.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e of In&s;truction to &s;hew,</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> That God is a faithful Creator. <HI>2.</HI> Rulers had need be of much wi&s;dom, and publickne&s;&s;e of &s;pirit.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>2:</HI> of Exhortation.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> To e&s;teem them highly. <HI>2.</HI> To make honourable mention of them&punc; <HI>3.</HI> To &s;peak to God for them. <HI>4.</HI> To &s;ub|mit to every&punc;Ordinance. <HI>5.</HI> To te&s;tifie our thankfulne&s;&s;e, by &s;ervice in per&s;on, and in pur&s;e.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. XI.</HEAD>
<ITEM><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 4.</NOTE> UNfolds that Governours and Go|vernments are apt to change; which the&s;e &s;ix things will further in|forme you in.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Governours change by death, and in their manners while they live. <HI>2.</HI> Manners and forms of Government, as well as Per&s;ons, are liable to change. <HI>3.</HI> People change in their mindes and conditions. <HI>4.</HI> Change of Govern|ments,
<PB REF="11">
Governours, and People, cau|&s;eth change of Laws. <HI>5.</HI> they change in their league and trade with Neigh|bour Nations. <HI>6.</HI> Je&s;us Chri&s;t King of Kings, makes a change on Govern|ours and Governments, by &s;ending Plague, Sword, or Famine, on them.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e of In&s;truction.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Le&s;&s;er bodies will change. <HI>2.</HI> See the creatures vanity.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e of Exhortation to Princes.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>2.</HI> To exalt righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e. <HI>2.</HI> To be little in their own eyes.</ITEM>
<ITEM>To All. <HI>1.</HI> to rai&s;e up your hearts to minde things above. <HI>2.</HI> to be content in the&s;e turnes. <HI>3.</HI> to con|tend to have the change for better.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. XII.</HEAD>
<ITEM><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 5.</NOTE> SHews that Kings abu&s;e their power; for</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> they &s;erve them&s;elves more then others. <HI>2.</HI> they turn the power which &s;hould be for good, to the hurt of others. <HI>3.</HI> Power was &s;et again&s;t Chri&s;t in his per&s;on when he was on Earth. <HI>4.</HI> It is again&s;t Chri&s;t and his intere&s;t Now. <HI>5.</HI> the power of Kings is given up to Chri&s;ts enemies.</ITEM>
<ITEM><PB REF="12">
&V;&s;e of In&s;truction, to &s;ee</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> the foundation of turns on Kingdoms. <HI>viz.</HI> Departing from the right ends. <HI>2.</HI> How little Kings de|&s;erve the name of Sacred. <HI>3.</HI> Judge not of men or cau&s;es to be good, by the greatne&s;&s;e of them that follow them. <HI>4.</HI> &V;ndeceive your &s;elves, about the true value of earthly powers. <HI>5.</HI> that tho&s;e in power be circum&s;pect.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. XIII.</HEAD>
<ITEM><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 6.</NOTE> SHews, that abu&s;e of power tends to the breaking of power, which is ap|parent;</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> When tho&s;e in power indulge their own lazine&s;&s;e. <HI>2.</HI> When they take no account of under-officers. <HI>3.</HI> When they rule by will. <HI>4.</HI> When they look not after the execution of good Laws. <HI>5.</HI> When they are un|ju&s;t. <HI>6.</HI> When they &s;infully conform to neighbour Princes. <HI>7.</HI> When they per&s;ecute tho&s;e who are good. <HI>8.</HI> When they interpo&s;e unduely in the things of God.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> of In&s;truction, to &s;ee the cau&s;e of great turns among us.</ITEM>
<ITEM><PB REF="12">
&V;&s;e <HI>2.</HI> of Admonition to Princes.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Take heed of your hearts in law|ful things. <HI>2.</HI> Take heed of cove|teous &s;elf-love. <HI>3.</HI> Exalt not your &s;elves unduely. <HI>4.</HI> Anger and ma|lice misbecome a Prince. <HI>5.</HI> For|get not the kindne&s;&s;e of others to you. <HI>6.</HI> Look that your Courtiers prove not flatterers.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. XIV.</HEAD>
<ITEM><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 7.</NOTE> PRinces being wicked, people grow wicked too; becau&s;e</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Wickedne&s;&s;e in men of high place is mi&s;repre&s;ented to the people. <HI>2.</HI> Wicked Princes leave good Laws un|executed, and &s;in unpuni&s;hed. <HI>3.</HI> Then wickedne&s;&s;e comes to be e&s;tabli&s;hed as by a Law. <HI>4.</HI> Becau&s;e of the Prie&s;ts of the Nation. <HI>5.</HI> People are migti|ly led by example.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> To &s;hew how much Rulers have to an&s;wer for. <HI>2.</HI> To &s;hew that examples move much. <HI>3.</HI> To take notice of the wickedne&s;s in us. <HI>4.</HI> See how ju&s;t it is to &s;uffer from Princes, when we grow &s;inful by them.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<PB REF="13">
<HEAD>CHAP. XV.</HEAD>
<ITEM><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 8.</NOTE> THat abu&s;e of power, and wicked|ne&s;&s;e of people adapt to Civil war. How abu&s;e of power works on good mens &s;pirits. How wickedne&s;s adapts; See it thus.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Pride in Princes, produceth pride in people. <HI>2.</HI> Pride introduceth luxu|ry. <HI>3.</HI> Luxury introduceth poverty. <HI>4.</HI> Poverty makes people di&s;contented. <HI>5.</HI> Di&s;contented people meditate their pre&s;&s;ures. <HI>6.</HI> Pre&s;&s;ed people hardly pay for any publick u&s;es. <HI>7.</HI> People grow weary of their Trades. <HI>8.</HI> They feare more then they feel. <HI>9.</HI> There be Incendiaries that augment their fears. <HI>10.</HI> The&s;e incendiaries have many fol|lowers.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> To Princes, to con&s;ider their abu&s;e of power. <HI>2.</HI> To people who complain of Wars, yet are the cau&s;e of them. <HI>3.</HI> To admire Gods goodne&s;s that we have no more Civil Wars.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. XVI.</HEAD>
<ITEM><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 9.</NOTE> SHews that Civil Wars produce fatal Changes; for</ITEM>
<ITEM><PB REF="13">
<HI>1.</HI> Then Government is de&s;troyed. <HI>2.</HI> Equity and Laws are not then to be heard. <HI>3.</HI> Then Religion, and devotion, are &s;ti|fled. <HI>4.</HI> Learning and Trading fall down dead. <HI>5.</HI> A rich people is made poor, and a &s;trong people weake. <HI>6.</HI> No &s;afety to any then. <HI>7.</HI> Plantations are nipt in the bud. <HI>8.</HI> The victory of Civil Wars is much to be lamented.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e. <HI>1.</HI> Admire Gods goodne&s;&s;e that we are a Nation. <HI>2.</HI> Con&s;ider how much we are engaged to tho&s;e in power, by who&s;e care it comes to pa&s;&s;e that Wars break not forth. <HI>3.</HI> Look on &s;ome incon|veniences as eligible, when they prevent what is fatal. <HI>4.</HI> It &s;hould be far from us to promote a Civil War.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. XVII.</HEAD>
<ITEM><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 10.</NOTE> NEighbour Princes fall off from us, or come forth again&s;t us, when we are in Civil War: which is opened thus.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> God hath bounded and limited all Nations in their Territories. <HI>2.</HI> Confede|racy is as needful for a Nation as a Per|&s;on. <HI>3.</HI> Its of great concernment, what, and with whom, confederacy is conclu|ded. <HI>4.</HI> I&s;lands have more liberty of
<PB REF="14">
choice, as to their confederates, then tho&s;e that live in a Continent. <HI>5.</HI> We may have cau&s;e to break with tho&s;e with whom we have been confederate. <HI>6.</HI> Its po&s;&s;ible &s;ome may break unju&s;tly from us. <HI>7.</HI> Tho&s;e with whom we are in League, may be de|voured by their adver&s;aries. <HI>8.</HI> Its po&s;&s;i|ble notwith&s;tanding confederacies a|broad, we may be di&s;joynt at home. <HI>9.</HI> This di&s;traction tempts your friends to &s;hake you off. <HI>10.</HI> It opportunes your con|federates to become your enemies.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> See how little help there is in men. <HI>2.</HI> See what wickedne&s;&s;e is incident to Nations as well as per&s;ons. <HI>3.</HI> Take hence one argument more again&s;t your Civil War. <HI>4.</HI> Learn, its a curious work to manage affairs in Civil Wars. <HI>5.</HI> Ad|mire Gods providences towards us, who hath bu&s;ied our Neighbour Nations.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. XVIII.</HEAD>
<ITEM><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 11.</NOTE> OPens that unkind and unju&s;t dea|lings of neighbour Nations produce forreign Wars: as thus.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> The pride and lu&s;t of ruling men, cau&s;e the&s;e hard dealings. <HI>2.</HI> Tho&s;e who are great, would be great alone. <HI>3.</HI> The&s;e
<PB REF="14">
great leaders obtain many followers. <HI>4.</HI> They conclude they have a fit &s;ea&s;on for their rage. <HI>5.</HI> A people under pre&s;ent pre&s;|&s;ures are exceding &s;en&s;ible. <HI>6.</HI> They re&s;olve if they recover, to do to others, as others thought to have done unto them.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> To &s;ee the &s;preading of &s;in, that it reacheth Nations as well as per&s;ons. <HI>2.</HI> Nations as well as per&s;ons, are liable to trouble upon trouble. <HI>3.</HI> God is appealed unto in War. <HI>4.</HI> To admire again Gods goodne&s;s to us.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. XIX.</HEAD>
<ITEM><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 12.</NOTE> SHews, that Je&s;us Chri&s;t will deale in &s;everity with the Kings of the Earth; becau&s;e</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Kings are in covenant with their people, and break their Covenants. <HI>2.</HI> In this dealing Chri&s;t appears no re&s;pecter of per&s;ons. <HI>3.</HI> In this dealing Chri&s;t makes his wi&s;dom out-&s;hine King-craft. <HI>4.</HI> Chri&s;t is to overcome Satan in his territories.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> Reade the &s;infulne&s;s of Kings in Chri&s;ts &s;everity. <HI>2.</HI> See the impartial and un&s;potted holine&s;s of Je&s;us Chri&s;t. <HI>3.</HI> See what to expect, and to what to refer our pre&s;ent providences.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<PB REF="15">
<HEAD>CHAP. XX.</HEAD>
<ITEM>COncludes with &s;hewing, how the twelve Po&s;itions formerly handled, in&s;truct us in our pre&s;ent Turns and Changes.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. XXI.</HEAD>
<ITEM>SHews the great Turns on Nations, ari|&s;ing from the con&s;ideration of Chri&s;t as King of Saints, &s;et forth in twelve Sections.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Je&s;us Chri&s;t is King of Saints, as well as King of the World. <HI>2.</HI> Chri&s;t hath his high honour upon his &s;ufferings. <HI>3.</HI> Chri&s;t puts forth the power he hath as King of Nations, for his people, to whom he is King of Saints. <HI>4.</HI> Je&s;us Chri&s;t &s;hall have more vi&s;ible glory in this World. <HI>5.</HI> Bitterne&s;&s;e is mingled with all Govern|ments, that Chri&s;t may be &s;weet. <HI>6.</HI> Chri&s;t pours out on his people a mighty &s;pirit of prayer, which he in his Government as King of Saints, returns full an&s;wer to. <HI>7.</HI> Je&s;us Chri&s;t &s;hall have a willing people in the day of his power. <HI>8.</HI> Some of the Kings
<PB REF="15">
of the Earth &s;hall be among this willing people. <HI>9.</HI> Chri&s;t having great work to do, &s;tirs up the &s;pirit of Princes and people. <HI>10.</HI> The great work of the latter days &s;hall be to exalt holine&s;&s;e and righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e. <HI>11.</HI> Saints &s;hall have notable Conque&s;t over their enemies. <HI>12.</HI> The&s;e things &s;hall be by degrees.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<HEAD>CHAP. XXII.</HEAD>
<ITEM>COntains the &V;&s;es of that Doctrine, that Chri&s;t is King of Saints.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> &V;&s;e of inviting In&s;truction, di&s;|covering,</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Chri&s;ts excellency. <HI>2.</HI> The proper|ties of his Kingdom. <HI>3.</HI> The glory of his Saints.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Chri&s;t his excellency in four things.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> His right and Title which is the ju&s;te&s;t: being.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> By Election. <HI>2.</HI> By Donation. <HI>3.</HI> By Birth. <HI>4.</HI> By purcha&s;e. <HI>5.</HI> By Con|que&s;t.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>2.</HI> His Qualifications are greate&s;t. <HI>3.</HI> His Admini&s;trations are the highe&s;t.
<PB REF="16">
<HI>4.</HI> His Communications are the large&s;t.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>2</HI> The Properties of his Kingdom being,</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Spiritual. <HI>2.</HI> &V;niver&s;al. <HI>3.</HI> Eter|nal. <HI>4.</HI> Bringing in perfect peace.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>3.</HI> The glory or excellency of his Saints; for,</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> They &s;hall be more Saints. <HI>2.</HI> They &s;hall live &s;afely. <HI>3.</HI> their enemies &s;hall be ruined.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>2.</HI> &V;&s;e of Exhortation.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> to know him. <HI>2.</HI> to fear him. <HI><GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">.</HI> to tru&s;t in him. <HI>4.</HI> to embrace him with love. <HI>5.</HI> to be like to him. <HI>6.</HI> to glorifie him. <HI>7.</HI> to be obedient to his laws; where you have,</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> the &s;ix Laws of Nature with Go&s;pel-light.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Peace is to be &s;ought. <HI>2.</HI> Stand to your Covenants. <HI>3.</HI> You mu&s;t be thankful. <HI>4.</HI> Serve one another. <HI>5.</HI> Be merciful and forgive. <HI>6.</HI> Reproach not one another.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>2.</HI> You have many Go&s;pel &s;trains &s;et out to highthen your obedience.</ITEM>
</LIST>
<LIST>
<PB REF="16">
<ITEM>THe Appendix &s;hews A&s;trological Predictions to be frivilous and impious; where the&s;e five things are granted.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> that the Stars have a powerful ruling excellency. <HI>2.</HI> that by their light, heat, and motion, they work great alterations in the Aire. <HI>3.</HI> that ha|ving this power over the Aire, they do diver<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="2 letters">y affect compound bodies. <HI>4.</HI> Scrip|ture &s;peaks plainely, that they are for times, and &s;ea&s;ons. <HI>5.</HI> that there may be &s;ome pre&s;ent Predictions about weather and &s;uch things.</ITEM>
<ITEM>But two things are denyed.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> that Stars have any power over the Rea&s;on or Will of man to nece&s;&s;itate or inforce them. <HI>2.</HI> that A&s;trologers can rightly pretend to foretell &s;uch things as depend on mans will, or are any way contingent: and this appears by &s;even Arguments.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>1.</HI> Such Predictions are derogatory to Gods prerogative of fore-knowing. <HI>2.</HI> Such predictions are cro&s;&s;e to the word of God. <HI>3.</HI> We rea&s;on from the Nature of the Stars. <HI>4.</HI> We rea&s;on from the Nature of Art. <HI>5.</HI> We argue
<PB REF="17">
from that part of A&s;trology, that is about weather. <HI>6.</HI> the&s;e Predictions are derogatory to the excellency of Man. <HI>7.</HI> VVe rea&s;on from the Nature of con|tingent things.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>Object.</HI> But many things they fore|tell come to pa&s;&s;e</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>Sol. 1.</HI> Not &s;o many as they brag of. <HI>2.</HI> Not from any cau&s;ing virtue in the Stars. <HI>3.</HI> Blind men &s;ometime hit the white; &s;o may A&s;trologers. <HI>4.</HI> their coming to pa&s;&s;e is a &s;trong argu|ment again&s;t them. <HI>5.</HI> It may come to pa&s;&s;e in a way of judicial venge|ance.</ITEM>
<ITEM>&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> to the profe&s;&s;ors of the Mathematicks. <HI>2.</HI> to their Di&s;ciples, dehorting them from Figure-ca&s;ting.</ITEM>
</LIST>
</DIV1>
</FRONT>
<BODY>
<HEAD><PB N="1" REF="17">&Sgr;&egr;&igr;&sgr;&mgr;&ogr;&sfgr; &Mgr;&egr;&ggr;&agr;&sfgr;. OR Heaven and Earth &s;haken.</HEAD>
<DIV1 N="1" TYPE="chapter">
<HEAD>CHAP. I. The Introduction, &s;hewing the occa&s;ion and &s;cope of the in&s;uing Treati&s;e.</HEAD>
<P><HI>_THe works of the Lord are great</HI> (&s;ayeth the P&s;almi&s;t) <HI>&s;ought</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">P&s;al. 111. 2.</NOTE><HI>out of all them that have plea&s;ure therein.</HI> When God is wor|king we mu&s;t eye him; and when his works be great, we mu&s;t be &s;earching them out; and not &s;oon weary, but <HI>taking plea&s;ure</HI> both in the works and &s;earch. Gods works to us of this Nation, have <HI>been honourable and glorious</HI> (as it is ver&s;e 3.) <HI>and his righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e enduring</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">v. 3.</NOTE><HI>for ever.</HI> No marvel then, if they be ta|king, with the minde and hearts of his people, who entertaine them with the highe&s;t e&s;teeme and mo&s;t joyful admira|tion: ver&s;e 4. <HI>He hath made his wonder|ful</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">v. 4.</NOTE><HI>workes to be remembred; the Lord is gra|cious</HI>
<PB N="2" REF="18">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">The occa|&s;ion.</NOTE> <HI>and full of compa&s;&s;ion:</HI> I appeale unto your con&s;ciences that read, whether the grace and full compa&s;&s;ion of God, have not made his works wonderful among us; Now God will not have his works writ|ten in the &s;and; he makes his works won|derful, and his wonderful works to be remembred, and &s;urely his people cannot forget them; they are ingraven on their hearts, and they cannot but remember <NOTE PLACE="marg">v. 5.</NOTE>them&punc; v. <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">. <HI>He giveth meat to them that fear him; He is ever mindful of his Covenant.</HI> Con&s;ider v. 5. the malice and rage of ad|ver&s;aries; and we cannot but reckon it among the wonderful works of God, that his people have a bit of bread, that they have meat for their mouths, and drink to quench their thir&s;t; but when its added, <HI>He is ever mindful of his Cove|nant:</HI> His Covenant, and his mindful|ne&s;&s;e of his Covenant; and &s;o giving them meat, renders this common path of pro|vidence, this <HI>&s;o</HI> giving them meat, to be truly wonderful. v. 6. <HI>He hath &s;hewed his</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">v. 6.</NOTE><HI>people the power of his works.</HI> How! few are there that take notice of the works of God; and fewer that take notice of <HI>God</HI> in his works: But this is the favour that he &s;hewes his people, not onely his works, but the <HI>power of them:</HI> their <HI>Verity,</HI> and <HI>Judgement, Truth, &V;prightne&s;&s;e</HI> and <HI>Sted|fa&s;tne&s;&s;e,</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">v. 7. &amp; 8.</NOTE>as it is v. 7, 8.</P>
<P>Vi&s;ion is the glory and light of life; he
<PB N="3" REF="18">
lives mo&s;t like a man, not that eates and drinks mo&s;t, &s;leeps and &s;ports mo&s;t, but he that with the acting eye of Rea&s;on, &s;ees mo&s;t of things, and their difference: He lives mo&s;t like a Chri&s;tian, that by <NOTE PLACE="marg">Heb. 11. 1.</NOTE>faith <HI>&s;e<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">th him that is invi&s;ible,</HI> makes a <HI>reall pre&s;ence of things ab&s;ent,</HI> and <HI>an evi|dence and tr<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">e enjoyment</HI> of things hoped for: our pre&s;ent and after-happine&s;&s;e is in vi&s;ion, by faith here, really and truly; but more hereafter, when we &s;hall <HI>&s;ee him</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Heb. 11. 27</NOTE><HI>face to face, and know as we are known,</HI> 1 <HI>Cor.</HI> 13. 12. <HI>Daniel</HI> and <HI>John,</HI> the greatly beloved Prophet and Di&s;ciple, were both much honoured with Vi&s;ions and Reve|lations: our Saviour commends <HI>Abra|ham for that he &s;aw his day and rejoyced, Joh.</HI> 8. 56. Tho&s;e who are <HI>Abrahams</HI> &s;eed, cannot but eye Chri&s;t and rejoyce in the dawning of <HI>his day:</HI> if God have <NOTE PLACE="marg">The &s;cope.</NOTE>an hand to work, &s;urely we mu&s;t have an eye to &s;ee, an heart to believe, and a tongue to prai&s;e him. God doth not work little things for his people; it &s;tands not with his love, and their condition; and when he doth <HI>great</HI> things, we mu&s;t meet <HI>him</HI> and <HI>them</HI> with great ob&s;erva|tion. I have heard an Amba&s;&s;ador re|&s;iding here, &s;hould write home that he lived in a Land of wonders; well note|ing how great turns pa&s;&s;ed on us, and how little blood was &s;hed about them; then if &s;trangers &s;ee &s;o much, we &s;hould
<PB N="4" REF="19">
&s;ee more. Doubtle&s;&s;e God hath <HI>revived his works of old; made his arme bare, com|manding</HI> and <HI>creating deliverances</HI> for us. How often hath he brought us to the gates of death? and then &s;aid <HI>return, re|turn, ye children of men.</HI> How many, and mighty, malicious and pro&s;perous, have our enemies been? and yet how de&s;troy|ed? How little and low, how de&s;pi&s;ed and nothing, have your Councils, Ar|mies, Allyes, your <HI>all</HI> been? and yet God hath <HI>remembred us in our low e&s;tate.</HI> He hath not been weary of doing us good, although we have &s;oon been weary of <NOTE PLACE="marg">Mic. 6. 9.</NOTE>&s;erving him. There is <HI>a voyce in the r<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">d</HI> (&s;aith the Prophet) and &s;urely mercies, deliverances and &s;alvations, have <HI>their voyce</HI> al&s;o; and the greater any danger or deliverance is, the louder is the voyce. Oh! that we could heare &s;o as to love and <HI>learn righteou&s;ne&s;se:</HI> Oh! that we were wi&s;e to read Gods works out of his word, his providences in his prophe&s;ies, <HI>Dan.</HI> 12. 10. <HI>The wi&s;e &s;hall under&s;tand:</HI> Thus to un|der&s;tand him, will be our wi&s;dome. When the Devil tempted our Saviour, it was by <HI>&s;hewing him the World and the glory</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Mat. 4. 8.</NOTE><HI>of it;</HI> But behold here a better vi&s;ion; the glory of the world, and worldly King|domes, and the fall of them; Mountains tumbling down, and Vallyes filled up; high things brought low, and low things exalted. How! many and mighty, pre|cious
<PB N="5" REF="19">
and &s;ea&s;onable, have been the re|turns of <HI>fervent, righteous, faithful prayers?</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Jam. 5. 16.</NOTE>They were made <HI>in former Ages,</HI> but are an&s;wered <HI>Now:</HI> our fore-fathers had the honour to &s;ow, and we the ble&s;&s;ing to reape the fruits of their prayers: Oh! the riches of the grace of God, that high|tens our mercies by &s;teeping them in <HI>blood:</HI> Our Adoption, Reconciliation, Redemption, Remi&s;&s;ion of &s;in and &s;alva|tion is by the <HI>precious blood of Je&s;us:</HI> the glorious truths of the everla&s;ting Go&s;pel come to us dyed in his blood, who was the great Martyr, and in the blood of ma|ny <NOTE PLACE="marg">Rev. 3. 14.</NOTE>his &s;ervants and Martyrs: <HI>Rev.</HI> 6. 9. Our pre&s;ent Liberty, Peace, and Enjoy|ments, did they not co&s;t the deare&s;t blood of many valiant Worthies?</P>
<P>Oh! let not, let not the blood of <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> his Martyrs and Souldiers condemn us; Let it not be &s;aid, God &s;tretched forth his hand to <HI>a fooli&s;h and gain&s;aying people;</HI> that the <HI>Oxe knoweth his owner, and the A&s;&s;e</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">I&s;a. 1. 3.</NOTE><HI>his Ma&s;ters crib: and that we know not, care not, con&s;ider not,</HI> when God works &s;uch glorious things. When <HI>David</HI> had the water of the Well of <HI>Bethlehem</HI> brought <NOTE PLACE="marg">2 Sam. 23. 15, 16.</NOTE>to him, he <HI>poured it out before the Lord, be|cau&s;e it was the blood of the&s;e men:</HI> Oh! that now your hearts might rebound the&s;e mercies to Heaven, whence they came, in humble thankfulne&s;&s;e, and watchful obedience; &s;eeing they are the
<PB N="6" REF="20">
<HI>blood of your brethren.</HI> When the time of performing great promi&s;es and prophe|&s;ies <NOTE PLACE="marg">Dan. 9. 2.</NOTE>drew nigh, God rai&s;eth up <HI>Daniel</HI>'s <HI>&s;pirit to &s;earch: Oh!</HI> that we might be praying and &s;earching, praying and rea|ding, praying and inquiring, and not giving over, till we come to &s;ome under|&s;tanding of the&s;e ble&s;&s;ed my&s;teries. Now to help you in this &s;earch, to informe your under&s;tanding, to be in&s;trumental to draw forth and e&s;tabli&s;h your faith about the great works of this latter Age, is the &s;cope of this in&s;uing Treati&s;e. The Lord in much mercy ble&s;&s;e <HI>you</HI> and <HI>it</HI> together, that tho&s;e good ends may be obtained.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="2" TYPE="chapter">
<HEAD>Chap. 2. Handleth the&s;e eight Propo&s;itions.</HEAD>
<P>FIr&s;t that God delivers his prophe&s;ies in the way of a promi&s;e. 2. New-Te&s;tament Promi&s;es are &s;et forth in Old Te&s;tament language. 3. That both pro|phe&s;ies and promi&s;es, are to be taken in the large&s;t extent. 4. That they admit of divers degrees, &s;ea&s;ons, and manners of fulfilling. 5. That under one per&s;on or thing named, the whole &s;eries both of per&s;ons and things is to be under&s;tood. 6. God performes his promi&s;es in the&s;e
<PB N="7" REF="20">
latter ages, in a way of proportion to his former glorious workings. 7. The in|flicting of puni&s;hment, on the adver&s;aries of his Church, is &s;ubordinate to the per|formance of his promi&s;e to his people. 8. That the time of fulfilling Prophe&s;ies and Promi&s;es, and working great changes, is at or before the coming of Chri&s;t.</P>
<P>Before we come to the particulars which we intend to in&s;i&s;t upon; give me leave fir&s;t, for the better under&s;tanding of the matter and the Scriptures produced, to lay down the&s;e eight Con&s;iderations.</P>
<P><HI>God delivers his Prophe&s;ies, in the way of a Promi&s;e.</HI> Prophe&s;ies are the foretelling <NOTE PLACE="marg">Prop. 1.</NOTE>of things that &s;hall come to pa&s;&s;e in their <NOTE PLACE="marg">Prophe&s;ies <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 span"> ed, in way of a promi&s;e.</NOTE>proper times. God cannot &s;peak to his Saints but in away of love; his foretel|ing things to come, tells you how he loves them. Our God is a God of power and grace: and promi&s;es are the engage|ments of both: The Father worketh, and Chri&s;t worketh, for his peoples &s;pecial good: and you have them both at work in performing prophetical promi&s;es.</P>
<P>The prophe&s;ie of Chri&s;t his coming in the fle&s;h, its in the way of a promi&s;e, <HI>I&s;a.</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">I&s;a. 9. 6.</NOTE>9. 6&punc; <HI>&V;nto us a Childe is borne, unto us a Son is given:</HI> faith in the promi&s;e, &s;peaks him born and given, although this was a long while after, <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 7. 14. <HI>The Lord him&s;elfe &s;hall give you a &s;igne. Behold a Virgin &s;hall conceive:</HI> which is rendred in the Go&s;pel
<PB N="8" REF="21">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">Mat. 1. 22.</NOTE> of <HI>Matthew</HI> by t<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">o words: one is, <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>tha<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> which was &s;poken</HI> holding out the pro|ph<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">&s;i<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">; for <HI>I&s;aiah</HI> is called a Prophet, and his &s;peaking is prophetical &s;peaking: for it was &s;p<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ken of the Lord by him. The other word <GAP DESC="foreign"> <HI>that it might be ful|filled,</HI> holds out the performance of that promi&s;e, which is, when the event an|&s;wers and makes up what was in the pro|mi&s;e.</P>
<P>That proph<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">&s;ie that the Go&s;pel &s;hould &s;hine on the darke <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 word"> entiles, is in the way <NOTE PLACE="marg">I&s;a. 9. 2.</NOTE>of a promi&s;e, <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 9. 2. So in <HI>Hag.</HI> 2. 7. (the prophe&s;ie we intend to open in the next Chapter) <HI>Thus &s;aith the Lord of Ho&s;ts,</HI> is by the Author to the <HI>Hebrews</HI> rendred <HI>Heb.</HI> 12. 26. <HI>Now he hath promi&s;ed:</HI> &s;poken by way of promi&s;e <GAP DESC="foreign">. And the ground of this is, the overflowings of Gods love, which cannot &s;peak of things a farre off, but withal&punc; tells you, how he is, and will be engaged about them; what doth concern the pre&s;ent time, is too narrow to expre&s;&s;e his love, and therefore he &s;peaks it out in things that are <HI>to come.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><P>Prop&punc; 2. N. T. Pro|mi&s;es are &s;et out it O. T. lan|guage.</P>
<P>Rev. 11. 1.</P></NOTE> <HI>New Te&s;tament promi&s;es are declared in Old Te&s;tament language.</HI> Thus the erecting of Go&s;pel Churches, the new edition and reformation of them, is called in a phra&s;e of the Old Te&s;tament, <HI>a Temple, Rev.</HI> 11. 1. <HI>John</HI> is bid to mea&s;ure the Temple, when he &s;peaks of Go&s;pel Churches.</P>
<P><PB N="9" REF="21">
The happy &s;tate of the Church is ter|med by a Jewi&s;h phra&s;e <HI>The Tabernacle of God among men, Rev.</HI> 21. 3. &s;ignifying <NOTE PLACE="marg">Rev. 21. 3.</NOTE>the glorious &s;tate of Go&s;pel times: and thus in the place afore named, <HI>filling the hou&s;e with glory,</HI> implyes the &s;ame thing.</P>
<P><HI>Babylon</HI> was of old an enemy to I&s;rael, and the great enemies in Go&s;pel-times are called <HI>Babylon</HI> al&s;o; and the de&s;tructi|on of <HI>tho&s;e</HI> enemies in Go&s;pel-times, is termed the fall of Babylon, <HI>Rev.</HI> 14. 8. <NOTE PLACE="marg">Rev. 14. 8.</NOTE></P>
<P>The Vi&s;ions concerning Church af|fairs are now, and &s;o formerly in the Prophets, expre&s;&s;ed by <HI>Angels, Hor&s;es, Trumpets, Women:</HI> and as they agree in the in&s;tructing language, &s;o in the promi&s;ing language al&s;o; and the rea&s;on, why our promi&s;es are thus expre&s;&s;<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">d, may be,</P>
<P N="1">1. Becau&s;e the &s;ame &s;pirit breaths in both the T<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">&s;taments, <HI>Old</HI> as well as <HI>New. To them was the Go&s;pel preached, Heb.</HI> 4. 2. <NOTE PLACE="marg">Heb. 4. 2.</NOTE><HI>as well as to us:</HI> no marvel then, if the promi&s;es be in the &s;ame, language.</P>
<P N="2">2. God would have the Gentiles to know his heart is now as full to them, as it was to his <HI>I&s;rael</HI> of old; and therefore he &s;peaks to them in the &s;ame language he &s;pake to <HI>I&s;rael.</HI></P>
<P N="3">3. God will have his ancient people, the <HI>Jewes</HI> whom he will convert, to under&s;tand his love fully; which that they may the better do, he &s;peaks unto them in his &amp; their own proper language.</P>
<P><PB N="10" REF="22">
That the&s;e Promi&s;es and Prophe&s;ies are to <NOTE PLACE="marg">Prop. 3.</NOTE>be taken in the large&s;t extent, in the letter and <NOTE PLACE="marg">Pro&punc; and Proph. to betaken in the large&s;t &s;en&s;er.</NOTE>my&s;tery, according to the &s;cope of the place and Analogie of faith&punc;Thus.</P>
<P>Babylons falling, <HI>Rev.</HI> 14. meanes that the Seat, Power, Doctrine, Subjects, and all, are ready to tumble down. Pro|mi&s;es and prophe&s;ies hold out the rai&s;ed|ne&s;&s;e of Gods wi&s;dom and love, and there|fore mu&s;t be of large extent: They &s;peak to, and of all per&s;ons, times and conditi|ons, therefore mu&s;t be large. Prophe&s;ies contain largne&s;&s;e of wi&s;dom and know|ledge, and promi&s;es largene&s;&s;e of, love: and therefore there mu&s;t be a largene&s;&s;e of expre&s;&s;ion to hold them forth. When God &s;aid unto <HI>Jacob, Gen.</HI> 32. 9, 13. <HI>I will</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Gen. 32. 9, 13.</NOTE><HI>do th<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">e good: Jacob</HI> under&s;tood it largly; for he turnes it into an argument of prayer, and twice repeats it: Litteral &s;en&s;e doth not undermine the my&s;tery, nor that overthrow the litteral &s;en&s;e: Gods promi&s;es are &s;uitable to his com|mands, keeping pace with them; they are conjoyned as Arteries and Veines in the body; Now the commands are excee|ding large, <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 119. 96. and &s;o are the <NOTE PLACE="marg">P&s;al. 119. 96.</NOTE>promi&s;es. <HI>Math.</HI> 5. 28. tells from our Sa|viour, that <HI>looking</HI> and <HI>lu&s;ting</HI> is <HI>committing Adultery:</HI> and the promi&s;e of giving Chri&s;t includes in <HI>Pauls</HI> arguing, the gi|ving of all other good things, <HI>Rom.</HI> 8. 32.</P>
<P>The &s;pirit hath framed up Faith with a
<PB N="11" REF="22">
large make and frame; and promi&s;es are for our faith in the largene&s;&s;e of it; and &s;o mu&s;t be large al&s;o. Prophe&s;ies and promi&s;es are expre&s;&s;ions of Gods minde: Now we mu&s;t not limite <HI>the holy One of I&s;rael,</HI> but take him in the fullne&s;&s;e of his expre&s;&s;ions.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Prop. 4.</NOTE> <HI>That the&s;e Prophe&s;ies and Promi&s;es admit of divers Degrees, Sea&s;ons and Manner of</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><P>They have divers de|grees of fulfilling.</P>
<P>Ho&s;. 11. 1.</P></NOTE><HI>fulfilling;</HI> thus, <HI>Ho&s;.</HI> 11. 1. I <HI>called my Son out of Egypt</HI> was truly made good when <HI>Mo&s;es</HI> brought the Children of <HI>I&s;rael</HI> out of <HI>Egypt;</HI> for I&s;rael was Gods &s;onne, but it had a farther degree of fulfilling in <NOTE PLACE="marg">Mat. 2. 15.</NOTE>Chri&s;t, <HI>Math.</HI> 2. 15.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Jer. 31. 15.</NOTE> <HI>Jer.</HI> 31. 15. concerning <HI>Rachels</HI> weep|ing, <HI>Bis hic locus impletus e&s;t:</HI> The place was twice fulfilled, &s;aith <HI>Mu&s;culus. Rachel</HI> was the Mother of <HI>Benjamin,</HI> and &s;o the mother of the Benjamites, the Tribe that kept clo&s;e to the hou&s;e of <HI>David:</HI> She was buried neer <HI>Bethlehem</HI> and is put to denote the whole Land of <HI>Judah,</HI> which was in a mourning condition at the time when they were carried away captive, and then <HI>Rachel</HI> is &s;aid to <HI>weep:</HI> and more|over <NOTE PLACE="marg">Mat. 2. 17.</NOTE>when the children are &s;laine in <HI>Beth|lehem,</HI> &s;he weeps again, <HI>Mat.</HI> 2. 17.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">I&s;a. 53. 4.</NOTE> <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 53. 4. <HI>Surely he hath borne our greifes,</HI> was fulfilled in the &s;orrow that fell on the per&s;on of the Lord as Mediator, as one in our roome and &s;tead; that is one manner of fulfilling: but is not all.</P>
<P><PB N="12" REF="23">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">Mat. 8. 17.</NOTE> <HI>Mat.</HI> 8. 17. Its brought in as a ground of healing the &s;icke and ca&s;ting out of evil &s;pi its.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">P&s;al. 78. 2. Math. 13. 35.</NOTE> <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 78. 2. The Prophet <HI>A&s;aph</HI> is &s;aid to <HI>open his mouth in a Parable:</HI> but it's ap|plyed to <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> and his preaching, <HI>Mat.</HI> 13. 35.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Zach. 11. 12.</NOTE> <HI>Zach.</HI> 11. 12. Speaking about the <HI>thirty pieces of Silver:</HI> it was true of <HI>Zacharie,</HI> and their ignoble dealing with him, as with a ba&s;e labourer, allotting &s;o meane a price to a faithful Prophet; but fulfilled farther in that <HI>thirty pieces</HI> for which <HI>Ju|das</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Math. 27. 9 P&s;al. 22. 18.</NOTE>&s;old his Ma&s;ter, <HI>Mat.</HI> 27. 9.</P>
<P><HI>P&s;al.</HI> 22. 18. <HI>They parted my garments among&s;t them:</HI> it po&s;&s;ibly may be verified in <HI>David. Omnia in Davidem convenire po&s;|&s;<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">nt,</HI> as <HI>Arias M<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ntanus &s;aith; David</HI> his de&s;troyers being confident that he could not return, they fell upon the &s;poile; but <NOTE PLACE="marg">Joh. 19. 23.</NOTE>tis fully performed in Chri&s;t, <HI>Joh.</HI> 19. 23.</P>
<P><HI>I&s;a.</HI> 61. 1. He <HI>hath &s;ent me to preach li|berty</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">I&s;a. 61. 1.</NOTE><HI>to the captives,</HI> was made good in the per&s;on of the Prophet <HI>I&s;aiah,</HI> preaching about their freedom from the Babyloni&s;h Captivity, though more fully <HI>in Chri&s;t,</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Luke 4. 21</NOTE><HI>Luke</HI> 4. 21.</P>
<P><HI>P&s;al.</HI> 41. 9. <HI>My own familiar friend which</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">P&s;al. 41. 9.</NOTE><HI>eat bread at my Table.</HI> It's true of <HI>Davids</HI> Courtiers: performed al&s;o in <HI>Judas</HI> a|gain&s;t <HI>Chri&s;t, John</HI> 13. 14.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Joh. 13. 14.</NOTE> <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 53. 1. <HI>Who hath believed our report?</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">I&s;a. 53. 1.</NOTE>The &s;peech relates to the Prophet in his
<PB N="13" REF="23">
time, but not onely to the Prophet; for it agrees to <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> as appears, <HI>John</HI> 12. 38. <NOTE PLACE="marg">Joh. 12. 38.</NOTE>I &s;hall conclude this po&s;ition with what I learned many years a goe, from tran&s;cri|bed <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Ma&s;ter</HI> Tempe&s;t Wood.</NOTE>Notes of a precious &s;ervant of Chri&s;t now at re&s;t.</P>
<P>The lea&s;t degree of the performing a promi&s;e being manife&s;ted, the promi&s;e therein may be truly &s;aid to be perform|ed, although not in the highe&s;t extent of it: Whereupon it is remarkable how in the Go&s;pels, and Acts of the Apo&s;tles, when any per&s;onal thing or individual act is mentioned, as that in <HI>Mat.</HI> 2. 17. (the <NOTE PLACE="marg">Mat. 2. 17.</NOTE>place above named) about <HI>Rachel,</HI> the holy Gho&s;t u&s;eth a word which &s;ignifies accompli&s;hment, <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>Then was ful|filled that which was &s;poken.</HI> But when promi&s;es are mentioned, which have re|ference to the Church, as <HI>Acts</HI> 2. 16. then <NOTE PLACE="marg">Acts 2. 16.</NOTE>its thus expre&s;&s;ed, <HI>This is that which was &s;poken</HI> by the <HI>Prophet Joel,</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">: he doth not &s;ay, it was fulfilled, but it was &s;poken: it had a true performance, but not the accompli&s;hment.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Prop. 5.</NOTE> <HI>That under one per&s;on or thing named a whole &s;eries both of per&s;ons and things is to be</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><P>Under one ex|pre&s;&s;ion they com|prehend a whole &s;eries.</P>
<P>Rom. 9. 7.</P></NOTE><HI>under&s;tood.</HI> See this plainly in the great promi&s;e, <HI>Rom.</HI> 9. 7. <HI>In I&s;aac &s;hall thy &s;eed be called.</HI> In the eight ver&s;e of the &s;ame Chapter, <HI>The children of the promi&s;e are counted for the &s;eed.</HI> When we read of the enemies of the Church, which &s;ome|times
<PB N="14" REF="24">
are called <HI>Hornes,</HI> by them he means all the powers that are pu&s;hing at <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t</HI> and his intere&s;t: The <HI>Vial</HI> on the <HI>Throne</HI> of the <HI>Bea&s;t</HI> mentioned <HI>Rev.</HI> 16. 10. although it meane eminently the <NOTE PLACE="marg">Rev. 16. 1.</NOTE><HI>City of Rome;</HI> yet withal it may take in all tho&s;e places wherein the &s;uper&s;titions of Antichri&s;t, have been more e&s;pecially exerci&s;ed, as Bi&s;hops Palaces, Cathedrals, Mona&s;teries, Priories, Deanes and Chap|ters hou&s;es, and &s;uch like places.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Prop. 6.</NOTE> <HI>God performes his promi&s;es, in the&s;e lat|ter dayes, in a way of proportion and corre|&s;pondency, with his former glorious workings</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">They cor|re&s;pond with for|mer glo|rious workings.</NOTE><HI>for his people.</HI> Thus mo&s;t expre&s;ly <HI>Hagg.</HI> 2. 5. its &s;aid, <HI>According as I covenanted with you when you came out of Egypt, &s;o my &s;pirit remaineth among you:</HI> where its plain that God engageth him&s;elfe to them <HI>now</HI> when they were building of the <HI>Tem|ple,</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Hag. 2. 5.</NOTE>according to his dealing with them when they were to be delivered out of <HI>Egypt.</HI> Thus in the Vi&s;ions of the Prophet <HI>John, Antichri&s;t</HI> is called <HI>Egypt;</HI> and their <HI>waters are turned into blood,</HI> and that by the <NOTE PLACE="marg">Rev. 11. 6.</NOTE>wittne&s;&s;es, <HI>Rev.</HI> 11. 6. in corre&s;pondence with what God did by <HI>Mo&s;es, Exod.</HI> 7. 19.</P>
<P><HI>I&s;rael in Egypt</HI> cryed Exod. <HI>2. 23. and &s;o do the &s;ouls</HI> under the Altar, Lord, Lord, how long, holy and true, do&s;t thou not judge and revenge our blood, on them that dwell on the earth? Rev. <HI>6. 10.</HI></P>
<P>He <HI>drowned the Egyptians in the red Sea,</HI>
<PB N="15" REF="24">
<HI>Exod.</HI> 14. 27. and now hath his wayes, it may be <HI>Sea-fights,</HI> to drown his ene|mies, as it was in the years, 1588, and 1639, and at other times &s;ince: I &s;hall conclude this po&s;ition with that &s;aying of the Prophet, <HI>Micah,</HI> 7. 15. where God promi&s;eth to his Church his goodne&s;&s;e <NOTE PLACE="marg">Mic. 7. 15.</NOTE>in the&s;e words: According <HI>to the dayes of thy coming out of the Land of Egypt will <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> &s;hew unto him marvelous things.</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Prop. 7.</NOTE></P>
<P><HI>That the inflicting of judgement, on the adver&s;aries of the Church, is &s;ubordinate to</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Inflicting of judge|ments &s;ubordi|nate to Promi&s;es.</NOTE><HI>the performance of his promi&s;es to his people.</HI> The &s;haking vengeance on the Nations, is but to make way for the good of Gods people. Gods creatures are precious to him as he is their Creator; and &s;urely he would never de&s;troy them, but in re|lation to a greater, farther and better good, then their de&s;truction can be evil. This is plain in <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 10. 12. <HI>The vi&s;iting of</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">I&s;a. 10. 12.</NOTE><HI>the &s;tout heart of the King of A&s;syria and the glory of his high looks,</HI> is in a way of inflict|ing judgement on him but its brought in as &s;ub&s;ervient to the <HI>performing of his whole work on Mount Sion:</HI> that was the maine thing driven at. <NOTE PLACE="marg">Prop. 8.</NOTE></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Chri&s;t coming is the time of fulfil|ling pro. &amp; proph.</NOTE> That the time of fulfilling prophe&s;ies and promi&s;es, and working great turnes, is at or before the coming of Chri&s;t. <HI>Thus in</HI> Hag. <HI>2. 6.</HI> I will &s;hake the heaven, <HI>when is that? it follows immediatly;</HI> The de&s;ire of all Nations &s;hall come:</P>
<P><PB N="16" REF="25">
The coming of <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> in the fle&s;h, was eminently the fulfilling of many prophe|&s;ies and promi&s;es, as you may read in the con&s;tant cour&s;e of the Go&s;pel: His com|ing then likewi&s;e produced great turnes and changes, <HI>Mat.</HI> 2. 3. <HI>Herod the King was troubled and all Jeru&s;alem with him:</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">. <HI>Herod</HI> and Jeru&s;alem, the King and all the people, are troubled. He troubles the chiefe Prie&s;ts, and Phari&s;ees, and Coun&s;els, <HI>John,</HI> 11. 47. <HI>what doe we doe? This man doth many Miracles.</HI> And when Chri&s;t &s;hall come again, you &s;hall have more turnes. <HI>All the promi&s;es are in him</HI> and for him; no marvel then if their performances, and his appearance come together. The down-fall of the <HI>Man of &s;in</HI> is the making good of many promi&s;es, but that is &s;aid to be by the <HI>brigh<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ne&s;se of his coming.</HI> 2 <HI>The&s;&s;.</HI> 2. 8. <HI>Then &s;hall that wicked one be revealed, whom the Lord &s;hall con&s;ume with the &s;pirit of his mouth, and &s;hall de&s;troy with the brightne&s;&s;e of his coming.</HI></P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="3" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="17" REF="25">
<HEAD>Chap. III. Shewing the meaning, Doctrines and Method of Hag. <HI>2. 6, 7.</HI></HEAD>
<EPIGRAPH>
<Q><BIBL><HI>Hag.</HI> 2. 6, 7.</BIBL>
<P>Thus &s;aith the Lord of Ho&s;ts, Yet once, and it is a little while and I will &s;hake the hea|vens, and the earth, and the &s;ea and the dry-land.</P>
<P N="7"><HI>7.</HI> And I will &s;hake all Nations, <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">and the de&s;ire of all Nations &s;hall come; and I will fill this hou&s;e with glo|ry, &s;aith the Lord of Ho&s;ts.</P></Q>
<Q><BIBL><HI>Heb.</HI> 12. 26, 27.</BIBL> <P>Who&s;e voyce then &s;hooke the earth: but now he hath promi&s;ed &s;aying, Yet once more I &s;hake not the earth onely, but al&s;o Hea|ven.</P>
<P N="27"><HI>27.</HI> And this word yet once more, &s;igni|fieth the removing of <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">hings that are &s;ha|ken, as of things that are made, that tho&s;e things which cannot be &s;haken may re|main.</P></Q>
</EPIGRAPH>
<P>HAving laid down the&s;e eight propo|&s;itions in general, we &s;hall now pitch down on this Scripture to which all the&s;e propo&s;itions give light.</P>
<P>Here in the&s;e words of the Prophet <HI>Haggai,</HI> you have a <HI>prophe&s;ie</HI> by way of a
<PB N="18" REF="26">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">The <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 word"> eight Propo&s;als give light to Hag. 2. 6. 7.</NOTE> <HI>promi&s;e;</HI> God foretells by his &s;ervant <HI>Hag|gai</HI> what &s;hall come to pa&s;&s;e; namely great turnes and changes, and withal en|gageth about them, by way of a promi&s;e that he will effect them, <HI>I will &s;hake;</HI> and that's your fi<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">&s;t rule.</P>
<P>He calls the Church-&s;tate under the Go<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">p<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">l by the name of a <HI>Temple</HI> and <HI>an hou&s;e,</HI> which is the language of the <HI>Old Te&s;tament,</HI> to &s;peak out Gods way of wor|&s;hip; but here, it hath a farther extent, even unto <HI>Go&s;pel-wor&s;hip,</HI> and admini&s;tra|tions, and that is according to the &s;econd Prop.</P>
<P><HI>Shaking of heaven and earth</HI> doth not onely meane the commotion in the&s;e na|tural bodies, and the alterations therein; but al&s;o the&s;e words hold out, the change in the great Political bodies of Church and State; and &s;o according to the third propo&s;ition are to be taken in the large&s;t extent.</P>
<P>Again, ob&s;erve this promi&s;e and pro|phe&s;ie of <HI>Haggai</HI> receives (according to what is laid down in the fourth propo&s;iti|on) &s;undry degrees of fulfilling. It was truly performed when Chri&s;t was born into the world; then Angels and Men, Heaven and Earth were moved; but this is not all; for the Author to the <HI>He|brews tells us</HI> of another <HI>&s;haking</HI> at ano|ther coming of Chri&s;t when we &s;hall re|ceive <HI>a Kingdome that cannot be moved,</HI>
<PB N="19" REF="26">
<HI>Heb.</HI> 12. 26. Be&s;ides when the Prophet <HI>Haggai</HI> names <HI>the Temple and the Hou&s;e,</HI> he meanes all the frame of wor&s;hip, and not barely the Fabrick and building that was reared up. When he names <HI>Zoroba|bel and Jo&s;hua,</HI> he meanes not onely tho&s;e two particular per&s;ons, but all govern|ours, and deliverers of Gods people, in &s;everal places and ages are included, which is the direction that the fifth pro|po&s;ition gives us.</P>
<P>Moreover the great and glorious alter|ations that God will make in the&s;e la&s;t dayes, is here expre&s;&s;ed by a phra&s;e re|lating to Gods wonderful dealing with his people I&s;rael&punc; we finde <HI>Exod.</HI> 19. 18. <NOTE PLACE="marg">Exod. 19. 18.</NOTE>at the appearance of God on Mount <HI>Sinai,</HI> its &s;aid <HI>the wh<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">le mount quaked greatly;</HI> and when God appears to make the&s;e turnes, he is &s;aid by the Prophet here to <HI>&s;hake heaven and earth,</HI> which agrees fully with the &s;ixth propo&s;ition.</P>
<P>The <HI>&s;haking of all Nations</HI> here, what doth it meane el&s;e but the execution of vengeance on the Nations? thus plainly in <HI>v.</HI> 21. 22. of this 2. Chap. where the <HI>&s;haking of heaven and ear<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">h is repeated. v.</HI> 21. and expounded <HI>v.</HI> 22. by <HI>this phra&s;e, I will overthrow the throne of Kingdomes, and I will de&s;troy the &s;trength of the Kingdomes of the Heathen; but for what end? v.</HI> 23. It was to exalt <HI>Zorobabel</HI> to be as a <HI>Signet;</HI> it was to make way for his Churches
<PB N="20" REF="27">
good, which was the le&s;&s;on taught in the eight propo&s;ition.</P>
<P>La&s;tly, the time of the&s;e great turnes is plainly expre&s;&s;ed to be at the <HI>coming of Chri&s;t:</HI> Chri&s;t is yet to come in the judge|ment of all, one way or another, and all his comings produce notable changes, as the eight propo&s;ition &s;hewed. And thus having brought down what was &s;poken in general, in the propo&s;itions, to this particular prophe&s;ie of <HI>Haggai;</HI> I &s;hall onely adde one word about the coherence of the&s;e two ver&s;es, with the former part of the Chapter, and then de&s;cend to the explication of the words.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">The cohe|rence.</NOTE> It's plain, <HI>v.</HI> 2. and 3. that <HI>Zorobabel, Jo&s;hua</HI> and the <HI>people</HI> were under di&s;cour|agement about building of the Temple: <HI>we</HI> build a Temple (&s;ay they) but what is it? a poor meane frame: <HI>Solomons</HI> Tem|ple was a &s;tately Edifice, but this is <HI>no|thing</HI> to that: were it not better for us to give over, then to goe forward with <HI>&s;uch</HI> a work? Now in the fourth and fifth ver&s;e, God calls upon them: 1. To be &s;trong; be &s;trong, be &s;trong. 2. To <HI>worke</HI> and not give over. 3. To be confident and not feare. Now the Arguments are three. 1. I am with you, <HI>v.</HI> four. 2. My Spirit &s;hall remain among you, <HI>v.</HI> five. 3. I will &s;hake Heaven and earth for you, and the de&s;ire of all Nations &s;hall come and fill this hou&s;e with glory, <HI>v.</HI> 6. &amp; 7.</P>
<P><PB N="21" REF="27">
So then the&s;e words are brought in as an argument to take off their feare, and render them confident, to &s;trengthen them in the work God called them unto: Thus they cohere with the former words; let us now proceed to explication of them: we &s;hall begin with tho&s;e words.</P>
<Q>Thus &s;ayth the Lord of Ho&s;ts.</Q>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Saith what?</NOTE> <HI>Thus &s;ayth]</HI> The Hebrew word <GAP DESC="foreign"> tran&s;lated <HI>Sayeth,</HI> it denotes in Scripture phra&s;e five things.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">1. To &s;peak.</NOTE> 1. To declare the minde by &s;peaking. <HI>Dixit&punc;</HI> 1. <HI>locu<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">us e&s;t:</HI> to expre&s;&s;e our thoughts or motions of heart by words: &s;o <HI>Gen.</HI> 20. 5. &s;peaking of <HI>Sarah, &s;he, even</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Gen. 20. 5.</NOTE><HI>&s;he her &s;elfe &s;aid</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign"> <HI>he is my Brother,</HI> that is, &s;he uttered &s;o much in &s;peech or words that another might under&s;tand; and thus God &s;pake by his Prophet.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. To pro|phe&s;ie.</NOTE> 2. It's put to hold out a &s;peaking be|fore hand what &s;hall come to pa&s;&s;e after|ward, <HI>Dixit</HI> 1. <HI>prophetavit.</HI> He &s;aid, that is, he prophe&s;ied; and a word &s;o &s;poken is a prophetical word: thus <HI>Gen.</HI> 41. 54. <NOTE PLACE="marg">Gen. 41. 54.</NOTE><HI>the &s;even yeares of dearth began according as Jo&s;eph had &s;aid.</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign"> <HI>dixerat:</HI> that is <NOTE PLACE="marg">Said afore|hand.</NOTE>according as he had prophe&s;ied.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">3. To me|ditate.</NOTE> 3. It &s;ignifies a &s;peaking to ones &s;elfe, a &s;peaking in a way of thought, or medi|tation. <HI>Dixit</HI> 1. <HI>cogitavit.</HI> He &s;aith, that is, he thought, he &s;ayth in him&s;elfe: Our
<PB N="22" REF="28">
thoughts are our communication with our &s;elves; when we are &s;erious in medi|tation of our own hearts, or wayes, we are &s;aid to return to our hearts, and to &s;peak in our hearts: thus 2 <HI>Sam.</HI> 21. 16. <NOTE PLACE="marg"><GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> Sam 21. 16.</NOTE><HI>Goliah the Giant thought to kill David;</HI> the word is <GAP DESC="foreign"> <HI>et dicebat percutere.</HI> He &s;aid he would kill him, that is, he &s;pake &s;o to him&s;elfe, it was the language of his thoughts.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">4. To com|mand.</NOTE> 4. To &s;ay is to &s;peak with authority, to &s;peak by way of command: <HI>Dixit</HI> 1. <HI>imperavit.</HI> He &s;aid, that is as much as he commanded; &s;o <HI>Jonah</HI> 2. 11. <HI>The Lord</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Jonah 2. 11.</NOTE><HI>&s;pake to the Fi&s;h,</HI> that is, he commanded it.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg">5. To pro|mi&s;e.</NOTE> 5. And la&s;tly, to &s;peake is not barely to declare ones minde, to think, or to command; but it holds out &s;uch a &s;pea|king wherein the &s;peaker engageth him|&s;elfe; <HI>dixit,</HI> 1. <HI>promi&s;it:</HI> he &s;aid, that is, he promi&s;ed it, and &s;o it's taken <HI>here: Thus &s;aith the Lord of ho&s;ts,</HI> that is, <HI>Thus promi&s;eth the Lord of Ho&s;ts;</HI> that phra&s;e viz. <HI>the Lord of Ho&s;ts;</HI> we &s;hall not open here; onely now draw the&s;e 2. Ob&s;ervations.</P>
<P>That the Lord in all ages, di&s;pen&s;eth him|&s;elfe <NOTE PLACE="marg">Ob&s;er. 1.</NOTE>to his people by way of a promi&s;e: <HI>&s;o here.</HI></P>
<P>That when his people are under di&s;courage|ment <NOTE PLACE="marg">Ob&s;er. 2.</NOTE>and feare, he &s;trengthens them by holding forth him&s;elfe to be the Lord of Ho&s;ts.</P>
<Q><PB N="23" REF="28">I will &s;hake.</Q>
<P><HI>I:</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">. <HI>I Jehovah,</HI> who have my being of my &s;elfe, and give being to my word of promi&s;e: <HI>I,</HI> who have all creatures and times in my power and di&s;po&s;al, <HI>I,</HI> even <HI>I, will &s;hake.</HI> All refer this &s;haking to God, but &s;ome refer this to God in the per&s;on of the Father, as <HI>Hierom. &amp; G<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">o<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">g. Eden,</HI> and &s;o they make the meaning to be, <HI>I</HI> that am the Father of <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">,</HI> and in him your Father, and the Father of mercies, <HI>I will &s;hake the Heavens.</HI> But the Author to the <HI>Hebrews</HI> refers it to <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> and &s;o I, that is, <HI>I</HI> that am <HI>Emanuel, King of Kings, and Lord of Lords,</HI> who <HI>was dead, but am alive,</HI> and now <HI>live for evermore,</HI> I, who <HI>am the brightne&s;&s;e of my Fathers glory,</HI> and <HI>the expre&s;&s;e image of his per&s;on,</HI> who <HI>have &s;even eyes and &s;even hornes,</HI> all-&s;eeing&punc; and all-working power; I that have made and hold up the pillars of the world, <HI>I will &s;hake.</HI></P>
<P>The Author to the <HI>Hebrews</HI> adds an ex|pre&s;&s;ion, &s;hewing that this &s;haking was done &s;uddainly, and with ea&s;e. Its but a word &s;peaking, its but <HI>&s;aving, Let Heaven and Earth be &s;haken,</HI> and it &s;hall be &s;haken; as once <HI>he &s;aid, Let there be an Heaven</HI> and <HI>an earth,</HI> and <HI>it was &s;o. Who&s;e voice then &s;hook the earth.</HI></P>
<P><PB N="24" REF="29">The word voice is ap|plyed to things
<LIST>
<ITEM><HI>Natural, as</HI> Rev. <HI>6. 1.</HI> The voice of Thunder. <GAP DESC="foreign">.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>Artificial,</HI> Mat <HI>124. 31.</HI> The voice of a Trumpet, <GAP DESC="foreign">.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>Rational, 2</HI> Pet. <HI>2 16.</HI> The voice of a Man, <GAP DESC="foreign">.</ITEM>
<ITEM>Supernatural, as here, His voice, <GAP DESC="foreign">.</ITEM>
</LIST></P>
<P><HI>His voice.</HI> That is, the voice of <HI>Je&s;us</HI> the <HI>Mediator of the new Covenant,</HI> who&s;e blood &s;peaks better things then that of <HI>Abel;</HI> His voyce, who <HI>&s;peaks from Heaven,</HI> His voyce &s;hook.</P>
<P><HI>Will &s;hake</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign"> <HI>Jun.</HI> tran&s;lates it, <HI>Ego</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Shaking what?</NOTE><HI>commoturus &s;um,</HI> I am about to &s;hake. <HI>Sha|king</HI> &s;ignifies a violent Motion, a Motion differing from the common Motion: 1. As when the wind is in the bowels of the earth, and in its breaking forth makes the earth for to tremble. <HI>Terrae motus,</HI> that is called &s;haking, <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 13. 13. <HI>The earth &s;hal move out of his place.</HI></P>
<P N="2">2. Or as the wind &s;hakes the corn to and fro, or the fruit upon the trees, &s;omtimes this way, then the contrary way, which is not the natural motion of the corne or fruit, but as its forced by the wind, <HI>P&s;alme</HI> 72. 16. <HI>His fruit &s;hall &s;hake like Liba|nus.</HI></P>
<P N="3">3. Or as the motion of an Army, <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 30. 32. In battels of &s;haking will he fight with it. This &s;haking in <HI>Heb.</HI> 12. is expre&s;&s;ed by two words.</P>
<P><PB N="25" REF="29">
The fir&s;t <GAP DESC="foreign"> <HI>proprie de &s;ale vi ven|torum agitato;</HI> it &s;ignifies properly to &s;hake as the Sea is shaken with a mighty wind, when the wind gets into the bowels of the Sea.</P>
<P>The other word is <GAP DESC="foreign">, &s;uch a kind of shaking as tears and rends in pieces; and &s;o this phra&s;e expre&s;&s;eth tearing turns, and rending changes which shall befall the Nations. So then shaking contains</P>
<P N="1">1. A change and alteration.</P>
<P N="2">2 Such as is accompanied with annihila|tion, or bringing of things to nothing.</P>
<P N="3">3. Annihilation in a way to execute ju|&s;tice.</P>
<P N="4">4. It denotes &s;ometime al&s;o alteration from bad to good, from good to better. Shaking in a way of mercy, or at lea&s;t bringing good out of evil; So here its sha|king by way of a promi&s;e. Take hence the&s;e five Ob&s;ervations.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Ob&s;. 1.</NOTE> <HI>1.</HI> The nature of things here are liable to change. <HI>God only is immutable.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Ob&s;. 2.</NOTE> <HI>2.</HI> That the changes below are and may be
<LIST>
<ITEM>Suddain,</ITEM>
<ITEM>Violent, &amp;</ITEM>
<ITEM>Strange.</ITEM>
</LIST></P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Ob&s;. 3.</NOTE> <HI>3.</HI> That yet they are righteous, and &s;hall be gracious to Gods people.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Ob&s;. 4.</NOTE> <HI>4.</HI> That Je&s;us Chri&s;t him&s;elfe hath the highe&s;t hand in the&s;e changes.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Ob&s;. 5.</NOTE> <HI>5.</HI> That in the&s;e changes he &s;hewes him&s;elfe the Lord of Ho&s;ts.</P>
<Q><PB N="26" REF="30">
The Heaven and Earth.</Q>
<P>The&s;e four words, <HI>Heaven, Earth, Sea</HI> and <HI>Dry Land,</HI> are taken two wayes. Grammatically, Rhethorically.</P>
<P N="1">1. Grammatically for &s;uch things in Nature as the letters of the words do im|port, as <HI>the Earth</HI> for that part of the world which we tread on, and &s;o the like of the re&s;t.</P>
<P N="2">2. They are taken <HI>Rhetorically,</HI> when by a fine manner of &s;peaking, an elegan|cy of expre&s;&s;ion, they &s;et forth &s;ome thing be&s;ide what they expre&s;&s;e in their Gram|matical &s;en&s;e: both wayes agree to the text we are upon. Now ob&s;erve in the Rhetorical way there is a double accep|tation.</P>
<P N="1">1. By a Metonymie of the &s;ubject for the adjunct, <HI>Continentis pro contento,</HI> when the thing containing is put for the thing con|tained. <HI>Heaven</HI> is put fo the <HI>inhabitants of heaven,</HI> and &s;o <HI>Earth, Sea</HI> and <HI>Dry Land,</HI> put for tho&s;e that dwell on the Earth, Sea, or Dry Land.</P>
<P N="2">2. By a Metaphor or borrowed &s;peech, becau&s;e heaven is the highe&s;t, and in com|pari&s;on of that, earth is the lowe&s;t body; they are put to declare high and low things: a little more to open the&s;e words, ob&s;erve.</P>
<P>Heaven <GAP DESC="foreign"> &s;ignifies that part of
<PB N="27" REF="30">
the world which is oppo&s;ite to the earth, from <GAP DESC="foreign"> an adverbe of place (as &s;ome think) &s;hewing the di&s;tance of heaven, as being mo&s;t remote from the earth.</P>
<P>We read of the fir&s;t, &s;econd and third heaven.</P>
<P>The fir&s;t is called <GAP DESC="foreign"> or an expance, that which is neare&s;t the Earth, and tur|ned round about it: thus we read of the <HI>windows of this heaven to be opened</HI> when the raine fell, <HI>Gen.</HI> 8. of birds flying in this <HI>Heaven, Deut.</HI> 4.</P>
<P>The &s;econd Heaven is the place where the Stars are fixed, and &s;o called the &s;tar|ry heaven.</P>
<P>The third is the Seat of the ble&s;&s;ed, <HI>Sedes Beatorum</HI> into which the Apo&s;tle <HI>Paul</HI> was wrapped, 2 <HI>Cor.</HI> 12. 2.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Terra pedibus an|nima<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="3 letters">m teritur.</NOTE> And the Earth <GAP DESC="foreign"> that part of the world which is di&s;tingui&s;hed from heaven; &s;ome derive it from <GAP DESC="foreign"> a word &s;ignifying to run, becau&s;e bea&s;ts run upon it. It's the place where men dwell, <HI>Gen.</HI> 18. 18. &s;ometime it &s;ignifies one Country more then another, <HI>Gen.</HI> 41. 57. <HI>And all Countries came to Egypt becau&s;e the famine was &s;ore in all Lands.</HI> Sometime it &s;ignifies a feild; but here I take it to denote a <HI>Continent,</HI> that part of the world that is di&s;tingu&s;ht from Seas and I&s;lands, the Maine-land.</P>
<P><HI>The Sea</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign"> you have a plaine de&s;crip|tion of that given by <HI>Mo&s;es, Gen.</HI> 1. 10. <HI>its</HI>
<PB N="28" REF="31">
<HI>the gathering together of the waters.</HI></P>
<P><HI>The dry Land</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">. <HI>Arida</HI> the dry Land, as di&s;tinct from Heaven, Earth and Seas: which I here take to be <HI>I&s;lands, Lands in the mid&s;t of Sea;</HI> dry Land, yet compa&s;&s;ed about with water. From the words thus opened ob&s;erve.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Ob&s;er. 1.</NOTE> Je&s;us Chri&s;t will make great changes in the natural bodyes of Heaven, Earth, Sea and dry Land: <HI>This ari&s;eth from the words taken Grammatically.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Ob&s;er. 2.</NOTE> <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t will turne and change the in|habitants of Heaven and Earth and Sea and dry Land: Even Angels and men;</HI> Men that dwell on the <HI>Continent,</HI> I&s;lands and Seas, and this ari&s;eth from the Rhetorical Metonymie, whereby the thing containing is put for the thing contained.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Ob&s;er. 3.</NOTE> Je&s;us Chri&s;t will make great changes in the heavens and earth, in the high and low things of Kingdomes and Peoples and Na|tions.</P>
<P>Having thus taken the words a&s;under, and given you the meaning of them, and the ob&s;ervations from them, we will now put them together again, in this &s;hort form following.</P>
<P><PB N="29" REF="31">
<LIST>
<ITEM><HI>Hag.</HI> 2. 6, 7, 8. con|tains a prophe|tical pro|mi&s;e, wherein ob&s;erve
<LIST>
<ITEM>The pro|mi&s;e is propoun|ded&punc; wherein con&s;ider 4 things.
<LIST>
<ITEM>1. The per&s;on promi&s;ing
<LIST>
<ITEM>The Lord, of Ho&s;ts, <GAP DESC="foreign"></ITEM>
</LIST></ITEM>
<ITEM>2. The things promi&s;ed, which are three
<LIST>
<ITEM>1. <HI>The &s;ha|king,</HI> twice repeated, &s;et out by its object,<LIST>
<ITEM>The heavens.</ITEM>
<ITEM>The earth.</ITEM>
<ITEM>The &s;eas.</ITEM>
<ITEM>The dry land.</ITEM>
<ITEM>The nations.</ITEM>
<ITEM>All nations.</ITEM>
</LIST></ITEM>
<ITEM>2. The <HI>comming of Chri&s;t,</HI> called the
<LIST>
<ITEM>de&s;ire of
<LIST>
<ITEM>Nations.</ITEM>
<ITEM>All.</ITEM>
</LIST></ITEM>
</LIST></ITEM>
<ITEM>3. Of <HI>fil|ling,</HI> &s;et out by
<LIST>
<ITEM>1. What. <HI>This hou&s;e.</HI></ITEM>
<ITEM>2 With what, <HI>with Glory.</HI></ITEM>
</LIST></ITEM>
</LIST></ITEM>
</LIST></ITEM>
<ITEM>3. The per&s;ons to whom this promi&s;e is made
<LIST>
<ITEM>Zorobabel Jo&s;hua All the peo|ple.<LIST>
<ITEM>This is taken from <HI>v.</HI> 4.</ITEM>
</LIST></ITEM>
</LIST></ITEM>
<ITEM>4. The time of performance, and that is, a
<LIST>
<ITEM>Set time, <HI>once.</HI></ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>Short time,</HI> Yet a little while.</ITEM>
<ITEM><HI>Time repeated,</HI> Yet once more.</ITEM>
</LIST></ITEM>
</LIST></ITEM>
<ITEM>The promi&s;e is confirmed to our faith, by the re|petition of the fir&s;t words, <HI>Thus &s;aith the Lord,</HI> at the end of <HI>ver&s;.</HI> 7.</ITEM>
</LIST></P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="4" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="30" REF="32">
<HEAD>CHAP. IIII. Shews how in the great turnes of Ages God di&s;pen&s;eth him&s;elfe in the way of a Promi&s;e: for</HEAD>
<P>FIr&s;t this holds out God as a Father. 2. This exalts the honour of <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> the Son. 3. This honours God in the per&s;on of the Spirit. 4. This makes notably for the &s;ecurity and improvement of Grace. 5. This confounds the men of the world. 6. This greatens our e&s;tate. U&s;e of In|&s;truction and Exhortation.</P>
<P>You have heard the meaning of the&s;e words (Thus &s;aith the Lord) that they hold out a promi&s;e, and that the Lords &s;aying is not a bare expre&s;&s;ing of a thing to be &s;o or &s;o; but an expre&s;&s;ion with an engagement of him&s;elfe; its a &s;aying by way of a promi&s;e: Hence we &s;hall begin with this ob&s;ervation.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Doctr.</NOTE> That the Lord in the great turnes and <NOTE PLACE="marg">The Lord in changes di&s;pen&s;eth him&s;elfe by the way of a promi&s;e.</NOTE>changes of all Ages, di&s;pen&s;eth him&s;elfe by the way of promi&s;es.</P>
<P><HI>Thus he did to</HI> Adam <HI>in Paradi&s;e:</HI> Do this and live; <HI>the like after his fall:</HI> The &s;eed of the woman &s;hall break the Serpents head.</P>
<P><PB N="31" REF="32">
<HI>It was a great turne when all the world was drowned; and then how doth God di&s;pen&s;e him&s;elf? he makes a</HI> Covenant with Noah, Gen. <HI>9. 13.</HI> I will &s;et my bow in <NOTE PLACE="marg">Gen. 9. 13.</NOTE>the clouds, and it &s;hall be a token of Covenant between me and the Earth.</P>
<P>It was no &s;mall turne when <HI>Terah</HI> and others were gros&s;ly defiled by Idolatry, then for God to call <HI>Abraham</HI> out; but how doth he doe it? by making a <HI>Cove|nant with him, Gen.</HI> 17. 4. <HI>Behold my Cove|nant</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Gen. 17. 4.</NOTE><HI>is with thee, and thou &s;halt be a father of many Nations.</HI></P>
<P><HI>We are not ignorant what variety of changes</HI> Jacob <HI>had experience of; but God &s;upports him by his promi&s;e,</HI> Gen. <HI>28. 15.</HI> Behold I am with thee, and will keep thee in all places whither thou goe&s;t. Gen. <HI>46. 1.</HI> I&s;|rael <HI>takes his journey for</HI> Egypt, <HI>but</HI> v. <HI>3. he hath this</HI> viaticum, <HI>this provi&s;ion by the way,</HI> I am the God of thy Father; fear not to go down to Egypt, for I will make of thee a great Nation: <HI>It was a great and mighty work to bring</HI> I&s;rael <HI>out of</HI> Egypt, <HI>and be|hold then,</HI> Exod. <HI>34 27, 28.</HI> The Lord &s;aid to <HI>Mo&s;es;</HI> Write the&s;e words; for after the tenour of the&s;e words have I made a covenant with thee.</P>
<P>Againe, in the time of the Judges, <HI>Jo&s;h.</HI> 1. 5. &amp; of Kingly power, 2 <HI>Chron.</HI> 1. 9. In the time of the captivity under the King of <HI>Baby|lon, Jer.</HI> 25. 11, 12. the like when they came out of captivity, <HI>Hag.</HI> 1. 8. In all the&s;e times
<PB N="32" REF="33">
God di&s;pen&s;ed him&s;elfe in way of a pro|mi&s;e: So he doth in Go&s;pel-times; <HI>Acts</HI> 2. 39. <HI>The promi&s;es are to you and to your chil|dren.</HI> 1 <HI>Tim.</HI> 4. 8. <HI>Godline&s;&s;e is profitable for all things (and &s;o in all conditions) and hath the promi&s;e of the life that now is, and that that is to come.</HI> The <HI>New Heavens</HI> and <HI>the New earth</HI> do certainly holdout the greate&s;t alterations that ever shall be; but this is by promi&s;e, 2 <HI>Pet.</HI> 3. 13.</P>
<P>The demon&s;tration of this we shall hold out in the&s;e &s;ix pa&s;&s;ages.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. 1.</NOTE> This promi&s;ing way holds out God as a <HI>Father</HI> in his glorious excellency of <HI>wi&s;|dome</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">This holds out God as a Father.</NOTE>and <HI>Immen&s;ity.</HI> All creatures are mea&s;ured by the pre&s;ent time; but God in promi&s;ing, &s;hews he hath <HI>all times</HI> in his power; creatures have onely the <GAP DESC="foreign">, the pre&s;ent <HI>Now:</HI> but God <HI>is</HI> and <HI>was,</HI> and <HI>will be:</HI> Oh! the riches of his un&s;peak|able mercy: the pre&s;ent time is a &s;hort moment, God cannot expre&s;&s;e his love to us in it &s;ufficiently, nor are we in capaci|ty to receive his love, and therefore he takes the time <HI>to come,</HI> and puts it into the promi&s;e, yea he takes eternity to doe it in.</P>
<P>A promi&s;ing way glorifies the power of God, <HI>Rom.</HI> 4. 21. <HI>Abraham was fully per|&s;waded that what he had promi&s;ed he was able al&s;o</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign"> <HI>to performe it:</HI> God doth not put you off with a promi&s;e be|cau&s;e he is weak, but becau&s;e he is <HI>able</HI> to
<PB N="33" REF="33">
performe: Be not troubled becau&s;e you have not pre&s;ent po&s;&s;e&s;&s;ion; for <HI>he is faith|full that promi&s;ed, Heb.</HI> 10. 22.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s; 2. Exalts the honour of Chri&s;t the Son.</NOTE> This promi&s;ing way exalts the honour of <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t;</HI> for all promi&s;es are made to him <HI>fir&s;t,</HI> therefore he is called <HI>The Co|venant, I&s;a.</HI> 42. 6. The promi&s;es center in him, and have fir&s;tly their performance in and to, and for him, 2 <HI>Cor.</HI> 1. 20. <HI>In him yea, and in him Amen.</HI> We are creatures at too great a di&s;tance from God; he cannot fir&s;tly and immediatly deale with us, we are too low for that dealing, but he deals with <HI>Chri&s;t.</HI> We are all promi&s;ed as a <HI>&s;eed</HI> to him, <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 53. 10. to him is the everla&s;t+ing Kingdome promi&s;ed, and he waits till his enemies become his <HI>foot&s;tool, P&s;al.</HI> 110. 1. that is, his enemies &s;hall be &s;o far from prevailing again&s;t him, as that they &s;hall be (although they intend not &s;o) a meanes of making him a&s;cend into his throne, as a man climbs into the throne by the <HI>foot&s;toole;</HI> the &s;pirit is <HI>fir&s;t on Him,</HI> and from him on us; God is fir&s;t his Fa|ther, then ours, fir&s;t his God then ours, <HI>John</HI> 20. 17. <HI>I goe to my Father and your Father, to my God and your God.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. 3. Honour God in the per&s;on of he &s;pi|rit.</NOTE> This honoureth God, in the per&s;on of the &s;pirit who is called, <HI>Ephe&s;.</HI> 1. 13. <HI>The holy Spirit of promi&s;e;</HI> the rea&s;on is this; be|cau&s;e all promi&s;es carry in their nature, a reall application of that good which the promi&s;e holds out. Now application|work
<PB N="34" REF="34">
is proper unto God, in that per&s;on of the Spirit: God mu&s;t have honour in <HI>this per&s;on,</HI> as well as in the per&s;on of the <NOTE PLACE="marg">Joel 2. 28.</NOTE><HI>Father,</HI> or <HI>Son:</HI> Therefore in the la&s;t days, <HI>the &s;pirit &s;hall be poured out upon all fle&s;h:</HI> This &s;pirit &s;hall appear to rule men more in Kingdoms and Governments, in matters of Peace and War, then ever yet our eyes have &s;een.</P>
<P>This makes notably for the advantage <NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. 4. Makes for the advan|tage of Gods people.</NOTE>of Gods people; and that,</P>
<P N="1">1. To render them in a &s;ecure e&s;tate: when our &s;tock was in <HI>Adams</HI> hand, we lo&s;t all; but now its in <HI>Chri&s;ts,</HI> and under a promi&s;e, its &s;afe and &s;ecure, <HI>Rom.</HI> 4. 16. If our good e&s;tate did depend on any thing in <HI>&V;s,</HI> it could not but be uncertain, becau&s;e we are &s;o; but being of promi&s;e, of grace in him, and faith in us, it ren|ders our &s;tate &s;ecure.</P>
<P N="2">2. Promi&s;es from God draw forth per|formances from <HI>&V;s: praemiis ducimur,</HI> we are led by rewards. 2. <HI>Cor.</HI> 7. 1. we mu&s;t <HI>Clean&s;e, and clean&s;e</HI> thorowly, not from &s;ome, but <HI>all filthine&s;&s;e,</HI> not onely <HI>of the fle&s;h,</HI> but <HI>of the &s;pirit;</HI> and all on this <NOTE PLACE="marg">2 Cor. 7. 1.</NOTE>ground, <HI>Having</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign"> <HI>the&s;e promi&s;es,</HI> we mu&s;t not onely <HI>be holy</HI> and in the feare of God, but <HI>perfect holine&s;&s;e</HI> &s;till upon this ground, <HI>Having the&s;e promi&s;es:</HI> God will have it known, his people dare tru&s;t him, and fall to work upon a promi&s;e, although they have little in hand. It
<PB N="35" REF="34">
is that which commends the ingenuity of their obedience, that they work upon a promi&s;e. No marvel then if God di&s;|pence him&s;elfe in that way which is &s;o improving to his childrens grace.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. 5. confounds the men of the world.</NOTE> 5. This notably confounds the men of the world; Its fooli&s;h to fle&s;h and blood to live on a promi&s;e; they live by &s;en&s;e, and not by faith, and therefore are car|ried on, and taken with pre&s;ent things. The whole Go&s;pel is <HI>fooli&s;hne&s;se to them;</HI> what are then the promi&s;es? which are the Go&s;pel of the Go&s;pel. This way re|volves things into the meer power, good|ne&s;&s;e and fidelity of God, which men of the world are &s;trangers to; this way of conver&s;e is too high for them; they are brought in jeering at the promi&s;e, 2 <HI>Pet.</HI> 3. 4. Turne them to Corne and Wine, O! they are good, they have &s;ome relli&s;h with their palates; but as for the pro|mi&s;es, they &s;eeme dull, dry, flat things to them: Oh fooli&s;h worldlings, who are &s;o full of the world, that they loath the&s;e honey combs, <HI>the&s;e great and precious pro|mi&s;es.</HI></P>
<P N="6"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. 6. greatens our e&s;tate.</NOTE> 6. La&s;tly, this greatens our e&s;tate, our rever&s;ions being more then all that we have in pre&s;ent po&s;&s;e&s;&s;ion; yea it exceed|ingly hightens all that we doe now enjoy: when mercies come in a promi&s;e, they come dipped in the blood of <HI>Je&s;us,</HI> they lu&s;ter with the light of Gods counte|nance,
<PB N="36" REF="35">
thus the &s;leep of a righteous man is better then that of other men; becau&s;e there is &s;omething of a love-token in it: <HI>He giveth his beloved &s;leep, P&s;al.</HI> 127. 2. God hath general wayes whereby he di&s;|pen&s;eth him&s;elfe as a <HI>faithful Creator;</HI> a Sun for all, raine, clouds, winter, &s;ummer, &s;eedtime and harve&s;t <HI>for All:</HI> But &s;till he re&s;erves his <HI>bo&s;ome</HI> to his own, he remem|bers his <HI>Covenant</HI> for them, and be&s;prin|kles them with intimate loves. Yea in tho&s;e favours which Gods people enjoy in common with the world, there are &s;weet intermixtures of &s;pecial love, de&s;i|rable interweavings of gracious favours.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><P>U&s;e 1. of In&s;tructi|on.</P>
<P>Great turnes have great wants.</P></NOTE> In times of great turnes, you will meet with great wants, want of coun&s;el, acti|vity, fidelity: you had therefore need of a promi&s;e to recour&s;e to. It may be pro|vi&s;ions may fall &s;hort, promi&s;es are rich &s;torehou&s;es: your dangers are as many as your wants; where will you finde a rock of ages, but in the promi&s;es? Turning times are <HI>difficult times,</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">: Be not troubled as if &s;ome &s;trange thing befel you, when you finde wants, difficul|ties and nece&s;&s;ities ari&s;ing: make not <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ad conclu&s;ions, give not all over for lo&s;t and gone; &s;ay not, I have had the&s;e &s;alvations and deliverances, but now I &s;hall &s;urely peri&s;h. No, no, God re&s;erveth much in his own hand, much in the promi&s;es; and to him and them, and them in him mu&s;t you look.</P>
<P><PB N="37" REF="35">
Con&s;ider how in all ages and great <MILESTONE N="2"> turnes, God withers the arme of fle&s;h, <NOTE PLACE="marg">That God then wi|thers the arme of fle&s;h.</NOTE>bla&s;teth the white blo&s;ome of the creature, &s;o that it cannot help; Its a <HI>Promi&s;e,</HI> a <HI>Pro|mi&s;e</HI> mu&s;t do you good; that revolveth the work into Gods power, grace and goodne&s;&s;e. Goe to the creatures you have loved, and been fond of, but they will prove vaine; <HI>The &s;tout-hearted are &s;poiled, they have &s;lept their &s;leep, and all the men of</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">P&s;al. 76. 5.</NOTE><HI>might have not found their hand, P&s;al.</HI> 76. 5. How little can men doe, if they have no hands? and as little, if they have hands and cannot finde them. The <HI>wi&s;e man &s;hall not glory in his wi&s;dome, nor the &s;trong man in his &s;trength, nor the honourable man in his dignity, but God will be exalted in his goodne&s;&s;e.</HI></P>
<P>Have you not &s;een great hou&s;es with|out inhabitants, whole Townes and nu|merous Families cut off, Honour in the du&s;t, and wi&s;e coun&s;els turned into fool|i&s;hne&s;&s;e? Oh! then learn now, learn experi|mentally to &s;ee the creatures vanity.</P>
<P>Take notice Gods wayes are in the <MILESTONE N="3"> <HI>great deeps,</HI> and his <HI>foot&s;teps are not known:</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Gods wayes are in the deep.</NOTE>becau&s;e he acts not according to our coun&s;els, or according to former praece|dents, nor according to pre&s;ent advanta|ges, as we doe, but according to his own gracious Will, according to his promi&s;e. Now God in his promi&s;e re&s;erves times, and methods, mea&s;ures and in&s;truments,
<PB N="38" REF="36">
in his own hand. He will work now, not then or then, and not now; &s;o much, and no more, by the&s;e, and not by tho&s;e; he will &s;ill by emptying, build by de&s;troying; we many times in our thoughts, <HI>limit the holy One of I&s;rael,</HI> and methodize his ways, when alas we know them not: But Gods promi&s;e is as it were the limiting of him|&s;elfe; and how glorious is that way, that doth mea&s;ure him that is unmea&s;urable, bound him that is infinite? but tis becau&s;e its a mea&s;ure &amp; bound of his own making; and &s;o much for the u&s;e of In&s;truction.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e 2. To &s;earch the pro|mi&s;es.</NOTE> Now follows a word of Exhorta|tion, To provoke you to &s;earch out the promi&s;es that concern the pre&s;ent age and times we live in. Its the commenda|tion of &s;ome of the children of <HI>I&s;&s;aker, That they had under&s;tanding of the times to know what I&s;rael ought to doe,</HI> 1 <HI>Chron.</HI> 12. 32. Father <HI>Jacob, Gen.</HI> 49. 1. excit<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">s his &s;ons to attend to his prophe&s;ies on this ac|count, <HI>That I may tell you what &s;hall be fall you in the la&s;t dayes. I&s;a.</HI> 2. 2. <HI>In the la&s;t dayes the mountaine of the Lords hou&s;e &s;hall be e&s;tabli&s;hed on the top of the Mountains. Acts</HI> 2. 17. <HI>It &s;hall come to pa&s;&s;e in the la&s;t dayes (&s;ayth God) that I will pour out my &s;pi|rit on all fle&s;h, and your &s;onnes and daughters &s;hall prophe&s;ie.</HI></P>
<P N="2"><HI>2.</HI> Pet. <HI>3. 3.</HI> There &s;hall come in the la&s;t dayes Scoffers: <HI>Is it not glorious to be|hold what Gods people &s;hall doe to other</HI>
<PB N="39" REF="36">
<HI>people</HI> in the la&s;t dayes? Numb. <HI>24. 5.</HI> Evil will befal in the la&s;t dayes, becau&s;e you will doe evil in the &s;ight of the Lord.</P>
<P>Ezek. <HI>38. 16. Speaking of</HI> Gog, <HI>its pro|phe&s;ied,</HI> Thou &s;halt come up again&s;t my peo|ple of I&s;rael as a cloud to cover the Land, it &s;hall be in the la&s;t dayes. <HI>By this meanes we come to conver&s;e with God under a</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Dan. 2. 28.</NOTE><HI>glorious title of</HI> Revealing &s;ecrets.</P>
<P>The Angel <HI>Gabriel</HI> thought it a work be|fitting him, <HI>Dan.</HI> 10. 14. <HI>I am come to make thee under&s;tand what shall befal thy people in the latter dayes. Ho&s;.</HI> 3. 5. <HI>They shall &s;eek the Lord their God and David their King, and shall feare the Lord and his goodne&s;se in the latter dayes.</HI> Is it not a thing de&s;irable to be conver&s;ing with the &s;ame Revela|tions that God gave to Chri&s;t, and Chri&s;t &s;hewes unto his &s;ervants? even things that <HI>mu&s;t shortly come to pa&s;se, Rev.</HI> 1. 1. Oh that I might prevaile with you to &s;tu|dy the <HI>Revelation</HI> more; we run after Palmi&s;ters, Figure-ca&s;ters, A&s;trologers to know things to come, which they cannot declare unto us, and in the mean &s;ea&s;on we neglect the&s;e precious declarations of God which would &s;weetly teach us: Now as motives to per&s;wade you, con&s;ider,</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Moti. 1. This ren|ders you children of wi&s;|dome.</NOTE> This renders you <HI>children of wi&s;dome,</HI> wi&s;e to know the times: Gods promi&s;es are the be&s;t conclu&s;ions; In <HI>them,</HI> we come to have notions of the times according to Gods thoughts.</P>
<P><PB N="40" REF="37">
This &s;hews a neern<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">&s;&s;e of familiarity with God, <HI>Rev.</HI> 4. 1. <HI>Come hither</HI> (its a friendly phra&s;e) <HI>an<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> I will &s;hew thee things that mu&s;t be hereafter.</HI> Freinds unbo&s;ome &s;ecrets one to another; <HI>The&s;e &s;ecrets of the Lord are with them that feare him:</HI> By thus conver&s;ing with the&s;e Revelations we come to <HI>be immediatly in the Spirit, Rev.</HI> 4. 2.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Mot. 2. Pre&s;erves again&s;t &s;in.</NOTE> Its a ble&s;&s;ed pre&s;ervative again&s;t the in|fection of &s;in: Our mindes are apt to wanto<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ne&s;&s;e, and giddine&s;&s;e. Oh! but how doth the con&s;ideration of <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t</HI> &s;et forth in his <HI>&s;even eyes and &s;even hornes, Rev.</HI> 5. 4. his providence, and his power, cut off this wanton giddine&s;&s;e? Its a great evil to back&s;lide in heart. Oh! but eying the&s;e promi&s;es, keeps the minde intent on God: the minde thus &s;et, &s;weetly in|voaks the heart, and holds it to a re-in|gagement of better behaviour. Formality is one of the great evils that be&s;ets us, which is, when we act on <HI>low grounds,</HI> common cu&s;tome, and example, and with <HI>low &s;pirits:</HI> Let the&s;e promi&s;es <HI>dwell richly</HI> in you, and you will be higher. We are never wor&s;e then when we are <HI>earthly|minded;</HI> now nothing is &s;o proper to work off that, as to be moulded by the&s;e <NOTE PLACE="marg">Mot. 3. Advan|ceth your faith, and love.</NOTE>Go&s;pel-prophe&s;ies and promi&s;es.</P>
<P>This is a way to advance your life of <HI>faith and love.</HI> God opens his bo&s;ome &s;e|crets in deare&s;t love in the&s;e promi&s;es;
<PB N="41" REF="37">
and this is mighty to cau&s;e a rebound of love in your &s;ouls: He gives you <HI>great and precious promi&s;es,</HI> and your faith re|ceives them: Oh then! let your faith work by love, and love by faith, and both be fixed on this ble&s;&s;ed object of God in his promi&s;es: <HI>To live by faith,</HI> is to have faith acted in our pre&s;ent lives, and that according to the promi&s;es of the pre&s;ent age. To love is actually to clo&s;e with God as the cheife and mo&s;t &s;utable good, and this he appears to be in his pro|mi&s;es.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Mot. 4. Conquers difficul|ties.</NOTE> Behold here a proper cour&s;e to Con|quer difficulties, and di&s;couragements: The be&s;t of Saints have their ebbings and damps, their heart-divi&s;ions, and heart-contractions. Turne, oh turne to the promi&s;es, and then it will be <HI>full Sea</HI> with you; the light and heat there will ea&s;ily expel your dumps and damps, and at once unite and enlarge you.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Mot. 5. Makes us watchful and duti|ful.</NOTE> I am &s;ure you would be watchful and dutiful; and I am &s;ure al&s;o, that this tra|ding with promi&s;es will keep you waking and working. Shall I minde you how apt you are to nod, to grow &s;ecure and carele&s;&s;e? and is it not from hence that you forget the promi&s;es of this latter age? did you weight them well, you would finde how much work lyeth on you, and <NOTE PLACE="marg">Mot. 6. Promotes the prai&s;e of God.</NOTE>lyeth undone.</P>
<P><HI>Its a good thing to give thanks, to</HI>
<PB N="42" REF="38">
<HI>prai&s;e is plea&s;ant and comely; and doth there not lie a &s;weet hidden vertue in Go&s;pel-promi&s;es to promote this work? The Revelations of the&s;e latter times by the Prophet</HI> John, <HI>how is it interwoven with Saints prai&s;es, with Church-prai&s;es?</HI> Rev. <HI>4. 8, 9, 10, 11.</HI> Thou art worthy to re|ceive glory and honour, Rev. <HI>7. 12.</HI> Ble&s;&s;ing, Glory, and Wi&s;dome, and Thanksgiving, and Honour, and Power, and Might, be unto our God for ever and ever, Rev. <HI>11. 17.</HI> We give thanks to thee Lord God Almighty, which art and wa&s;t and art to come, becau&s;e thou ha&s;t taken to thee thy great power, and ha&s;t reig|ned, Rev. <HI>15. 3, 4.</HI> They &s;ing the &s;ong of Mo&s;es and of the Lamb, &s;aying, Great and marve|lous are thy works Lord God Almighty; ju&s;t and true are thy wayes O thou King of Saints: who &s;hall not feare thee O Lord, and glorifie thy Name, Rev. <HI>16. 5.</HI> Thou art righ|teous O Lord, who art and wa&s;t and shall be, becau&s;e thou ha&s;t thus judged, Rev. <HI>19. 1.</HI> Alleluja, Salvation, Glory and Honour and Power unto the Lord our God; for true and righteous are his judgements. <HI>To con|clude then, you mu&s;t be a pray&s;ing peo|ple as well as a praying people; con|ver&s;e more with God in his promi&s;es, and you cannot but be pray&s;ing of him.</HI></P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="5" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="43" REF="38">
<HEAD>CHAP. V. Sheweth that Chri&s;t being about to performe his promi&s;es, cau&s;eth alterati|ons in the Natural bodies of Heaven and Earth, which is thus demon&s;trated.</HEAD>
<P>FIr&s;t, Chri&s;t hath given a being and con|&s;tant cour&s;e to Heaven and Earth. 2. He maintains that being. 3. The crea|tures thus made are at his beck. 4. Its his plea&s;ure that &s;ometime they &s;hould &s;tep a&s;ide from their ordinary con&s;tant cour&s;e. 5. Chri&s;t governs this turning a&s;ide. 6. The&s;e Turns carry with them the nature of Signes. Four Rea&s;ons added and U&s;es.</P>
<P><HI>I will &s;hake the Heavens and the Earth, the Sea and the dry Land:</HI> The&s;e words according as was laid down in <HI>Chapter</HI> three, being taken Grammatically and properly, they afford this ob&s;ervation That, <NOTE PLACE="marg">Doct. Chri&s;t workes alterati|ons in the natural bodies of heaven &amp; earth.</NOTE></P>
<P>When Chri&s;t is about to performe his pro|phetical promi&s;es, he cau&s;eth alteration in the bodies and natural cour&s;es of Heaven, Earth, Sea and dry Land.</P>
<P>Heaven and Earth in their prime and litteral &s;ignification, hold out that great
<PB N="44" REF="39">
frame that God in the beginning formed out of nothing. Now in this great Fa|bricke are the alterations we &s;peak of. I &s;hould not have pitched on this ob&s;er|vation, but that I finde the holy Gho&s;t in all the eminent turns to make &s;ome im|pre&s;&s;ion and mention this way. It was a great turne reduced all the world to eight per&s;ons; but then you know the win|dows of <HI>Heaven were opened,</HI> and <HI>the foun|tains of the great deep broken up,</HI> and the <HI>raine was upon the Earth, Gen.</HI> 7. 12, 13.</P>
<P>To turne I&s;rael out of Egyptian bon|dage was a great turne, and then the <HI>Red Sea mu&s;t be dryed up, Exod.</HI> 14. 16.</P>
<P><HI>At the giving of the Law,</HI> Exod. <HI>20. 8. there are</HI> thundrings and lightnings and the voyce of a Trumpet, and the mountain &s;moa|king.</P>
<P>I&s;raels pre&s;ervation in the Wilderne&s;&s;e was a whole continued &s;eries of Turnes, and then we read of a <HI>Pillar of cloud and a pillar of fire, Num.</HI> 14. 14. they had <HI>water out of the Rocke followed them,</HI> 1 <HI>Cor.</HI> 10. 4. and <HI>Mannah rained down, Exod.</HI> 16. 35.</P>
<P>So in the New Te&s;tament at the birth of Chri&s;t there is a <HI>Star</HI> which is cal|lep <HI>His, his Star in the Ea&s;t, Mat.</HI> 2. 2. At the death of <HI>Chri&s;t, Mat.</HI> 27. 51. <HI>The earth quakes and rocks rend, and the graves were opened.</HI> At the &s;ending of the Spirit, <HI>Acts</HI> 2. 2. <HI>&s;uddainly there came a &s;ound from hea|ven as of a ru&s;hing mighty winde:</HI> and <HI>Acts</HI>
<PB N="45" REF="39">
4. 31. When <HI>they had prayed the place was &s;haken.</HI> When <HI>Paul</HI> and <HI>Sylas</HI> mu&s;t be de|livered out of pri&s;on, <HI>Acts</HI> 16. 26. <HI>&s;uddain|ly there was a great Earthquake.</HI> Now to cleare this ob&s;erve,</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Chri&s;t gives a being to all crea|tures.</NOTE> <HI>1. Je&s;us Chri&s;t hath given a being and a con&s;tant cour&s;e of operation to Heaven and Earth, Sea and dry Land.</HI> John <HI>1. 3.</HI> All things were made by him, and without him was not any thing made that was made. Prov. <HI>30. 4.</HI> He a&s;cends up to Heaven and de&s;cends, he gathereth the winde in his fi&s;t, he binds the waters in a garment, and e&s;ta|bli&s;heth all the ends of the Earth. P&s;al. <HI>104. 2.</HI> He covers him&s;elfe with light, and layes the beames of his chambers in the waters; He maketh clouds hit Chariots, and rides on the wings of the winde. P&s;al. <HI>19. 4, 5.</HI> He &s;ets a Tabernacle for the Sun, and gives it a race to run.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Maintains what he hath given</NOTE> 2. <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t</HI> doth not onely give them a being, but al&s;o maintains what he hath given: gives them a con&s;tant cour&s;e, and maintains them in it; as men and Saints have their con&s;tant work to do, &s;o likewi&s;e have other creatures, and <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> upholds them and their cour&s;e too. <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 75. 3. <HI>I beare up the pillars of the earth. Heb.</HI> 1. 2, 3. <HI>By him are the worlds made, and he upholds all things by the word of his power. Jer.</HI> 31. 35. <HI>He gives the Sun for a light by day, and the ordinances of the M<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">on and Stars for a light by night, &amp; divideth the</HI>
<PB N="46" REF="40">
<HI>Sea when the waves thereof roare:</HI> and to &s;hew their con&s;tancy of operation. <HI>Jer.</HI> 33. 20. there is mention made of the <HI>Covenant of the day</HI> and the <HI>Covenant of the night,</HI> which none can break.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">They are at his beck.</NOTE> 3. The&s;e things thus made and main|tained by him, are at his beck. He made three dayes together without a Sun, <HI>Gen.</HI> 1. by reflecting the element of fire down|ward (as &s;ome &s;ay) and made the nights by rever&s;ing it upward, <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 136. 6. <HI>What&s;oever he plea&s;ed, that did he in heaven &amp; earth, in the &s;ea &amp; in the deep places:</HI> Heaven and Earth, Sea and deeps, are all at his plea&s;ure. V. 7. He maketh the <HI>vapour to a&s;cend, and lightnings for the raine; he bringeth the winde out of his Trea|&s;uries. P&s;al.</HI> 147. 15. <HI>He &s;ends his command forth, &amp; his word runneth very &s;wiftly.</HI> His word, his command is enough to make all run; as he made all by his word, &s;o by his word and will he governs all. <HI>Math.</HI> 8. 27. <HI>He rebukes the winde and the Sea, and they obey him:</HI> His rebuke and the creatures obedience fall in together.</P>
<P N="4">4. Its his plea&s;ure &s;ometime that they <NOTE PLACE="marg">They &s;ometime &s;tep a&s;ide from their ordinary cour&s;e.</NOTE>&s;hould &s;tep a&s;ide from their ordinary cour&s;e. The ordinary cour&s;e of the Sun is to be running of his race. But <HI>Jo&s;h.</HI> 10. 12. <HI>Sun, &s;tand thou &s;till in Gibeon, and thou Moon in the vally of Ajalon.</HI> The ordina|ry cour&s;e is for the heavens to give down raine; but in <HI>Ahabs</HI> time 1 <HI>Kings</HI> 17. 1
<PB N="47" REF="40">
there <HI>was neither dew nor raine.</HI> The or|dinary cour&s;e for the earth it is to bring forth corne and gra&s;&s;e for the food of man and bea&s;t; but in <HI>Jo&s;eph's time, Gen.</HI> 41. 54. <HI>The dearth was in all Lands.</HI></P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Chir&s;t guides tho&s;e &s;tep|pings.</NOTE> 5. That Je&s;us governs them in all the&s;e turnings a&s;ide; that is, he acts them, and orders them to his ends and intere&s;ts; and &s;o there is a &s;weet harmony in their excentrical motion. When the Sun &s;tood &s;till in <HI>Jo&s;hua's</HI> time, it was that <HI>I&s;rael</HI> might be avenged of the <HI>Amorites</HI> their enemies. The dearth was in all Lands, that &s;o <HI>Jo&s;eph</HI> might be exalted, and <HI>I&s;rael</HI> provided for. It raines, or raines not, that God might be honoured in the word of his Prophet <HI>Elijah</HI> the Ti&s;hbite.</P>
<P>When God takes away the power of burning from the fire, it was that his &s;er|vants the companions of <HI>Daniel</HI> &s;hould not be con&s;umed, <HI>but walke in the mid&s;t of the fire and have no hurt, Dan.</HI> 3. 25. God will not onely &s;hew his goodne&s;&s;e to his people by the ordinary and common cour&s;e of creatures, but &s;ometime he makes them &s;tep a&s;ide out of their com|mon cour&s;e, to an&s;wer their prayers, and help them in their &s;treights: and Now, in our dayes, though he workes not miracles, he works <HI>wonderful things, Miranda,</HI> though not <HI>Micacula.</HI> Though he worke not again&s;t the cour&s;e of the creatures nature; yet he alters it &s;o,
<PB N="48" REF="41">
that it gives us cau&s;e to wonder: yea and withal in this way he brings vengeance on his and his peoples enemies. It's light in <HI>Go&s;hen,</HI> when <HI>darkne&s;&s;e is on all the Land of Egypt. I&s;a.</HI> 24. 20. <HI>The Earth reels too and fro like a Drunkard, and &s;hall be removed like a Cottage; The tran&s;gre&s;&s;ion thereof &s;hall fall heavy upon it, and it &s;hall fall and not ri&s;e again.</HI></P>
<P N="6"><NOTE PLACE="marg">The&s;e turnes have the nature of &s;ignes.</NOTE> 6. That the&s;e Turnes in Heaven and Earth thus ordered by Chri&s;t, carry with them the nature of &s;ignes.</P>
<P>Luke <HI>21. 21.</HI> There &s;hall be Signes in the Sun, and in the Moon, and in the Stars; and upon the earth di&s;tre&s;&s;e of Nations and per|plexity, the Sea and the waves roaring.</P>
<P><HI>Acts</HI> 2. 19 <HI>I will &s;hew wonders in heaven above</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>and &s;ignes,</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>in the earth beneath, blood and fire and vapour of &s;moak.</HI> A Signe is that which be&s;ides it &s;elfe, in|troduceth &s;ome other thing into the un|der&s;tanding; as when you &s;ee &s;moak, your under&s;tanding doth not terminate in the &s;moak, but ri&s;eth higher to think of &s;ome fire that cau&s;eth that &s;moak: So when you &s;ee the&s;e &s;trange po&s;tures in the&s;e natural bodies, your minde re&s;teth not barely in the contemplation of them, but your under&s;tanding looks on them as fore-runners of other things, that &s;hall follow after.</P>
<P>Now among &s;ignes, &s;ome are Reme|morative, <NOTE PLACE="marg">Signes.</NOTE>Demon&s;trative, Progno&s;tical, Practical.</P>
<P><PB N="49" REF="41">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">Rememo|rative.</NOTE> Rememorative &s;ignes are &s;uch which call to minde things pa&s;t, and &s;o refre&s;h the memory; the Bow in the clouds tells us, God did de&s;troy the world by water, though he will do &s;o no more.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Demon|&s;trative.</NOTE> Demon&s;trative &s;ignes are &s;uch which declare a thing pre&s;ent, as &s;moak is a &s;igne of pre&s;ent fire, fire then burning.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Progno|&s;tical.</NOTE> Progno&s;tical &s;ignes are &s;uch as foretel in general things to come. Thus God may, and &s;ometime doth, by the&s;e chan|ges in the&s;e natural great bodies, &s;ignifie and foretel, that there &s;hall be great turns, and changes, in the great bodies Politique of Kingdomes, and Common-wealths: but what the&s;e particular turnes &s;hall be, and the &s;everal i&s;&s;ues of them, the &s;ignes in heaven and earth cannot foretel; for they are not practical &s;ignes.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Practical.</NOTE> Practical &s;ignes are &s;uch as in their nature cau&s;e and produce tho&s;e things whereof they are &s;ignes: but &s;uch &s;ignes the heavens and earth are not; they do not in their nature cau&s;e the turnes of Nations, nor are the turnes of Nations their effects.</P>
<P>Now whether this po&s;ition do contri|bute any favourable a&s;pect to judicial A&s;trologie, that we &s;hall &s;hew in the Ap|pendix, joyned to this Treati&s;e, and pa&s;&s;e it by now: onely re&s;olve this Que|&s;tion.</P>
<P>Why doth Chri&s;t when he intends great
<PB N="50" REF="42">
turnes in States, make &s;uch changes in Heaven and Earth?</P>
<P>I an&s;wer in four Rea&s;ons.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. 1. Chri&s;t be|gins to take his power.</NOTE> This is the beginning of Chri&s;t his <HI>taking to him&s;elfe his great power, Rev.</HI> 11. 17. Chri&s;t hath all power on earth, as well as in heaven; he is &s;overeigne Lord of all creatures, as well as King of Saints. <HI>Col.</HI> 1. <HI>He is the Fir&s;t borne of every creature, as well as head of the Church,</HI> and therefore he doth <HI>thus</HI> manife&s;t him&s;elfe. There be many fore-runners before the King comes; reckon the&s;e among the lea&s;t and lowe&s;t of Chri&s;ts &s;ervants, yet &s;urely what knees they have they bend to him. They are ready with their motion, and conjunctions to honour him, and in their language to tell you of his tran&s;cendent glory that is following. They are obe|dient, and &s;tep a&s;ide out of their ordinary way to let you know of their Lords drawing nigh. <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> could deal with Kingdomes and Nations without the&s;e <HI>Signes:</HI> But &s;ince he hath the&s;e creatures, he will make u&s;e of them; yea and their extravagances &s;hall do him good &s;ervice. Men &s;top their eares at the voyce of the ordinary cour&s;e of Heaven and Earth, and will not hear; but when he turnes their cour&s;es into <HI>Signes</HI> and wonders, <NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. 2. Speakes to all the world.</NOTE>then they &s;hall heare.</P>
<P>By this meanes he &s;peakes to all the World: when <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> him&s;elfe &s;peaks, it
<PB N="51" REF="42">
mu&s;t be with a mighty voyce. We low creatures doe but mutter and whi&s;per, and few there be that heare our voyce; but when <HI>he &s;peaks,</HI> heaven and earth, and all the world &s;hall heare him. When he &s;peakes by the word of his Go&s;pel, <HI>every creature mu&s;t hear, Mar.</HI> 16. 15. and his Apo&s;tles which were the Teachers, they mu&s;t have the gift of tongues, and be able to &s;peak the language of every Nation where they come, that &s;o the Parthians, Medes and Elamites might heare as well as the Jewes. <HI>Their line is gone out into all the earth, P&s;al.</HI> 19. 4. <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> hath another way of &s;peaking to all the world, namely by <HI>&s;ignes in heaven and earth;</HI> tho&s;e that will not hear his Go&s;pel, yet will li&s;ten to their language. Signes have their voyce, as well as men, <HI>Exod.</HI> 4. 8. <HI>If they will not believe the voyce of the fir&s;t &s;igne.</HI> Turkes, Jewes, Heathens, Prophane per|&s;ons, which regard not the &s;ound of the Go&s;pel; yet will <HI>now</HI> be <HI>Auriti,</HI> quick of hearing: as Chri&s;t in his preaching &s;pake, as one having authority; So he &s;peakes now, and commands attention. <HI>Prov.</HI> 18. 23. <HI>The poor u&s;eth intreaties,</HI> and its the poverty of Chri&s;ts me&s;&s;engers that they come be&s;eeching, and intreating; but <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> him&s;elfe &s;peakes in a commanding way, to let all men know, bad as well as good, that he is about his worke, and his great work. Earthly men minde the
<PB N="52" REF="43">
earth, &s;peak of it, account it their own; and <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> will meet them there, and &s;peake from, and by the <HI>Earth</HI> to them.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. 3. Creatures are not in that e&s;tate he in|tends.</NOTE> This way of working Signes, mindes us, that the creatures are not in that &s;tate he intendes them; By this change upon them, he hints unto us their re<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="2 letters">auration into <HI>the liberty of the &s;onnes of God, Rom.</HI> 8. 21. In their ordinary cour&s;e while they &s;erve tho&s;e who do di&s;&s;ervice to Chri&s;t, <HI>they groane, Rom.</HI> 8. 21. and to &s;tep out of this road to &s;ub&s;erve Chri&s;t, it is a fore|runner <NOTE PLACE="marg"><P>Rom. 8. 22. The crea|tures groaning opened.</P>
<P>Gen. 1. 26.</P></NOTE>of their liberty. 'Tis plaine God gave <HI>man dominion over the Fi&s;h of the Sea, and over the Fowls of the Aire, and over the Cattel, and over all the Earth, Gen.</HI> 1. 26. To man, that is true; but to what man? to man in what condition? it was not given to finful man, but to man after <HI>Gods Image and likene&s;&s;e,</HI> as it is in the &s;ame ver&s;e; to man before his fall, to righte|ous man, to <GAP DESC="foreign"> to man made <HI>upright,</HI> as it is <HI>Eccle&s;.</HI> 7. 29. Upright, according to the rule of his Creation; not to wicked and ungodly man; So that the prime end of all creatures &s;ervice, is directed to righteous man, to man after Gods Image and likene&s;&s;e: But to &s;erve wicked and unrighteous man, is be&s;ide their prime end, and therefore according to their na|ture, they <HI>groane,</HI> that is, they are not plea&s;ed, becau&s;e they obtain not their fir&s;t
<PB N="53" REF="43">
end; tis true they are not intelligent, and &s;o they know it not; but yet its again&s;t the fir&s;t Law of their creation: Its not fit they &s;hould know it; for then it would grieve them, and they have not &s;inned&punc; and &s;o have not let in greife upon them&s;elves. The Mathematical Bee, and the Artificial Spider, make their combs, and hou&s;es, according to the rules of rea&s;on; yet they know not what they do: So tho&s;e creatures &s;erve, but not according to their prime end, though they know it not; yet God knowes it, and will right it, and by u&s;ing of them in this extraordinary way, he tells us &s;o, and would not &s;uffer them thus to groane but that he knowes how to honour him&s;elfe and re&s;tore them. <NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. 4. Chri&s;t draws out &s;piri|tual act|ings.</NOTE></P>
<P>By the&s;e Turnes and appearances in na|tural bodies <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> knowes how to draw forth &s;piritual actings in his people: Let it thunder, or lighten, though his people are a&s;&s;ured of his love, and favour, and that they lie in his bo&s;ome; yet they en|tertaine him in that his voyce with an awful feare and reverence; that his mighty voyce makes them in a holy way to tremble, and yet to tru&s;t. When &s;ignes are in Heaven and Earth, Saints re&s;t not in the admiration of what they &s;ee, or hear, but &s;earch into the ble&s;&s;ed word of truth, for the meaning of tho&s;e &s;ignes. Grace makes a &s;ervant to be divine in drudgery, and not to eat and drink but to Gods
<PB N="54" REF="44">
glory: So likewi&s;e not to &s;ee or heare the &s;ignes in heaven and earth, but to eye him that works in, and by them: If Heathens and Strangers heare their voyce, &s;ure his own people and &s;ervants much more, and more to purpo&s;e. Others wonder at what they know not; the&s;e know and wonder. Others are afraid, and troubled, the&s;e feare and believe, be|lieve and waite, waite and pray.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e 1. See Chri&s;ts excellen|cy.</NOTE> See hence the excellency of <HI>Chri&s;t:</HI> the Go&s;pel glories to hold out that excellen|cy, and Saints glory to &s;ee the reflection of it in the Go&s;pel; and heaven and earth here glory to trumpet it out: View this excellency. 1. In that he cau&s;eth the&s;e alterations in Heaven and Earth, and that exalts him. Men cannot make them, they cannot &s;top nor open the bot|tels of the clouds, or the windowes of heaven, but <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> can. They can nei|ther rai&s;e nor cea&s;e the &s;t<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">rme and tem|pe&s;t, but <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> can. 2. This tells you; he that can do this, can do more; he can make enemies become friends, and friends more friendly. He can change coun&s;els and decrees, yea the thoughts and frames of our hearts. <HI>Laban</HI> came with a heart boy|<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ing in pa&s;&s;ion again&s;t <HI>Jacob,</HI> but God met him and &s;uffered him not to hurt him. Ravens are greedy fowles, and devour their prey, and yet as greedy as they are, they mu&s;t bring the prophet bread.</P>
<P><PB N="55" REF="44">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">Its vain to oppo&s;e Chri&s;t.</NOTE> Its a vaine thing to &s;et again&s;t Chri&s;t, <MILESTONE N="2"> <HI>Job&punc;</HI> 9. 4. <HI>He is wi&s;e in heart and mighty in &s;trength; who hath hardned him&s;elfe again&s;t him and hath pro&s;pered?</HI> If heaven and earth cannot &s;erve fully in their ordinary cour&s;e, he will change their cour&s;e and &s;erve him&s;elfe by that change. <HI>Exod.</HI> 14. 25. <HI>He takes off the Chariot wheeles and makes them drive heavily;</HI> whereupon the Egyptians cry out, <HI>Let us flie from the face of I&s;rael, for the Lord fighteth for them:</HI> you are &s;urely much over matched, when you have heaven and earth, and the God of both again&s;t you.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Its ea&s;ie to believe promi&s;es of this life &s;hall be perfor|med.</NOTE> Its no hard thing to believe that the <MILESTONE N="3"> promi&s;es concerning <HI>this life</HI> &s;hould be performed, while we remember what he doth in <HI>Earth</HI> as well as <HI>Heaven: The meeke &s;hall inherit the earth: and obedient ones &s;hall eat the good things of the Land, P&s;al.</HI> 37. 11. <HI>Prov.</HI> 3. 16. <HI>Length of dayes are in Wi&s;domes right hand, and in her left hand riches and honour.</HI> Say not your enemies are many, mighty, crafty and malicious, and you are few, and weake, and how &s;hall your tranquillity be? Re|member, <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> hath this power to change their &s;trength into weakne&s;&s;e, and your <NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e 2. of Exhorta|tion. 1. Con&s;i|der Chri&s;t in all the creatures.</NOTE>weakne&s;&s;e into &s;trength.</P>
<P>La&s;tly, let it exhort you to the&s;e four things.</P>
<P N="1">1. Con&s;ider Chri&s;t in all changes on the creatures; and this will make natu|ral
<PB N="56" REF="45">
Philo&s;ophy to become &s;piritual. Are there Ecclip&s;es of the Sun, blazing Stars, Meteors, unu&s;ual Winds and Stormes, Haile, Snow, Thunder and Lightning? Then let your &s;ouls mount up, in thoughts and feare of <HI>Chri&s;t;</HI> while A&s;trologers are vexing their mindes with &s;trained appli|cations of the&s;e things, here you are taught whether to refer them; Remem|ber <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> in the dry years we have had, in the unu&s;ual high Tydes, and &s;uch like Occurences.</P>
<P N="2"><MILESTONE N="2"> 2. Feare before <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> more then men; <NOTE PLACE="marg">Fear be|fore Chri&s;t.</NOTE>when they are angry, you are troubled; when they frowne, you feare; and is there not more cau&s;e to feare him that over|rules the con&s;tellations, turnes about the winds? <HI>Jer.</HI> 5. 22. <HI>Fear you not me &s;aith the Lord, and will ye not tremble at my per|&s;on who have placed the &s;and for the bound of the Sea?</HI></P>
<P N="3"><MILESTONE N="3"> 3. Advance your faith to a great ex|pectation, <NOTE PLACE="marg">Expect great things.</NOTE>and the expectation of great things. A little faith will not &s;uffice, when God &s;peaks and workes; we mu&s;t <NOTE PLACE="marg">Rom. 4.</NOTE>be <HI>&s;trong in faith if we will give glory to God,</HI> not con&s;idering the carnal rea&s;ons, examples, cu&s;tomes and experiences, which may be produced and pre&s;&s;ed: but to goe on in our per&s;wa&s;ion, that God which hath made Heaven and Earth, will compleat his work for his own and his Sons glory.</P>
<P N="4"><PB N="57" REF="45">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">Prai&s;e Chri&s;t.</NOTE> 4. Surely Chri&s;t is to be exalted in <MILESTONE N="4"> prai&s;e, that can worke about turnes in na|tural things to be &s;ub&s;ervient unto &s;piri|tual: Signes in heaven and earth have an a&s;pect to the performance of promi&s;es, and fulfilling of prophe&s;ies; and we &s;hould be heavenly and &s;piritual Mathe|maticians and A&s;trologers to take the true motion and dimen&s;ion of the&s;e things to the elevation of his Name, and our hearts to his prai&s;e.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="6" TYPE="chapter">
<HEAD>CHAP. VI. Shewes the change and the mini|&s;tration of Angels in the&s;e Turnes: Thus,</HEAD>
<P>Fir&s;t Chri&s;t is head of Angels. 2. They mu&s;t &s;erve his Saints. 3. They &s;erve in de&s;truction of their enemies. 4. They mu&s;t have apparent honour for this &s;ervice. 5. They are in the vi&s;ions, and &s;o in the execution. 6. They have King|dome-worke. 7. They and Saints are joyned together. 8. They are u&s;ed in the la&s;t, which are the be&s;t di&s;pen&s;ations. 9. <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> mu&s;t have his Angels as well as the Dragon. U&s;e of In&s;truction and Exhor|tation.</P>
<P><PB N="58" REF="46">
Concerning Heaven and Earth taken properly you heard in the former Chap|ter: Look on heaven and earth now, as &s;poken by a figure, &s;etting down the thing containing for the thing contained, and &s;o heaven containing the Angels, is put for the Angels contained in heaven: but then the que&s;tion will be, How are the&s;e Heavens &s;haken? or plainly thus, How are the&s;e Angels in Heaven, &s;aid to be changed?</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Angels called Heavens.</NOTE> Angels are called <HI>Heavens,</HI> becau&s;e they dwell there, <HI>Caeli quia caelicol<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">,</HI> Heavens becau&s;e the inhabitants of heaven: thus <NOTE PLACE="marg">Job. 15. 15.</NOTE><HI>Job</HI> 15. 15. <HI>The Heavens are not cleane in his &s;ight,</HI> that is, the Angels of heaven are not cleane: Not, that they have any &s;in to pollute them; but weighing them with him who is the <HI>holy, holy, holy One,</HI> they can beare no weight. <HI>Ne ip&s;i quidem caeli mundi &s;unt cum ip&s;o collati, quantum|vis a terrenis i&s;tis faecibus immunes. Beza:</HI> The heavens, although free from earthly dregs, are not cleare, compared with him: His eyes are more pure then to behold any iniquity; his holine&s;&s;e is him&s;elfe, and &s;o unmea&s;urable. The Angels though holy, yet is their holine&s;&s;e by mea&s;ure, their holine&s;&s;e is limited, they are but creatures, though holy and heavenly creatures; and compared with that infi|nite One, they are &s;aid not to be cleane: <HI>Job</HI> 4. 18. <HI>Behold he put no tru&s;t in his &s;er|vants,</HI>
<PB N="59" REF="46">
<HI>and his Angels he charged with folly: Nullo modo conferenda e&s;t illorum ju&s;titia cum ju&s;titia Dei quae modis omnibus infinita e&s;t.</HI> Their righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e is no way to be com|pared with his, which is altogether in|finite: and this it may be is hinted in tho&s;e latter words, <HI>In his &s;ight.</HI> They are cleane indeed in our &s;ight, and we can finde no impurity in them, but not &s;o in <HI>his</HI> &s;ight: <HI>Mat.</HI> 6. 20. <HI>Thy will be done in earth as it is in heaven,</HI> that is, by the An|gels in heaven.</P>
<P>Now how the&s;e heavens, the&s;e Angels may be &s;aid to be <HI>&s;haken</HI> is the great Que&s;tion. <NOTE PLACE="marg">How An|gels are changed.</NOTE></P>
<P>We &s;peake here of <HI>good Angels,</HI> whom we look on as confirmed in their &s;tate by <HI>Chri&s;t;</HI> and how then are they &s;haken?</P>
<P><HI>Philip Melanchthon</HI> who was called <MILESTONE N="1"> <HI>Germaniae Lu&s;cinia,</HI> Germanies Nightin|gale, <NOTE PLACE="marg">Heaven &s;haken when Chri&s;t takes our nature.</NOTE>referring this prophe&s;ie of <HI>Haggai</HI> to <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> his comming in the fle&s;h, &s;aith, <HI>Movit coelos, quia Deus a&s;sump&s;it humanam Naturam:</HI> He &s;hooke the heavens becau&s;e God a&s;&s;umed humane nature; and there is a certain truth in that, although the wordes carry more in them: It was a great &s;hake of Heaven, when Chri&s;t who was higher then the heavens, took our na|ture on him.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">At Chri&s;ts birth.</NOTE> Carthu&s;ian <HI>referrs it to the appearance</HI> <MILESTONE N="2"> <HI>of Angels at the birth of Chri&s;t:</HI> Movet coelos quando cives coele&s;tes apparuerunt homi|nibus
<PB N="60" REF="47">
concinnentes: Wh<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">n the Multitude of the heavenly ho&s;ts appeared p<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ay&s;ing God and &s;aying, Glory to God in <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 word"> highe&s;t, Luke <HI>2. 13, 14.</HI></P>
<P><MILESTONE N="3"> Others refer it to the great admiration <NOTE PLACE="marg">At Go&s;|pel prea|ching. 1 Pet. 1. 12.</NOTE>that even the Angels were in at the preaching of the Go&s;pel, 1 Pet. 1. 12. <HI>which things</HI> (namely the things o&punc; th<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> G<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="2 letters">pel) <HI>the Angels de&s;ire to look into,</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign"> from a word <GAP DESC="foreign"> <HI>incurvo me ut <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 word"></HI> which &s;ignifies, I bow down my &s;elfe that I may &s;ee, arguing an a<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">dency of affecti|on, and the undergoing (as it were) &s;ome difficulty to obtain a Vi&s;ion. They admired and looked, and <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">he more they looked, the more they admired; like tho&s;e that could not &s;atisfie them&s;elves in what they liked and looked after.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="4"> Now when God reveales <HI>New things</HI> to <NOTE PLACE="marg">Angels changed when God re|veals new things to them.</NOTE>Angels, then in &s;ome regard they receive a change; for they then know that which they knew not before, and in that recep|tion of new Revelations may truly be &s;aid to be under &s;ome mutation or change.</P>
<P>And who knowes, but God may re|veale new things to them concerning the great workes which he is about to doe in the World? Angels know &s;ome things, and much more then we, but not all: they know not &s;o much but they may know more: Angels may grow in know|ledge, as well as men; and all growth is
<PB N="61" REF="47">
a change, a change from a l<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">&s;&s;e quantity <NOTE PLACE="marg">Omnis lo|cutio Dei ad angelos e&s;t illumi|<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">atio.</NOTE>to a greater. Angels are Gods &s;ervants; and his &s;peaking to them, is his illigh<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">|ning of them to know his will, and know|ing to do it.</P>
<P>Chri&s;t is &s;aid to &s;hake the Angels in re|gard <MILESTONE N="5"> <NOTE PLACE="marg">When they have new im|ploy|ment.</NOTE>of that new employment he puts them to; It is true Angels have a per|fection: <HI>et quod perf<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ctum e&s;t, non re|cipit mutationem in p<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">jus,</HI> &s;aith <HI>Dru&s;ius,</HI> and that which is perfect receives not a change into a wor&s;e condition. So then though we a&s;cribe a change to Angels, we make not their condition wor&s;e; They <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ave a &s;table being, and &s;o con|tinue in their wi&s;dome, &s;trength and hap|pine&s;&s;e; bu<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> yet are liable to change, in regard of their mini&s;tration, which may be applyed unto diver&s;e things: <HI>Angeli &s;unt mutabiles quoad applicationem virtu|<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">um ad diver&s;a: Aquin.</HI> when that vir|tuous efficacious power which is in An|gels, is applyed to things that are diver&s;e one from another, and &s;uch things as have &s;ome oppo&s;ition one again&s;t another in their nature; the Angels them&s;elves are &s;aid to be changed, becau&s;e there is a change in the object, about which their power is conver&s;ant; the object not being the &s;ame <HI>now,</HI> that formerly: as for ex|ample.</P>
<P>It is a cleare truth they were alway mini&s;tring &s;pirits <HI>for the good of tho&s;e who</HI>
<PB N="62" REF="48">
<HI>be heires of &s;alvation, Heb.</HI> 1. 14. But it hath been the condition of the&s;e heires, to <HI>differ little from &s;ervants,</HI> to be here lo&s;t, afflicted, per&s;ecuted, for&s;aken; and in the&s;e ca&s;es, in this their low condition, Angels have &s;erved for their good: but &s;urely their heavenly Father intends his &s;onnes and heires a better portion, a por|tion better then that of affliction and tri|bulation; and that not in heaven onely, but &s;omewhat better upon earth: when as it is <HI>Rev.</HI> 21. 1, 2. <HI>The holy City the New Jeru&s;alem &s;hall be coming down from God out of heaven, prepared as a Bride a|dorned for her husband, when the Tabernacle of God &s;hall be with men, and he &s;hall be a|mong&s;t them; then Joy, Peace, Tru<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">h and Glory &s;hall be unto them.</HI></P>
<P>Now while Angels are mini&s;tring to the&s;e heires, the&s;e Saints, thus changed in their condition: May not the mini|&s;tration and Angels in regard of it, be &s;aid to be changed? <HI>Mutatio convenit Angelis in quantum <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">de novo applicantur ad aliquod mini&s;terium:</HI> change agreeth to Angels &s;o far forth as they are applyed to &s;ome mini&s;tration anew.</P>
<P>It's no derogation to good and holy Angels to attribute to them &s;uch a change as a new mini&s;tration inferrs; When as the witne&s;&s;es prophe&s;ied in &s;ack|cloth all the time of Antichri&s;t <HI>his</HI> 1260 <HI>dayes</HI> and were <HI>&s;laine;</HI> I que&s;tion not, but
<PB N="63" REF="48">
the Angels were in all tho&s;e dayes mini|&s;tring &s;pirits, for the good of the&s;e pro|phe&s;ying, dying witne&s;&s;es: but when the&s;e witne&s;&s;es &s;hall have a re&s;urrection, and a&s;cention, and glory; <HI>The &s;pirit of life from God enters into them, Rev.</HI> 11. 11. <HI>They a&s;cend up to heaven in a cloud, v.</HI> 12. Now I doe as little que&s;tion but the Angels were mini&s;tring &s;pirits for their good: but being there was &s;o va&s;t a di|&s;tance of the condition of the&s;e witne&s;&s;es, and &s;o great a change, as from death to life, from &s;laughter to glory, from earth to heaven: pardon me if I conceive the <HI>Angels</HI> in this their admini&s;tration to be &s;haken and changed. I &s;hall &s;ay no more of this, but give you my farther thoughts in this following Ob&s;ervation. <NOTE PLACE="marg">Doct. Angels mini&s;ter in the&s;e Turnes.</NOTE></P>
<P><HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t in the great Turning Provi|dences of the latter Age employes the mini|&s;tration of Angels.</HI> It was &s;o of Old, when <HI>I&s;rael</HI> was delivered out of Egypt, <HI>Exod.</HI> 23. 20. <HI>Behold I will &s;end an Angel before thee to keep thee in the way.</HI> The giving of <HI>the Law,</HI> was an eminent turne, but that was <HI>ordained by Angels, Gal.</HI> 5. 19. In the time of the Judges an Angel appeares to <HI>Gideon. Judg.</HI> 6. 12. And again <HI>to Manoah, Judg.</HI> 13. 2. About <HI>Ahabs</HI> time when I&s;rael were become Idolatrous, and <HI>Aha|ziah</HI> fel &s;icke, 2 <HI>Kings</HI> 1. 3. <HI>The Angel of the Lord &s;pake to Elijah.</HI> After the Cap|tivity, when the Temple was to be built,
<PB N="64" REF="49">
<HI>Zacharies prophe&s;ies are full of the</HI> appariti|ons of Angels, <HI>Zach.</HI> 1. 8. How great was the turne when Chri&s;t was to be borne? and then <HI>Luke</HI> 1. 28. An Angel &s;alutes <HI>Mary:</HI> and it was no &s;mall turne when he came to &s;uffer, and then you finde Angels mini&s;tring. In the prophe|&s;ies of the time after Chri&s;t, all the Vi&s;ions are by Angels; when the Ea&s;terne and We&s;terne Empires are de&s;troyed. <HI>Rev.</HI> 8. 7, 8. and 9. 11. <HI>The Angels &s;ound the Trum|pets.</HI> When the la&s;t plagues are to befal the Romi&s;h Antichri&s;t, the Angels pour out the <HI>Vials:</HI> and when the Bride, the Lambs Wife is to be &s;een, then an Angel mu&s;t &s;hew it, <HI>Rev.</HI> 21. 9. Now to cleare this, ob&s;erve.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">For 1. Chri&s;t is head of Angels.</NOTE> 1. Je&s;us Chri&s;t God-man is head of Angels. <HI>Col.</HI> 1. 16. They were all made <HI>by him, and for him;</HI> and &s;o they are cal|led <HI>Michael</HI>'s <HI>Angels, Rev.</HI> 12. 7. they are to &s;erve and wor&s;hip him, <HI>Heb.</HI> 1. 6. be|ing all made &s;ubject to him, 1 <HI>Pet.</HI> 3. 22. They are <HI>his ho&s;t,</HI> and he orders and com|mands them, <HI>Gen.</HI> 22. 1, 2. Chri&s;t is the &s;econd <HI>Adam</HI> from <HI>heaven heavenly,</HI> and his ho&s;t mu&s;t be like him&s;elfe, an heavenly ho&s;t. <HI>Luke</HI> 2. 13. <HI>A multitude of the hea|venly ho&s;t were pray&s;ing God.</HI> Chri&s;t hath the great intere&s;t in Angels; they are, fir&s;t for him, and then for us. <HI>Angeli non &s;unt facti propter hominem principaliter,</HI> faith <HI>Aquinas:</HI> Angels are not made for man
<PB N="65" REF="49">
principally: They are indeed made for us, but more for Chri&s;t; for us &s;ubordi|natly, for Chri&s;t principally, who mu&s;t be <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">i<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">&s;t &s;erved. When he was in his &s;tate of aba&s;ement, he &s;aid he could <HI>pray to the Father, and he would &s;end him more then</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Math. 26. 43.</NOTE><HI>twelve Legions of Angels;</HI> and hereafter when he &s;hall come forth in &s;tate, <HI>thou|&s;and thou&s;ands &s;hall mini&s;ter unto him, and ten thou&s;and times ten thou&s;and &s;hall</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Dan. 7. 10.</NOTE><HI>&s;tand before him: when he &s;hall be revealed from heaven with the Angels of his power,</HI> 2 <HI>The&s;&s;.</HI> 1. 7. Mark the power that Angels have; its <HI>his power,</HI> and they being &s;o great a body, he mu&s;t have preeminence above them.</P>
<P>Angels are to &s;erve <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> not in his <MILESTONE N="2"> per&s;on alone, but in his Saints, his mem|bers <NOTE PLACE="marg">Angels are to &s;erve Chri&s;t in <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> mem|bers.</NOTE>al&s;o. <HI>Heb.</HI> 1. 14. <HI>They are &s;pirits,</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, immaterial &s;ub&s;tances, and <HI>mini|&s;tering &s;pirits,</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, &s;erving in a pub|licke way&punc; <HI>&s;ent forth</HI> as the Apo&s;tles were &s;ent forth, <GAP DESC="foreign"> by an immediate Commi&s;&s;ion from Chri&s;t, <HI>To mini&s;ter</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, <NOTE PLACE="marg">Heb. 1. 14.</NOTE>to be heavenly Deacons <HI>for their &s;akes who &s;hall be heirs of &s;alvation. P&s;al.</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">P&s;al. 91. 11.</NOTE>91. 11. <HI>He &s;hall give his Angels charge over thee;</HI> which is extendible to the Mem|bers of Chri&s;t, as well as to Chri&s;t him|&s;elfe: Angels have charge of them, from and under him. <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 34. 7. <HI>The Angel of the Lord encampeth round about them that feare him and delivereth them.</HI> When <HI>Jacob</HI>
<PB N="66" REF="50">
is on his way, the Angels of God met him, <HI>Gen.</HI> 32. 1. When <HI>Daniel</HI> is in the Lyons Den, God &s;ends his Angel <HI>to &s;hut the Ly|ons mouths, Dan.</HI> 6. 12. When <HI>Peter</HI> is in pri&s;on, an Angel delivers him, <HI>Acts</HI> 12. 8. and though <HI>Lazarus</HI> dye a beggar, yet &s;hall he be carried by <HI>Angels into Abra|hams bo&s;ome, Luke</HI> 16. 22.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="3"> Angels are to &s;erve Chri&s;t, and his <NOTE PLACE="marg">In de&s;tru|ction of enemies.</NOTE>Saints in the de&s;truction of their enemies. 2 <HI>Kings</HI> 19. 35. <HI>That night the Angel &s;mote in the Campe of the A&s;syrians</HI> 185000. And proud <HI>Herod, Acts</HI> 12. 32. cannot e&s;cape the &s;miting of an Angel. God &s;mote <HI>Sodome</HI> and <HI>Egypt</HI> by Angels: <HI>Gen.</HI> 19. 3. and <HI>Exod.</HI> 12. 29. The Prophet <HI>John</HI> tells us of &s;piritual <HI>Egypt</HI> and <HI>Sodome;</HI> and that they &s;hall be de&s;troyed: and who knowes, but God may employ the&s;e his &s;ervants in their de&s;truction? <HI>Rev.</HI> 12. 7. <HI>Michael fights and his Angels too;</HI> we are &s;ure Antichri&s;t &s;hall be <HI>de&s;troyed by the brightne&s;&s;e of Chri&s;ts coming;</HI> and &s;urely when he &s;hall come, he will come atten|ded, and without all doubt his atten|dance &s;hall doe their &s;ervice to, and for him, for him and his.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="4"> Angels are to have a more apparent <NOTE PLACE="marg">Angels are to have ho|nour of their &s;er|vice.</NOTE>demon&s;tration and honour of, and for their &s;ervice, <HI>to Chri&s;t and his World</HI> then ever yet they have had. Angels are one of the highe&s;t ranks of creatures, <HI>P&s;al</HI> 103. 20. <HI>They are &s;aid to excel in &s;trength,</HI>
<PB N="67" REF="50">
<HI>P&s;al.</HI> 104. 4. <HI>To be &s;pirits and flames of fire:</HI> and undoubtedly they doe, and have done a notable deale of &s;ervice for God. <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 103. 21. <HI>They are &s;aid to doe his plea|&s;ure,</HI> that which is fully according to his will, and wherein he is delighted. Now how little glory hath God had from the creation, and admini&s;tration of Angels? and againe how little glory have men re|turned to Angels? They are creatures in Gods hand, whereby he doth much for us; but how little doe we own them? Now &s;urely God will finde a time to glo|rifie him&s;elfe more, and a time wherein <HI>we Men</HI> &s;hall glorifie <HI>Angels</HI> more; not in that exce&s;&s;e and &s;uper&s;tition that Pa|pi&s;ts doe; but according to <HI>his will</HI> and their workings.</P>
<P>Je&s;us Chri&s;t will have his <HI>providences</HI> <MILESTONE N="5"> corre&s;pond with his <HI>Prophe&s;ies</HI> and <HI>Promi|&s;es:</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Angels are in the vi&s;ion and &s;o in the executi|on.</NOTE>and therefore as Angels are &s;till brought in in the Vi&s;ions of <HI>John;</HI> &s;o they &s;hall be drawn forth in the execution: and Angels &s;ound the <HI>Trumpets,</HI> as you heard, <HI>Rev.</HI> 8. cry; <HI>Babylon is fallen, fallen. Rev.</HI> 14. 8. pour out the Vials, <HI>Rev.</HI> 16. that is, there is the mini&s;tration of An|gels with that of the Saints; <HI>Waldus, John Hus, Hierom of Prague, Wickliffe, Luther, Cal<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">in,</HI> and other precious Saints and Martyrs cry <HI>Babylon</HI> down, and fill up the Vials; and do not Angels too in their way? doe they not joyne with them?
<PB N="68" REF="51">
Yes &s;ure, and delight in the worke, be|cau&s;e its <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> his worke and will. <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t</HI> in &s;etting up his Kingdome among the <HI>Jewes</HI> u&s;ed Angels to &s;peak, <HI>Heb.</HI> 2. 2. and in pulling down Antichri&s;ts King|dome, and &s;etting up his own, he will u&s;e Angels again.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="6"> We read that Angels have worke de|puted <NOTE PLACE="marg">Angels have king|dome&punc; worke.</NOTE>to them concerning Kingdomes, <HI>Dan.</HI> 10. 13. <HI>The Prince of the Kingdome of Per&s;ia,</HI> is by Mr. <HI>Hugh Broughton</HI> expoun|ded to be an <HI>Angel:</HI> Angels are the fir&s;t Princes in compari&s;on of the Rulers of the earth (&s;aith he.) When whole <HI>Sodome</HI> and <HI>Gomorrah</HI> mu&s;t be de&s;troyed, <HI>Gen.</HI> 19. <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">. there be two Angels to do it. When God hath a <HI>Harve&s;t,</HI> the Angels mu&s;t be the <HI>Reapers</HI> and put in their <HI>Sickles.</HI> When the Nation of the A&s;&s;yrians is to be de|&s;troyed, it mu&s;t be by an Angel. When a National Pe&s;tilence is to come upon <HI>I&s;|rael,</HI> 2 <HI>Sam.</HI> 24. 16, 17. we read of <HI>an Angel &s;tretching out his hand:</HI> and truly when God hath great and general work to be done &s;peedily, and together, I am apt to believe, that in &s;uch workings he <MILESTONE N="7"> hath, and doth, and will, u&s;e the mini|&s;trations <NOTE PLACE="marg">They &s;hall be co<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">|joyn'd with Saints hereafter; and &s;o Now.</NOTE>of Angels. Not that he needs them, or could not do without them, but becau&s;e he hath made them, and bath them by him, he loves to make u&s;e of his own workman&s;hip.</P>
<P>Angels and Saints &s;hall be joyned to|gether
<PB N="69" REF="51">
hereafter to make up the great Congregation, and therefore <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> will joyne them in the worke here. <HI>Heb.</HI> 12. 22, 23. <HI>The inumerable Company of Angels, and the general Church of the Fir&s;t borne</HI> are joyned together: Its Chri&s;t his method to begin things here, which he will com|pleat hereafter. Saints &s;hall have <HI>Grace</HI> now, which &s;hall be turned into <HI>Glory</HI> hereafter: Great things are vailed now, which &s;hall be unvailed hereafter: <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> him&s;elfe was here <GAP DESC="foreign"> <HI>in the forme of a &s;ervant,</HI> but he &s;hall appear <HI>Lord of life and glory:</HI> Now we are the &s;onnes of God, 1 <HI>John</HI> 3. 2. but it <HI>doth not appeare what we &s;hall be.</HI> Now Saints and An|gels are joyned together in the intere&s;t of Chri&s;t, which &s;hall notably appeare here|after.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Chri&s;t be|ing upon his great|e&s;t worke u&s;eth his be&s;t &s;er|vants.</NOTE> Chri&s;t his la&s;t di&s;pen&s;ations are his <MILESTONE N="8"> greate&s;t, and &s;o he will make u&s;e of his mo&s;t glorious in&s;truments.</P>
<P N="1">1. His infinite Wi&s;dome is working all the di&s;orders of the world, to his own glory; and &s;o acts by &s;uch creatures as are the wi&s;e&s;t and fulle&s;t of under&s;tan|ding: we poor creatures act too much by &s;en&s;e, example and cu&s;tome, when <HI>Rea&s;on</HI> is again&s;t us: <HI>Angels</HI> not &s;o.</P>
<P N="2">2. Now <HI>he takes unto him his power, his great power,</HI> his <HI>ruling power,</HI> and &s;o brings in his &s;ervants, which have mo&s;t &s;trength and power in them, &s;uch as are the <HI>An|gels,</HI>
<PB N="70" REF="52">
<HI>Angeli moventur &s;ecundum totam vi<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="2 letters"> &s;uam in id quod agunt;</HI> which are moved according to their whole force, on that object on which they act.</P>
<P N="3">3. He is now upon the more immediate admini&s;tration of his Saints, and <HI>his world,</HI> and therefore calls forth his &s;er|vants which have the mo&s;t immediate being from him; <HI>Angeli &s;unt creati &agrave; Deo immediate.</HI></P>
<P N="4">4. Chri&s;t is now to &s;hew forth his <HI>un|changeablene&s;se;</HI> that although he have &s;uffered his Spou&s;e <HI>to lie among the pots,</HI> and to be to&s;&s;ed from condition to condition; yet he will carry her through all the&s;e to&s;&s;es to a &s;ettled unchangeable &s;tate, and &s;o &s;ets to worke his &s;ervants that have the mo&s;t uncorruptible being.</P>
<P><MILESTONE N="9"> Satan hath his Angels to worke by, <NOTE PLACE="marg">Chri&s;t mu&s;t have his An|gels, as well as Satan hath his.</NOTE><HI>Rev.</HI> 12. 9. which <HI>are ca&s;t out with him into the earth:</HI> turne to the &s;eventh ver&s;e of that Chapter, and you &s;hall finde <HI>Michael and his Angels fought again&s;t the Dragon and his Angels. Heb.</HI> 1. 7. <HI>He made his An|gels &s;pirits:</HI> Satan &s;hall not do &s;o much hurt by his &s;ervants, as Chri&s;t will do good by his: Satan imitates Chri&s;t, and &s;o hath his Angels, as <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> hath his; he fol|lowes him not out of love, or liking to him, but knowing his wi&s;dome and pre|valency. Chri&s;t and his Angels &s;hall ap|peare indeed, not onely fighting, <HI>but ca&s;t|ing down:</HI> As <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> will Conquer by his
<PB N="71" REF="52">
Saints, &s;o by his Angels al&s;o: Conquer he mu&s;t, not onely in his own per&s;on, but in the per&s;on of all his &s;ervants, both <HI>Angels</HI> and <HI>Saints.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Object.</NOTE> You &s;peak of Angels, and their Mini|&s;try: I but, little or nothing appears; how doth it appeare they are working?</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Sol. 1.</NOTE> The operations of Angels are not im|maginary but reall, although not expo|&s;ed to &s;en&s;e; their actings were not &s;o glorious if they &s;hould, fall under our &s;en&s;es.</P>
<P N="2">2. Let us con&s;ider our weakne&s;&s;e and &s;in|fulne&s;&s;e, and that will tell us, how unfit we are for their appearance; they trem|bled of Old, when the Law was given by them, and we would tremble if they &s;hould now appeare; for <HI>Omnis apparen|tia Angeli in principio e&s;t cum terrore,</HI> all appearance of Angels at fir&s;t, is with &s;ome terrour.</P>
<P N="3">3. But yet if you weigh things in a San|ctuary Ballance, you will finde &s;uch actings and workings as faith can ri&s;e up unto, although &s;en&s;e cannot. And when God will worke more of his great works by them, then he will <HI>highthen</HI> our faith to apprehend them more.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e of In|&s;truction. U&s;e 1. Chri&s;t is far above Angels.</NOTE> Doth <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> in the&s;e great turnes u&s;e the mini&s;tration of Angels? then &s;urely he him&s;elfe is far above them: the <HI>Lord</HI> is above the &s;ervant, and he to whom the admini&s;tration is, is above them that
<PB N="72" REF="53">
mini&s;ter: above them then he is, and a|bove them in the&s;e turnes; for <HI>Heb.</HI> 1. 2. He is &s;aid <HI>to make the worlds,</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>&s;e|cula,</HI> the &s;everal <HI>ages of the world. Mr. Dixon</HI> in his Commentary on the place, &s;aith, he callet<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> it the <HI>worlds for the va|riety of times and ages, and fleeces of the creatures one &s;ucceeding another.</HI> You wrong Je&s;us Chri&s;t if you conver&s;e not with him in all the&s;e inferiour motions: he is the <HI>primum mobile,</HI> the fir&s;t mover, and other things move after him.</P>
<P>The whole fir&s;t Chapter to the <HI>Hebrews</HI> &s;ets forth the excellency of <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> far a|bove that of Angels; which here I &s;hall give you a briefe account of.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Heb. 1. opened.</NOTE> Take notice</P>
<P>How he gives the full due to Angels, the full due of their glory: Its gran|ted they are <HI>the &s;onnes of God,</HI> as <HI>Ad<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">m</HI> is &s;aid to be, <HI>Luke</HI> 3. 38. in that they had their immediate being from him, and accordinly <HI>&s;ang unto him and &s;h<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">uted for joy. Job.</HI> 38. 7.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 4.</NOTE> They have an <HI>excellent name,</HI> which implyes an excellent nature: Names are put to expre&s;&s;e the natures of things, and excellent names, to excellent things, a|mong which Angels are to be rank<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">d.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 6.</NOTE> Th<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">y are <HI>His</HI> Angels, of him, and for him, and therefore excellent. They are <HI>&s;pirits,</HI> having a &s;imple unc<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">mpounded being, and therefore an excellent being:
<PB N="73" REF="53">
They are as <HI>flames of fire,</HI> of lightning, that &s;peedily execute his will, <HI>mini&s;tring &s;pirits</HI> as <HI>v.</HI> 14.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 4. <GAP DESC="foreign">.</NOTE> But now <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t</HI> hath by <HI>inheri|tance obtained a far more excellent name then they:</HI> they are made very good, but he is made far better.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 2.</NOTE> He is <HI>&s;o</HI> a <HI>Son</HI> as they are not; a Son by way of eminency; he is a <HI>Son</HI> and <HI>fir&s;t b<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">gotten,</HI> which they are not. <NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 6.</NOTE></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 2.</NOTE> He is <HI>appointed heir of all things,</HI> which the Angels are not; but even they are part of his po&s;&s;e&s;&s;ion, given to be his &s;ervants. <NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 3.</NOTE></P>
<P>He is the <HI>brightne&s;&s;e of the Fathers glory;</HI> &s;o are not Angels: Angels hold forth much of God, but they are not the <HI>Chara|cter of his Per&s;on as Chri&s;t is:</HI> They are u&s;ed in the government of this world; but he <HI>upholds all things by the word of his power.</HI> Truth it is, they do much &s;ervice, and do it cheerfully and vigorou&s;ly; but they can never do <HI>that &s;ervice</HI> that <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> doth. <HI>He by him&s;elfe purged our &s;in,</HI> which is a worke too great for them: he takes his place where they cannot; they may &s;tand <HI>about the Throne,</HI> and waite the plea&s;ure of God; but <HI>he &s;its down at the right hand of his glory.</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 8.</NOTE></P>
<P><HI>He is God,</HI> and they are but <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="2 letters">eatures, and owe him for their being, <HI>v.</HI> 7. as do the Heaven and Earth, <HI>v.</HI> 10. In regard <NOTE PLACE="marg">7. and 10.</NOTE>of his humane nature, <HI>He hath the oyl of gladne&s;&s;e above his fellows:</HI> and &s;o <HI>loves</HI>
<PB N="74" REF="54">
<HI>righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e, and hates iniquity</HI> more then Angels.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 8.</NOTE> He hath <HI>a Throne, and that for ever;</HI> and its honour enough for Angels to waite about it.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 13.</NOTE> Many are the <HI>enemies</HI> of this Throne and Kingdome, but God will make them <HI>his foot&s;toole.</HI> Thus you &s;ee Angels are but Mini&s;ters, although glorious Mini&s;ters: Chri&s;t is more glorious then they.</P>
<P>Let me adde one word more to exhort <NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e of Ex|hortation. 1. To be|hold the&s;e works.</NOTE>you.</P>
<P N="1">1. To draw your eyes to behold the&s;e glorious workes; Its a curious &s;tudy to &s;earch into Gods providences; he im|prints much of him&s;elfe upon them, and that by his choice &s;ervants, his <HI>Angels.</HI></P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2 Not to be di&s;|couraged.</NOTE> 2. Let no di&s;couragement &s;eize upon you as to the Times, Mea&s;ures, Methods, In|&s;truments of the&s;e things. God hath his own hou&s;hold &s;ervants, which he can and will imploy at his plea&s;ure.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">3. Ri&s;e in love.</NOTE> 3. And &s;hall not this afford &s;ome ele|vation of your hearts in love to God, when he doth on your behalfe, imploy his be&s;t attendance?</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">4. Come forth to be fellow&punc; &s;ervants with the&s;e Angels.</NOTE> 4. La&s;tly, let it mightily provoke all the &s;ervants of God, his precious Wor|thies to come forth, and goe on, in the &s;ervice of the&s;e latter times: Its no wor&s;e bu&s;ine&s;&s;e you are called forth unto, then Chri&s;t puts his Angels about. Oh! then let not your hands hang down, nor your
<PB N="75" REF="54">
knees be feeble. Study what worke is put into your hands, and do it with all your might. Are you called to coun&s;el, or to act? at home or abroad? by Sea or by Land? Oh! lift up your heads, and rejoyce, that God hath counted you worthy to be under-powers in the&s;e <NOTE PLACE="marg"><GAP DESC="foreign">.</NOTE>tran&s;actions: value it as your happine&s;&s;e to have been in his hand: Let not the thoughts of danger, or difficulty di&s;cou|rage you; you are about Angels worke, and you &s;hould have Angels &s;pirits; you have their help, and you &s;hall have a re|ward not inferiour to their condition.</P>
<P>I &s;hould now according to the opening of the words, as we have &s;poken of the inhabitants of heaven and their &s;haking; &s;o proceed to &s;hew the &s;haking of the Inhabitants of that part of the earth that is called a <HI>Continent;</HI> as al&s;o the &s;haking of the inhabitants of <HI>the Sea,</HI> and the inhabitants <HI>of I&s;lands;</HI> but the&s;e things I &s;hall not handle now, but ha&s;ten to what I intend in this Book.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="7" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="76" REF="55">
<HEAD>CHAP. VII.</HEAD>
<P><HI>Opens the &s;hake of Kings and Princes&punc; becau&s;e, <HI>1.</HI> They make the great turns in the Earth. <HI>2.</HI> They pretend exemption from mans power. <HI>3.</HI> Dealing with them is a compendious way of dealing with the Nations. <HI>4.</HI> Being decked with worldly glory, they &s;eem to be Chri&s;ts match. &V;&s;es of In&s;truction and Ex|hortation.</HI></P>
<P>HEaven as you heard <HI>Ch&aacute;p.</HI> 3, denotes <NOTE PLACE="marg">Heaven meanes h<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">gh things.</NOTE>by a <HI>Metaphor</HI> the highe&s;t things. Thus when the Prophet <HI>Mo&s;es</HI> &s;peaks of the <HI>high walls</HI> of a City <HI>D<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ut.</HI> 1. 28. He tells them of <HI>a City walled up to heaven:</HI> It is the language of the Prophets, to compare a Kingdome to a World; and what is highe&s;t in a Kingdome, to what is highe&s;t in the World. Satan is called, 2 <HI>Cor.</HI> 4. 4. <HI>The god of this World,</HI> and when he was in the highe&s;t of his <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ff<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ctual working in the <HI>children of di&s;obedience:</HI> when he wrought &s;o in them, that they exalted him as a <HI>God,</HI> by wor&s;hipping of him; when he had his heatheni&s;h Prie&s;ts, Altars, Sacrifices, Fea&s;t-dayes, in the time of
<PB N="77" REF="55">
the Emperours: as <HI>Jehovah God</HI> had his among his people <HI>I&s;rael;</HI> then is <HI>Satan</HI> &s;aid to be <HI>in Heaven:</HI> becau&s;e in &s;o great hight in the World. <HI>Rev.</HI> 12. 7, 8. The <NOTE PLACE="marg">Rev. 12. 7, 8.</NOTE><HI>Dragon</HI> is &s;aid to <HI>be in heaven,</HI> in regard that he was exalted and ob&s;erved as a God: But when his Tempels, Idols and Altars were demoli&s;hed; he is there, and then &s;aid to be <HI>ca&s;t out of heaven.</HI> The heatheni&s;h Kings and Princes that were mo&s;t forward and &s;hining in this helli&s;h heaven, are called <HI>Stars.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">I&s;a. 61. 15, 16.</NOTE> <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 61. 15, 16. When God brings <HI>I&s;rael</HI> out of <HI>Egypt,</HI> which he did by <HI>dividing the red Sea, v.</HI> 15. when he makes them a people di&s;tinct and &s;eparate from the E|gyptians, none in-bodyed with them, he made <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">hem eminently his <HI>Sion and peo|ple, v.</HI> 16. This his work is expre&s;&s;ed by two phra&s;es. <HI>Planting Heavens,</HI> and <HI>lay|ing the foundation of the Earth;</HI> that is, he will make them a Common-wealth, a Kingdome, a World Politique.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">I&s;a. 65. 17, 18.</NOTE> I&s;a. <HI>65. 17, 18. When</HI> Jehovah erects Je|ru&s;alem a rejoycing, and her people a joy; <HI>which &s;hall be in the latter age of the world; its &s;aid, 17.</HI> Behold I create a new Heaven and a new Earth.</P>
<P>In like manner, when the high or low things of a Nation are de&s;troyed; it is expre&s;&s;ed by the de&s;truction of the high or low things of the World. <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 34. 4. &s;peaking of the de&s;truction of Jeru&s;alem,
<PB N="78" REF="56">
he &s;aith, <HI>All the ho&s;t of heaven &s;hall be di&s;ol|ved,</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">I&s;a. 34. 4.</NOTE>that is all tho&s;e high things of Jeru|&s;alem &s;hall be laid low; &s;o the de&s;tructi|on of Samaria, <HI>Ho&s;.</HI> 10. 8. and &s;o here <HI>I will &s;hake the Heavens,</HI> that is, I will &s;<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ake the high things and per&s;ons of Kingdomes, Nations and Common-wealths: Note then,</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Doctr. Chri&s;t &s;hakes Kings and Princes.</NOTE> <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t will &s;hake the Kings, Princes, Nobles and glorious ones of the World, I&s;a.</HI> 34 5. When the &s;word comes down on the people of his cur&s;e to judgement, its &s;aid <HI>The Heavens &s;hall be rowled together like a &s;cr<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">wle,</HI> that is, the mo&s;t high things or per&s;ons &s;hall be contracted, confu&s;ed, co|vered with &s;hame, di&s;coloured, &s;cattered, con&s;umed as a leafe from the tree. <HI>Daniel</HI> &s;peaking of the Tyrant <HI>Antiochus Epipha|nes,</HI> and what he &s;hould do again&s;t the people of <HI>I&s;rael, Dan.</HI> 8. 10. its &s;aid, It <HI>waxed great again&s;t the ho&s;t of Heaven, and it ca&s;t &s;ome of the ho&s;t and the Stars to the ground:</HI> So will Chri&s;t do with the high and mighty ones of the Earth: He is the <HI>watcher and the holy One</HI> that numbers and weighs Kingdomes, <HI>Dan.</HI> 4. 13. and 5. 26. They think them&s;elves exempt from mans &s;crutiny; are they therefore from Gods? They make <HI>their ne&s;t in the Stars,</HI> and &s;ay <HI>in their hearts, Who &s;hall plucke them down?</HI> &s;hall not <HI>Chri&s;t?</HI> Let us &s;ee what grounds conclude us into this principle, that Chri&s;t will thus deale with them.</P>
<P><PB N="79" REF="56">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. 1. Kings make great turnes.</NOTE> The&s;e are the men that make the turns on Earth; therefore Chri&s;t will &s;hake them. Let them be as <HI>Lucifer,</HI> &s;ons of the morning, on the ri&s;ing hand; yet he will overturne them that make the&s;e turnes. <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 14. 12, 13. Its &s;poken of <HI>Ba|bylon; How art thou cut down that did&s;t weaken the Nations?</HI></P>
<P><HI>Ver&s;e 16.</HI> Is this the man that made the Earth to tremble, that did &s;hake kingdomes? ver&s;e <HI>17.</HI> That made the world as a Wilder|ne&s;&s;e, and de&s;troyed the Cities thereof, that open'd not the hou&s;e of his pri&s;oner? <HI>Take</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">I&s;a. 14&punc; 12. 13.</NOTE><HI>notice of five pa&s;&s;ages there,</HI></P>
<P N="1">1. They change governments, and Chri&s;t will change them; They <HI>&s;hake the Kingdomes, v.</HI> 16. and Chri&s;t will &s;hake them.</P>
<P N="2">2. <HI>They weaken the Nations, v.</HI> 12. and Chri&s;t will weaken them.</P>
<P N="3">3. <HI>They de&s;troy Cities and make the world as a Wilderne&s;&s;e, v.</HI> 17. for their lu&s;t and plea&s;ure, and God will de&s;troy them and leave their habitations de&s;olate.</P>
<P N="4">4. They hold the people in a flavi&s;h feare; <HI>They v.</HI> 16. <HI>make the earth to tremble. Chri&s;t will amaze</HI> and terrifie them.</P>
<P N="5">5. They <HI>did not let the pri&s;oner loo&s;e home|ward, v.</HI> 17. <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> will impri&s;on them at home, and make his people in&s;ult over them. <HI>Is this the man?</HI> or the&s;e the Kings that made the earth to tremble? that did Tyrant it over my people, that took
<PB N="80" REF="57">
them pri&s;oners, and k<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">pt them pri&s;oners? for <HI>their &s;akes</HI> I will ari&s;e.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. 2. They &s;eeme ex|empt from mans power.</NOTE> They pretend to be exempt from mans power. <HI>Mr. Hugh Broughton</HI> ob&s;erves from <HI>Nebuchadnezzar</HI> his golden Image, that <HI>Chri&s;t in profane eyes is a ba&s;e &s;tone, and hea|then Kings goodly mettal. Who is the Lord?</HI> was <HI>Pharaohs</HI> proud que&s;tion, <HI>that I &s;hould obey his voyce?</HI> and it was as wicked a con|clu&s;ion of his, <HI>I know not the Lord, neither will I let I&s;rael go.</HI> What infectious ac|clamation was that which flye-blowed <HI>Herod? Acts</HI> 12. 12. The <HI>vo<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ce of God and not of man;</HI> and is it not now grown in|to a po&s;ition <HI>Qui &s;ummum in civitate im|perium habet, quicquid is fecerit impune <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">&s;se.</HI> Who&s;oever hath the &s;upreame power, what&s;oever he doth, is not to be puni&s;hed. Now its mo&s;t proper for Chri&s;t to deale with them, to &s;hake them tho|rowly, whom men either dare not, can|not, or will not meddle with.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. 3. Dealing with them, is a way to deale with Na|tions.</NOTE> Dealing with them, is a compendious way of dealing with the Nations they re|late unto; the ready way to &s;hake Na|tions is to &s;hake their <HI>Kings:</HI> They are the <HI>Shepherds;</HI> and if you &s;trike them, <HI>the &s;heepe will be &s;cattered:</HI> when God was angry with <HI>I&s;rael,</HI> the ready way was to move <HI>David</HI> again&s;t them, 2 <HI>Sam.</HI> 24. 1. <HI>Thou art worth ten thou&s;and of us,</HI> 2 <HI>Sam.</HI> 18. 5. Kings are the light of their people; the way to darken them, is to put out
<PB N="81" REF="57">
their light, <HI>Lam.</HI> 4. 20. people breath much in their Kings; &s;top his breath, and you &s;top theirs.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. 4. Kings &s;eeme to be Chri&s;ts match.</NOTE> <HI>They are decked with all worldly pompe and glory; and therefore in the judgement of fle&s;h and blood, the fitte&s;t match for</HI> Chri&s;t. Eccl. <HI>2. 8.</HI> I gat me Silver and Gold, the peculiar Trea&s;ures of Kings. I gat me Men-&s;ingers and Maid-&s;ingers, the delight of the &s;onnes of men. P&s;al. <HI>82. 6.</HI> Ye are Gods, and all of you the chil|dren of the mo&s;t high. Acts <HI>25. 23.</HI> King A|grippa comes with great pompe: <HI>and</HI> Nebu|chadnezzar, Dan. <HI>5. 19.</HI> Whom he would he &s;lew, and whom he would he kept alive; whom he would he &s;et up, or plucked down; <HI>their excellent maje&s;ty dazles us poor low ones,</HI> Dan. <HI>4. 36. But its not &s;o with</HI> Chri&s;t <HI>who comes again&s;t the&s;e</HI> Goliahs, <HI>the&s;e Champions, and Cheiftains of the world, and tumbles them down.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e 1. 1. There is a meane&s;&s;e in their maje&s;ty.</NOTE> Fir&s;t, will Chri&s;t &s;hake Kings and Prin|ces? then let us &s;ee, a meane&s;&s;e in their maje&s;ty, and lowne&s;&s;e in their highne&s;&s;e. They are above other men, but under <HI>Chri&s;t;</HI> others account to them, and they mu&s;t account to him. Sen&s;ual men &s;ee nothing in them but pompe and power; but men that live by faith, and weigh them in the ballance of the Sanctuary, &s;ee <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> &s;haking of them, &s;ee them fal|ling down and <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> mounting up: <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> alone is <HI>Rex Catholicus,</HI> the <HI>Catho|lique</HI>
<PB N="82" REF="58">
<HI>King,</HI> to whom <HI>that King</HI> that a&s;|&s;umes that name, and all others mu&s;t be accomptable.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. Man|agement of parti|cular pla|ces mu&s;t be recko|ned for.</NOTE> 2. Learne al&s;o that management of par|ticular places and powers, mu&s;t be recko|ned for: when <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> comes to &s;hake them, he &s;hakes them not con&s;idered &s;imply as <HI>Men;</HI> but as <HI>men in Office,</HI> as men digni|fied with place and power, as <HI>Kings</HI> and <HI>Princes.</HI> Oh! how great will that day and worke be, when the <HI>Emperour</HI> mu&s;t an&s;wer for his Provinces, and the ex|treame cruelty and oppre&s;&s;ion of the Pro|te&s;tant party! what a hideous cry of blood in &s;o many years War will be heard again&s;t him, when Germanies teares and de&s;olations &s;hall be turned into a vial of wrath upon him! How much hath the King of Spain to an&s;wer for the blood of Indians, and Engli&s;h in the We&s;t-India? All his golden Mines will never be &s;o &s;weet, as the vengeance will be bit|ter. Let his cur&s;ed cruel <HI>Inqui&s;ition</HI> be as precious to him as his right eye, yet God will plucke it out, God will ca&s;t it down; He will no more beare with an <HI>Inqui&s;ition</HI> in <HI>Spain,</HI> then with an <HI>High-Commi&s;&s;ion</HI> Court in <HI>England.</HI> I wi&s;h that <HI>France</HI> and <HI>Savoy</HI> would con&s;ider of their Ma&s;&s;acres; and if they do not, all the world &s;hall acknowledge Chri&s;t his ju&s;t &s;haking-deva&s;tations, in many years war, and other wayes of vengeance on them.</P>
<P N="3"><PB N="83" REF="58">
3. Will Chri&s;t account with Princes, and &s;hake them? then &s;urely meaner men &s;hall <NOTE PLACE="marg">3. Chri&s;t will &s;ure|ly ac|count with meaner men.</NOTE>not e&s;cape: Magi&s;trates, Mini&s;ters, Coun|&s;ellers, Captains, Parents, Ma&s;ters, look about you; Chri&s;t is on his circuit, hath began his <HI>Audit;</HI> look well to your ac|counts: Princes are not too great, nor you too little for him to account withal; he will deale punctually, he will not &s;huffle over things with you. Hearken, he calls <HI>venite ad judicium,</HI> Come to judge|ment; what can you an&s;wer for your times, and talents, your meanes and mer|cies, your deliverances and &s;alvations, your covenants and engagements? Are you yet more holy, heavenly, watchful, faithful, fruitful? will your relations ble&s;&s;e God for you, for your coun&s;el, in|&s;truction, reprehen&s;ion, exhortations, pray|ers and examples? Can you &s;ay you are free from the blood of your people, chil|dren, &s;ouldiers, and &s;ervants? If they peri&s;h, is it on their own account? you having freed your &s;ouls in the faithful di&s;charge of your duty.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">4. We may ap|peale to Chri&s;t.</NOTE> 4. In all oppre&s;&s;ion from powers its a ju&s;t ground for people to appeale to <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> who&s;e Office it is to &s;upervi&s;e their act|ings, and to <HI>&s;hake them, Exod.</HI> 2. 23. <HI>I&s;rael &s;ighed by rea&s;on of their bondage, and their cry came up to God:</HI> we tread on wormes, and goe over where the hedge is lowe&s;t: Its no new thing for <HI>might</HI> to oppre&s;&s;e
<PB N="84" REF="59">
<HI>right;</HI> but if men cannot have right on earth, there is none can hinder a man from looking to heaven; it was a notable ap|peale of <HI>David</HI> from <HI>King Saul to Jehovah,</HI> 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 24. 15. <HI>The Lord be judge and judge between me and thee, and plead my cau&s;e and judge me on thee:</HI> its emphatical, that thrice he repeats the word judge. <HI>The Lord be judge, and judge, between me and thee: and judge me out of thy hand;</HI> How pathetically doth the &s;ame <HI>David</HI> addre&s;&s;e him&s;elfe to God? <HI>P&s;alm.</HI> 35. 23. <HI>Stir up thy &s;elfe and awake to my judgement, unto my cau&s;e, my God and my Lord. Evigila &amp; expergi&s;cere,</HI> watch and ari&s;e; and &s;ure|ly he will do &s;o. I remember what <HI>Mr. Henry Burton</HI> a late Martyr told me; that being in trouble before the highe&s;t pow|ers, and having appealed to the King, and finding no redre&s;&s;e, he expre&s;&s;ed him&s;elfe thus: Well, I appeale to the <HI>King of Kings:</HI> and &s;o may we in like ca&s;es.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">5. Judge|ments on Kings have cha|racters of Chri&s;t on them.</NOTE> Learne farther, that judicial procee|dings again&s;t Princes, is &s;tamped with re|markable Characters of Chri&s;t on them: for <HI>he &s;hakes</HI> them. Thus in the prophe|&s;ies of <HI>John, Revel.</HI> 6. The &s;ixe Seales containe the &s;everal &s;teps of plaguing the heatheni&s;h Roman Empire.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rev. 6. 2, 3, 4, 5. V. 2.</NOTE> At the opening of the fir&s;t Seale, <HI>v.</HI> 2. there appears <HI>a white Hor&s;e: Chri&s;t riding on the word of truth,</HI> and going on Conque|ring and to Conquer heatheni&s;me.</P>
<P><PB N="85" REF="59">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 3. &amp; 4.</NOTE> The &s;econd Seale <HI>and red Hor&s;e</HI> &s;hews the bloody wars that <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> rai&s;eth a|gain&s;t them. <NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 5. &amp; 6.</NOTE></P>
<P>The third Seale <HI>and black Hor&s;e</HI> de|notes &s;carcity of bread, by which Chri&s;t afflicts them.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 7. &amp; 8.</NOTE> The fourth <HI>Seale and pale Hor&s;e</HI> includes warres, famine, plague, and all which <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> brought in upon them.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 9.</NOTE> Upon opening the fifth <HI>Seale</HI> you have the <HI>cry of the Saints</HI> under their per&s;ecu|tions, which Chri&s;t heares attentively.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">V. 12.</NOTE> <HI>The &s;ixth Seale utterly ruines the hea|theni&s;h Empire, the great day of</HI> Chri&s;t his wrath being come upon it; &s;o that it was not able to &s;tand.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rev. 8. 2.</NOTE> The opening of the &s;eventh Seale pre|&s;ents you with a Vi&s;ion of <HI>&s;even Angels</HI> with <HI>&s;even Trumpets,</HI> and they relate <HI>Chri&s;ts his &s;haking</HI> and ruinating the <HI>Empire</HI> while <HI>Chri&s;tian;</HI> and no marvel, &s;eeing it became <HI>Arrian</HI> and per&s;ecuting: <HI>Totus Mundus Arrianus.</HI></P>
<P>The foure fir&s;t Trumpets &s;ound the fa|tal ruine of the We&s;terne Empire, when <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> &s;tirred up the <HI>Goths and Vandals</HI> in four incur&s;ions upon it.</P>
<P>The fifth and &s;ixth Trumpet, which are two of the <HI>Vae Tubae,</HI> the <HI>woe Trumpets,</HI> they &s;ound out Chri&s;t his &s;haking of the Ea&s;t|erne Empire, in that he gives pa&s;&s;age to <HI>Mahomet</HI> and his company in the fifth Trumpet, and in the &s;ixth Trumpet to the <HI>Turkes.</HI></P>
<P><PB N="86" REF="60">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">Rev. 16. 1.</NOTE> We read in <HI>Rev.</HI> 16. 1. of &s;even Vials, which contain <HI>Chri&s;t his &s;haking</HI> the King|dome of <HI>Antichri&s;t;</HI> for they are <HI>the la&s;t plagues on the Bea&s;t.</HI> Thus you &s;ee emi|nent Characters of Chri&s;t his judging all his adver&s;aries, even from <HI>Johns</HI> time to this very day, both his Heatheni&s;h and Antichri&s;tian enemies.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><P>U&s;e 1. of Exhor|tation.</P>
<P>To medi|tate on Chri&s;t and his &s;ha|king.</P></NOTE> To tho&s;e who are in high place of power: I be&s;eech them to &s;uffer a word of exhortation, from one who daily prays for them. Oh! how good is it for men to meditate on <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> and his &s;ha|king, on <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> and his accounting with them! think not, becau&s;e you have Sword and Coun&s;el, Armies and Navies, that now your <HI>mountaine</HI> is &s;o <HI>&s;trong</HI> it &s;hall never <HI>be moved.</HI> They once thought &s;o who are <HI>now</HI> &s;haken out; and the enter|tainment of &s;uch thoughts again, will be the ready way to a repeated &s;haking: Tis true, God hath ble&s;&s;ed you with a &s;eries of good &s;ucce&s;&s;es, and by them turned others out of their &s;eats, and placed you in; I hope and heartily wi&s;h, that their &s;innes, their crying &s;innes, may never be found among you; for if they be, <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> can rai&s;e up others to &s;hake you out, as he rai&s;ed up you to &s;hake others. The good God forbid, that ever that day &s;hould ari&s;e among us: But rather of the riches of his mercy grant your e&s;tabli&s;h|ment, by Judgement and Righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e;
<PB N="87" REF="60">
that &s;o <HI>you may be called repairers of our breaches,</HI> the re&s;torers of paths to dwell in. Much of the impetuous violence of the &s;treames of wickedne&s;&s;e would be dryed up, by the due con&s;ideration of Chri&s;t his coming to <HI>&s;hake.</HI></P>
<P><HI>Princes are great</HI> Ma&s;ters, <HI>and &s;ubjects are their &s;ervants; and</HI> Col. <HI>4. 1.</HI> Ma&s;ters, give unto your &s;ervants that which is ju&s;t and equal, knowing that ye al&s;o have a Ma&s;ter in Heaven.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. Give Chri&s;t the honour due to him.</NOTE> Let all that know and feare God, give unto Chri&s;t the honour due unto his Name; In that he &s;hakes Kings and Prin|ces, he is decked with glory, and &s;ets up his Throne for vengeance: Thus the Church doth, <HI>Rev.</HI> 5. 12. <HI>Worthy is the Lamb to re|ceive power, and riches, and wi&s;dome, and &s;trength, and honour, and glory and ble&s;|&s;ing.</HI></P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="8" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="88" REF="61">
<HEAD>CHAP. VIII.</HEAD>
<ARGUMENT>
<P>Shewes, <HI>1.</HI> That All power is in Chri&s;t. <HI>2.</HI> Its his due upon taking our na|ture. <HI>3.</HI> Though it be his due, yet is it given to him. <HI>4.</HI> Though it be his due and given him, yet he hath little glory of it. <HI>5.</HI> He will exalt him&s;elfe in great Turnes to take up his glory by them. &V;&s;es of In&s;truction and Ex|hortation.</P>
</ARGUMENT>
<P>KIngs and Princes are the greate&s;t per|&s;ons; and the &s;haking of the&s;e tall Cedars is one of the greate&s;t works in the world, &amp; that which notably holds forth <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t.</HI> I &s;hall therefore indeavour to open the &s;haking of the&s;e earthly powers, both from the con&s;ideration, <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 span"> <HI>Je|&s;us Chri&s;t,</HI> and that both 1. <HI>As King of the World.</HI> 2. <HI>As King os Saints.</HI> Secondly of the&s;e great per&s;ons; and that both in re|gard of 1. <HI>Them&s;elves.</HI> 2. <HI>Their Relations;</HI> All which we &s;hall ca&s;t into &s;everal po&s;i|tions to be handled in the chapters fol|lowing.</P>
<P>The con&s;ideration of Chri&s;t as King of the World, gives you a very faire account
<PB N="89" REF="61">
of the turnes in the&s;e latter Ages; which that you may the better under&s;tand, we &s;hall lead you on <HI>by twelve &s;everal Po&s;itions;</HI> all of them contributing &s;ome thing to the right and religious under&s;tanding of the&s;e turnes: Now the fir&s;t Po&s;ition is this.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 1. All power is given to Chri&s;t.</NOTE> All power is given to Chri&s;t in Heaven and Earth, Math. <HI>28. 18.</HI> Dan. <HI>2. 44.</HI> The God of Heaven &s;ets up Chri&s;ts Kingdom, and the Kingdome &s;hall not be left to other people; but it &s;hall break in pieces and con&s;ume all tho&s;e Kingdomes, and it &s;hall &s;tand for ever. <HI>Chri&s;ts power it &s;o re&s;ides in him, that it cannot be tran&s;lated: Its a conquering power, for it breakes in peices and it en|joyes the fruit of &s;uch conque&s;ts; for it</HI> &s;tands for ever.</P>
<P>This we &s;hall open in five pa&s;&s;ages.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">1. All power is in Chri&s;t.</NOTE> 1. <HI>That all power is in Chri&s;t;</HI> it is in him as in the proper &s;eat of it. He is the fir&s;t fountaine of all power, and all the power in all the creatures flowes from him, their power is but a drop of his Ocean; the highe&s;t and be&s;t kinde of power dwells in him: He is the <HI>fir&s;t borne of every creature.</HI> His power is exten&s;ive to all creatures, and times; all creatures are either <HI>in heaven or in earth;</HI> and his power reacheth both. <HI>Col.</HI> 1. 16. <HI>By him were all things created that were in Heaven and Earth, vi&s;ible and invi&s;ible, whether they be Thrones or Dominions or Principalities or</HI>
<PB N="90" REF="62">
<HI>Powers. And Jer.</HI> 10. 7. <HI>Who would not feare thee Oh King of Nations? P&s;al.</HI> 22. 28. <HI>The kingdome is the Lords, and he is Governour among the Nations.</HI> All earthly powers have their periods, their ri&s;e and fall, their beginning and ending: but its not &s;o with <HI>Chri&s;ts</HI> power; for <HI>Heb.</HI> 1. 8. Its &s;poken to him, <HI>Thy throne oh God is for ever and ever.</HI></P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. His due upon the taking of our na|ture.</NOTE> 2. <HI>All power was Chri&s;t his due upon the taking of our nature:</HI> So much is wrapped up upon the a&s;&s;umption of our fle&s;h, that thereupon all created power was to be under him. Suppo&s;e man had not fallen, nor Chri&s;t &s;uffered; yet if he take our nature to him&s;elfe, upon this, all power in all creatures mu&s;t be under him: <HI>Heb.</HI> 2. 6. When <HI>he bringeth in the Fir&s;t begotten into the world,</HI> he &s;aith, <HI>and let all the An|gels of God wor&s;hip him:</HI> Ob&s;erve, he is called <GAP DESC="foreign"> <HI>the Fir&s;t borne.</HI> Chri&s;t as taking our nature had a being in the <HI>coun&s;el of God,</HI> and was before any <HI>creature was:</HI> and by that priority and fir&s;tne&s;&s;e of being, he hath a preeminence above all creatures what&s;oever, <HI>Col.</HI> 1. 18. <HI>In all things he mu&s;t have the pereeminence.</HI> The fir&s;t begotten under the Law had a privi|ledge above all his brethren; he had the rule and the double portion. So hath <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> he hath the rule of all creatures, he guides them to their end; and indeed, they are all his portion, given unto him
<PB N="91" REF="62">
as the Fir&s;t begotten. Againe ob&s;erve, the text mentions God the Fathers <HI>bring|ing Chri&s;t into the world:</HI> which was, when at his exhibition in the fle&s;h he manife&s;ted it to the world, that he was his onely be|gotten Son. And ob&s;erve la&s;tly, that up|on this taking of our fle&s;h, the Angels which are the highe&s;t ranke of creatures are &s;ubject to him; nay with the highe&s;t &s;ubjection, namely that of adoration: now if Angels the highe&s;t of creatures, &s;urely all other creatures much more.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">3. All power is rightly &s;aid to be given Chri&s;t.</NOTE> 3. That though this power were his due; yet it is rightly &s;aid to be <HI>given to him,</HI> in that its a power falls on him as in our nature, not con&s;idered onely as &s;econd per&s;on: Now being thus in our nature, the <HI>Father is greater then he, Joh.</HI> 14. 28. <HI>I goe unto my Father, for my Father is greater then I:</HI> and he is in that regard, le&s;&s;e then the Father: The Father gives all to Chri&s;t, and Chri&s;t returnes all to the Father: <HI>Dare e&s;t dominium transferre. John</HI> 3. 35. <HI>The Father loveth the Sonne, and hath given all things into his hand;</HI> gi|ving is a transferring out of love; and the Fathers love is &s;o great, he cannot give him le&s;&s;e then <HI>all. v.</HI> 34. <HI>He give the &s;pi|rit to him, but not by mea&s;ure. Joh.</HI> 10. 39. God the Father <HI>gives all his elect cho&s;en ones to Chri&s;t,</HI> and he gives him worke to do for them, <HI>Joh.</HI> 17. 4. <HI>I have fini&s;hed the worke which thou gave&s;t me to doe, Joh.</HI>
<PB N="92" REF="63">
5. 26, 27. <HI>He hath given to the Sonne to have life in him&s;elfe, v.</HI> 27. <HI>and he hath given him authority to execute judgement al&s;o, be|cau&s;e he is the Son of Man.</HI> In regard of all creatures, He hath power given him over all fle&s;h, <HI>Joh.</HI> 17. 2. <HI>The Government is laid upon his &s;houlders, and he rules among the Na|tions, Dan.</HI> 4. 21.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">4. Chri&s;t hath had little glo|ry of all his power.</NOTE> 4. <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t hath had but little glory of all his power, Joh.</HI> 1. 11. <HI>He came to his own, and his own received him not.</HI> How many are there in the world that never heard of <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t?</HI> how many that are profe&s;&s;ed enemies again&s;t him? and among all that beare his Name, how few live indeed by him? How many thou|&s;ands are there in the Synagogue of An|tichri&s;t, that although they beare his Name, being called Chri&s;tians, and make profe&s;&s;ion of him, yet in workes deny him? Look upon the great ones of the Earth, who have that power of his de|rived unto them, that others have not; yet how great &s;trangers are they unto him? Nay looke among tho&s;e who pre|tend to Reformation, and to be adver&s;a|ries to all &s;uper&s;titions; yet how little do <NOTE PLACE="marg">5. Chri&s;t will exalt him&s;elfe, &s;o as Kings &s;hal confe&s;&s;e his power.</NOTE>they take notice of his power put forth in the World, or give him the prai&s;e of it?</P>
<P N="5">5. Chri&s;t will exalt him&s;elf in &s;uch great &amp; various turnes on Kings, as &s;hall extort acknowledgement from their con&s;ciences
<PB N="93" REF="63">
that he is above them, and make them confe&s;&s;e, This <HI>is the hand of Chri&s;t upon us,</HI> who&s;e Va&s;&s;als we are; Our Crownes and Scepters are more his then ours; He, He, is the Lords Annointed; All powers of earth are immediately and fully given to him, and not to us. We poor worms &s;truggle for this earth; but heaven and earth, and all power are his, and we are but his underlings. <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 10. 12. <HI>I will pun|i&s;h the fruit of the &s;tout heart of the King of A&s;&s;yria, and the glory of his high looks.</HI> Let us conclude this with the confe&s;&s;ion of <HI>Nebuchadnezzer, Dan.</HI> 4. <HI>I Nebuchadnez|zar</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">Dan. 4. 37.</NOTE><HI>extol the King of heaven, all who&s;e words are truth, and his wayes judgement, and tho&s;e that walke in pride he is able to aba&s;e.</HI></P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e of In|&s;truction. See Gods love to Chri&s;t.</NOTE> 1. Take notice of the exceeding riches of Gods love to Chri&s;t, and in him to us; He loves and gives, and gives no le&s;&s;e then <HI>all;</HI> not &s;ome, but <HI>all</HI> power. <HI>Power</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign"> rightful power, priviledged power. Chri&s;t hath the highe&s;t and the &s;weete&s;t Title, He hath all by <HI>gift.</HI> The Father gives, and gives to him immediately; nothing intervenes between the Father and <HI>Chri&s;t;</HI> In all his giving <HI>to us, Chri&s;t</HI> comes between, he is the <HI>Mediatour,</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, the middle per&s;on: but in this gift to <NOTE PLACE="marg">2. The Father is fully &s;atis|fied that all is in him.</NOTE><HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> none comes between him and the Father.</P>
<P N="2">2. Learne hence, the Father is fully &s;atisfied in that he hath laid all power on
<PB N="94" REF="64">
<HI>Chri&s;t;</HI> he will never que&s;tion <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> his Title, he is as he would have him to be. <HI>All</HI> power would cracke the creatures &s;houlders; <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> alone is able to beare it: Men under a little power, how do they pride &amp; pranke and wanton it! But behold <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t</HI> altogether lovely, and lovely in his power. The power is given him not onely of heaven, or over the things in heaven: but <HI>its given him in heaven:</HI> The power is the mo&s;t glorious power, and its given him in the mo&s;t glorious place; for &s;o the words may be read; not onely all power in heaven is given me; but all power is given me <HI>in heaven.</HI> Men receive their Commi&s;&s;ions here on the earth: Chri&s;t takes it <HI>in Heaven.</HI></P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">3. The plea&s;ure of the Lord &s;hall pro&s;per.</NOTE> 3. Doubtle&s;&s;e as it is <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 53. 10. The plea&s;ure of the Lord <HI>&s;hall pro&s;per in his hand,</HI> he wants nothing to effect it. He hookes the unruly <HI>Leviathans,</HI> re&s;trains the cruelty and oppre&s;&s;ion of their power, and turnes their vanity to his Fathers glory: power &s;hall not alwayes be in the hands of the wicked, the Saints &s;hall rule; for Chri&s;t is the greate&s;t Saint.</P>
<P N="4">4. Chri&s;t returnes alI to the Father: He receives all power from him, and &s;hall returne it all to him. 1 <HI>Cor.</HI> 15. 24. <HI>He de|livers up the Kingdome to God, even the Fa|ther.</HI> The Kingdome is <HI>Chri&s;ts</HI> power in the whole frame and body of it; but that he delivers up to his Father: and for the
<PB N="95" REF="64">
pre&s;ent he will &s;acrifice all the unju&s;t powers of the earth to his Fathers ju&s;tice, and cau&s;e goodne&s;&s;e to ari&s;e with great|ne&s;&s;e, and peace with power. Let me adde one word to exhort you.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e 2. Exhort. 1. To in|vite to love Chri&s;t.</NOTE> 1. To flocke about Chri&s;t in love, to come where the power is: and Loe here is all power; were Chri&s;t powerle&s;&s;e or weak, I would never invite you to him, <HI>Heb.</HI> 7. 25. <HI>He is able, and able to &s;ave, and to &s;ave to the utmo&s;t:</HI> Oh why hang you backe, why linger &s;o long? are you unwilling to be happy? doe you love your weakne&s;&s;e, that you run not to his power? What is &s;cattered el&s;ewhere, is centered here. Its a Chri&s;tian art, right|ly to ab&s;tract all earthly powers; all are but ciphers till Chri&s;t put a figure to them: Every man <HI>is a friend to him that giveth gifts:</HI> Now who can give &s;o much as he that hath <HI>All?</HI> and is it not our wi&s;dome to have him to friend? Let me be&s;peake you, as <HI>Balak</HI> &s;aid to <HI>Balaam, Num.</HI> 22. 37. <HI>Am not I able indeed to pro|mote thee to honour?</HI> So is not <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> able indeed to pay all thy debts, to heale all thy di&s;ea&s;es, to protect thee from dan|gers, and to inrich thee with fulle&s;t en|joyments? Oh! come, come, &s;tay no longer, let that which can command, in|vite you: namely <HI>his power.</HI></P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. To be at his di&s;|po&s;al.</NOTE> 2. <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="2 letters">me and wellcome; but come with re&s;olvedne&s;&s;e to be wholly at his
<PB N="96" REF="65">
di&s;po&s;al: Ordinary and common ob&s;er|vance will not &s;uffice: <HI>All power</HI> doth challenge <HI>all love,</HI> and <HI>all &s;ubjection,</HI> from <HI>all hearts.</HI> Oh! let Chri&s;t have <HI>all;</HI> bring your Lamb to him, <HI>for he is worthy:</HI> How little is your <HI>all</HI> to his? your large&s;t compa&s;&s;e is in your thoughts and de&s;ires: Oh bring them to him, let him be <HI>in all your thoughts,</HI> and the onely de&s;ireable one to you. He demands your <HI>hearts:</HI> you have <HI>his</HI> already; your <HI>hearts</HI> and there|in your <HI>all:</HI> what is heartle&s;&s;e is nothing. Let your hearts then, and with your hearts your feare, and hope, and faith and joy attend him.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">3. Let wicked ones tremble.</NOTE> 3. Tremble you wicked ones, though the mighty of the earth. Again&s;t whom have you exalted your &s;elves? how will you deale with him that hath all power? all power to puni&s;h, as well as reward: your power is his, and he mu&s;t not &s;uffer his power in your hands to be abu&s;ed. Your mountains and your hills cannot cover you from the power of his wrath; who makes <HI>Rivers of brim&s;tone,</HI> and <HI>ever|la&s;ting burnings</HI> for you, and prepares <HI>Tophet</HI> of old.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><P>4. Let the Earth be glad.</P>
<P>P&s;al. 97. 1.</P></NOTE> 4. <HI>The Lord Reigneth, let the earth be glad:</HI> Feare not your Summer, and Winter, your Seed-time and Harve&s;t, your Sun to &s;hine, and raine and dews to fall; your dayes and nights provi&s;ions, and
<PB N="97" REF="65">
protections; for all power is his; and honour him to whom all power is given.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="9" TYPE="chapter">
<HEAD>CHAP. IX.</HEAD>
<ARGUMENT>
<P>Shews, Po&s;. <HI>2.</HI> That Kings reigne by Chri&s;t. <HI>1.</HI> They are or are not by him. <HI>2.</HI> He ble&s;&s;eth or bla&s;teth them in Government. <HI>3.</HI> What wi&s;|dome or power they have, they can|not put forth without him. <HI>4.</HI> Conti|nuation and &s;ucce&s;&s;ion is from him. <HI>5.</HI> Bad Kings as well as good, are from him. &V;&s;es for In&s;truction and Exhortation.</P>
</ARGUMENT>
<P>CHri&s;t hath all power, as we &s;hewed in the former Chapter; and as he hath all, &s;o he <HI>gives all:</HI> Its his glory to com|municate; he hath of the be&s;t, and he giveth of the be&s;t. All Kingly power is given to him, and he gives all power to men: whence followes this &s;econd Po&s;i|tion.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 2. Kings reigne by Chri&s;t.</NOTE> <HI>The Kings of the Earth, they reigne by Chri&s;t;</HI> this is &s;et down in &s;o many words. <HI>Pro.</HI> 8. 15. <HI>By me Kings reigne, and Princes decree ju&s;tice. v.</HI> 16. <HI>By me Princes rule and</HI>
<PB N="98" REF="66">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">Prov. 8: 16.</NOTE> <HI>Nobles, even all the Judges of the earth.</HI> I ob&s;erve three things from tho&s;e words. 1. That the &s;everal ranks of Governours are from him, both the &s;upreame and the &s;ub|ordinate Magi&s;trates; not onely <HI>Kings,</HI> but <HI>Princes</HI> al&s;o rule by him; not onely <HI>Kings</HI> and <HI>Princes,</HI> but <HI>Nobles</HI> and <HI>Judges.</HI> 2. I ob&s;erve in the highe&s;t act of power that Kings and Princes put forth, that therein they are but <HI>Chri&s;ts</HI> Sub&s;titutes; To make Lawes and Decrees, to decree that which is right and for publicke good, is one of their highe&s;t and mo&s;t noble acts of power; but that they can|not doe without him. I ob&s;erve thirdly, That the particular execution, as well as the decree, is from <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> to bring down this or that Decree, or Law, to this or that per&s;on or ca&s;e; the application of the Law to tho&s;e whom it doth concerne, even this is from <HI>Chri&s;t;</HI> for all the <HI>Judges of the earth are by him: Judices &s;unt qui inter litigantes jus dicunt:</HI> Judges are they that declare what is Law among tho&s;e that are at variance; and the&s;e Judges and their &s;entences are here referred to <HI>Chri&s;t:</HI> you will more fully apprehend this Po&s;ition by the five pa&s;&s;ages follow|ing.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">For 1. They are, or are not, by him.</NOTE> 1. <HI>That Kings are, or are not by him:</HI> They have not onely their being from him as they are men, but as they are <HI>Kings,</HI> as they are <HI>Kingly men:</HI> he &s;ets them up,
<PB N="99" REF="66">
and then they are Kings; and pulls them down, and then they are as other <HI>common men.</HI> 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 15. 1. <HI>The Lord &s;ent Samuel to annoint Saul to be King of his people;</HI> there he is &s;et up, there he is a King; but <HI>v.</HI> 23. <HI>becau&s;e thou ha&s;t rejected the word of the Lord, He hath al&s;o rejected thee from being King;</HI> there he is pulled down. <HI>He gave the Kingdome, power, and &s;trength and glory to Nebuchadnezzar, made him King of Kings, Dan.</HI> 2. 3. But he un-kings him, yea un-mans him too. <HI>Dan.</HI> 4. 25, 31, 32. <HI>Oh King Nebuchadnezzar, to thee it is &s;poken, The Kingdome is departed from thee:</HI> there he is un-kinged, and <HI>v.</HI> 32. <HI>They &s;hall drive thee from men, and thy dwelling &s;hall be with the bea&s;ts of the feild:</HI> there he is un-manned. He annointed <HI>Hazael</HI> King over Syria, and <HI>Jehu</HI> over I&s;rael, 1 <HI>King.</HI> 19. 15, 16. Yea all the Kingdomes of men are &s;olely at his di&s;po&s;al, <HI>and he giveth them to whom&s;oever he will, Dan.</HI> 4. 32.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. Chri&s;t ble&s;&s;eth or bla&s;t|eth in go|verment.</NOTE> 2. <HI>He either ble&s;&s;eth or bla&s;teth men in the worke of Government.</HI> Upon Him is fir&s;t, and <HI>re&s;teth</HI> the <HI>&s;pirit of wi&s;dome and under&s;tanding, of coun&s;el and might, to judge and reprove with all. I&s;a.</HI> 11. 2, 3. and <HI>Dan.</HI> 2. 21. <HI>He giveth wi&s;dome to the wi&s;e, and knowledge to them that know under&s;tan|ding:</HI> and again, <HI>Dan.</HI> 4. 16. <HI>Let his heart be changed from mans, and let a bea&s;ts heart be given to him:</HI> When <HI>Saul</HI> was annointed King over I&s;rael, 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 10. <HI>v.</HI> 16. Its &s;aid
<PB N="100" REF="67">
of him, <HI>Thou &s;halt be turned into another man,</HI> and <HI>v.</HI> 9. <HI>God gave him another heart.</HI> He doth not &s;ay a new heart, a holy heart, but <HI>another heart;</HI> a heart differing from the heart he had while he was a private per&s;on: then he minded his fathers A&s;&s;es, and family-occa&s;ions; but now he had another heart, a heart for government, a heart for publicke affaires and their management. <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t</HI> divides wi&s;|dome and folly among the Grandees of the world. <HI>Solomon</HI> was the wi&s;e&s;t Prince that ever was: But his &s;onne <HI>Rehoboam</HI> was not &s;o, he was but a little removed from a foole, <HI>Eccle&s;.</HI> 10. 16. They are men, or children, according as he makes them.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">3. Kings cannot put forth their power without him.</NOTE> 3. <HI>What wi&s;dome and power they have, they cannot put forth without him.</HI> Some|time they appeare &s;tronger then men; an|other time weaker then children: Now none &s;o wi&s;e as they, and by and by none &s;o fooli&s;h; and all according as <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> enlargeth or contracteth them: They a&s;&s;ume power to make, or unmake, to e&s;tabli&s;h, or null Lawes; but &s;ure they are wofuly out, if they leave him out. Grant they are the <HI>high</HI> ones, yet &s;ure <HI>he is higher then they:</HI> we deny not but they have an Image on them, that makes them better then other men; but &s;till they are <HI>but men,</HI> and he is better then they: Its his prerogative to be <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>The Law-giver,</HI>
<PB N="101" REF="67">
<HI>Jam.</HI> 4. 12. and he gives law to them, and they cannot without him, lay law on their people. He is <HI>one,</HI> there is <HI>one Law-giver,</HI> and the onely one, there is no more; They cannot make Laws without him, but he doth without them: Let their hearts meditate high and great things, yet their <HI>hearts are in his hand, Prov.</HI> 21. 1. <HI>and he turns them as &s;eemeth him good.</HI></P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">4. Conti|nuation and &s;uc|ce&s;&s;ion is from him.</NOTE> 4. <HI>Their Continuation and &s;ucce&s;&s;ion is from him.</HI> 1. <HI>Sam.</HI> 15. 28. <HI>The Lord hath rent the Kingdome of I&s;rael from thee this day, and hath given it to a neighbour of thine that is better then thou.</HI> This <HI>Solomon</HI> ac|knowledgeth, 1 <HI>King.</HI> 3. 7. <HI>Oh Lord my God, thou ha&s;t made thy &s;ervant King in|&s;tead of David my father.</HI> How much of King&punc;craft is laid out to &s;ettle and per|petuate governments on heires and &s;uc|ce&s;&s;ors? but how little can this pretend to, without <HI>Chri&s;t? Dan.</HI> 5. 26, 27. He is the great <HI>Numberer,</HI> and <HI>Ponderer; Bel&s;hazzars</HI> Kingdome was <HI>number|ed</HI> and <HI>fini&s;hed, he was weighed in the ballance and found wanting.</HI> This King <HI>David</HI> knew well, 2 <HI>Sam.</HI> 5. 12. He per|ceived (not that men &s;o much, nor that <HI>Joab</HI> or <HI>Abner)</HI> but <HI>that the Lord had e&s;tabli&s;hed him King over I&s;rael.</HI> Hence is that conclu&s;ion from wi&s;e <HI>Daniel, Chap.</HI> 2. 21. <HI>He changeth times and &s;ea&s;ons, he removeth Kings, and &s;etteth up Kings.</HI></P>
<P N="5"><PB N="102" REF="68">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">Bad Kings as well as good, reigne by Chri&s;t.</NOTE> 5. <HI>Bad Kings as well as good reigne by Chri&s;t:</HI> Chri&s;t had in e&s;pecial manner the vi&s;ible admini&s;tration of the Kingdomes of <HI>I&s;rael</HI> and <HI>Judah,</HI> and their Kings were anointed by him; but how few good a|mong them all? Now becau&s;e this may &s;eeme a hard &s;aying, give me leave to open it in the&s;e &s;ixe pa&s;&s;ages.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Good men may be bad Kings.</NOTE> 1. Good men may be bad Kings; their grace makes them good; but its their gifts&punc; and the acting of them fits them for their King&s;hip. <HI>David</HI> was a good man, <HI>a man after Gods one heart;</HI> but when out of pride <HI>he numbered the people,</HI> in that he was no good King; for it brought a plague upon them, 2 <HI>Sam.</HI> 24. <HI>Hezekiah</HI> was a good man; but in vaine o&s;tenta|tion, &s;hewing the Amba&s;&s;adors of the King of <HI>Babylon his Trea&s;ure,</HI> in that he was no good King, 2 <HI>King.</HI> 20. <HI>A&s;a</HI> was a good man; but when he <HI>impri&s;oned the Seer, and oppre&s;&s;ed &s;ome of the people,</HI> in that he was no good King, 2 <HI>Chron.</HI> 16. 10.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. The badne&s;&s;e of Kings is not from Chri&s;t.</NOTE> 2. The badne&s;&s;e of men, or of Kings, is not from <HI>Chri&s;t;</HI> though we &s;ay bad Kings reigne by him, yet we do not &s;ay, their badne&s;&s;e is by him; we abhor the thoughts of making him the author of &s;in, who is the holy One of God. 1. All his <HI>Comman|dements are right, his Statutes pure, his Law perfect:</HI> there is not the lea&s;t hint there to warrant any wickedne&s;&s;e: but &s;till that which is contrary is comman|ded:
<PB N="103" REF="68">
He commands no wickedne&s;&s;e. 2. Its far from the heart of Chri&s;t <HI>to worke any</HI> wickedne&s;&s;e in their hearts; you mu&s;t father your &s;in &s;omewhere el&s;e; <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> will never own it; accu&s;e, accu&s;e, (as you have ju&s;t cau&s;e) your &s;elves, your wicked corrupt natures, but you mu&s;t acquit him. 3. Neither doth <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> &s;tirre up un|to any wickedne&s;&s;e; his &s;pirit is a holy &s;pirit, and no inviting or encouraging men to &s;in comes from that &s;pirit.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">3. Yet he &s;uffers them to be.</NOTE> 3. Though he is no cau&s;e of their badne&s;&s;e, yet they could not <HI>be,</HI> and &s;o not be <HI>bad,</HI> but that he &s;uffers it: If it were the ab&s;olute Decree of God that there &s;hould be no bad men, nor Kings, &s;ure there &s;hould be none&punc; Its impo&s;&s;ible any thing &s;hould be <HI>&s;o</HI> again&s;t his will; for then he were not happy in him&s;elfe, and &s;o not God; But &s;urely all grant its his will to &s;uffer it, to permit it to be; and is there not &s;omething more? though &s;in be evil; yet is it not good that &s;in have a being? God would not &s;o much as &s;uffer &s;in in the World, but that he knows how to produce good out of it; and may not he will the pro|duction of good? and is it not to worke like him&s;elfe to bring good out of evil? <HI>Gen.</HI> 50. 20. <HI>Ye thought evil again&s;t me</HI> (&s;aith <HI>Jo&s;eph</HI> to his Brethren that &s;old him) <HI>but God meant it unto good, to &s;ave much people alive:</HI> and when <HI>Jo&s;eph</HI> made
<PB N="104" REF="69">
known him&s;elfe to his Brethren, <HI>Gen.</HI> 45. 5. he &s;aith, <HI>Be not greived nor angry with your &s;elves, that ye &s;old me hither; for God did &s;end me before you to pre&s;erve life.</HI></P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">4. Chri&s;t is righte|ous in thus &s;uf|fering them.</NOTE> 4. That <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> &s;hewes him&s;elfe to be righteous when Kings and Princes are wicked; He doth righteou&s;ly puni&s;h &s;in with &s;in; <HI>Ephraim is given to Idols, let him alone; and I will not puni&s;h your daughters when they commit whoredome, nor your &s;pou&s;es when they commit Adultery.</HI> God may give places and power to wicked men, and not grace; and then they will become more wicked, and fill up their mea&s;ure &s;uddainly. God may be angry with a people for their &s;in, and &s;o give them a <NOTE PLACE="marg">Ho&s;. 13. 11.</NOTE>King in his wrath, <HI>Ho&s;.</HI> 13. 11. <HI>I gave them a King in mine anger.</HI> Gods anger is his ju&s;tice, whereby he burnes again&s;t &s;in; and what he gives in ju&s;tice, is with re&s;pect to their &s;in: Now he gave them <HI>a King in his wrath;</HI> let that King be never &s;o vile, yet God that gave him is righteous, I and righteous in that giving of him.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg">5. Chri&s;t <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">s graci|ous, as well as righteous.</NOTE> <HI>5. That Je&s;us Chri&s;t is gracious, as well as rightcous, and orders all the bad|ne&s;&s;e of Kings for good,</HI> Acts <HI>4. 27, 28.</HI> Herod and Pont&iuml;us Pilate with the Gentiles and people of I&s;rael are gathered together again&s;t Chri&s;t, but its to doe what Gods hand and c<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">un&s;el had determined before to be done. Cyrus <HI>is a Heathen King and knows not G<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">d,</HI> I&s;a. <HI>45. 4.</HI> Yet for Jacob my &s;er|vants
<PB N="105" REF="69">
&s;ake, and I&s;rael mine elect, I have even called thee by thy name; and I&s;a. <HI>44.</HI> ult. Cyrus he is my &s;hepherd and &s;hall per|forme all my plea&s;ure; &s;aying to Jeru&s;alem, thou &s;halt be built, and to the Temple, thy foundation &s;hall be laid.</P>
<P N="6"><NOTE PLACE="marg">6. Chri&s;t reigns more in tho&s;e who are good, then in tho&s;e who are bad.</NOTE> 6. Though all Kings reigne by Chri&s;t, yet Chri&s;t reignes much more in tho&s;e who are good, then in tho&s;e who are bad: He puts his &s;pirit into <HI>them</HI> that are good, to make them good; he gives them the <HI>&s;pirit</HI> of wi&s;dome, <HI>coun&s;el,</HI> and the <HI>feare of the Lord.</HI> He layes his Law upon them, and draws them forth in obedience to it. He &s;tirres them up to what is good, and holds them on in that goodne&s;&s;e. He gave <HI>Solomon</HI> wi&s;dome to goe in and out before that great people; and he wi&s;eth Princes for their places, and makes their actings acceptable both to God and men.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e 1. For In|&s;truction. Chri&s;t &s;tamps a maje&s;ty on them.</NOTE> 1. Kings reigne by <HI>Chri&s;t;</HI> It is not then &s;o much their rich apparrel, their &s;umptuous Pallaces, their Royal atten|dance, that in&s;tamps their <HI>Maje&s;ty</HI> on them, as this, that they are <HI>Chri&s;ts crea|tures</HI> for this World; they beare his Image of power and government on them, and that is their great Maje&s;ty: They are his ordinance, <HI>Rom.</HI> 13. reigne by him; and this &s;ubjects and keeps mens &s;pirits under. Oh! thanke Je&s;us Chri&s;t that you have no more in&s;urrections, a|gain&s;t
<PB N="106" REF="70">
tho&s;e in place and power; mens minds are it may be ready enough to breake out, but there is &s;omething of <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> &s;tops them.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. To ri&s;e again&s;t them, is to ri&s;e again&s;t Chri&s;t.</NOTE> 2. We cannot ri&s;e again&s;t government, but we ri&s;e again&s;t <HI>Chri&s;t:</HI> Alas! who are they that be in power, but <HI>men</HI> like our &s;elves, that we ri&s;e again&s;t them? Nay but they have a Commi&s;&s;ion, which we have not; a re&s;i&s;tance is not &s;o much to <NOTE PLACE="marg">Rom. 13. 2.</NOTE>them, as God. <HI>Rom.</HI> 13. 2. <HI>is and alwayes was good Scripture; Who&s;oever re&s;i&s;teth the power, re&s;i&s;teth the Ordinance of God; and they that re&s;i&s;t &s;hall receive to them&s;elves damnation or judgement; wherefore you mu&s;t be &s;ubject, not onely for wrath, but al&s;o for con&s;cience &s;ake, v.</HI> 5.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">3. A&s;cribe the good of govern|ment. to Chri&s;t.</NOTE> 3. A&s;cribe the good of government to <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t;</HI> All their wi&s;dome, ju&s;tice, mercy and goodne&s;&s;e, is extracted from him; when you eat of the fat, and drink of the &s;weet, when you enjoy your hou&s;es and lands, your &s;hops and &s;hips, your p<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ace and plenty, exalt him for it. That you can lie down and ri&s;e up, and walke abroad, its of his goodne&s;&s;e and ingrave his Name on it, and returne his prai&s;e to him.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">4 A ground of patience under bad Rulers.</NOTE> 4. Do bad as well as good reigne by him? learne hence a ground of patience, and contentation: Nothing calmes the heart &s;o much as to revolve things on God regularly. <HI>David &s;ays P&s;al.</HI> 39. 9.
<PB N="107" REF="70">
<HI>I was dumb, and opened not my mouth, be|cau&s;e thou did&s;t it.</HI> When <HI>Aaron</HI> lo&s;t both his &s;onnes, that which made him hold his peace, was, that God would <HI>be &s;anctified</HI> and <HI>glorified;</HI> God had done it, <HI>Lev.</HI> 10. 3. That which made <HI>Job</HI> not to <HI>charge God fooli&s;hly,</HI> and kept him from the &s;in of impatience, it was, <HI>that the Lord had given and taken away;</HI> and the like was that in old <HI>Eli,</HI> 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 3. 18. when heavy things were denounced again&s;t him, and his hou&s;e, he &s;aid, <HI>It is the Lord, let him do whatever he plea&s;e.</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">5. Chri&s;t is more glorious then all Kings.</NOTE></P>
<P N="5">5. How glorious is that <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> by whom Kings reigne? how poorely doth all their &s;plendor re&s;emble his glory? while they rule others, he rules them: Oh! that we could &s;ee him; he is not onely their governour, but their Maker; fall down and adore before him. They mu&s;t bring in an account of their government, and you may appeale from them to him, as you heard before. He is mo&s;t ab&s;olute, and by his Decree things are and &s;hall be to eternity. How doth it greive Princes to feele old age come upon them? to be &s;ubjected to aches, paines and di&s;|ea&s;es, and that they and their honour mu&s;t part, and lie in the du&s;t? Oh! then admire, and for ever prai&s;e him who&s;e <HI>Kingdome is an everla&s;ting Kingdome, and of who&s;e government there is no end.</HI></P>
<P>I &s;hall conclude this Po&s;ition with a
<PB N="108" REF="71">
word of exhortation to Princes, taken out <NOTE PLACE="marg"><P>U&s;e 1. of Exhorta|tion.</P>
<P>P&s;al. 2. 10. 1. To be wi&s;e.</P></NOTE>of <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 2. 10.</P>
<P N="1">1. <HI>To be wi&s;e</HI> and under&s;tand by whom you reigne: away with your conte&s;ting again&s;t <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> and fall in with his ends and intere&s;ts; that will be your wi&s;dome indeed; a &s;ingle portion of wi&s;dome &s;hould not content you; you are to &s;tudy, and <HI>to rule;</HI> and a great deale of wi&s;dome is required to a <HI>little rule:</HI> you have many &s;nares and temptations in your places, and you need abundance of wi&s;dome to guard you from tho&s;e &s;nares; you are to govern others, yea many o|thers, as well as your &s;elves: <HI>Be wi&s;e now therefore O ye Kings.</HI></P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. To be in&s;tructed.</NOTE> 2. <HI>Be in&s;tructed ye Judges of the Earth:</HI> God hath his word and his rod for <HI>you,</HI> as well as others; and its wi&s;dome to learn by both; <HI>Deut.</HI> 17. 19. you mu&s;t <HI>read to keep you humble, that your hearts be not lifted up above your brethren;</HI> and if you heare not that voyce of the word, behold a &s;peaking rod, and him that appointed it; Heare, <HI>heare,</HI> and <HI>learn,</HI> yea learn <HI>righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e.</HI></P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">3. To feare.</NOTE> 3. <HI>Feare,</HI> feare before him: Its not below you O Kings; it will not argue a pu&s;illanimous &s;pirit to feare God. <HI>Exod.</HI> 18. 21. <HI>Jethro</HI>'s Ju&s;tices were <HI>able men, men</HI> able for government, <HI>yet fearing God.</HI> The le&s;&s;e you are under the feare of men, the more &s;hould you <HI>walke in the feare of</HI>
<PB N="109" REF="71">
<HI>God:</HI> This feare would be a &s;weet bound to your power and will: and tru&s;t God to make others feare you, while you re|verence him.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">4. To &s;erve.</NOTE> 4. <HI>Serve with feare:</HI> Oh &s;trange! mu&s;t Kings <HI>&s;erve?</HI> yea &s;ure, its not &s;o &s;trange as true: you are the <HI>Judges of the Earth,</HI> and therein his &s;ervants. Many contro|ver&s;ies will come before you, and you are to decide them according to Law: encourage your &s;elves in that thankle&s;&s;e worke of judging, that its part of your &s;ervice to Godward.</P>
<P>Prov. <HI>29. 4.</HI> The King by judgement e&s;ta|bli&s;heth the Land; but he that receiveth gifts overthroweth it. <HI>Let</HI> Jeho&s;aphats <HI>coun&s;el be acceptable to you, 2</HI> Chron. <HI>19. 6.</HI> Take heed what you doe; for ye judge not for man, but for the Lord, who is with you in the judgement.</P>
<P><HI>You had need of good men about you, both in Court and Council: This was</HI> Davids <HI>re&s;olution,</HI> P&s;al. <HI>101. 6, 7.</HI> My eyes &s;hall be upon the faithful in the Land to dwell with mee; and he that walketh in a per|fect way &s;hall &s;erve me. <HI>It is recorded of</HI> Ahaziah, <HI>2</HI> Chron. <HI>22. 3. that</HI> he walked in the wayes of the hou&s;e of Ahab; for his Mo|ther a Daughter of Omri was his Coun&s;ellor to do wickedly.</P>
<P>Kings mu&s;t do right to others, they mu&s;t releive the oppre&s;&s;ed; then &s;urely they them&s;elves mu&s;t be far from oppre&s;&s;ion.
<PB N="110" REF="72">
<HI>Ezek.</HI> 46. 18. <HI>The Prince &s;hall not take of the peoples inheritance by oppre&s;&s;ion, to thru&s;t them out of their po&s;&s;e&s;&s;ion.</HI> Your great &s;ervice lies in this, to be a terrour to evil works, <NOTE PLACE="marg">1 Pet. 2. 14. Prov. 20. 26.</NOTE>an avenger to execute wrath on the wicked, to &s;catter them, and bring the wheele upon them: but to encourage them that do well, that they may live a peaceable and quiet life, in all godline&s;&s;e and hone&s;ty.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg">5. To re|joyce with trembling.</NOTE> 5. <HI>Rejoyce with trembling:</HI> You have your burdens, and &s;o your joyes, more then others: You have your Gardens and Orchards, your Parkes and Plea&s;ures, your Mu&s;icks and Recreations; we envy you not in the&s;e; much comfort may you have in them all; onely take in this Caution, <HI>rejoyce with trembling;</HI> you ar<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> never &s;o apt to mi&s;carry as in the highth of your joyes. <HI>Job</HI> feared his &s;ons when <HI>Fea&s;ting,</HI> and you know who&s;e brand it is to Fea&s;t <HI>without feare, Jude, v.</HI> 12.</P>
<P N="6"><NOTE PLACE="marg">6. To ki&s;&s;e the Son.</NOTE> 6. La&s;tly, <HI>Ki&s;&s;e the Son;</HI> ki&s;&s;e him with a ki&s;&s;e of love, <HI>O&s;culo dilectionis,</HI> and that with all &s;incerity: ki&s;&s;e him with a ki&s;&s;e of honour and obedience, <HI>O&s;culo &s;ubjecti|onis,</HI> as <HI>Samuel</HI> ki&s;&s;ed <HI>Saul,</HI> 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 10. 1. ki&s;&s;e him with a ki&s;&s;e of confidence, as here in the Text, <HI>Ble&s;&s;ed are all they that put their tru&s;t in him.</HI> Ki&s;&s;e him with a ki&s;&s;e of Devotion, <HI>O&s;culo Devotionis;</HI> for he alone is worthy of all love, &s;ubjection, faith, and wor&s;hip.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="10" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="111" REF="72">
<HEAD>CHAP. X.</HEAD>
<ARGUMENT>
<P>Opens the <HI>3.</HI> Po&s;. That &s;etting up of Government and Governours is for the good of the World. <HI>1.</HI> In that it keeps men in Order. <HI>2.</HI> In that it gives propriety. <HI>3.</HI> It promotes in|crea&s;e of what we po&s;&s;e&s;&s;e. <HI>4.</HI> Brings in Peace. <HI>5.</HI> It is &s;et up when God fitts &s;ome, and brings in others to con&s;ent. <HI>6.</HI> This is for the good of all ranks of men. <HI>7.</HI> Good to them in their whole life. <HI>8.</HI> That Gover|nours due it is to be honoured. &V;&s;es.</P>
</ARGUMENT>
<P>YOu have heard, that Kings reigne by Chri&s;t, and &s;o are his creatures; Government is of his making, its his Or|dinance, and &s;o as it is from him, is good: None &s;o good as <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> and what he makes, that is al&s;o good; cannot be bad: <NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 3. Govern|ment is for the Worlds good. 1 Pet. 2. 13.</NOTE>hence followes your third Po&s;ition. That</P>
<P><HI>The &s;etting up of Government and Gover|nours is notably for the good of the World, Rom.</HI> 13. 4. <HI>He is the Mini&s;ter of God to</HI>
<PB N="112" REF="73">
<NOTE PLACE="marg"><GAP DESC="foreign">.</NOTE> <HI>thee for good.</HI> 1 <HI>Pet.</HI> 2. 13. its called <HI>mans creature,</HI> both becau&s;e its an Ordinance for man, for man as he is a rea&s;onable creature; and Secondly, Its an Ordi|nance wherein God acts and draws forth Rea&s;on to the highe&s;t acts and ends; its that which is in e&s;pecial man|ner for the good of man, of mankind; that will farther appeare in that,</P>
<P N="1">1. Government is &s;et up to keep the <NOTE PLACE="marg">1. It keeps the world in order.</NOTE>World in order; order is <HI>&V;niu&s;cuju&s;que rei debita coll<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">c<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">tio,</HI> the due &s;etting of things and per&s;ons in their proper place, and keeping them there. In an Army, when every Commander is where the General appoints, and every Souldier in that ranke and file, where the Comman|der appoints, and accordingly moves, that Army is &s;aid to be <HI>in order.</HI> Now Government doth that to the World, that order doth to an Army. Men are apt to be out of their due place and &s;tation, and to move unduely; now government rightens them. We read a &s;ad Story, <HI>Judg.</HI> 17. 6. <HI>There was no King in I&s;rael, but every man did that which was right in his own eyes;</HI> There was no King, but many Tyrants. Kings rule by law, Ty|rants by will; and &s;o do all rule where there is no government; and then every man is a Tyrant, his lu&s;t his law, nay a Divel, <HI>Homo homini daemon;</HI> Anarchy is wor&s;e then Tyranny; better a bad govern|ment
<PB N="113" REF="73">
then none at all, <HI>Ip&s;a quidem Tyrannis e&s;t tolerabilis prae Anarchia,</HI> &s;aith <HI>Beza.</HI> Tyranny is tolerable, when weighed with Anarchy: Now to take away this di&s;|order, and to keep every man in his place, is government &s;et up; for it is the ap|plication of rules of rea&s;on to things, times, and per&s;ons; It is an hone&s;t bind|ing men to their good behaviour.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Per&s;ons &s;o kept, enjoy pro|priety.</NOTE> 2. <HI>Per&s;ons &s;et and kept in order enjoy propriety:</HI> Without government all things are common, and community makes a War of every man with every man; what is common is mine as well as his, and his as well as mine; and therefore if another enjoy that I like, if it cannot be divided, and I like and lacke it, I will fight for it with him, and &s;o he with me: but government ends this War, and makes what was common be|fore, to be proper now; what belonged to all before, to be peculiar to &s;ome now, and &s;o prevents that War we now &s;peake of: it divides unto every man his inheri|tance, and maintains him in it. It was Gods government that divided the Land of <HI>Canaan</HI> to the children of <HI>I&s;rael,</HI> and gave them every one their lot; or el&s;e there would have been as much fighting among them&s;elves about it, as there was to di&s;po&s;&s;e&s;&s;e the Amorite, the Canaanite, the Hivite, and the Perizzite. <NOTE PLACE="marg">3. Go|vernment promotes increa&s;e.</NOTE></P>
<P N="3">3. <HI>Government promotes the increa&s;e of</HI>
<PB N="114" REF="74">
<HI>what we properly have:</HI> Intere&s;t is that which drawes forth all men; they will not &s;ow to have others reape, nor build to have others po&s;&s;e&s;&s;e and dwell there: But let it be their <HI>own,</HI> and then they think no labour too much, no co&s;t too great: what is every bodies, is no bodies; and Commons we &s;ee are wa&s;ted, when inclo&s;ures which are wor&s;e ground, are more improved. Government makes me call this, or that, my hou&s;e, my land, my &s;tate; and being mine, I like and love it, and do what I can to improve it.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">4. Protects our peace.</NOTE> 4. <HI>Government protects your peace: Pax e&s;t tranquillitas ordinis.</HI> You heard of order before, and now we tell you of the tranquillity of it, which is peace. What di&s;mal &s;tormes would ari&s;e in every Country, City, Town, and Family, about every mans Land, Dwelling, Trading, E&s;tate, if government were not? It keeps us alive in our hou&s;<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">s, and our hou&s;es <NOTE PLACE="marg">1 Tim. 2. 2.</NOTE>furni&s;hed for our livelyhood: <HI>A peaceable and a quiet life</HI> is the great end of govern|ment; and if any breake in upon you to di&s;turbe, and di&s;quiet you, then govern|ment interpo&s;eth to protect, and defend you.</P>
<P N="5">5. <HI>The &s;etting up of government is, when</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">5. When God fits &s;ome, and makes o|thers con|&s;enting.</NOTE><HI>God makes &s;ome men able, and willing, to manage publicke affairs; and draws the &s;pi|rits of others to con&s;ent and &s;ubject. As Je&s;us Chri&s;t a&s;cended up into heaven to</HI>
<PB N="115" REF="74">
<HI>give gifts unto men, for the edification of his body, Eph.</HI> 4. 12. So, as King of the World, he is in heaven, and gives gifts unto men, for the government of the world. Some men we &s;ee are &s;o weake that they cannot manage their own af|fairs with di&s;cretion; others are &s;o &s;trong that they can guide their own, and the af|fairs of others too: but <HI>honos onus,</HI> Ho|nour is a burden; to care for others is a care with burden, and men love not to be burdened: It is therefore the goodne&s;&s;e of <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> &s;o to temper and propo&s;e things to men, as to incline them to take &s;uch care and burdens on them. <HI>This thing is too heavy for thee, thou art not able to per|forme it,</HI> &s;aid <HI>Jethro</HI> to <HI>Mo&s;es, Exod.</HI> 18. 18. And <HI>who is able to judge this thy &s;o great a people!</HI> was <HI>Solomons</HI> expre&s;&s;ion. 1 <HI>Kings,</HI> 3. 9. but <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> makes men both able and willing for government: But &s;uppo&s;e they are never &s;o able, and willing; how can they govern, if they be not called to it? I, but the &s;ame <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> that makes men able and willing to govern, makes others <HI>willing to choo&s;e,</HI> and &s;ubjecting to be governed: and he cau&s;ing both the&s;e &s;weetly to concurre, &s;ets up a Govern|ment. I confe&s;&s;e, I have wondered to &s;ee the &s;ubjection of Souldiers to their Captains, of Seamen to their Boat&s;wains, and that to blows and bill-bows; if they &s;hould take head, its not their Captain
<PB N="116" REF="75">
or Ma&s;ter could with&s;tand them: and why do they not? truly its becau&s;e <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> by his ordinance of government aws their &s;pirits.</P>
<P N="6">6. <HI>This is notably for the good, not of</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">6. This is for the good of all ranks of men.</NOTE><HI>&s;ome, but of all ranks of men:</HI> high and low, rich and poor, learned and ignorant, good and bad. Government is of God, who is the chiefe&s;t good, and &s;o mo&s;t communicative, mo&s;t good to others; and therefore tho&s;e who are imployed a|bout this worke, are called <HI>Dij Terre&s;tres,</HI> Earthly Gods. I have &s;aid <HI>you are Gods:</HI> It notably commends government to us, when it is &s;o exten&s;ive in its goodne&s;&s;e. All mens good is &s;o interwoven in it, that <HI>it</HI> cannot be ob&s;tructed, but all men will &s;uffer in that ob&s;truction.</P>
<P N="7"><NOTE PLACE="marg">7. In their whole lives. <GAP DESC="foreign">.</NOTE> 7. <HI>Government is exten&s;ive not onely to all men, but to all men in their whole lives;</HI> and this I take from that pa&s;&s;age in 1 <HI>Tim.</HI> 2. 2. <HI>That we may lead a quiet life.</HI> Where I ob&s;erve two things. Fir&s;t, that <NOTE PLACE="marg">1 Tim. 2. 2.</NOTE>matter of life and death is wrapped up in government. And Secondly, that the good of government is not onely in &s;ome times and pa&s;&s;ages of life, to all ranks of men; but in the <HI>whole cour&s;e</HI> and &s;eries of pa&s;&s;ages in our whole lives, and mo&s;t eminently in the matters of highe&s;t con|cernment, as its there added, in all godli|ne&s;&s;e, and <HI>gravity;</HI> for &s;o the word <GAP DESC="foreign">, tran&s;lated hone&s;ty, properly &s;ignifies:
<PB N="117" REF="75">
we have protection of our being from go|vernment, that we might be much in godline&s;&s;e; and next to godline&s;&s;e, we mu&s;t be <HI>grave,</HI> carry our &s;elves &s;o, as may ju&s;tly clame an e&s;teeme from tho&s;e we conver&s;e withal.</P>
<P N="8"><NOTE PLACE="marg">8. Honour due to go|vernours.</NOTE> 8. <HI>There is certainly honour due to &s;uch who are &s;et up for government. Rom.</HI> 13. 1. They are the <HI>higher powers,</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign"> and <HI>v.</HI> 3. they are <HI>the Rulers,</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, yea and <HI>fathers</HI> too, and there|fore mu&s;t be honoured; God never in|tended them their duty without their dignity: nor did he appoint a &s;mall por|tion of honour for them; we owe re&s;pect one to another, and we mutually give and receive honour one of another; but honour to Governours mu&s;t be more; they mu&s;t have that and &s;omething more: as they are publick per&s;ons, they mu&s;t have <HI>publick honour,</HI> and as they are for good of all, &s;o <HI>all</HI> mu&s;t honour them. This is that which we are commanded, <HI>Rom.</HI> 13. 7. <HI>Render to all their dues; Ho|nour to whom Honour belongeth.</HI> Honour is their due, and you wrong them if you give it not; and you oblige them for your protection, when you give them their honour.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e 1. for In&s;truct. 1. God is a faithful Creator.</NOTE> 1. Take notice hence that God is a <HI>faithful Creator,</HI> as well <HI>as a merciful Re|deemer.</HI> He hath everla&s;ting love to guide his cho&s;en ones to eternal life; and he
<PB N="118" REF="76">
hath common love to govern the World. Wh<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">n you enjoy the &s;weet and good, the peace and plenty of government, we deny not but you &s;hould look to the&s;e that God makes u&s;e of to hand tho&s;e good things by; but your thoughts are not to re&s;t on them, but to mount higher; own the in|&s;trument, but honour more the prime efficient: are your Governours good? remember him that makes them &s;o; do you receive good under them? Oh! be &s;ure to eye the hand whence it comes: God extends the good of government to unrea&s;onable creatures as well as unto you, and to you the more in and by them. There is more improvement of the crea|tures, both of Sea and Land where go|vernment is, then where its wanting: witne&s;&s;e the condition of our Brethren in <HI>New England</HI> compared with that of the Natives there; who receive little of the good of creatures, which God gives our precious Brethren to enjoy with a|bundant comfort.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. Go|vernours need w<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ldome, and pub|lick &s;pi|rits.</NOTE> 2. Governours need abundance of wi&s;dome, and publickne&s;&s;e of &s;pirit; for they are &s;et up for the good of the World. The world was not made for them to pompe and pallace in, to hunt and pro|gre&s;&s;e in; but they are made for the world, and &s;hould be for the good of it. Nothing is &s;o cro&s;&s;e to a &s;pirit of go|vernment, as a low &s;elfi&s;h-&s;pirit. Worthy
<PB N="119" REF="76">
and honourable Governours, you had need &s;tudy and pray, ob&s;erve and pray, take coun&s;el and pray; much, very much lieth upon you, even the good of <HI>all</HI> un|der your government; which the Lord ble&s;s you to con&s;ider of and effect.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e 2. Exhort.</NOTE> Is government for the worlds good? then give me leave to exhort you to an|&s;wer the good you receive.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">1 To e|&s;teeme them highly.</NOTE> 1. By highly e&s;teeming them that are <HI>over you in the Lord:</HI> they are for your good, and you ought &s;o <HI>to e&s;teeme them.</HI> 2 <HI>Sam.</HI> 18. 3. the people there cryed out, <HI>Thou art worth ten thou&s;and of us.</HI> The Law required a man &s;hould reverence <HI>his Mother, Lev.</HI> 19. 3. how much more tho&s;e who are <HI>fathers of their country, Patriae pa|tres,</HI> Patriots indeed. How doth the Church lament, <HI>Lam.</HI> 4. 2. The <HI>breath of our no&s;trils, the annointed of the Lord was taken in their pitts;</HI> and tho&s;e are branded for <HI>&s;ons of Belial</HI> that de&s;pi&s;ed <HI>Saul,</HI> and brought him no pre&s;ent. 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 10. 27. They <HI>walke after the fle&s;h in the lu&s;t of un|cleanne&s;&s;e that de&s;pi&s;e government,</HI> 2 <HI>Pet.</HI> 2. 10.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. Make honour|able men|tion of them.</NOTE> 2. Make honourable mention of them: in the &s;ame place, they are reckoned <HI>pre|&s;umptuous and &s;elf-willed who feare not to &s;peake evil of dignities. Exod.</HI> 22. 28. <HI>Thou &s;halt not revile the gods, nor cur&s;e the Ruler of thy people.</HI> I could heartily wi&s;h that men would not think their tongues their own, but cea&s;e from this cur&s;ing, and re|viling.
<PB N="120" REF="77">
When <HI>Jo&s;eph</HI> was Governour of <NOTE PLACE="marg">Gen. 42. 10.</NOTE><HI>Egypt,</HI> his brethren call him <HI>Lord;</HI> and &s;urely we &s;hould not &s;peak &s;lightly of tho&s;e from whence we expect our publick good and protection: How unrea&s;on|able is &s;uch railing? it onely foames out your own di&s;content, and tends to boile up an undue rage in them that hear you; it profits not them that be over you, but rather exa&s;perats them again&s;t you, and turns tho&s;e thoughts that &s;hould be for you, again&s;t you.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">3. To &s;peak to God for them.</NOTE> 3. Let me exhort you to &s;peak to God for them. 1 <HI>Tim.</HI> 2. 1, 2. Its the Apo&s;tles exhortation there; he well knew how backward we would be unto it, and <NOTE PLACE="marg">1 Tim. 2. 1, 2.</NOTE>th erefore he &s;aith: <HI>I exhort</HI> and that with a <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>a fir&s;t of all,</HI> and marke his variety of expre&s;&s;ions; <HI>Supplications, Prayers, Interce&s;&s;ions,</HI> and <HI>giving of thanks, mu&s;t be for all in authority,</HI> and <HI>all little enough;</HI> did you know their duties and their difficulties, you would not cea&s;e praying for them, <HI>v.</HI> 2. Its <HI>for your good, that you may lead a quiet life; pray</HI> you more, and they will rule better: It may be they had not mi&s;carried &s;o much, nor &s;o often, if you had helped them by your prayers. <HI>v.</HI> 3. <HI>This is good and accept|able in the &s;ight of God our Saviour;</HI> and no marvel &s;ince they are tho&s;e that he &s;ets up for the good of the World. Hap|ply <HI>they</HI> are not &s;o good as <HI>they</HI> &s;hould be,
<PB N="121" REF="77">
neither are <HI>you:</HI> but be good in this, to pray to make them better. They were bound to pray in <HI>Pauls</HI> time, when you might reckon &s;o many Magi&s;trates as there were, &s;o many were their enemies: and are we not more bound now, when our Magi&s;trates are our friends? God hath not dealt &s;o with other Nations, nor with us in this Nation heretofore. Never was there a Magi&s;tracy that did openly and profe&s;&s;edly engage for the good of all that truely feare God, as now there is. Oh! cover their infirmi|ties in love, and pray for them; for they beg your prayers. <HI>Cyrus</HI> in&s;erts it into his Decree, <HI>Ezra</HI> 6. 10. <HI>that they might pray for the life of the King:</HI> and I am confident that nothing would be more acceptable then your fervent prayers: and let them never want them.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">4. To &s;ub|mit to every ordinance of man.</NOTE> 4. <HI>Submit your &s;elves to ever<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> ordi|nance of man, for the Lords &s;ake.</HI> All men de&s;ire to rule, but few know how to &s;ub|mit: God &s;ets them to order, and our duty is to be under their ordering: It is po&s;&s;ible &s;ome of their ordinances may cro&s;&s;e our particular intere&s;ts, and our &s;pirits; &s;hall we therefore not &s;ubmit? it may be for a publick good that they decree; and if they order &s;o, they doe their duty, and our duty is to &s;ubmit, though it be our particular lo&s;&s;e. If we would look up, and con&s;ider for who&s;e
<PB N="122" REF="78">
&s;ake we are to &s;ubmit, it would much re|leive us: <HI>Its for the Lords &s;ake;</HI> the Lord requires our &s;ubmi&s;&s;ion to them: for <HI>his &s;ake</HI> &s;ubmit: it may be your &s;pirits ri&s;e when you think of the men you are to &s;ubmit too, and that the time was, that there was not &s;o much difference between them and you, and you little thought to be &s;o at their commands: I, but know, its to <HI>God</HI> more then to them; and I hope it will be no hard thing to &s;ubmit to him; to God.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg">5. To &s;erve in per&s;on &amp; pur&s;e.</NOTE> 5. La&s;tly, te&s;tifie your thankfulne&s;&s;e for the good you enjoy, by your &s;ervice both in p<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">r&s;on and pur&s;e, as occa&s;ion may call you: boggle not at the word &s;ervice, they &s;erve you more then you &s;erve them. The greek Proverbe is true, <GAP DESC="foreign">, there is one &s;ervant of the hou&s;e, and that is the Ma&s;ter&punc; their government is but an ho|nourable &s;ervice; and will you not &s;erve them that &s;erve you. Grumble not too much at publick Taxes and Impo&s;itions; governments cannot be carried on with|out them; they contribute what is more precious for your &s;afety, then you doe for their government. <HI>Rom.</HI> 13. 7. <HI>Ren|der to all their dues: Tribute to whom Tri|bute is due, Cu&s;tome to whom Cu&s;tome.</HI></P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="11" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="123" REF="78">
<HEAD>CHAP. XI.</HEAD>
<ARGUMENT>
<P>&V;nfolds the fourth Po&s;ition, That Go|vernments are apt to change; where|in is &s;et down. <HI>1.</HI> Governours change by death, or other wayes. <HI>2.</HI> Forms of Government change. <HI>3.</HI> People change. <HI>4.</HI> Lawes change. <HI>5.</HI> Leagues and Trade change. <HI>6.</HI> Chri&s;t makes change by his judge|ments and providences. &V;&s;es.</P>
</ARGUMENT>
<P>WE &s;hould be too bad, if we did not acknowledge the good of Govern|ment; but withal we &s;hould be too fool|i&s;h if we ranke not that good in its due place. Governments are good, but &s;till they are creatures; and all the goodne&s;&s;e of creatures is mutable. Hence this fourth Po&s;ition.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 4. Govern|ment is apt to change.</NOTE> <HI>Governments and Governours, being crea|tures of this world, are apt to change.</HI> Go|vernments are Gods Ordinance, and &s;o &s;hall &s;tand, but &s;tand as creatures, and creatures of this world, and &s;o as the World, changeable. Its the tran&s;cendent property of <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> to be unchange|ably good, creatures not &s;o; and
<PB N="124" REF="79">
this will be manife&s;t many wayes.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">1. Gover|nours change.</NOTE> 1. Governours change by death, or in their manners: They are men as well as others; and &s;o come under that Statute law, wherein <HI>all mon are appointed once to die; Their breath is in their no&s;trils,</HI> and if God ca&s;t it out, all their power on earth cannot retaine it. Nay &s;ometime by their luxury, riot, and intemperance, they dig their own graves, and &s;horten their lives; nay &s;ometime they die while they live, either depo&s;ing them&s;elves, or el&s;e being depo&s;ed by others from their government, and &s;o they out-live their pompe and power. Now the change of Governours makes great change in go|vernments; what troubles have been in the vacancies of Princes, and what tur|moile about Succe&s;&s;ors? but &s;uppo&s;e they live, yet they may change their manners: How good are many at fir&s;t, and how bad at latter end! 2 <HI>Chron.</HI> 24. 2. <HI>Joa&s;h did what was right in the &s;ight of the Lord all the dayes of Jehojadah; but ver&s;.</HI> 17. <HI>and</HI> 18. <HI>when he was dead he hearkened to the Princes of Judah, and left the hou&s;e of the Lord.</HI></P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. Forms of govern|ment change.</NOTE> 2. Manners and Forms of government as well as per&s;ons are liable to changes; <HI>I&s;rael</HI> was fir&s;t ruled by <HI>Judges,</HI> then <HI>Kings,</HI> then by <HI>Strangers.</HI> Rome, <HI>Roma &s;epticollis,</HI> &s;even-hilled Rome, more various
<PB N="125" REF="79">
in her government, then hills: witne&s;&s;e their Kings, Con&s;uls, Dictators, Emper|ours, &amp;c. How oft doth Soveraigne power change, from One to more, and from more to One again? and the change hap|pily not from what is unlawful, to that which is lawful; but from what is le&s;&s;e convenient, to what is more. I think not government by a <HI>King</HI> to be unlaw|ful, nor yet the government by a &s;ingle per&s;on and a Parliament. We in our dayes have &s;een much in this, therefore I &s;hall adde n o more.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">3. People change.</NOTE> 3. People change in their Mindes, Manners and Conditions. In all go|vernment, there mu&s;t be &s;ome to be <HI>ru|led,</HI> as well as &s;ome <HI>to rule;</HI> and if either change, it hath a great influence in the government. The people are the body to be governed, and you know its <HI>mobile vulgus,</HI> an un&s;etled, changeable body: How oft do they commend and cry up &s;ome for government, and by and by deny them? now, none &s;o worthy, &s;o de&s;irable; anon, none &s;o unfit as they; Now, they fall down and adore their wi&s;dome, valour and &s;ucce&s;&s;e; and after|ward ri&s;e up again&s;t them, and would if they could, trample on them. 1 <HI>Kings</HI> 12. 1. <HI>All I&s;rael come to Sechem to make Reho|boam King,</HI> but a little after, <HI>v.</HI> 16. <HI>they &s;ay, What portion have we in David? nei|ther have we inheritance in the &s;on of Ie&s;&s;e.</HI>
<PB N="126" REF="80">
<HI>To your tents oh I&s;rael; now &s;ee to thine own hou&s;e David:</HI> And as they change in their minds, &s;o in their manners and condi|tion; they grow wor&s;e and wor&s;e, in gluttony, drunkenne&s;&s;e, in pride, malice, uncleanne&s;&s;e and revenge; yea they may grow poorer, more idle, and &s;o more needy.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">4. Laws change.</NOTE> 4. Change of Governour, Govern|ments and People, produceth the change of Laws. Governours look on the <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">egi|&s;lative power, as their highe&s;t; and there|fore to hold out their place, they make Acts and repeale them; they vote and unvote again, ratifie and null Ordinan|ces, and that &s;ometime upon grounds of rea&s;on. <HI>The &s;afety</HI> of the people is, and ought to be, the <HI>Supreame Law.</HI> Now when people do thus change, it may be nece&s;&s;ary to change the Laws, that &s;o their &s;afety may be provided for.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg">5. Leagues and Trade change.</NOTE> 5. Nations change in their Leagues and Trade; They are in with one Na|tion, and out with another, and &s;ome|time in and out with the &s;ame Nation. <HI>David</HI> he was friends with <HI>Naha&s;h</HI> the King of the children of <HI>Ammon;</HI> but when <HI>Naha&s;h</HI> was dead, 2 <HI>Sam.</HI> 10. <HI>Hanun</HI> the &s;on of <HI>Naha&s;h</HI> and <HI>David</HI> fall out. <HI>Rev.</HI> 18. 3. There was a time when the <HI>Mer|chants waxed rich,</HI> but <HI>v.</HI> 11. the <HI>Mer|chants of th<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> earth &s;hall weepe and mourne over her, for no man buyeth their merchan|di&s;e</HI>
<PB N="127" REF="80">
<HI>any more.</HI> Trading is &s;ometime &s;ick, yea dead, and men complaine they have nothing to do; another time it grows quick, and they have great returns.</P>
<P N="6"><NOTE PLACE="marg">6. Chri&s;t changes them by his judge|ments on them.</NOTE> 6. <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t</HI> the King of Nations, he by his great judgements, of Sword, Fa|mine, &amp; Plague of Pe&s;tilence, makes great changes: Governments are apt enough to change of them&s;elves; but how much more when Chri&s;t comes to deale with them? <HI>Ezek.</HI> 14. 13. <HI>God breakes the &s;taffe of bread, and &s;o cuts off man and bea&s;t from it;</HI> or el&s;e, <HI>v.</HI> 17. <HI>He brings a Sword upon the Land, or &s;ends the Pe&s;tilence, v.</HI> 19. <HI>and pours out fury</HI> upon the Land in blood, to cut off from it man and bea&s;t. What woful alterations are there, and have there been in <HI>Germany</HI> by the&s;e means? Cities laid wa&s;te, and become ruinous heaps by a prevailing enemy; how many Families &s;wept away with the plague, and the living &s;carce able to bury the dead?</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e of In|&s;truction. 1. Surely, le&s;&s;e bo|dies will change.</NOTE> 1. If Governments; &s;urely le&s;&s;e bodies, &s;uch as are Towns, Villages, Families, are not freed from &s;uch changes; how many Families have we &s;een up and down, ri&s;e and fall! yea many great hou|&s;es de&s;olate, and contemptible ones ex|alted. Oh that we were wi&s;e to make our Families little Churches, our dwellings habitations of righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e, and recep|tacles of poor di&s;tre&s;sed ones; it may be <HI>the Lord</HI> might lengthen out our tran|quillity,
<PB N="128" REF="81">
build us up, and not de&s;troy us.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. See the creatures vanity.</NOTE> <HI>2. Learne hence the vanity of the creature, and of all conditions here be|neath: why &s;hould we &s;et our hearts on that that is not, or may &s;oon prove other|wi&s;e then now it is?</HI> I&s;a. <HI>2. 22.</HI> Cea&s;e, oh cea&s;e from man wh<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">&s;e breath is in his no&s;trils; for wherein is he to be accounted of? It is better to tru&s;t in the Lord, then to put any <NOTE PLACE="marg">P&s;al. 118. 8, 9.</NOTE>confidence in man; It is better to tru&s;t in the Lord, then to put any confidence in Prin|ces. <HI>Let me now adde a word of Ex|hortation.</HI></P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e 2. of Exhort. 1. To go|vernours to look after true wi&s;dome and righteou&s;|ne&s;&s;e.</NOTE> 1. To tho&s;e who have the Govern|ment upon their &s;houlders, to look after true wi&s;dome and righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e as their e&s;tabli&s;hment: that which goes to make up pride and lu&s;t, will &s;urely moulder; that which is wicked and oppre&s;&s;ive will downe with a vengeance. Equity and &s;incerity are the be&s;t poyze and balla&s;t for your tumbling frames: your moun|tains are but weake, and your founda|tions un&s;etled. <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 73. 18. <HI>Surely thou did&s;t &s;et them in &s;lippery places, thou ca&s;te&s;t them down to de&s;truction.</HI> Is it not be&s;t for you to draw nigh to God, the unchange|able One, to cry to him, to lift up your &s;ouls in &s;ecret, to draw down that &s;tabili|ty from heaven which cannot be found upon earth?</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. To be little in their own eyes.</NOTE> 2. How little and low &s;hould you be in your own eyes? think not your <HI>moun|taine</HI>
<PB N="129" REF="81">
<HI>&s;o &s;trong,</HI> that you can <HI>never be mo|ved,</HI> when as your government carryes that in the frame and make of it that is apt to change; you or your people, their condition, or your condition may &s;oon alter; your confederates may prove ene|mies, and your trading pa&s;&s;e to others; you &s;tand now, but how &s;oon may you fall? others may fall and ri&s;e; but if you fall, how hardly will your ri&s;ing be? Men of low&punc; condition cannot fall much; but dangerous is their &s;tate that are in high place; <HI>Facilis de&s;cen&s;us,</HI> de&s;cent is ea&s;ie, but its hard to get up again.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">3. To have our Trea|&s;ures in Heaven.</NOTE> 3. It may exhort us all, To have our trea&s;ures and hearts in Heaven. <HI>Sur&s;um Corda. Ari&s;e, ari&s;e,</HI> for <HI>this is not your re&s;t.</HI> How readily &s;hould you take leave of that that is going from you, and you cannot &s;tay it? <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>Col.</HI> 3. 2. <HI>Set your affections on things that are above, and not on things on the earth,</HI> is the A|po&s;tles coun&s;el; and if you will be follow|ing and &s;eeking, he tells us what it &s;hould be, 1 <HI>Cor.</HI> 14. 1. <HI>follow after Charity, and de&s;ire &s;pirtual gifts, that ye may edifie one another.</HI></P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">4. Ca&s;t off quarrel|ling pa&s;|&s;ions at the&s;e Turns.</NOTE> 4. Ca&s;t off tho&s;e thoughts and pa&s;&s;i|ons as unrea&s;onable, that &s;torme and quarrel at the&s;e alterations; Its your wi&s;dome contentedly to &s;ubmit to that which your bu&s;tling cannot remedy. We read of one, who when it was told
<PB N="130" REF="82">
him that his childe was dead, an&s;wered, <HI>Scio me genui&s;se <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ortalem;</HI> I know I begat a mortal. When &s;uddain and great al|terations pre&s;ent, cea&s;e to wonder; what is rivetted in the nature and compo&s;ition of things, will not out; &s;parks will up, and &s;tones will down, and &s;o will King|domes.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg">5. Con|tend that the change may be for the better.</NOTE> 5. La&s;tly, let us all in the feare of God contend, that &s;ince governments are apt to change, and alterations will be; Oh! contend that they may be for the better. How de&s;irable are the conver&s;i|ons of a State and Nation? from Pride to Humility, from Vanity to Gravity, from Ungodline&s;&s;e to Holine&s;&s;e, from Oppre&s;&s;ion to Releiving the poor; I, tho&s;e would be happy Changes indeed, and &s;uch as would conduce to our pro&s;|perity.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="12" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="131" REF="82">
<HEAD>CHAP. XII.</HEAD>
<ARGUMENT>
<P>Opens the fifth Po&s;. That Kings abu&s;e their power; for, <HI>1.</HI> They &s;erve them|&s;elves more then others. <HI>2.</HI> They turne their power that &s;hould be for the good, to the hurt of others. <HI>3.</HI> It was again&s;t Chri&s;t in his per&s;on. <HI>4.</HI> It is again&s;t Chri&s;t in his intere&s;t. <HI>5.</HI> Its given up to Chri&s;ts enemie. &V;&s;es.</P>
</ARGUMENT>
<P>WE have heard that Kings reign by Chri&s;t, and that Government is &s;et up for the good of men: But now we come to &s;hew the unhappy inver&s;ion of power againg <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> and of govern|ment again&s;t tho&s;e for who&s;e good it was intended. Hence your fifth Po&s;ition. <NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 5. Kings a|bu&s;e their Power. Gen. 10 10.</NOTE></P>
<P><HI>Kings and Princes have in all Ages gros&s;ly abu&s;ed their power.</HI> The fir&s;t King we read of is <HI>Nimrod, Gen.</HI> 10. 10. <HI>His Kingdome began at Babel:</HI> but what was he? <HI>v.</HI> 8. He was a <HI>mighty one,</HI> thats true; Kings are mighty ones, but where? in <HI>the earth,</HI> and for the earth; for earthly and &s;en&s;ual things, <HI>v.</HI> 9. <HI>He was a mighty</HI>
<PB N="132" REF="83">
<HI>one, but a mighty Hunter;</HI> not &s;o much of bea&s;ts as of men. <HI>Saul</HI> was the fir&s;t King of <HI>I&s;rael;</HI> and what he was we all know. Now that they have thus abu&s;ed their power, I &s;hall &s;hew the&s;e five wayes.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">1. They &s;erve them&s;elvs more then o|thers.</NOTE> 1. They &s;erve them&s;elves more then others. Government and Governours you heard was &s;et up for others, and their good; and to turne it to one per&s;on, or family, is a palpable abu&s;e: How &s;ad is it when their double portion of the&s;e out|ward things which &s;hould en<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ble them to be more u&s;eful and beneficial to others, is imploy'd and laid out mainly to gain friends and &s;ervants to their own lu&s;ts and interr&s;ts? Tho&s;e who have been mo&s;t popular, pretending love to their Coun|try, how wickedly have they interwoven their &s;elf-intere&s;ts? when they have good &s;ucce&s;&s;e in publick enterpri&s;es, how do they &s;acrifice to their own nets, applau|ding their own wi&s;dome and power? You &s;hall finde them &s;ometimes affable and courteous; but is it not to inhaunce love and power to them&s;elves, by the repute of their wi&s;dome, birth and elo|quence? <HI>I<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">genio&s;i &s;ed nequam; facundi &s;ed malo publico:</HI> witty, but wicked; eloquent, but to publick damage; and thus they abu&s;e their power by their corrupt &s;elfe|&s;eeking. 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 8. 11. Its &s;aid, <HI>He will appoint for him&s;elfe: He,</HI> that is <HI>Saul,</HI> and &s;uch as he was, will appoint for them|&s;elves:
<PB N="133" REF="83">
But <HI>David</HI> who was <HI>after Gods own heart</HI> (in government as well as o|the<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">wayes) and tho&s;e who be like <HI>David,</HI> they, they I &s;ay, will not &s;eek them&s;elves but the good of others: and now (me|thinks) I finde my hope enlarged for tho&s;e who &s;it at the &s;terne of this Com|mon-wealth, that they being eminently and remarkably rai&s;ed up by God, will &s;eeke the honour of him who thus rai&s;ed them.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. They turn their power to the hurt of others.</NOTE> 2. They turn their power that &s;hould be for the good, to the hurt of others. God never intended power to oppre&s;&s;e; power to cru&s;h the weake and innocent, but to help and releive them: But I would daily ob&s;ervation and experience both in this and former ages did not proclame the mi&s;erable abu&s;e of power. Read over your Chronicles, and there you will finde that made good which was &s;poken by <HI>Cato Cen&s;<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">rius: Reges omnes e&s;&s;e de genere be&s;tiarum rapacium,</HI> All Kings are akin to ravenous bea&s;ts, who prey and devour; they are great in power, and powerful in oppre&s;&s;ion. 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 8. 13, 14, 15, 16, 17. <HI>They &s;hall take your Daughters, your Feilds, your Seed, your Servants, your Sheep;</HI> and what is this <NOTE PLACE="marg">3. The Powers were a|gain&s;t Chri&s;t in his per|&s;on.</NOTE>taking, but unju&s;t taking? and unju&s;t taking is oppre&s;&s;ion, and oppre&s;&s;ion an a|bu&s;e of power.</P>
<P N="3">3. The greate&s;t powers were again&s;t
<PB N="134" REF="84">
<HI>Chri&s;t</HI> in his per&s;on, while he was upon earth, <HI>Acts</HI> 4. 26. <HI>The Kings of the earth &s;tand up, and the Rulers are gathered toge|gether again&s;t the Lord, and again&s;t his Chri&s;t.</HI> No &s;ooner was Chri&s;t born, but <HI>Herod</HI> &s;eekes his life, and he is faine to be carried into <HI>Egypt;</HI> when he comes forth to preach, and work miracles, the Scribes and the Phari&s;ees, and the Rulers of the people &s;et again&s;t him, call him <HI>Bel zebub the Prince of Devils;</HI> and though he profe&s;&s;ed <HI>his Kingdom not to be of this world,</HI> but came in a low emptied con|dition; yet he is held forth as an enemy <HI>to Cae&s;ar, Joh.</HI> 19. 12. <HI>If thou let this man goe, thou art not Cae&s;ars friend;</HI> and &s;o you know how he was condemned and abu&s;ed by <HI>Herod</HI> and <HI>Pontius Pilate.</HI> Thus was go|vernment turn'd again&s;t him who &s;et it up.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">4. They have been enemies to Chri&s;t his peo|ple.</NOTE> 4. Kings and Princes have been bitter enemies again&s;t Chri&s;ts intere&s;t and peo|ple. When Gods <HI>I&s;rael</HI> was in <HI>Egypt, there aro&s;e a new King, Exod.</HI> 1. 11. that &s;et <HI>Task-ma&s;ters to afflict them with heavy bur|dens, that their &s;ouls &s;erved with rigour.</HI> Bur|dens, Taxes, Ma&s;ters, Hard&s;hip, Servitude, is the be&s;t that Kings can afford the <HI>I&s;rael of God.</HI> When they come into <HI>Canaan, Sihon</HI> King of the Amorites, will not &s;uf|fer them to pa&s;&s;e thorow his border, but gathers all his people to fight them: The Kings of <HI>Jeru&s;alem, Hebron, Jarmuth,</HI>
<PB N="135" REF="84">
<HI>Lachi&s;h</HI> and <HI>Eglon</HI> made war with the Gi|beonits becau&s;e they made peace with <HI>I&s;rael. Jo&s;h.</HI> 10. 3. It was <HI>Jeroboam the King,</HI> the &s;on of <HI>Nebat that &s;inned, and made I&s;rael to &s;in,</HI> 1 <HI>Kings</HI> 14. 16. And a|gain&s;t whom were all tho&s;e bloody per|&s;ecutions under the Heatheni&s;h Emper|ours, but again&s;t the Chri&s;tians, the &s;er|vants and wor&s;hippers of <HI>Chri&s;t?</HI> If any evil befel them, they make the Chri&s;tians the cau&s;e of it; and then, <HI>Chri&s;tianos ad Leones,</HI> carry the&s;e Chri&s;tians to the Ly|ons, let them devour them: it was e|nough to make a man guilty if he were a Chri&s;tian: <HI>Bonus vir Caius, &s;ed Chri&s;tianus; Caius</HI> was a good man, but a <HI>Chri&s;tian;</HI> and thus is power inverted again&s;t <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> and his intere&s;t in his people.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg">5. They give up their power to the bea&s;t.</NOTE> 5. Kings and Princes give up their power to Chri&s;ts enemie; can there be a greater abu&s;e? <HI>Rev.</HI> 17. 17. The <HI>ten hornes,</HI> the ten Kings of Europe, <HI>they agree and give their kingdom to the Bea&s;t</HI> to receive laws from his lu&s;t, and to &s;erve his de|&s;ignes. <HI>Rev.</HI> 16. 14. <HI>The froggs which are the &s;pirits of Devils, goe forth to the Kings of the earth;</HI> and <HI>Rev.</HI> 17. 2. <HI>The Kings of the earth commit fornication and are drunk with</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e of In|&s;truction. 1. See the ground of the turns upon King|domes.</NOTE><HI>the wine of the great whore:</HI> and thus you &s;ee power abu&s;ed.</P>
<P N="1">1. See here the foundation of turnes and changes upon kingdomes and go|vernments; they are departed far from
<PB N="136" REF="85">
their right ends, become corrupt and a|bominable, &s;o that the Lord cannot <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">uf|fer them. Are the&s;e the powers that I &s;et up (&s;aith God)? did I ever intend they &s;hould be again&s;t me and mine? did I &s;et them up to pride them&s;elves in their lu&s;ts, and to oppre&s;&s;e tho&s;e that are better then them&s;elves? Surely no. <HI>I will now ari&s;e &s;aith the Lord, and overturn, overturn, over|turn them.</HI></P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. Kings little de|&s;erve the name of Holy.</NOTE> 2. See how little they de&s;erve the name of Sacred Maje&s;ty, who were &s;o pro|fane and mindel<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">&s;&s;e of holy things, that keep up Religion not out of con&s;ci|ence, but cu&s;tome, not that God may have his homage and men Gods ble&s;&s;ing; but out of State-policy to keep men in awe; how gro&s;&s;e flattery is it, both of dead and living, to count their memory ble&s;&s;ed, who were &s;o crooked and cur&s;ed in their cour&s;es?</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><P>3. Judge no cau&s;e by great followers.</P>
<P>Joh. 7 48, 49.</P></NOTE> 3. Judge not of men or cau&s;es to be good, by the greatne&s;&s;e of them that own them and follow them. When Chri&s;t was in the world, <HI>Joh.</HI> 7. 48. the que&s;tion was, <HI>Have any of the Rulers or Phari&s;ees be|lieved on him?</HI> any of your great wi&s;e men? No, I warrant you, they know better, they are more wi&s;e then &s;o: <HI>v.</HI> 49. but <HI>this people,</HI> this poor people, gid|dy people, nay <HI>cur&s;ed</HI> people <HI>that know not the Law, Luke</HI> 23. 35. <HI>The Rulers derided him,</HI> and <HI>Luke</HI> 24. 20. <HI>Our chiefe Prei&s;ts</HI>
<PB N="137" REF="85">
<HI>and Rulers delivered him to be condemned to death, and to be crucified.</HI> You mu&s;t not make the great ones of the earth your ex|ample; for then you will follow wicked|ne&s;&s;e.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">4. Learne the true value of earthly Powers.</NOTE> 4. Undeceive your &s;elves about the true value of earthly powers: The Trap|pings of power are not &s;o good as we count for, becau&s;e power it &s;elfe may be &s;o &s;oon and gros&s;ly abu&s;ed: Grace, grace, is mo&s;t de&s;irable, which is proper and active to correct the&s;e abu&s;es, and cannot &s;erve to the&s;e wicked inver&s;ions.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg">5. Let tho&s;e that rule be circum|&s;pect.</NOTE> 5. La&s;tly, is it any undue inference, that &s;eeing Kings have abu&s;ed their power, to call upon tho&s;e who take their places on them, to be circum&s;pect, very circum&s;pect? what hath been, may be again; what hath been abu&s;ed, may be abu&s;ed: Mi&s;take me not; I am far from be&s;pattering tho&s;e whom I am bound to honour; &s;urely Gods great deliverances, and his peoples blood, are fre&s;h upon their hearts, and will rai&s;e up a redoubled con&s;ideration in them how to honour God and &s;erve their pre&s;ent generation, in the manage|ment of publick affairs.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="13" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="138" REF="86">
<HEAD>CHAP. XIII.</HEAD>
<ARGUMENT>
<P>Proceeds to the &s;ixth Po&s;. which &s;hews, That abu&s;e of power tends to the breaking of power; which is appa|rent. <HI>1.</HI> When tho&s;e in power indulge their lazine&s;&s;e. <HI>2.</HI> VVhen they take no account of under-Officers. <HI>3.</HI> VVhen they rule by will. <HI>4.</HI> VVhen they look not after exc<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="2 letters">ution of good Laws. <HI>5.</HI> But are unju&s;t. And <HI>6.</HI> Sinfully conformable to neigh|bour Princes. <HI>7.</HI> &V;ndue enterpo&s;al in the things of God. And <HI>8.</HI> Per|&s;ecute tho&s;e who are good. &V;&s;es.</P>
</ARGUMENT>
<P>GOvernments you heard were apt to change; yea to change from good to bad, and from bad to wor&s;e, and that brings in a breach. Sin and &s;orrow are in&s;eparable companions; if &s;in goe before, &s;orrow will follow after. To be clothed with power, is an honour; but to abu&s;e power is a &s;in, and &s;uch a &s;in as will make way for ruine, de&s;olation, and de|&s;truction. Hence your &s;ixth Po&s;ition.</P>
<P><PB N="139" REF="86">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. 6. Sins of Princes break their Power.</NOTE> <HI>The &s;ins of Princes whereby they abu&s;e power, carry a tendency with them to breake their power.</HI> All their power is from Chri&s;t, and all &s;in is again&s;t him; and &s;urely he will never maintaine his own power in a way again&s;t him&s;elfe. As Princes have power over other men, &s;o they <HI>&s;in</HI> in that power; they &s;in as they are <HI>men,</HI> and they &s;in as they are <HI>men in place, as Princes.</HI> Now their <HI>Princely &s;ins</HI> are tho&s;e that break their Princely power; as thus.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">As 1. A lazy &s;pirit.</NOTE> 1. Indulging of a lazie &s;pirit, tends to break their power. They gladly ac|cept of the honour, revenues and ob&s;er|vance of their places; but transferre the care to others. <HI>Corona curarum nidus,</HI> A Crown is a ne&s;t of cares; they love the <HI>Crown,</HI> but will not undertake the <HI>care:</HI> They are too nice and delicate, they mu&s;t not mi&s;&s;e their meals, their naps, their &s;ports, no not for a publick good. No wonder then if God cau&s;e <HI>that</HI> to pa&s;&s;e from them, which they &s;o put away from them&s;elves; and make that over to others in the honour, which they long before made over to them in the worke and &s;ervice.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">2. Not ac|counting with their Mini&s;ters.</NOTE> 2. When Princes take no account of their Mini&s;ters, it tends to break power. I know its impo&s;&s;ible Princes &s;hould per|forme all their duties in their own per|&s;on: They have much lieth upon them|&s;elves,
<PB N="140" REF="87">
and they have more to transferre to others; Its a wa&s;ting &s;in to put off what is inherent in them&s;elves; and tis no le&s;&s;e to transferre to others, and take no ac|count of them. They mu&s;t have their Mini&s;ters; thats granted; but their Mini|&s;ters mu&s;t be accounted with, or el&s;e all will fall: It keeps them in due awe and order, to think they mu&s;t to an <HI>audit,</HI> give account of their &s;teward&s;hip. Places and ju&s;tice will be bought and &s;old, pub|lick trea&s;ures exhau&s;ted, publick negoti|ations &s;lighted, and what care they, when they know they &s;hall be let alone? How unworthily may men betray their tru&s;t, di&s;honour their Prince, and wrong the Nation, yea do it boldly, when they know they &s;hall goe unexamined, and &s;o unpuni&s;hed? Princes deve&s;t them&s;elves of their highe&s;t power by this neglect; and its ju&s;<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> they &s;hould fall &s;hort of the reverence they exp<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ct in the hearts of tho&s;e who are under them.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">3. When will is Law, <HI>Greg.</HI> in Moral.</NOTE> 3. When will is Law, then down goes rule: <HI>Non debet Princeps dominari &s;ed Ratio:</HI> The Prince that is the Prince in his will, &s;hould not beare &s;way, but Rea|&s;on: Government hath no &s;uch enemy as &s;elf-willedne&s;&s;e; never do Princes lo&s;e &s;o much of their power as when they exalt their will again&s;t Law; they think <NOTE PLACE="marg">4. Not executing good Laws.</NOTE>they gain, but then they lo&s;e mo&s;t.</P>
<P N="4">4. Neglect of looking after the execu|tion
<PB N="141" REF="87">
of good Laws, much infeebles their power: Kings &s;hould be living laws, <HI>Re|ges vivae leges,</HI> their carriage &s;o regular, as to command imitation, and their care great to &s;ee good laws executed: Exe|cution makes good Laws alive; and good Laws well executed, makes Kings live; for their power is advanced in their exe|cution, and neglect herein is fatal and ruinous to them.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg">5. In|ju&s;tice.</NOTE> 5. Inju&s;tice tumbles down Chairs of State, <HI>Prove.</HI> 16. 12. <HI>The Throne is e&s;ta|bli&s;hed by righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e:</HI> but <HI>Mic.</HI> 7. 3. Its <HI>doing evil with both hands when the Prince asketh and the Judge asketh for a reward.</HI> When that is acted which we read of 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 8. 14. when the oppre&s;&s;ed cry, and are not ea&s;ed, when might overcomes right, its a woful victory, and &s;uch an one as they &s;hall have no cau&s;e to triumph in; for <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> will cau&s;e them to vomit up all their &s;weet mor&s;els, and to repent of their unju&s;t dealings.</P>
<P N="6"><NOTE PLACE="marg">6. Sinful confor|mity to neigh|bour Nations.</NOTE> 6. Sinful conformity to neighbour Na|tions doth no good. It di&s;plea&s;ed God and his &s;ervant <HI>Samuel,</HI> when the people cryed out <HI>Make us a King,</HI> 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 8. 6. and the great argument was, <HI>they would be like o|ther Nations:</HI> So ver&s;e 6. <HI>Give us a King to judge us;</HI> and ver&s;e 5. <HI>Make us a King to judge us, like all the Nations.</HI> When we conforme to their pride, their fa&s;hions, their exce&s;&s;e, their wantonne&s;&s;e; will not this undermine us?</P>
<P N="7"><PB N="142" REF="88">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">7. Undue interpo|&s;al in the things of God.</NOTE> 7. Undue interpo&s;al in the things of God will pull down the powers of men. God hath re&s;erved it for his own wi&s;|dome, power and holine&s;&s;e, to give the Law of his wor&s;hip; <HI>His teare is not to be taught by the precepts of men,</HI> or made good by their powers: The <HI>patterne of the Ta|bernacle and Temple</HI> is to be fetched from God alone; we are not tyed to waite for mens commands to &s;erve God; they may make our &s;ervices to be more &s;afe in the practice, but not more righteous in them&s;elves. Gods command is a &s;uf|ficient warrant, and its high pre&s;umption for any to interpo&s;e therein, to corrupt or cro&s;&s;e his &s;ervice.</P>
<P N="8"><NOTE PLACE="marg">8. Per&s;e|cution of the good and quiet.</NOTE> 8. Unju&s;t per&s;ecution, and pro&s;ecuti|on of the good and quiet of the Land cracks authority. They are to be <HI>ter|rour to evil doers,</HI> and then their authority comes forth in the power of it; but they mu&s;t not be terrours to tho&s;e that doe well, nor &s;trengthen the hands of the wicked, and &s;ad tho&s;e whom God would not have &s;added. This will never &s;tabli&s;h any government. Chri&s;ts intere&s;t is in his people; the be&s;t way for Princes to main|taine their intere&s;t, is, to fall in with Chri&s;ts intere&s;t. His people are his <HI>an|nointed ones, and they mu&s;t doe them no harme. Zach.</HI> 12. 3. <HI>Jeru&s;alem is a bur|den&s;ome &s;tone; all that burden them&s;elves with it, &s;hall be cut in pieces, though all</HI>
<PB N="143" REF="88">
<HI>the people of the world be gathered together again&s;t it.</HI></P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><P>U&s;e 1. of In&s;truct.</P>
<P>See the cau&s;e of our turns.</P></NOTE> 1. See the cau&s;e of the great turns that have been among us: Former ages can|not parallel our &s;tories; you know how God hath &s;et up his Throne for Judge|ment, and called the great and mighty ones to the barre, and cut them off. And oh! that now the&s;e who yet remaine would turn their eyes hither, and &s;ee (though it be late fir&s;t) &s;ee the <HI>true cau&s;e</HI> that cracked all former greatne&s;&s;e, and be humbled; confe&s;&s;e their &s;ins in their de|&s;olations; and if they cannot &s;ee their fins as cro&s;s to God, let them abhor them as enemies to their own State. Oh! that they would accept of this coun&s;el, <HI>To breake off their &s;ins by righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e, and their iniquities by turning to the Lord, that &s;o (if po&s;&s;ible) there may be a return of their tranquillity.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">U&s;e 2. of Admoni|tion.</NOTE> Suffer I be&s;eech you yet once more a word of admonition; the Lord make it precious healing balme to you.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">1. Watch the heart in lawful things.</NOTE> 1. Watch over your hearts in lawful things, <HI>and with all keeping keep your hearts therein.</HI> Its lawful &s;urely to eate and drink; and for you to eate of the fat and drink of the &s;weet, yea to fea&s;t your &s;elves daily: But tis not lawful <HI>to feed without feare, Jude</HI> 12. <HI>Eccle&s;.</HI> 10. 16. <HI>Wo unto thee oh Land when thy Princes eate in the morning.</HI> Its lawful to eate, but not to
<PB N="144" REF="89">
eate un&s;ea&s;onably; <HI>Prov.</HI> 31. 4. <HI>Its not for Kings O Lemuel, its not for Kings to drink wine, or Princes &s;trong drink; lea&s;t they drink and forget the law, and pervert the judgement of any of the afflicted:</HI> its not for Kings &s;o to drink as their drinking &s;hall make them light and frollick, &s;o as to forget the law, the afflicted and their cau&s;e. <HI>Math.</HI> 11. 8. <HI>They that weare &s;oft cloathing,</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>wearing them daily, are in Kings hou&s;es:</HI> But we read withal, <HI>Zach.</HI> 1. 8. <HI>I will puni&s;h the Princes of the Kings children, and all that are cloath|ed with &s;trange apparel.</HI> If the &s;oftne&s;&s;e of their apparel betoken a greater &s;oftne&s;&s;e of their temper, it is not their being in Kings hou&s;es &s;hall &s;ave them from puni&s;h|ment. <HI>Strange apparel:</HI> Jun. <HI>Indumento alienigenarum:</HI> apparel in imitation of &s;trangers, people of another Nation, when they frame them&s;elves into the garbe of a Conquering people, whether <HI>Egyptian</HI> or <HI>Babylonian,</HI> and te&s;tifie their &s;pirit by their habit: <HI>Omnes qui exoticis ve&s;tibus le|vitatem animi prodebant. Drufius.</HI> Such who betrayed the levity of their minds, by their phanta&s;tical apparel: <HI>Probabile e&s;t,</HI> &s;aith <HI>Calvin, Aulicos &s;tulta affectatione muta&s;&s;e ve&s;tes:</HI> Its likely the Courtiers out of a fooli&s;h imitation changed their garments. I would our Courtiers were not guilty of new&punc;fangled fa&s;hions, and gari&s;h garments, paintings and powder|ings,
<PB N="145" REF="89">
&s;pots of beauty, and naked brea&s;ts, opening their &s;hop-windows as if their mode&s;ty were put to &s;aile. You may que&s;tionle&s;&s;e, &s;ometimes relaxe your minde from your &s;erious and weighty employments, and follow your Recrea|tions and Plea&s;ures: but take heed of being <HI>lovers of plea&s;ure;</HI> that will make you <HI>poor men, Prov.</HI> 21. 17. and to be, <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>lovers of plea|&s;ures</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">2 <HI>Tim.</HI> 3. 4.</NOTE><HI>more then lovers of God,</HI> will render you wor&s;e then poor, even wicked men: beware your plea&s;ures be not your ma|&s;ters; for then you will &s;erve <HI>diver&s;e lu&s;ts</HI> as <HI>well as plea&s;ures. Tit.</HI> 3. 3. <HI>Malus &s;i re|gat, &s;ervus e&s;t tot dominorum quot vitiorum;</HI> One &s;aith, If an evil man rule, he is &s;er|vant of &s;o many Ma&s;ters as he hath vices. Look on the plea&s;ures of the fle&s;h as the bane of your &s;pirits, and your Courtly pompe to be but &s;o much pageantry: When <HI>Agrippa, Acts</HI> 25. 23. is &s;aid to come <HI>with great pompe,</HI> its in the Greek, <GAP DESC="foreign">, with a great phancy; great pompe is no more. Worthy is the record of that great and good Courtier <HI>Mo&s;es, Heb.</HI> 11. 25. who <HI>cho&s;e rather to &s;uf|fer affliction with the people of God, then to enjoy the plea&s;ures of &s;in for a &s;ea&s;on.</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Beware of &s;elf-love.</NOTE></P>
<P N="2">2. Beware of covetous &s;elf-love, the canker of publick places. <HI>Exod.</HI> 18. 21. The men there to be cho&s;en Rulers, mu&s;t be&punc; <HI>hating&punc; covetou&s;ne&s;&s;e.</HI> When <HI>Samuel</HI>
<PB N="146" REF="90">
would deter the people from a King, 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 8. 11, 12. He pleads, <HI>He will take your &s;ons for him&s;elfe,</HI> for <HI>his</HI> hor&s;men to run before <HI>his</HI> Chariots, to care <HI>his</HI> ground, to reap <HI>his</HI> Harve&s;t; its all <HI>His, His, His;</HI> wicked Princes pretend pub|lick tran&s;actions and nece&s;&s;ities, when the maine is to fill their own Coffers; they &s;pare neither their own children, nor &s;trangers, bnt exact their Cu&s;tomes from them, <HI>Math.</HI> 17. 25. But exceeding ter|rible is that of <HI>Jeremiah</HI> to &s;uch, <HI>Jer.</HI> 17. 11. <HI>He that getteth riches and not by right, &s;hall leave them in the mid&s;t of his dayes, and at his end &s;hall be a foole.</HI></P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> Exalt not your &s;elves un|duely.</NOTE> 3. Exalt not your &s;elves unduely, for that will bring you down, <HI>Prov.</HI> 16. 18. <HI>Pride goeth before de&s;truction, and an haughty &s;pirit before a full:</HI> proud &s;peeches, ge|&s;tures, carriages, &s;hould be abhorred by you. Its one thing to keep a due di&s;tance, another thing to be proud: Its one thing to maintaine your place, and another thing to be haughty. It was the fault of good <HI>Hezekiah,</HI> that his heart was lifted up; I but it was his great commenda|tion, that he <HI>humbled him&s;elfe for the pride of his heart.</HI> Be not wi&s;e in your own eyes, but give eare to the wi&s;dome of the Ancient, and the petitions of the poor.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> Anger misbecomes you.</NOTE> 4. Anger and malice misbecome any wi&s;e man, much more a Prince. <HI>Ira&s;uror brevis e&s;t;</HI> Anger is a &s;hort madne&s;&s;e, and
<PB N="147" REF="90">
malice is illwill continued, and both &s;hould be bani&s;hed from you. How fa|mous was <HI>Mo&s;es</HI> for his government, and yet <HI>the meeke&s;t man of all the earth? Perit judicium quando res tran&s;it in affectum;</HI> you will lo&s;e your judgement when your af|fections are di&s;tempered, <HI>Eccl.</HI> 7. 9. <HI>Anger re&s;teth in the bo&s;ome of fools;</HI> and folly &s;hould be far from them that govern. How ill did <HI>Sauls</HI> anger become him, when he calls <HI>Jonathan the &s;on of a perver&s;e rebellious woman?</HI> 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 20. 30. and as little will it become Princes now.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>5.</HI> Forget not others kindne&s;&s;e to you. <HI>2</HI> Chron. <HI>24. 22.</HI></NOTE> 5. Forget not the kindne&s;&s;e of others to you, and your engagements and pro|mi&s;es to them. Rulers mu&s;t be <HI>men of truth, Exod.</HI> 18. 2<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">. True in performing their promi&s;es. Its a brand on King <HI>Joa&s;h</HI> that he <HI>remembred not the kindne&s;&s;e that Jehojada had done unto him, but &s;lew his &s;on Zechariah. Prov.</HI> 17. 7. <HI>Excellent &s;peech becometh not a foole, much le&s;se does lying lips a Prince.</HI> Ingratitude, and un|faithfulne&s;&s;e, is bad in any, but wor&s;e in a Prince, who have wherewith to reward good &s;ervice, but do not.</P>
<P N="6"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>6.</HI> Look that fol|lowers prove not flatterers.</NOTE> 6. Look well that your Courtiers, and Coun&s;ellers prove not flatterers: <GAP DESC="foreign">: flatterers are Crows, <HI>Prov.</HI> 26. 28. A flattering mouth worketh ruine. How many &s;uch mouthes are a|bout great ones, and how much do they worke their ruine? 1 <HI>Kings</HI> 22. 12. All
<PB N="148" REF="91">
the <HI>Prophets</HI> prophe&s;ied &s;aying, <HI>Goe up to Ramoth Gilead and pro&s;per:</HI> but that pro&s;|perity <HI>was his death, v.</HI> 37. <HI>for the King died.</HI> Its the unhappine&s;&s;e of great ones that they have few to &s;peak truth to them; men rather &s;eeke to plea&s;e the humour of great men, or to &s;erve them&s;elves upon them, then to &s;peak plaine and faithfully to them.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="14" TYPE="chapter">
<HEAD>CHAP. XIV.</HEAD>
<ARGUMENT>
<P>&V;nfolds the &s;eventh Po&s;ition, That Princes being wicked, people grow wicked too; becau&s;e. <HI>1.</HI> The power and place of Princes, pre&s;ent wicked|ne&s;&s;e under another hue. <HI>2.</HI> Then good Laws are not executed. <HI>3.</HI> Then wickedne&s;&s;e is e&s;tabli&s;hed by a Law. <HI>4.</HI> Becau&s;e then the Prei&s;ts fall in. <HI>5.</HI> People follow examples of great ones. &V;&s;es.</P>
</ARGUMENT>
<P>ALI &s;in is of a &s;preading nature, and the &s;ins of Princes are <HI>mo&s;t</HI> &s;preading; their &s;ins undoe their power (as you heard) I, and their <HI>people</HI> too, as appears in the &s;eventh Po&s;ition.</P>
<P><PB N="149" REF="91">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. <HI>7.</HI> Wicked Prince, wicked people.</NOTE> <HI>Princes being wicked, people grow wicked too, Prov.</HI> 29. 12. <HI>If a Ruler hearken to lyes, all his &s;ervants are wicked:</HI> he will not want tho&s;e that will feed a lying, proud, uncleane humour in them. A wicked King makes a wicked Court, the Court infects the City, and the City the Country, and one Country another. Sin is an epidemical plague, and &s;oon &s;preads the infection; and the &s;tronge&s;t infection is from the highe&s;t powers as appears, Becau&s;e,</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. <HI>1.</HI> Wickedne&s;&s;e in Princes comes in another dre&s;&s;e.</NOTE> 1. Wickedne&s;&s;e in men of high place is mi&s;repre&s;ented to the people; it comes to them in another dre&s;&s;e, and under ano|ther hue then indeed it hath; people are &s;o fooli&s;h to conceit all well that great ones do. <HI>Joh.</HI> 7. 48. <HI>Do any of the Rulers believe?</HI> they thought unbeliefe no &s;in, becau&s;e the Rulers believed not. Pride in Princes is lookt on but as <HI>Stateline&s;se;</HI> their Luxury, living freely; their Wan|tonne&s;&s;e, Court plea&s;ure and merri|ment; and their Oppre&s;&s;ion, their praero|gative: What we would abominate co|ming from meaner per&s;ons, we fall down and magnifie in them. We read 2 <HI>Kings</HI> 3. 36. <HI>what&s;oevor the King did, plea&s;ed the people;</HI> and if he do wickedly, that will plea&s;e them too; and they are ready to fall in with their wickedne&s;&s;e. <NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. <HI>2.</HI> Good La<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> are not ex<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">|cuted.</NOTE></P>
<P N="2">2. Wicked Princes leave Gods Law unexecuted, and wickedne&s;&s;e unpuni&s;hed; and this layes the rains on the neck of the
<PB N="150" REF="92">
peoples lu&s;ts; what are laws to them if not executed? who would not be during in &s;in, when he can e&s;cape free? Under-Magi&s;trates move according to the na|ture and motion of the Supreame: If his motion be irregular, theirs will prove excentrical; if the one &s;ell places, the other will &s;ell ju&s;tice: None look after Magi&s;trates, and they as little look to their unde -officers; and &s;o, all wicked|ne&s;&s;e hath a free cour&s;e.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><P>Rea&s;. <HI>3.</HI> Wickedne&s;s is e&s;tabli|&s;hed as by a Law.</P>
<P><HI>P&s;al.</HI> 94. 20.</P></NOTE> 3. Becau&s;e we finde wickedne&s;&s;e <HI>e&s;ta|bli&s;hed then as by a law,</HI> and that opens all the fountains of helli&s;h deeps, and makes a deluge of &s;in to drown men in. When wickedne&s;&s;e gets the Throne, and mi&s;cheife is framed by a Law; then as it is <HI>ver&s;e</HI> 21. wo be to the &s;ouls of the righ|teous, and the blood of the innocent: <HI>Honor virtutis praemium:</HI> Honour &s;hould be the reward of virtue; but when it is mi&s;placed, and become the reward of vil|lany, not virtue; when prophanation of holy times, and things, &s;hall be u&s;hered in with <HI>his Maje&s;ties declaration</HI> and book of &s;ports: now he is &s;carce a good &s;ub|ject reputed, that is not a good <HI>dancer</HI> and &s;porter then. When rogui&s;h Stage|players &s;hall pa&s;&s;e as his Maje&s;ties &s;er|vants, who dares hinder the actings of their wickedne&s;&s;e? and will not people follow it fa&s;ter then they can act? yes, and it may be, out act them too? yes &s;urely.</P>
<P N="4"><PB N="151" REF="92">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. <HI>4.</HI> Becau&s;e of National Prie&s;ts.</NOTE> 4. Becau&s;e of the <HI>Prei&s;ts</HI> of the Nation. It hath &s;till been in all times like Prince, like Prei&s;t; Kings had their Bi&s;hops, Bi&s;hops their Chaplains, Chaplains their Friends and acquaintance to cry up his &s;acred Maje&s;ty, his ble&s;&s;ed memory, and happy reigne: when if &s;ifted. we &s;hall not finde much truth in any of their a&s;|&s;ertions. <HI>Ahab</HI> had his Prophets crying <HI>Goe up to Ramoth Gilead and pro&s;per,</HI> when God neither commanded the going up, nor promi&s;ed the pro&s;perity. Will it not promote ungodline&s;&s;e when the Lea|ders of the people cau&s;e them to erre, and commend &s;uch bad examples to them? like Prince and like Prei&s;t, and <HI>Ho&s;.</HI> 4. 9. <HI>like Prei&s;t, like people.</HI></P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. <HI>5.</HI> People are led by ex|ample.</NOTE> 5. People are mightily led by example, and no example &s;o potent as that of great ones; men affect to plea&s;e them, hoping they may by their greatne&s;&s;e do for them; or fearing if they conforme not to them, it may prove their prejudice. <HI>Regis ad exemplum totus componitur orbis,</HI> all the World is moulded by the example of their Kings: What &s;hoales of Drunkards will wallow in their mire, and reele in your &s;treets, when the Prince <HI>loves bottels of Wine?</HI> Good God! how will men &s;tretch their wits to invent new oaths and cur&s;es, when the <HI>Prince is a Bla&s;phemer:</HI> wickedne&s;&s;e &s;eems to come off with a grace from the&s;e Grandees; and how
<PB N="152" REF="93">
punctually will gracele&s;&s;e ones follow their perver&s;e wayes?</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> Rulers have much to an&s;wer for.</NOTE> 1. How much have &s;inful Rulers to an&s;wer for, not onely their own &s;ins, but other mens al&s;o? how many <HI>&s;ons of B<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">lial</HI> do they bring forth by their example, and multiply guiltine&s;&s;e on their own ac|counts? Princes implead people for facti|on, &s;edition, tumults and riots, and not without cau&s;e: But may not people in|dite them for bad example, for &s;etting the blurred coppies that they write after? and may not Princes blame them&s;elves for making the people fir&s;t wicked and then rebellious? Again &s;ee</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Exam|ples move much.</NOTE> 2. Examples move much, <HI>plus movent quam miracula,</HI> yea more then miracles. Miracles are cau&s;e of pre&s;ent wonder; But are &s;oon forgotten; examples are repea|ted and daily before us: Example is a &s;hort way to good or evil: Oh! then look a|bout you, whoever you are, that are a|bove others. Magi&s;trates, Mini&s;ters, Cap|tains, Parents and Ma&s;ters of Families; you of all others, &s;hould be <HI>burning and &s;hining lights, holding out the word of truth in your godly conver&s;ation</HI> to your people and &s;ouldiers; Husbands, Parents, Ma|&s;ters, ob&s;eve your duty in your dignity, and &s;o deport your &s;<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">lves, as your Con|&s;orts, Children, Servants, may &s;ee their <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> Wi<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ked|ne&s;&s;e is in <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ur <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 word">.</NOTE>rule in your actions.</P>
<P N="3">3. Take notice (People) what great
<PB N="153" REF="93">
wickedne&s;&s;e is rooted and rivetted in you; you could not take that impre&s;&s;ion from evil example without (as you do) if you had not a <HI>body of &s;in</HI> within: oh thank your naughty hearts, for being &s;o &s;oon tainted. Satan comes to our Savi|our and <HI>findes nothing in him, Joh.</HI> 14&punc; 30. but in us he findes a &s;trong party for him. Indite your wicked, proud, pa&s;&s;ionate, uncleane, ungodly Natures, for your forwardne&s;&s;e, too too great forwardne&s;&s;e to follow what is evil; the theives with|in open to tho&s;e without, and both <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ob and &s;poile.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> Its ju&s;t that we &s;uffer from Princes.</NOTE> 4. La&s;tly, how ju&s;t is it that you &s;uf|fer from Princes, when you grow &s;inful from them? can you be content to fol|low them in evil, and be di&s;contented to receive evil from them? little doe you know how your following hardens and encourageth them in &s;in; they grow wor&s;e and wor&s;e, and you help to make them &s;o: no wonder if you finde them bitter to you, when they finde you wicked again&s;t God.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="15" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="154" REF="94">
<HEAD>CHAP. XV.</HEAD>
<ARGUMENT>
<P>Opens the eight Po&s;ition; namely, That abu&s;e of Power and wickedne&s;se of People, adapt to Civil War, as ap|pears. <HI>1.</HI> In that pride in Princes produceth pride in people. <HI>2.</HI> Pride introduceth Luxury. <HI>3</HI> Luxury po|verty. <HI>4.</HI> Poverty di&s;content. <HI>5.</HI> Di&s;content meditation on their pre&s;|&s;ures. <HI>6.</HI> That meditation an un|willingne&s;&s;e to payments for publick &s;ervice. <HI>7.</HI> They for&s;ake their Trades. <HI>8.</HI> They feare more then they feele. <HI>9.</HI> Incendiaries aug|ment their feare. <HI>10.</HI> The&s;e incen|diaries have many followers. &V;&s;e.</P>
</ARGUMENT>
<P>YOu have heard of Power abu&s;ed, <HI>Chap.</HI> 12. and how the &s;ins of Prin|ces tend to break that power, <HI>Chap.</HI> 13. and that when Princes are wicked, people prove &s;o al&s;o. Let us now &s;ee all the&s;e <NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. <HI>8.</HI> Abu&s;es in Princes &amp; people, ad|apt to Civil War.</NOTE>joyned together in this eighth Po&s;ition.</P>
<P><HI>That abu&s;e of power in Princes, and wickedne&s;&s;e in people, adapt to Civil War. Rehoboams</HI> abu&s;e of power cau&s;ed the ten
<PB N="155" REF="94">
Tribes to rend from him; and the wic|kedne&s;&s;e of the Benjamites cau&s;ed the people of <HI>I&s;rael</HI> to war again&s;t them.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> It doth &s;o with good men.</NOTE> 1. Abu&s;e of power &s;ticks much upon &s;ome &s;erious and godly &s;pirits; it did &s;o on our Worthies in that <HI>long Parliameut:</HI> Worthies I call them; for truly <HI>they did worthily in their time:</HI> and we know how &s;en&s;ible they were of the Supreame a|bu&s;ed mi&s;led <HI>Power,</HI> how oft they peti|tioned, how long they treated, and trea|ted, waited and waited, and at la&s;t were forced to defend them&s;elves: In which defence, God and their con&s;ciences, and we can te&s;tifie, how tenderly they pro|ceeded, and how unwillingly they were drawn to act at la&s;t as they did.</P>
<P>It will not &s;tand with the wi&s;dome of &s;ome men to &s;ee the <HI>Laws</HI> (which are <HI>the wi&s;dome of our Ance&s;tors put forth with power and Authority)</HI> to &s;ee them I &s;ay, trampled upon, and fooli&s;h &s;elf-will exalted:</P>
<P>The courage of others cannot brooke unju&s;t commands over their per&s;ons and demands of their e&s;tates. Some beleeve God hath inve&s;ted them and theirs with a liberty which they cannot lightly part withall; but are tyed to maintaine. Others conceive they are betru&s;ted with publicke intere&s;t, and therefore dare not but &s;peake plainly, and act boldly.</P>
<P>Some feare they &s;hould offend, by <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">in|full &s;ilence and &s;ubjection.</P>
<P><PB N="156" REF="95">
Other feare they &s;hould be unfaithfull to tho&s;e in power to &s;ee them abu&s;e it, and not let them know it:</P>
<P>All are &s;en&s;ible of power abu&s;ed, would faine have abu&s;ed power rectified; but if to the abu&s;e of power, there be added per|ver&s;ne&s;&s;e, and &s;upremacy of will, cea&s;e to wonder if you meet with a di&s;po&s;ition to warr, yea the wor&s;e of warrs, <HI>a civil warre.</HI></P>
<P>The&s;e wi&s;e, couragious, con&s;cientious Men, are leading men, and have many fol|lowers; their good affection to their Countrey being &s;o oft tryed and known, obliges their countryes hearts to them: How many have bin made wi&s;e by their wi&s;doms, and in&s;tructed by them in prin|ciples of power and &s;tate, which they ne|ver knew, and begin to be acquainted with the terriers and boundaryes of prero|gative and liberty?</P>
<P>Courage is not confin'd to leaders, but is that which is competible to tho&s;e under command, who &s;hare in it as well as they that lead them. Our great Councell found that if they d<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">r&s;t lead, they &s;hould not, nor did not, want followers, yea <HI>fighters</HI> too: I think never nation had &s;uch a Par|liament, nor Parliament &s;uch &s;ouldiers. It was our happine&s;&s;e, we had &s;o many con&s;cientious, as well as couragious <HI>men:</HI> and &s;urely as courage, &s;o con&s;cience pre|vailed with many, yea exceeding many,
<PB N="157" REF="95">
both commanders and commanded: How glad were many poore, precious &s;oules, to &s;ee tho&s;e whom they had cho&s;en, to make lawes for them, to endeavour to keepe a good cou&s;cience toward God and toward Men, towards Authority and tho&s;e under it! And &s;ure it could not but re|joyce the hearts of tho&s;e con&s;cientious worthyes, to finde &s;o many to love &amp; pray for them night and day: let them looke to their Con&s;cience, in what they com|mand&punc; for they &s;till found a ready con&s;ci|ence in them to obey. How many dayes and nights too, have bin &s;pent on one &s;ide in councell, on the other in fa&s;ting and prayer! oh the frequent and fervent mee|tings and prayers, that we have had, and now reape the an&s;wers of! what a mighty &s;pirit of grace did God poure out on Pa|&s;tors and people, on Captains and &s;ouldi|ers; on Coun&s;els and congregations, that we may truely &s;ay, Never &s;uch a praying Parliament, a praying city, a praying ar|my, and a praying people as we have had; and all this occa&s;ioned by <HI>abu&s;e of power.</HI> See the height of Gods goodne&s;&s;e, that can and doth bring light out of dark|ne&s;&s;e, &s;weetne&s;&s;e out of bitterne&s;&s;e, and good out of evill: little did tho&s;e then in power intend to draw forth &s;uch a &s;pirit of prayer; but though they <HI>intended evil,</HI> God <HI>turned it to good:</HI> But all this while we <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Its &s;o in bad men.</NOTE>&s;peak but of one party. <HI>Nullu~ bellum utrin&abque;</HI>
<PB N="158" REF="96">
<HI>ju&s;tum.</HI> No war, &amp; &s;o no civil war can be ju&s;t on both &s;ides. Its the mi&s;erable fate of war, that be&s;ides all the mi&s;ery of it, there is unavoidably <HI>iniquity</HI> cleaving to one &s;ide, or other. We have yet bin &s;peaking of the better &s;ide; but let us looke, and you will finde folly as well as wi&s;dome, and wick|edne&s;ie as well as con&s;cience, nay more, and in more, to adapt to civill war: for</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> Pride in Princes produceth pride in people.</NOTE> Pride in Princes produceth pride in people: It inrageth their hearts, when they &s;ee they are not owned as Brethren, but abu&s;ed as &s;laves, 1 <HI>Kings</HI> 12. 13. <HI>Rehoboam an&s;wers the people roughly:</HI> and <HI>ver&s;.</HI> 16. the people return as bad an an&s;wer, <HI>What por|tion have we in David? and what inheritance in the &s;on of Je&s;se? To your tents, O I&s;rael.</HI> How doe they grudge the unworthy flat|tering Courtier, the ingro&s;&s;ing of their princes love, which they &s;hould &s;hare in, and not have all contracted and centred in a favorite? How did their &s;tomacke ri&s;e to &s;ee vile per&s;ons preferred, and their bet|ters &s;lighted, and laide a&s;ide?</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Pride brings in Luxury.</NOTE> Pride introduceth Luxury: when mens minds are high, then they thinke how to live high, in their dyet, apparrell, plea|&s;ures, recreations, entertainments: how wel might many live if their minds were &s;ui|ted to their &s;tate, a low minde, with a low &s;tate! How happily do many live, that ne|ver live to &s;ee a hundred pound of their own together! but when Men a&s;pire to be
<PB N="159" REF="96">
like tho&s;e above them, when their &s;tate wil not bear it, it utterly breakes them.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> Luxury begets po|verty.</NOTE> 3. Luxury of people introduceth poverty: <HI>He that loveth plea&s;ure, &s;hall be a poor man; and he that loveth wine and oyl, &s;hall not be rich, Prov.</HI> 21. 17. When men indulge their palates, gratifie their ap|petites, exceed in plea&s;ures, gaming, ap|parrel; poverty comes on them like an armed man.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> Poverty di&s;content.</NOTE> 4. Poverty makes people di&s;conten|ted, and tho&s;e mo&s;t who have been rich, and have made them&s;elves poor: Now they think of what they had, but have not what they had, but &s;pent, and &s;pent unrea&s;onably: Now they would be glad of that which they profu&s;ely lavi&s;hed out to releive their extreamity; they <HI>cannot worke,</HI> and to beg <HI>they are a&s;hamed;</HI> and thus they pine and whine in di&s;content. <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>5.</HI> Di&s;con|tented peo|ple medi|tate on their pre&s;|&s;ures.</NOTE></P>
<P N="5">5. A di&s;contented people meditate their pre&s;&s;urs be&s;ide their poverty; and begin to think what hath been done by &s;uch as them&s;elves in former times; and what? have they lo&s;t their Engli&s;h blood and &s;pirits? and &s;hall they betray them|&s;elves and their po&s;terity into &s;lavery? for &s;o they call due obedience. No, no, never they; it &s;hall never be &s;aid &s;o of them: and pre&s;ently in this di&s;content conclude them&s;elves &s;trong enough in their <HI>multitude,</HI> how weak &s;o ever other wayes.</P>
<P N="6"><PB N="160" REF="97">
<NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>6.</HI> Then payments for publick u&s;e, are cryed down.</NOTE> 6. All payments for publick u&s;e (how nece&s;&s;ary and rea&s;onable &s;o ever) are de|cryed and op<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">o&s;ed: they conclude them|&s;elves oppre&s;&s;ed, and not pittied; bur|thened and not ea&s;ed. 1 <HI>Kings</HI> 12. 18. <HI>Re|hoboam &s;ent Adoram who was over the Tri|bute, and they &s;toned him with &s;tones that he died.</HI> New Cu&s;tomes, Impo&s;t, Leavies, Ce&s;&s;es, Taxes, and Exci&s;e, do much re|gret upon them; and were it not for fear, would never be paid. Tho&s;e that appear or &s;peak for the&s;e payments, they are &s;trait way condemned as common adver|&s;aries of publick Liberty, and friends to Tyranny.</P>
<P N="7"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>7.</HI> People grow weary of their Trades.</NOTE> 7. People grow lazie, and weary of their Trades, and now cry, away, away with following their Arts, Callings, and Occupations, which peace had trained them up to, and improved them in, and wherein God had ble&s;&s;ed them, to main|taine them&s;elves and their families: The&s;e they look upon now as poor and low wayes; and determine that its bet|ter be marching, loytering, plundering abroad, then at home &s;titching, weaving, plowing, and &s;uch like.</P>
<P N="8">8. They feele much want, and feare <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>8.</HI> They feele much; but feare more.</NOTE>more; and that drives them on to a de|&s;paire, and de&s;peration to a &s;turdine&s;&s;e of &s;pirit, and cro&s;&s;ne&s;&s;e of re&s;olution; <HI>Pr<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">|&s;tat perire &s;emel quam quotidie:</HI> If the wor&s;t come to the wor&s;t, its better to
<PB N="161" REF="97">
peri&s;h once then daily: things are bad now, and will be wor&s;e; we may com|plaine, but we look for no redre&s;&s;e; bet|ter die then &s;tarve, once then ever, &s;pee|dily then lingringly.</P>
<P N="9"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>9.</HI> There be mauy In|cendiaries.</NOTE> 9. There be many Incendiaries to aug|ment their feares: All Ages and Coun|tries have bred &s;uch crafty ones, who love and live in troubled waters: Now is their time to plot and plead, to tell tho&s;e who are rich, that the <HI>State</HI> will pill and poll them, &s;o as to leave them poor e|nough. They per&s;wade poor ones, that they cannot be wor&s;e then they are; they have nothing to lo&s;e, and they may gain &s;omething by changes; alterations will make them rich; they di&s;til into &s;ome mens mindes, that Government is but &s;ome mens policy to keep them&s;elves in power, and others in feare; and why may not they be as able to rule others, as others them?</P>
<P N="10"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>10.</HI> The&s;e Incendiarys have many followers.</NOTE> 10. The&s;e Incendiaries have many fol|lowers; they meet with many that &s;ucke in greedily their di&s;cour&s;e, and are very credulous of their flattering whi&s;pers. How much do the&s;e beutifews work up their di&s;ciples to a rage? and if they can highten that rage into a tumult, and tu|mult to a farther mi&s;chiefe, they think them&s;elves gallant men, and they have acted their parts well enough. Now ambitious men, who thought all this
<PB N="162" REF="98">
while that they have been unduely kept from honour, pirk up them&s;elves, as ha|ving a &s;ea&s;on to ri&s;e and head a di&s;con|tented multitude.</P>
<P>Now follows a u&s;e to Princes, to Peo|ple, to All.</P>
<P N="1">1. To Princes you are not &s;trong in your <NOTE PLACE="marg">&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> To Princes.</NOTE>power, but in the good u&s;e of it; you are apt to cry out of the people that they are factious, &s;editious, mutinous, and it may be they are &s;o; but are you free? are you guiltle&s;&s;e? have not you tempted them thereto by your unju&s;t dealing? <HI>Pharoah</HI> complains of the <HI>I&s;raelites; You are idle, you are idle;</HI> but never ea&s;ed their burdens. When people are &s;tubborn, refractory, giddy, and di&s;obedient to|ward you, may not you then recall your di&s;obedience to <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> and injuries to them? and conclude, God is ju&s;t, though the people be wicked and unthankful? No marvel if they fall &s;hort in obeying, when you exceed in commanding: what wonder if they pitty and &s;eek to help them&s;elves, when their <HI>&s;hepherds do not pitty them?</HI> You take it ill, and ju&s;tly you may, that men &s;peak evil of you, and your government, and you call it <HI>Trea&s;on;</HI> but withal examine, do not you Lord it over them, with a <HI>Sic volo, &s;ic jubeo, volu|mus &amp; mandamus?</HI> We will and com|mand; and it may be with more will then rea&s;on; do not you give them ju&s;t cau&s;e to complaine?</P>
<P N="2"><PB N="163" REF="98">
<NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> To peo|ple.</NOTE> 2. A word to the people; You cry out of Wars, cruel Wars, the wor&s;t of Wars, Wars in our own bowels: our Wives are husbandle&s;&s;e, our Children fatherle&s;&s;e, our Fathers childele&s;&s;e, our Hou&s;es de&s;olate, our E&s;tate wa&s;ted; Tra|ding decayes, but Ce&s;&s;es increa&s;e; we have &s;pent &s;o much blood, and yet no peace: we thought now and then, by this or that meanes, by Parliament, Council or Army, we &s;hould have been &s;ettled; but we finde we are far from it. Oh! the times! hard times, evil times, never wor&s;e! But all this while, you forget that you have made them &s;o. Your wickedne&s;&s;e, unthankfulne&s;&s;e, pride, luxury, have &s;et the hearts of Gover|nours again&s;t you, and &s;et you one a|gain&s;t another. <HI>James tells us, Jam.</HI> 4. 1. <HI>Wars and fightings come from your lu&s;ts that war in your members.</HI> How much, how exceeding much better were it (if you mu&s;t be fighting) to take up the ancient Chri&s;tian weapons, of <HI>Prayer</HI> and <HI>Teares,</HI> to implead and per&s;ecute your &s;ins. Now followes a word to all.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">&V;&s;e <HI>3.</HI> To all to admire God in his good|ne&s;&s;e.</NOTE> Admire with all admiration the riches of Gods goodne&s;&s;e; that though tho&s;e who have been in power have abu&s;ed it, and them&s;elves; and tho&s;e under power, have abu&s;ed the powers they &s;hould be under, and their liberty too: That yet,
<PB N="164" REF="99">
yet, God in much mercy hath re&s;trained &s;o far the rage and actings of men, that we have not daily in&s;urrections: and that although there have been Armies formed in Scotland, Ireland, England, he hath &s;ubdued and &s;cattered them; and while I am now writing, behold many re|newed and reboubled cau&s;es of admira|tion; that though there have been (I wi&s;h I could not &s;ay among the Saints) a froward, petti&s;h, grumbling, di&s;con|tented &s;pirit, boyling over with unruly pa&s;&s;ions, and &s;ome breaking forth into horrid riots, as in <HI>Salisbury:</HI> yet God hath &s;cattered and &s;uppre&s;&s;ed them; <HI>Ble&s;&s;ed, for ever ble&s;&s;ed be his Name.</HI> Oh! that all, high and low, Governours and governed, would follow after righteou&s;|ne&s;s, and judgement; <HI>That, that,</HI> would be the &s;tability of their rule and peace; <HI>Fiat ju&s;titia ne ruat Mundus:</HI> Let ju&s;tice run down like a &s;treame, and righteou&s;|ne&s;s like a mighty torrent; then &s;hall our peace be abundant, and our pro&s;perity be increa&s;ed: Who ever lo&s;t by doing well, or gained by evil doing? Gaine is what remaines to a man, <HI>omni damno deducto,</HI> when all his lo&s;s is computed; Righte|ou&s;ne&s;s may &s;uffer for the pre&s;ent, but it will greatly advantage in the end.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="16" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="165" REF="99">
<HEAD>CHAP. XVI.</HEAD>
<ARGUMENT>
<P>Opens the ninth Po&s;ition, That Civil VVars cau&s;e fatal Turnes; which appears in that <HI>1.</HI> Government is de&s;troyed. <HI>2.</HI> Laws are not heard. <HI>3.</HI> Religion is &s;laine. <HI>4.</HI> Learning and Trading are dead. <HI>5.</HI> A rich people are made poor. <HI>6.</HI> No &s;afety to any. <HI>7.</HI> Plantations are nipt in the bud. <HI>8.</HI> The victory is to be lamen|ted. &V;&s;es.</P>
</ARGUMENT>
<P>COncord and agreement is the health of a State; and when a State is in health, their little, yea their lea&s;t things grow, and grow pro&s;perou&s;ly: <HI>Concordia parvae res cre&s;unt;</HI> their little number and learning, their little e&s;tate and traffick, yea their religion and good manners, all grow: But &s;edition is the <HI>&s;ickne&s;&s;e</HI> that infeebles their &s;trength, &s;o that no per&s;on in his place can well performe his duty; it pines away their comfort, and convul|&s;ions them into an irregular motion: <HI>&s;e|dition</HI> doth &s;o much; I, but <HI>Civil War</HI> is a &s;ickne&s;&s;e unto death, yea the <HI>death</HI> it
<PB N="166" REF="100">
&s;elfe of a <HI>Common-wealth.</HI> Hence your ninth Po&s;ition.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. <HI>9.</HI> Civil wars cau&s;e rui|nous Turnes.</NOTE> <HI>Civil Wars produce ruinous fatal Turnes and changes.</HI> Farewel all publick life, activity and comfort, when Civil wars prevaile. A State may live and live gal|lantly in a war-faring condition, as in <HI>Holland;</HI> l, but it is the States of the <HI>&V;ni|ted Provinces;</HI> Their arrows mu&s;t be tyed together among them&s;elves, though head|ed to wound their adver&s;aries. <HI>A King|dome divided again&s;t it &s;elfe cannot &s;tand.</HI> See this in the&s;e eight pa&s;sages en&s;uing.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">1. Govern|ment is then de|&s;troyed.</NOTE> 1. Civil war de&s;troyes government; That which you heard was &s;et up by <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> and &s;o much for the good of the World, is here taken away. We may ju&s;tly take up a bitter lamentation, to &s;ee the Magi&s;trate and Officers of ju&s;tice and peace to be de&s;pi&s;ed. <HI>Lam.</HI> 2. 6. <HI>In the indignation of his anger he hath de&s;pi&s;ed the King:</HI> here, here, is that &s;ad &s;tate of <HI>B<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">l|lum omnium contra omnes,</HI> a war of all a|gain&s;t all; as its &s;poken of <HI>I&s;hmael, Gen.</HI> 16. 12. <HI>His hand again&s;t every man, and every mans hand again&s;t him;</HI> &s;o here: but mo&s;t deplorable it is to &s;ee tho&s;e who beare the &s;word of ju&s;tice &s;lighted, put down, abu&s;ed. The honour of Citizens and people, is collected into their <HI>Magi|&s;trates, Judges,</HI> and Ju&s;tices of the Peace; but here in Civil wars, it is buried, laid in the du&s;t.</P>
<P N="2"><PB N="167" REF="100">
<NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Laws are then &s;ilent.</NOTE> 2. Equity and Laws, are not heard in Civil wars: Tho&s;e Laws that guide men to their edification and peace, are not regarded. <HI>Silent leges inter arma:</HI> The Laws are &s;ilent when weapons &s;peak.
<Q><L>&mdash;Barbarus Ho&s;tis</L>
<L>&V;t fera plus valeant legibus arma facit.</L></Q>
The barbarous &s;ouldier makes weapons more prevaile then Law: Let the law &s;peak never &s;o much rea&s;on, peace and profit, yet they &s;light it: Now will and lu&s;t is law, lawle&s;&s;e law! We pitty men in Bedlam, in their fren&s;y fits, deprived of rea&s;on, acting more like bea&s;ts then men: In Civil wars, <HI>in&s;aniunt omnes,</HI> all men are mad, cutting their own throats, &s;lay|ing the life of all their comforts at once. Laws are Gods wi&s;dome, found and held out by men for our good: but how little is God or man, their wi&s;dome or our own good regarded here? Nothing but oppre&s;&s;ion and unju&s;tice, pillaging and plundering is looked after. <HI>Terras A&s;traea reliquit. Judgement is turned away backward, and ju&s;tice &s;tandeth afar off; for truth is fallen in the &s;treet, and equity cannot enter.</HI></P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> Religi|on is &s;laine.</NOTE> 3. Civil wars &s;layes Religion and De|votion: <HI>Victa jacet pietas.</HI> You &s;hall meet with oathes, cur&s;ing, raging, rail|ing, but no prayer; they fight and de|&s;troy, but call not upon God.</P>
<LG>
<PB N="168" REF="101">
<L>&mdash;Fug&ecirc;re pudor, verumque, fide&s;que,</L>
<L>In quorum &s;ubiere locum, fraude&s;que, dolique,</L>
<L>In&s;idiaeque, &amp; vis, &amp; Amor &s;celeratus habendi.</L>
</LG>
<P>Mode&s;ty, truth and faithfulne&s;&s;e, are fled away, and cozenage and deceit are come in their place. Let the faithful &s;ervants of Chri&s;t cry aloud, and not &s;pare; tell them again and again of their &s;ins and tran&s;gre&s;&s;ions; yet <HI>who believeth their re|port?</HI> Let me allude to that in <HI>Lam.</HI> 2. 6. They violently take away the Taber|nacle, and de&s;troy the places of the A&s;|&s;embly, and cau&s;e the &s;olemne Fea&s;ts and Sabbaths to be forgotten in Sion, and no remembrance of any thing but of their Abominations.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> Learning and Trad|ing fall.</NOTE> 4. Down fall Learning and Trading, which maintaine the glory of a Nation: alas they are now quite dead. Study of Tongues and Arts, Philo&s;ophy, Divinity, the Secrets of Nature, the My&s;teries of the Go&s;pel, are now laid a&s;ide. The Me|thods of training up Children to be &s;er|viceable in Church or State, are under|valued. How exten&s;ive is this evil, that reacheth the child unborn, who hath cau&s;e to cur&s;e it, in that it &s;hall want good edu|cation? Men now had rather have bare &s;hops, then &s;hops well furni&s;hed; their &s;hops empty, rather then full for an ene|my: The Husbandman will not plow, when he hath not hopes to reape; or
<PB N="169" REF="101">
&s;ow tho&s;e feilds which he thinkes Hor&s;e or Foot will trample or eate up.</P>
<LG>
<L>&mdash;Non ullus aratro</L>
<L>Dignus honor, &s;quallent abductis arva colonis,</L>
<L>Et curvae rigidum falces conflantur in en&s;em.</L>
</LG>
<P>There is now no re&s;pect to the Plough; the feilds lie fallow, becau&s;e the hus|bandmen are taken away, and crooked &s;ickles are turned into cruel &s;words. Merchants are now embargoed, they can|not receive their returns, becau&s;e they are &s;urprized by the way; and they are un|willing to &s;end forth, lea&s;t they &s;hould adde to their &s;urprizers.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>5.</HI> It makes a rich peo|ple poor.</NOTE> 5. Civil wars make a rich people poor, and a &s;trong people weake: <HI>Divitiae &s;an|guis reipublicae.</HI> Riches are the blood of the Common-wealth; but the&s;e wars &s;trick &s;o in that veine, that the Common-wealth even bleeds to death. Trading being &s;topped, hinders the coming in of wealth; and Souldiers will take care to ea&s;e you of what you have: Its not any good cau&s;e, but money that many fight for. Souldiers of fortune, or rather without fortune, would not care if both &s;ides were beaten and undone; &s;o they might have to &s;will and pipe, to hunt and whore withal. Mi&s;take me not, I abhor to re|flect on hone&s;t Commanders or &s;ouldiers: I believe our Nation can produce the mo&s;t and be&s;t of them in the World; and
<PB N="170" REF="102">
which is a wonder, &s;ouldiers being u&s;ed to take away what is precious; God hath engaged us to that rank of men for all the precious things we do enjoy: But yet we know all are not &s;o; and that many Families can &s;peak by &s;ad expe|rience.</P>
<P N="6"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>6.</HI> No &s;afety to any.</NOTE> 6. No &s;afety to any in war: <HI>Nulla &s;alus bello;</HI> &s;o much is that great Law inverted, that now <HI>De&s;tructio populi &s;uprema Lex;</HI> Not the &s;afety, but the de&s;truction of the people, is the great Law. Their work and bu&s;ine&s;&s;e is to &s;lay and burne, pluck up and pull down, ruine and de&s;troy. How many Countries, Towns, Villages, Families and Per&s;ons, have we known de&s;olate and without inhabitant? How many &s;tately Edifices, the &s;eats of Noble Families, have we &s;een levelled with the ground, and the owners know them no more? Behold the ju&s;tice of an aven|ging God; do not &s;ome of the members of the greate&s;t Family that was in our Nation, wander like Vagabonds, from one Country to another, being burden|&s;ome where ever they become? and en|joy nothing of all that their Ance&s;tors po&s;&s;e&s;&s;ed, but po&s;&s;e&s;&s;ed their wicked|ne&s;&s;e. How many of both &s;ides complain that they are undone; &s;ome by their enemies, others by their friends? I know my &s;elfe where a good Gentleman &s;uf|fered more in one night, by &s;ome of his
<PB N="171" REF="102">
own party, then &s;ome of his neighbours paid in &s;ome years Ce&s;&s;es.</P>
<P N="7"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>7.</HI> Planta|tions are nipt in the bud.</NOTE> 7. <HI>Good Plantations</HI> which are the chil|dren of the Common-wealth, that &s;warme out from them and hive in a forreigne Country, how are they nipt in the bud, by Civil wars? They are gone from you, but &s;o as they cannot live well without you. Methinks I hear tho&s;e many thou&s;ands of precious &s;ouls in <HI>New England</HI> complaine, that they are forced to goe too like the Natives, almo&s;t <HI>naked,</HI> and all becau&s;e they cannot have cloaths from their friends, who were wont to &s;end to their refre&s;hment; and now they here need what formerly they &s;pared them. Harke, harke, the cry of <HI>Virginia, Barbados</HI> and other places, who &s;ay; God is good to us in giving us Commodities, but we have no Market for them; your wars ob&s;truct our returns. If you will not regard the cry among your &s;elves, yet let the cry of many thou&s;ands of <HI>us,</HI> &s;o many leagues off, ring a peale in your eares. Oh for Gods &s;ake, for truth &s;ake, for yonr ene|mies &s;ake, agree agree: Will you at once de&s;troy your &s;elves, and kill us at this di&s;tance? The Lord awaken your hearts, and &s;often them to a &s;peedy &s;etled com|po&s;ure.</P>
<P N="8"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>8.</HI> Victo|ries of civil wars, are much to be lamented.</NOTE> 8. La&s;tly, even the victories of Civil wars are much to be lamented. In other victories men u&s;e to ride in Triumph;
<PB N="172" REF="103">
but &s;ad, &s;ad is the Triumph here; whom have you overcome? not &s;trangers or for|reigners, but your Brethren; &s;uch whom formerly you lived and rejoyced with, bought and &s;old with; nay it may be fa&s;ted and prayed with; and now the&s;e you have cut off. How little did the <HI>Children</HI> of <HI>I&s;rael</HI> Triumph <HI>Judg.</HI> 21. 6? <HI>They repented them for Benjamin their Bro|ther, and &s;aid, There is a Tribe cut off from I&s;rael this day;</HI> &s;o true is that &s;aying, <HI>In bellis civilibus nihil mi&s;erius quamip&s;a Victo|ria.</HI> In Civil wars nothing more mi|&s;erable then the Victory it &s;elfe.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> Admire Gods good|ne&s;&s;e.</NOTE> 1. Learne hence to admire the excee|ding goodne&s;&s;e of Gods gracious provi|dence, that we who have been &s;o many years under &s;uch &s;evere wars, are yet <HI>a Nation;</HI> after &s;o many &s;eiges, pitched battles, daily fightings and skirmi&s;hes, in one, in another County, nay almo&s;t in all Counties of the Nation: and in one Nation after another; In Ireland, Scot|land and England, by Sea and by Land, that we are yet <HI>a live Nation;</HI> and a Na|tion enjoying much more Peace, Plenty, and Liberty too, I &s;ay more then other Nations; liberty of per&s;on, &s;tate, and which is mo&s;t of all, <HI>of Con&s;cience:</HI> Oh <HI>ble&s;&s;ed,</HI> for ever <HI>ble&s;sed be our gracious God,</HI> that although we have had this woful di|vi&s;ion, as yet he hath not given us up to the de&s;olation; to a wilderne&s;s &s;tate as
<PB N="173" REF="103">
the word <GAP DESC="foreign"> &s;ignifies, <HI>Math.</HI> 12. 25. Erect monuments of his mercy, and let your children know how great things God hath done in your dayes, for them and you.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Con&s;i|der how much we are engaged to tho&s;e now in power.</NOTE> 2. Con&s;ider how much you are enga|ged to tho&s;e in pre&s;ent power, by who&s;e care and coun&s;el, as in&s;truments in Gods hand, it comes to pa&s;&s;e that the&s;e wars break not forth again. We that live on the Sea Coa&s;t ob&s;erve, that though the winde be laid, and the &s;torme over, yet there is an unquietne&s;&s;e in the waves for &s;ome time after a &s;torme. God <HI>that ri|deth on the heavens for our help, and in his excellency on the skie,</HI> hath calmed our &s;torme: yet alas! how many &s;pirits &s;till boyle unduely? how ready are men to renew another Civil war? and are we not beholding to their wi&s;dome and power, that prevents &s;uch &s;ad returns? Oh be &s;till, be &s;till; let not God heare your murmurings, and repinings, and &s;ad not tho&s;e whom God makes means of your &s;afety and pre&s;ervation.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> Look on &s;ome incon|veneinces as eligible.</NOTE> 3. We &s;hould look on &s;ome incon|veniences as eligible, when they be in a way to prevent what is fatally ruinous. Tis true, Exci&s;e is heavy, and Taxes burden&s;ome; but is not Civil war wor&s;e? Its impo&s;&s;ible to conceive the manage|ment of publick affairs without publick expen&s;e; and is it not great weakne&s;&s;e
<PB N="174" REF="104">
to grumble at that which is &s;o ju&s;t and nece&s;&s;ary? But it may be you complain you are over-ce&s;&s;ed, dealt unequally with|al; &s;uppo&s;e that; but is that &s;o bad as to have all taken, and nothing left you? I, but this was not &s;o in former times; nay it is wor&s;e now, then it was then; we grumbled at a little Ship-money, at Court and Conduct-money; alas that is but a flea-biting to what we feele now. But do you not feele enough? but would you feele more? who brought you into this condition? had not your &s;elves the greate&s;t hand in it? and will you com|plain for what your &s;elves have brought on your &s;elves? It would refre&s;h the hearts of tho&s;e in place to finde you in &s;uch a condition of &s;afety, as that the&s;e charges might be &s;pared; but till that time come, they &s;hould not be faithful to you, to take them off; nor will you doe your &s;elves right, except you beare them.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> Promote not civil war.</NOTE> 4. It &s;hould be far from us to begin, promote, or abet any Civil war: It &s;hews the highth of the wickedne&s;&s;e of our quarrel&s;ome &s;pirits, that rather then you will not be fighting, you will devour one another: <HI>Saevis inter &s;e convenit &V;r&s;is,</HI> feirce Beares agree among them&s;elves. Far be it from you, to make or take up cau&s;es of breaches among your &s;elves; doubt not, you will finde more then e|nough
<PB N="175" REF="104">
abroad: why will you &s;ad the heart of your friends, and rejoyce your enemies? <HI>Oh tell it not in Gath, and pub|li&s;h it not in the &s;treets of Askalon, le&s;t tho&s;e that hate you hear it and rejoyce.</HI> Surely the <HI>divi&s;ions of Ruben cau&s;e great thoughts of heart.</HI> How good and plea&s;ant were it for Brethren to <HI>dwell together in unity!</HI> that would be as the precious diffu&s;ed oyntment, a refre&s;hing dew, which hath a commanding ble&s;&s;ing, yea <HI>life</HI> in it. What?</P>
<P>What evil have good and whole&s;ome Laws done you, that you take a cour&s;e to break them? is that the requital for all the provi&s;ion and protection you have had by them? will you pluck up your fences and lay your inclo&s;ures common?</P>
<P>Magi&s;trates, as well as Mini&s;ters, are called Shepherds, and both watch over you; one for your &s;piritual, the other for your civil good: and will you damp and di&s;courage them? will you tempt them to fling off all? or if they hold their charge, mu&s;t it be with a burdened minde?</P>
<P>Call to minde your <HI>Religion, your Re|ligion:</HI> is that nothing to you? can you think to have a religious being, when its in di&s;pute, whether you &s;hall have a be|ing or no? can you finde your Oratories in the Campe? or your Chri&s;tian, &s;weet Chri&s;tian meetings in their courts of Guard? Will the &s;wearing and cur&s;ing
<PB N="176" REF="105">
there, teach you to pray and prai&s;e? Can ambition, lu&s;t, impudence, coveteou&s;|ne&s;&s;e, luxury, revenge, cruelty, envy, vio|lation of covenants, feare, &s;orrow, plea&s;e you? Is not the voyce of your <HI>&s;weet &s;inger of I&s;rael</HI> better then the roaring of Canons, and beating of Drums, and &s;ounds of Trumpets? is not the &s;till <HI>voyce of the Bridegroome</HI> more plea&s;ant, then Arme, Arme, Hor&s;e, Hor&s;e, away, away&punc; they come, they come; fall on, fall on?</P>
<P>How do you like your thin Markets and Shops, and your Ships to be laid up? and the tidings that your Ve&s;&s;els a|broad came within &s;ight of land, and yet were &s;urprized, or &s;unk by the enemy, and &s;o never came home? Should it not greive you to be made poor, to make your enemies rich? that Shops and Ships, Che&s;ts and Bags, &s;hould be emptied for them that will never give you thanks? But why do I mention the&s;e things? What is e&s;tate to life, and the lo&s;&s;e of your goods to the continual feare and &s;orrow that you were in night and day? When you are at home, every knock at your door renews your fears, that others are come to take away that which the former company left.</P>
<P>Deare loving Wives, have you forgot the feares you were in for your careful Husbands? Parents; &s;urely you will re|member
<PB N="177" REF="105">
your &s;orrows for your &s;ons, of who&s;e death you daily expected tidings; and the feare for your daughters is not yet off: you feared lea&s;t they &s;hould be abu&s;ed to the lu&s;t of a wicked villaine. I &s;hould offer violence to your ingenuous re&s;olutions to urge more arguments; you are &s;ufficiently in&s;tructed in the evil of the&s;e wars; I onely be&s;eech you to re|member what you have &s;een and felt.</P>
<P>And now, one word to you who are the Saints of the mo&s;t High: You have a <HI>God</HI> to goe unto, <HI>a Throne of grace open;</HI> he that is King of the World, and Lord of peace and war, <HI>is your Saviour:</HI> oh to your weapons, you prayers and teares, that peace and truth may be in your dayes, and in your childrens after you. Oh let not your hearts be at a di&s;tance one from another, or from this praying work. Be|&s;et the Throne of grace, ring a peale of prayers in the eares of the <HI>Almighty; lay hold upon him, and wra&s;tle with him, give him not over till you prevaile;</HI> Its of great concernment what you come to him for; its <HI>his</HI> intere&s;t as well as <HI>yours;</HI> its not the good of &s;ome, but the good <HI>of all</HI> you come for. Oh then make ha&s;te, make ha&s;te, pro&s;trate your &s;elves humbly before him; for <HI>you will God accept,</HI> and your <HI>voyce will be plea&s;ant,</HI> and your <HI>countenance comely before him.</HI></P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="17" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="178" REF="106">
<HEAD>CHAP. XVII.</HEAD>
<ARGUMENT>
<P>Handles the tenth Po&s;ition, That Neighbour Princes fall off from us, or come forth again&s;t us when we are imbroyled in Civil Wars: This is explained in &s;hewing, <HI>1.</HI> That God hath bounded all Nations. <HI>2.</HI> Confederacy is needful for a Nation. <HI>3.</HI> Its of great concernment with whom you confederate. <HI>4.</HI> I&s;landers have more liberty therein then o|thers. <HI>5.</HI> We may break with our confederates. <HI>6.</HI> They may breake from us. <HI>7.</HI> They may be de&s;troyed. <HI>8.</HI> VVe may break at home, though we have peace abroad. <HI>9.</HI> Our di|&s;tractions tempt our confederates to fall from us. <HI>10.</HI> And opportunes our enemies to invade upon us. &V;&s;es.</P>
</ARGUMENT>
<P>CIvil Wars do not onely cau&s;e turn|ings, but overturnings, and of that which is neare&s;t and deare&s;t among&s;t us. It &s;ets the father again&s;t the &s;on, and &s;on
<PB N="179" REF="106">
again&s;t the father, one brother and friend again&s;t another; but that is not all, it extends likewi&s;e to incite Neighbour Nations again&s;t us; and this leads us to con&s;ider the tenth Po&s;ition,</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. <HI>10.</HI> Neighbours fall from or upon us.</NOTE> <HI>That Neighbour Princes fall off from us, or come forth again&s;t us, when we are im|broyled in Civil wars.</HI> We cannot open the many and wa&s;ting evils which attend Civil wars; one and not the lea&s;t, is the unfaithfulne&s;&s;e of Neighbour Nations: which that you may the better conceive, we &s;hall thus explaine.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><P><HI>1.</HI> God hath bounded Nations.</P>
<P><HI>Acts</HI>17. 26.</P></NOTE> <HI>1. That God hath bounded and li|mited Nations in their territories, as well as particular per&s;ons in their po&s;&s;e&s;|<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ions.</HI> Acts <HI>17. 26.</HI> God who hath made of one blood all Nations of men for to dwell on all the face of the earth, and hath determined the times before appointed, and the bounds of their habitation. <HI>Out of which place I ob|&s;erve four things.</HI></P>
<P N="1">1. That God makes <HI>Nations of men</HI> as well as men; that is, that he continueth &s;o many Families and Per&s;ons together as make a Nation.</P>
<P N="2">2. Hemakes them <HI>to dwell on the face of the earth;</HI> that is, makes them to re&s;ide, work and continue in one place, and not to be &s;hifting and wandring up and down: <HI>Habitare e&s;t plus quam morari:</HI> To <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">well is more then to &s;tay in a place; for its to &s;tay &s;o as to lay forth a
<PB N="180" REF="107">
mans &s;elfe in a &s;etled con&s;tant way.</P>
<P N="3">3. That <HI>he appoints</HI> their dwelling; that is, that Nation for this place, and another Nation for another place, and a third Nation for another place: this is plain from <HI>Deut.</HI> 2. 5. <HI>Meddle not with the children of E&s;au; for I will not give you of their Land; no not &s;o much as a foot|breath, becau&s;e I have given Mount Seir unto E&s;au for a po&s;&s;e&s;&s;ion.</HI></P>
<P N="4">4. God bounds their habitations; hitherto they mu&s;t come and no farther; thus much they mu&s;t have and no more. The <HI>children of I&s;rael</HI> mu&s;t have &s;o much and no more; and the <HI>children of E&s;au,</HI> &s;o much and no more: and what <HI>I&s;rael</HI> hath, <HI>E&s;au</HI> mu&s;t not meddle with; and what <HI>E&s;au</HI> hath, <HI>I&s;rael</HI> mu&s;t not meddle with: and thus one Nation borders on another, and one I&s;land is neere an|other.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Confe|deracy is needful for a Nation.</NOTE> 2. Confederacy is as needful for a Nation or Kingdome, as for a Family or per&s;on: <HI>Vae Soli:</HI> wo to him that is a|lone, is extendible to a Nation; wo to a Nation that is alone. <HI>Tyre and Sidon</HI> was <HI>nouri&s;hed by Herods</HI> Country, <HI>Acts</HI> 12. 20. and therefore they conclude a Peace with him. As in Gods dealing with men, he hath given &s;ome of his gifts to all men; all to none; So in Countries, God gi|veth to one that which another wanteth. Thus <HI>Spain</HI> hath Wine and Fruits; <HI>Eng|land</HI>
<PB N="181" REF="107">
Wool and Cloth; that &s;o there may be mutnal intercour&s;e between Nation and Nation. Thus their was a League between <HI>Solomon</HI> and <HI>Hiram,</HI> 1 <HI>Kings</HI> 5. 12. <HI>and between A&s;a King of Judah, and Ben-hadad King of Syria,</HI> 1 <HI>Kings</HI> 15. 8, 9.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> Its of great con|cernment what, and with whom con|federacy is made.</NOTE> 3. Its of great concernment what, and with whom confederacy is concluded. <HI>Judg.</HI> 2. 2. <HI>Ye &s;hall make no League with the inhabitants of this land; ye &s;hall throw down their Altars:</HI> The P&s;almi&s;t gives the rea&s;on, <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 106. 35. <HI>They were mingled among the Heathen, and learned their works.</HI> God likes not league with Idolaters; and why &s;hould we? But if wi&s;dome and ne|ce&s;&s;ities of State urge a Peace for a &s;ea&s;on; yet why, oh why, &s;hould the &s;ubjects of this Nation, while they are conver&s;ant about their lawful occa&s;ions, be liable to that <HI>bloody cur&s;ed Inqui&s;ition?</HI> they are hindred to declare what God hath taught them of his truth, and expo&s;ed to excee|ding cruel dealing. It is one of the plots of Antichri&s;t to continue their Subjects in &s;uper&s;titious darkne&s;&s;e, and to &s;hut out all light they can. I am confident that God will pluck it down, although all the craft and intere&s;t of <HI>Je&s;uites</HI> be put forth to maintain it.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> I&s;lands have more liberty in choice of their con|federacy.</NOTE> 4. I&s;lands have more liberty of choyce as to their confederates then they that live in a Continent: They are immedi|ately bounded by the Sea, others by
<PB REF="108">
Frontier Towns. It may be God hath &s;eparated us in this I&s;land of Great Brit|<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">aine from all the World, <HI>Toto divi&s;os orb<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> Britannos,</HI> that &s;o we of this Nation might not be unduely fettered by con|federacy, but act more freely for him. I finde in <HI><GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ambden</HI> that <HI>Regnum Angliae, Regnum Dei:</HI> the Kingdome of <HI>England</HI> is called <HI>Gods Kingdome;</HI> becau&s;e none &s;eeme to care for it but God. And doth God take care for us? Surely we &s;hould then care for him, and his intere&s;t, and we need not care or feare what men can do again&s;t us.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> We may <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 word"> with <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 span">.</NOTE> 5. Its po&s;&s;ible we may have cau&s;e to break with tho&s;e with whom we have been confederate, as we did with <HI>Scot|land;</HI> and this will produce great change. How neer were we and the Scots in League? We were <HI>Brethren</HI> that cove|nanted, fa&s;ted, and prayed together, en|gaged and fought together: but if they will be our <HI>Lords,</HI> which were our <HI>friends;</HI> if they endeavonr to beare rule over our Land, and Con&s;ciences too; and if we cannot bow down and let them tread up|on us, they will then by an Army &s;eek to force it. Wonder not if we endeavour to defend our &s;elves; and &s;o break from them.</P>
<P N="6">6. Its po&s;&s;ible &s;ome may break unju&s;tly <NOTE PLACE="marg"><GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 line">.</NOTE>from us, as our Brethren of <HI>Scotland did,</HI> and not they alone, but others al&s;o: The Lord forgive our <HI>Brethren of Holland,</HI> and
<PB N="183" REF="108">
lay not their unkinde dealing to their charge. They gained mnch by our lo&s;&s;es; many of our &s;hips which &s;hould have come to our Ports, were con&s;igned to theirs: but this contents them not, they thought to have been our <HI>Ma&s;ters.</HI> I &s;hall never forget their vaunting appearance in <HI>Dover Road;</HI> and withal Gods good|ne&s;&s;e in lowing and &s;cattering of them then and there.</P>
<P N="7">7. Tho&s;e with whom you are in league may be devoured by their adver&s;aries, <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>7.</HI> Our <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 span"> ad|ve<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">&s;ari<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="2 letters">.</NOTE>and then &s;o much of your hedge is bro|ken. I wi&s;h our friends &s;o well, that I would never have them fall out among them&s;elves, and &s;o make them&s;elves a prey to their adver&s;aries: But &s;uch a thing may be; and if it &s;hould, would it not produce new Coun&s;els and Actions, new Turnes and Changes among us?</P>
<P N="8">8. Its po&s;&s;ible notwith&s;tanding all your Unitings and Leagues abroad, you may <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>8.</HI> <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 span"> <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">e <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 span"></NOTE>be disjoynt at home. We had peace with <HI>France, Spain,</HI> and <HI>Holland,</HI> when we had War in <HI>England:</HI> and how little could their interpo&s;ition effect our agreement? Nay our Union remotely did occa&s;ion our di&s;&s;ention, while tho&s;e in power plot|ted to be like tho&s;e with whom they were in league, to be as ab&s;olute over us, as they over their Subjects: did not their actings to this end produce <HI>their</HI> Tyranny, and <HI>our</HI> Mi&s;ery? Little may we expect <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 word">
<PB N="184" REF="109">
&s;trangers, when we are not wi&s;e for our own good: is peace good abroad? and is it not better at home? and yet how little had we of that better peace?</P>
<P N="9"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>9.</HI> This disjunction tempts your con|federates to &s;hake you off.</NOTE> 9. This di&s;traction tempts your friends to &s;hake you off: <HI>Nullus ad ami&s;&s;as ibit Amicus opes:</HI> When wealth is gone, friends are gone too. Now danger is at the door of our neighbours, <HI>Damnum imma|ne.</HI> They think it po&s;&s;ible a prevail|ing party among us may turne again&s;t them, and it concerns them to look to that; how ever it brings them to a <HI>Neu|trality,</HI> and that increa&s;eth and lengthen|eth our divi&s;ions, as we found in the tem|per of the <HI>Dutch,</HI> before the la&s;t War and Peace. There is not onely danger like|ly, but there is <HI>lucrum ce&s;&s;ans,</HI> a &s;top of the hope of gain: our neighbours rightly judge, that they can expect little help from us, &s;o long as our troubles among our &s;elves continue: our own condition gives us &s;o full an imployment for our &s;elves, that we cannot attend their intere&s;t and their good.</P>
<P N="10"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>10.</HI> It op|portunes them to become y<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ur ene|mies.</NOTE> 10. La&s;tly, it opportunes your confe|derates to become your enemies: <HI>Accipe dum dolet,</HI> take your fee while the patient is &s;ick, is the Phy&s;itians maxime; it will come &s;horter and more heavily afterward. <HI>Simeon</HI> and <HI>Levi</HI> came on the <HI>Seche|m<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">es when they were &s;ore;</HI> and when you are weak, your confederates will &s;treng|then
<PB N="185" REF="109">
them&s;elves; they hope for a party within you, when you fall out among your &s;elves; they expect not onely your weakene&s;&s;e, but their own &s;trength by it: <HI>Divide et impera;</HI> your divi&s;ions will make them reigne. Me thinks I heare them cry, On, On, take, per&s;ue, for they are divided; and &s;ometimes God gives one Nation a Commi&s;&s;ion again&s;t ano|ther, <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 7. 18. <HI>I will hi&s;&s;e for the flie of Egypt, and for the bee that is in the land of A&s;&s;yria.</HI> God can as ea&s;ily de&s;troy a Na|tion as a per&s;on; He needs but <HI>hi&s;&s;e,</HI> and the <HI>Flie</HI> and the <HI>Bee</HI> come. God may have a controver&s;ie again&s;t you, and plead it out with you by <HI>your enemies.</HI> Peace and War are not made &s;o much on earth by Kin<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">s and Councils, as by God in <HI>Heaven.</HI></P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> See how little hope or help in men.</NOTE> 1. Let us &s;ee how little hope or help there is in men. You a&s;&s;ociate with neighbour Nations, and expect help and friend&s;hip from them; but no &s;ooner are we fallen out among our &s;elves, but they keep at a di&s;tance from us: &s;end to them, and you &s;hall have crafty, dilatory an|&s;wers; the truth is, they are waiting which party will get the better, that (if they joyne with any) they may joyne with the &s;tronge&s;t &s;ide. It may be you expect Men, or Money, or Ammunition from them; but a few faire words is the mo&s;t you &s;hall get. The&s;e prove like <HI>Jobs</HI>
<PB N="186" REF="110">
<HI>friends,</HI> like <HI>winter brooks,</HI> or land floods, <HI>Job</HI> 6. 15. <HI>which overflow when you have no need;</HI> but when the time <HI>waxeth warms they vani&s;h:</HI> when its hot, they are <HI>con|&s;umed out of their place.</HI> Thus much <HI>Rab|&s;hekah</HI> could tell, <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 36. 6. <HI>Egypt was a broken &s;taffe, and a reed, which if a man leane on, will run into his hand:</HI> And the Lord him&s;elfe &s;aith, <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 30. 3. <HI>The &s;trength of Pharoah &s;hall be your &s;hame, and the tru&s;t in the &s;hadow of Egypt your confu&s;ion;</HI> and this we finde verified, <HI>v.</HI> 5. They <HI>were all a&s;hamed of a people that could not profit, nor be an help, but be a &s;hame, and al&s;o a re|proach.</HI></P>
<P N="2">2. See what wickedne&s;&s;e is incident to <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> See the wickedne&s;&s;e incident to Nations.</NOTE><HI>Nations,</HI> as well as to particular per&s;ons; to wit, to prey upon you when you are in mi&s;ery, and to rai&s;e them&s;elves out of your ruines. <HI>Job.</HI> 6. 14. <HI>To him that is afflicted pitty &s;hould be &s;hewed from his friend:</HI> and is not the &s;ame pitty due much more to an afflicted Nation, from the friends and confederates thereof? I but, <HI>men have for&s;aken the feare of the Al|mighty.</HI> Did men con&s;ider what notice God takes, how tho&s;e whom he afflicts are dealt withal, they dur&s;t not &s;erve them&s;elves on them; They dur&s;t not be like fle&s;h-flies &s;ucking the blood of their neighbours. <HI>Zach.</HI> 1. 15. is a notable place to this purpo&s;e: <HI>I am &s;ore di&s;plea&s;ed with the Heathen that be at ea&s;e; for I was</HI>
<PB N="187" REF="110">
<HI>but a little di&s;plea&s;ed, and they helped for|ward the affliction. Deut.</HI> 25. 17, 18. The Prophet <HI>Mo&s;es</HI> bids <HI>I&s;rael, Remember what Amaleke did to thee by the way, when ye were come forth out of Egypt, how he met thee by the way, and &s;mote the hindmo&s;t of thee, even all that were feeble behind thee; when thou wa&s;t faint and weary, and feared not God.</HI> I wi&s;h &s;ome among&s;t our deare Brethren of <HI>Holland,</HI> (to whom I have been engaged, and whom I really love and honour) would con&s;ider, whether &s;omething of the &s;pirit of <HI>Tyrus</HI> (who parallels them mo&s;t of any Nation in Scripture) be not, or hath not been found among &s;ome of them. <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 23. 18. Their <HI>Merchants are Princes, and their Traffi|quers the honourable of the earth:</HI> Con|&s;ider I &s;ay, whether &s;ome of Tyrus &s;pirit have not &s;tirrid too much in <HI>&s;ome</HI> among&s;t you: of whom its &s;aid, <HI>Ezek.</HI> 26. 2. <HI>Ty|rus hath &s;aid again&s;t Jeru&s;alem, Ah &s;he is broken that was the gates of the people: Fracta e&s;t &V;rbs portis populo&s;i&s;&s;ima;</HI> She is turned unto me; her Trade and Traf|fique &s;hall come to me; <HI>I &s;hall be repleni|&s;hed now &s;he is laid wa&s;te.</HI></P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> An ar|gument a|gain&s;t Civil war.</NOTE> 3. Take hence a fre&s;h argument again&s;t your Civil war, in that it bla&s;teth all the help, comfort, coun&s;el which you expect from your friends and allies. You &s;hall by tho&s;e Wars be left alone, to wre&s;tle and tug it out with your own mi&s;ery. It
<PB N="188" REF="111">
is a &s;ad complaint we read of, <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 38. 11. <HI>My lovers and my friends &s;tand aloofe from my &s;ore, and my kin&s;man &s;tand afar off.</HI> I would faine per&s;wade my &s;elfe we have &s;marted &s;o much, and have not onely been &s;corched, but burnt in the fire, that we &s;hall for ever dread it: But how is it that we heare, &s;ee, and experience the ri&s;ing of rage, and the undue heart|boyling almo&s;t everywhere, in every man! Will you bare your &s;elves for your neighbours la&s;hes? will you invite them to your own ruine? will you gratifie a malicious &s;pirit in them? Look into <HI>France,</HI> how nigh was the conclu&s;ion of peace between them and us? and hath not hopes of divi&s;ions interrupted it? Oh! at length, unite your hearts, hands, per&s;ons and prayers, that your neighbour Nations may be glad to &s;ue for, and con|tinue agreement with you.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> Its a curious worke to manage publick affairs.</NOTE> 4. Learne hence that it is a curious work to manage publick affairs in time of <HI>Civil War.</HI> They have many knotty, intricate occa&s;ions at home, and they mu&s;t look narrowly unto <HI>them;</HI> but withal they mu&s;t look <HI>abroad</HI> too; pre|vention of trouble from them abroad is as well to be minded, as ea&s;ing of it at home. A de&s;perate adver&s;ary will not &s;ticke to call in any to their a&s;&s;i&s;tance: and rather then they will not obtain their revengful ends, they will invite and
<PB N="189" REF="111">
wellcome one to de&s;troy you, although <HI>them&s;elves</HI> &s;inke in that de&s;truction. Had not they need of wi&s;dome to clo&s;e <HI>with &s;ome</HI> that <HI>they</HI> may do good to the pub|lick, and with <HI>others</HI> that they may doe <HI>no harme?</HI> to confirme peace with &s;ome, to break it with others? All Nations imploy their wi&s;e&s;t heads in their greate&s;t tran&s;actions; and I know none greater then what pre&s;ents in Civil di&s;tractions, which call for the &s;trength of wi&s;dome.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>5.</HI> Admir<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> God in his providen|ces.</NOTE> 5. La&s;tly, fall down before the glori|ous and gracious God, admire and adore him for his providences and protections over you. Behold he hath bu&s;ied the neighbour Princes at home, &s;o that they could not intend to fall on you. God &s;et <HI>France</HI> again&s;t <HI>Spain,</HI> and <HI>Spain</HI> again&s;t <HI>France,</HI> that neither of them might be a|gain&s;t <HI>England:</HI> Neither <HI>France nor Spain</HI> intended to contribute to your welfare. We are not ignorant how little good will they beare us, and how they would re|joyce at our haltings: and &s;hould not we ble&s;&s;e God who hath pre&s;erved us, and <HI>walke in the feare of the Lord becau&s;e of the&s;e adver&s;aries?</HI></P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="18" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="190" REF="112">
<HEAD>CHAP. XVIII.</HEAD>
<ARGUMENT>
<P>Opens the eleventh Po&s;ition, viz. Hard dealings of neighbour Nations pro|duce forreigne VVars, which ari&s;e <HI>1.</HI> From the pride and lu&s;t of the ruling men in Neighbour Nations. <HI>2.</HI> From their de&s;ire to be great a|lone. <HI>3.</HI> They draw many followers after them. <HI>4.</HI> They reckon our di&s;tractions their &s;ea&s;on. <HI>5.</HI> Tho&s;e who are hardly dealt withal, are very &s;en&s;ible of &s;uch dealing. <HI>6.</HI> Re&s;olve to deale with others, as they thought to have dealt with them. &V;&s;es.</P>
</ARGUMENT>
<P>EVils come on us as <HI>Jobs</HI> me&s;&s;engers; the fir&s;t had &s;carce &s;pake, but the &s;econd came, and &s;o the third: or like Circles in the water, after a &s;tone is thrown into it; they come one upon an|other. It is a &s;ad evil to have Wars at home, and its an addition to that evil to have them abroad too; yet this hath been our condition which the eleventh Po&s;ition will <HI>unfold.</HI></P>
<P><PB N="191" REF="112">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. <HI>11.</HI> &V;nju&s;t dealings cau&s;e for|reigne wars.</NOTE> <HI>&V;nkind and unju&s;t dealings of Neighbour Nations toward a people harraced by Civil war, produce forreigne War.</HI> It was &s;o of old between <HI>I&s;rael</HI> and <HI>Amaleke Exod.</HI> 17. 8. when <HI>I&s;rael</HI> were falling out among them&s;elves, <HI>chiding</HI> at <HI>Ma&s;sah</HI> and <HI>Meri|bah,</HI> then came <HI>Amaleke</HI> and fought with <HI>I&s;rael.</HI> Now a long time after this, its one of the prime workes that the fir&s;t King of <HI>I&s;rael</HI> mu&s;t fall upon; and he is commi&s;&s;ionated from heaven to it, name|ly to fight with <HI>Amalek,</HI> 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 15. 3. <HI>I remember what Amalek did to I&s;rael, how he laid waite for him in the way when he came up from Egypt. Now goe and &s;mite Amalek, and utterly de&s;t<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">oy all that they have.</HI> We of this Nation were coming out of <HI>Egypt</HI> Civil and Spiritual; we wanted not tho&s;e who dealt unkindly with us then; and what followed but a bloody forreigne War? to give you an account of this, Ob&s;erve.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> The pride and lu&s;t of ru|ling men, cau&s;e un|ju&s;t dea|lings.</NOTE> 1. The pride and lu&s;t of &s;ome ruling men cau&s;ed tho&s;e unkind and unju&s;t dea|lings. When great men are led a&s;ide by &s;qint-eyedaims, and corrupt hopes of advantage; when they are unduely bia&s;|&s;ed by their marriage, alliance, and cor|rupt intere&s;t, it layes a foundation of &s;uffering for their neighbours. Some ruling men of neighbour Nations would be great, and they care not <HI>How,</HI> although war involves all per&s;ons, per&s;ons of all
<PB N="192" REF="113">
rankes, and conditions, into the evil and &s;ufferings of it; yet the <HI>beginnings</HI> of it are from a <HI>few</HI> per&s;ons, and tho&s;e the <HI>greate&s;t,</HI> but not alway the <HI>be&s;t.</HI> They conjecture and contrive great, and it may be, wicked things for them&s;elves; and others mu&s;t act them: They would be higher, or greater; and to make way for that, others mu&s;t fall and &s;inke.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Men de&s;ire to be great alone.</NOTE> 2. Tho&s;e who are great, are de&s;irous to be &s;o <HI>alone:</HI> they are loth others &s;hould ri&s;e up to greatne&s;&s;e by them; li|berty is &s;weet to them, but they would have others continue in their chains. <HI>Holland</HI> knows the good and &s;weet of Liberty; but if <HI>England</HI> a&s;pire to that condition, her great ones there will be angry. Excu&s;e my &s;eeming unchari|table thought, if I feare a &s;pirit of envy or malice reigned too much among for|reigne powers, together with a Politick feare that we might grow too great for them. <HI>Pharoah</HI> feared the multiplying of <HI>I&s;rael, lea&s;t they &s;hould fight again&s;t them, Exod.</HI> 7. 10. Malice is the wor&s;t of pa&s;|&s;ions, and war the wor&s;t of conditions; and &s;urely the one proceeds from the o|ther; private quarrels from the malice of low ones; but the malice of great ones ri&s;eth up to <HI>a War.</HI></P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> Great Leaders obtain many fol|lowers.</NOTE> 3. The&s;e great (though evil) Leaders &s;oon obtain many followers. They pretend the good of many, and many
<PB N="193" REF="113">
are deceived by them; what with feare and flattery, they engage <HI>all</HI> under them; and what was in a few <HI>heads</HI> before, lies upon many <HI>hands</HI> now. The followers now &s;peak the language of their fir&s;t movers; On, On, the day is ours; we are &s;trong, and they are weak; Advance, ad|vance, they will retreate; what &s;ometime <HI>Hamor</HI> &s;aid, <HI>Gen.</HI> 35. 23. <HI>Shall not their cattle &amp; their &s;ub&s;tance, and every bea&s;t of theirs be ours?</HI> So, &s;hall not their Ships, their Mer|chandize, their Trading be ours? and thus they are driven on, and it may be to their own ruine. <HI>D<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">lirant Reges, plectun|tur Achivi.</HI> Rulers mi&s;take, and the peo|ple &s;uffer for it: But now both joyne together, Rulers and ruled expre&s;&s;e the &s;ame language; Down with them, down with them, even to the ground: Let us divert their Trade, &s;urprize their Mer|chants, &s;top their goings out and returns, and in the end we &s;hall have their habi|tations in po&s;&s;e&s;&s;ion.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> Our di&s;traction is their &s;ea&s;on.</NOTE> 4. They conclude that they have a fit &s;ea&s;on for their rage to break forth in: they would not thus imbarke, but that they think they have a faire winde: they call to minde, that many among us are made de&s;olate, and they <HI>can do nothing;</HI> many are &s;ullen, and they <HI>will do</HI> no more then they are forced unto; many would act but cannot, many can, but will not. Some are afraid among us (&s;ay they)
<PB N="194" REF="114">
and they will act but little, others are de&s;perate, and they will act too much. In fine, they reckon we are all di&s;orderly, and people broken, who&s;e foundations are de&s;troyed; whereupon they hearten one another, Sit no longer &s;till, up and be doing, up and be fighting, and you &s;hall prevaile.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>5.</HI> An op|pre&s;&s;ed peo|ple are very &s;en&s;ible.</NOTE> 5. A people under pre&s;&s;ures, though they cannot at pre&s;ent help them&s;elves; yet are exceeding &s;en&s;ible of hard u&s;age. God and good men are mindful of what is acted to tho&s;e who are <HI>in low e&s;tate;</HI> they meditate what kindne&s;&s;e they have done, and what unkindne&s;&s;e they receive; what good turns they have done them, which were never requited; and what wrongs they have received, which they never de|&s;erved. It makes them recall the time when their <HI>now</HI> enemies were low enough, and then they were releived by our help. Now we that helped <HI>are low,</HI> and tho&s;e who were helped by us pre&s;&s;e us down lower. Oh ingratitude! there is &s;ure a God in heaven that will do right, and we waite his time; yea he is and hath been gracious.</P>
<P N="6"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>6.</HI> They re&s;olve to retaliate.</NOTE> 6. Tho&s;e who have been pre&s;&s;ed, re&s;olve (if ever they recover) to do to them, what they intended to others. We are not &s;o dead and buried, but we hope to ri&s;e again; and then expect your own mea&s;ure, full, heaped, pre&s;&s;ed down, and
<PB N="195" REF="114">
running over. You would have de&s;troy|ed us if you could; can you think it too much if we have your thoughts? Nay, you were not a long while changed in your minde; can you think it unrea&s;on|able for us to defend our &s;elves? <HI>Judg.</HI> 8. 6. The Princes of <HI>Succoth</HI> would not give bread unto <HI>Gideon</HI>'s Army; but what an&s;wer makes he ver&s;e 7? <HI>When the Lord hath delivered Zeba and Zalmunna into my hand, I will teare your fle&s;h with the thornes of the Wilderne&s;se.</HI> It is foretold to to be the complexion of the la&s;t times, <HI>Luke</HI> 21. 9. <HI>Ye &s;hall heare of Wars, and Commotions; Nation &s;hall ri&s;e again&s;t Na|tion, and Kingdome again&s;t Kingdome,</HI> which we have &s;een verified in our times. <NOTE PLACE="marg">&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> See the &s;preading nature of &s;in.</NOTE></P>
<P N="1">1. Doth unju&s;t dealing of <HI>Nations,</HI> &amp;c. Behold here the &s;preading nature of &s;in, it infects Nations as well as particular per&s;ons, it mingles with State affairs, yea the concernments of many States, and perplexeth them all. Sin is as exten&s;ive in the &s;orrow it brings, as in the defile|ment: National &s;in and inju&s;tice brings in National War; and that is plague enough.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> A Na|tion is li|able to trouble u<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">|on tr<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="2 letters">b</NOTE> 2. One and the &s;ame Nation may be liable <HI>to trouble upon trouble,</HI> as well as a particular per&s;on. The Po&s;ition tells us of Forreigne as well as Civil Wars, and one following the other, on the &s;ame
<PB N="196" REF="115">
people. A people harra&s;ed with Civil war, and not free from Forreigne: How humble &s;hould Nations be who are thus at Gods mercy? how great is that God that hath Trea&s;ures of vengeance to &s;pend upon Nations, as well as upon particular per&s;ons.? If our Civil wars purge us not, reforme us not, occa&s;ion not our return to God; he can follow it with a Forreigne War; and when we think our war at home is pa&s;t, and cry peace, peace, &s;uddainly he can &s;end an Alarum of war from a neigbour Nation. Oh that <HI>men would learne to feare the Lord for his greatne&s;se, and &s;tand in awe of his judgements.</HI></P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> War is an appeale to God.</NOTE> 3. Learne here that Forreigne war is an appeale to God; nay all war is no le&s;&s;e in its nature; <HI>we</HI> are not fit judges, for we are parties; nor are <HI>our neighbours</HI> fit judges, for they are parties as well as we. Our warfare is the &s;trong pleading of the cau&s;e on both &s;ides; the deciding of the cau&s;e, by being Conquerers or con|quered, is onely in Gods hand: How &s;e|rious &s;hould men be in matters of <HI>War,</HI> when God is thus appealed unto in it?</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> See here Gods good|ne&s;&s;e.</NOTE> 4. I cannot but here minde you of Gods fatherly goodne&s;&s;e. It was his goodne&s;&s;e as you heard to keep us <HI>a people alive</HI> in our Civil war; and it is no le&s;&s;e his goodne&s;&s;e that after our Civil war, when we were weake and tired, and then
<PB N="197" REF="115">
had <HI>Forreigne War</HI> fall upon us, that that did not utterly ruine and de&s;troy us. <HI>Prai&s;e the Lord oh my &s;oul, and forget not all his benefits, who redeemeth thy life from de&s;truction, P&s;al.</HI> 103. 24.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="19" TYPE="chapter">
<HEAD>CHAP. XIX.</HEAD>
<ARGUMENT>
<P>Concludes with Po&s;. <HI>12.</HI> That Chri&s;t will deale &s;everely with the Rulers of the Earth, <HI>1.</HI> Becau&s;e they are in Covenant with their people. <HI>2.</HI> That Chri&s;t may appeare no re&s;pect|er of per&s;ons. <HI>3.</HI> That his wi&s;dome may out &s;hine their king-craft. <HI>4.</HI> That Satan may be overcome in the World. &V;&s;es.</P>
</ARGUMENT>
<P>CIvil and Forreigne Wars have brought us to a low e&s;tate, pre&s;|&s;ed us very &s;ore, we cannot help our &s;elves, and others will not help us; a world of iniquity and mi&s;ery is incum|bent on us by our wars at home and a|broad, and the <HI>hand of the Rulers</HI> of the earth hath been <HI>deep in all this;</HI> is there none to look after <HI>them?</HI> yes &s;ure; con|&s;ult
<PB N="198" REF="116">
with the <HI>la&s;t Po&s;ition</HI> and that will tell you.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Po&s;. <HI>12.</HI> Chri&s;t deals in &s;everity with Kings.</NOTE> Je&s;us Chri&s;t will deale in &s;everity with the Rulers of the Earth. <HI>1</HI> Chron. <HI>16. 21, 22.</HI> He &s;uffered none to doe his people wrong, but reproved Kings for their &s;akes. P&s;al. <HI>76. 11, 12.</HI> He loo&s;eth their loynes, and &s;trickes them thorow, cuts off their &s;pirits and ca&s;ts con|tempt on Princes. Job. <HI>12. 21.</HI> He profanes their glory, and &s;poiles all their excellency, and layes their honour in the du&s;t.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>I&s;a.</HI> 20 23.</NOTE> <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 20. 23. <HI>He bringeth the Princes to nothing, he maketh the Judges of the earth as vanity:</HI> they &s;eemed the mo&s;t &s;table beings on earth, having all that fle&s;h and blood could contribute to maintaine them, but he brings them <HI>to nothing.</HI></P>
<P>I&s;a. <HI>3. 14.</HI> The Lord will enter into judge|ment with the Ancient of his people, and the Princes thereof; for ye have eaten up the Vineyard, the &s;poile of the poor is in your hou&s;es.</P>
<P>Jer. <HI>34. 21.</HI> Zedechiah King of Judah, and the Princes, will I give into the hands of their enemies, and into the hand of them that &s;hall &s;eeke their life, and into the hand of the King of Babylons Army.</P>
<P>I&s;a. <HI>41. 25.</HI> I have rai&s;ed one from the North, and he &s;hall come upon Princes, as up|on Morter, and as the Potter treadeth clay.</P>
<P>Rev. <HI>19. 17, 18.</HI> The fowles of Heaven are gathered unto the &s;upper of the great God, that they may eate the fle&s;h of Kings, and the
<PB N="199" REF="116">
fle&s;h of Captains. <HI>This his dealing mani|fe&s;teth him to be King of the World, and the Author of the great Turns and Chan|ges here beneath.</HI> Dan. <HI>2. 20, 21.</HI> Ble&s;&s;ed be the Name of God for ever, for Wi&s;dome and Coun&s;el are his, and he changeth the times, and the &s;ea&s;ons; He removeth Kings, and &s;etteth up Kings. <HI>See the Rea&s;ons for this dealing of Chri&s;t.</HI></P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. <HI>1.</HI> They break covenant with their people.</NOTE> 1. Kings are in covenant with their people, and their great <HI>Tru&s;tees.</HI> 2 <HI>Kings</HI> 11. 17. <HI>Jehoiadah made a Covenant with the King and the people:</HI> But how little they keep their covenants, experience &s;adly tells us. They covenant to maintaine whole&s;ome Laws, and the ju&s;t Rights and Liberties of the Subject; but how little are either regarded by them afterward? They covenant to make the &s;afety of the people, and not the fulfilling of their wills the greate&s;t Law; but how little is that minded? when the lea&s;t income of their intere&s;t &s;hall indanger publick good, when they are in competition. Now <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t</HI> he is <HI>The Amen, the true and faithful witne&s;&s;e,</HI> and hates all unfaith|fulne&s;&s;e; they think they may play fa&s;t and loo&s;e; they &s;ee none to put their bonds in &s;uite; I, but <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> in that ca&s;e, will enter an action again&s;t them, and <NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. <HI>2.</HI> Chri&s;t ap|pears no re&s;pecter of per&s;ons.</NOTE>ca&s;t them, and make them pay all co&s;ts and charges.</P>
<P N="2">2. Now in this his &s;evere dealing with
<PB N="200" REF="117">
earthly Rulers, <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> appears <HI>no re&s;pecter of per&s;ons. Job.</HI> 39. 14. <HI>He accepteth not the per&s;ons of Princes, nor regardeth the rich more then the poor:</HI> he is as exact in go|vernment, as he is in teaching. <HI>Luke</HI> 20. 21. <HI>Thou teache&s;t rightly, and accepte&s;t no mans per&s;on:</HI> and 1 <HI>Pet.</HI> 1. 17. <HI>He judgeth every man according to his works,</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>without re&s;pect of per&s;ons.</HI> He values not tho&s;e gingles and trappings of power, greatne&s;&s;e, and honour: <HI>Righte|ou&s;ne&s;&s;e</HI> with him &s;hall be owned in the lea&s;t and lowe&s;t; but wickedne&s;&s;e &s;hall not be &s;pared in the greate&s;t.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. <HI>3.</HI> Chri&s;t his wi&s;dome exceeds their king-craft.</NOTE> 3. By this dealing Chri&s;t makes his <HI>Wi&s;dome</HI> to out-&s;hine their <HI>King-craft</HI> and carnal Policy. <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 11. 2. <HI>The &s;pirit of wi&s;|dome, under&s;tanding, and coun&s;el re&s;ts on Chri&s;t; not onely</HI> is in him, but in him as the proper place of them, they <HI>re&s;t</HI> in him. Rulers have all the advantage of bree|ding, and example to make them &s;ubtile, they have all that the &s;tronge&s;t wits can pre&s;ent them with: Their intere&s;t makes them &s;erious, their malice quick-&s;ighted, and their experience &s;etled in their way: This is their <HI>bu&s;ine&s;&s;e,</HI> they make it their <NOTE PLACE="marg"><GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 span">.</NOTE><GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="2 letters">rke to mind and follow it. <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 2. 2. <HI><GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">he Kings of the earth &s;et them&s;elves</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign"> <HI><GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="4 letters">unt, Simul faciunt &s;tare,</HI> they make it &s;tand together. <HI>Vires omnes &amp; &s;tudia &amp; conatus conferunt in Dominum,</HI> &s;aith <HI>Vata|blus.</HI> They employ all their forces, &s;tu|dies,
<PB N="201" REF="117">
and endeavours, again&s;t the Lord: <HI>The people, they rage and imagine a vaine thing;</HI> they are led by pa&s;&s;ion, and phan|ta&s;ie, which things are &s;oon gone; but your <HI>Kings</HI> and <HI>Princes</HI> proceed more &s;ol|lidly; <HI>The Rulers take coun&s;el together,</HI> but for all this &s;olid working, you know what follows, <HI>ver&s;e</HI> 4. <HI>He that &s;itteth in the heavens &s;hall laugh, the Lord &s;hall have them in deri&s;ion.</HI></P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Rea&s;. <HI>4.</HI> Chri&s;t is to overcome Satan in his own Territories.</NOTE> 4. Chri&s;t is to overcome Satan in <HI>his</HI> own Territories (as he counts them) Not onely &s;hall Chri&s;t overcome him in &s;piritual regiment, over the &s;ouls and con&s;ciences of men; but Chri&s;t mu&s;t drive him out of the <HI>World</HI> al&s;o, out of his <HI>hold in the Earth. Rev.</HI> 11. 15. <HI>The Kingdomes of this world are become the Kingdoms of our Lord and his Chri&s;t, and he &s;hall reigne for ever and ever. Satan in</HI> 2 <HI>Cor.</HI> 4. 4. is &s;tiled <HI>the God of this world;</HI> but <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> mu&s;t ungod him. 1 <HI>Cor.</HI> 15. 24, 25. <HI>He mu&s;t put down all rule and authority and power:</HI> and &s;urely Satans rule &s;hall not &s;tand, but he will pull it down.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> See the &s;in|fulne&s;&s;e of Kings, in Chri&s;t his dealing with them.</NOTE> 1. Read the &s;infullne&s;&s;e of Kings, through <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> his &s;everity: &s;urely they mu&s;t be out of mea&s;ure &s;inful whom Chri&s;t thus brings his wheele upon. God knows, I am no enemy to Governours, nor Governments, nor to <HI>that</HI> by way of a King; yet I think Kings are and have been the wor&s;t rank of men in the World.
<PB N="202" REF="118">
Read your own Chronicles, and you will finde you may write all your good Kings in a &s;mall Ring. <HI>Corruptio optimi pe&s;&s;ima:</HI> The corruption of the be&s;t, is wor&s;t; Kings &s;hould be be&s;t, and they have the be&s;t of Power, Plea&s;ure and Revenues; <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Vid. Chap.</HI> 10. &amp; 11.</NOTE>but how wofully is all corrupted? and &s;o much <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> his dealing with them tells you, and you &s;hould learne it thence.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> See his impartial holine&s;&s;e.</NOTE> 2. See the impartial and un&s;potted ho|line&s;&s;e and righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e of <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t:</HI> He will not &s;pare &s;in where ever he finds it; He hath vials full of wrath to pour out, when they fill up their mea&s;ures of &s;in: When they ripen their &s;ins to the harve&s;t, he will command his <HI>Angel to put in the &s;ickle. Chri&s;t</HI> can &s;uffer them in their wickedne&s;&s;e, and yet have no defilement to him&s;elfe: <HI>Lae&s;a patientia fit furor.</HI> Pa|tience abu&s;ed turns into rage; he will a|bundantly recompence his patience and long&s;uffering with the amazing &s;trictne&s;s of his ju&s;t proceedings!</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> Learne to what to refer our pre&s;ent providen|ces.</NOTE> 3. See what to expect, and to what to refer the providences of our pre&s;ent age. Is it not a &s;haking thought to recal how <HI>the tale&s;t Cedar</HI> that grew among&s;t us, who was greene and &s;pread his branches far, is felled to the ground: The great|e&s;t Family among us laid wa&s;te, and the po&s;terity that expected &s;ucce&s;&s;ion, into the riches and honours of their fore-Fathers,
<PB N="203" REF="118">
are little better then <HI>Noble Vagabounds?</HI> I meddle not with the proceedings in that ca&s;e, but &s;ure I am, <HI>In all God is ju&s;t.</HI> God hath begun in <HI>England,</HI> but he will not end <HI>there.</HI> I dare not pre&s;ume to &s;et down times, mea&s;ures, meanes, and modes of things, which the <HI>Father hath re&s;erved in his own hand;</HI> onely this I &s;ay, waite but a while, and it may be you &s;hall &s;ee The Ince&s;tuous hou&s;e <HI>of Au&s;tria,</HI> the <HI>Em|perour, King of Spain, France, and the re&s;t of the ten Kings of Europe,</HI> which have given <HI>their power to the Bea&s;t,</HI> to come tumbling down; and if they fall, &s;urely many more will fall with them; their Crea|tures, and their Followers, their Cour|tiers, and their Flatterers cannot &s;tand, but mu&s;t come down, and with them ma|ny more. I per&s;wade my &s;elfe, that tho&s;e whom God hath &s;et now in power over us do &s;eriou&s;ly weigh, what <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> hath done and will do, how he is <HI>ye&s;terday and to day, the &s;ame for ever, for ever;</HI> ju&s;t and jealous again&s;t all wickedne&s;&s;e and un|godline&s;&s;e, and that this doth and will work upon their hearts, and cau&s;e them to be humble before God, and much in prayer; to be watchful over them&s;elves and theirs, and others, and to &s;tudy to do the work of Chri&s;t put into their hands, not negligently, but faithfully, not to plea&s;e men, but Chri&s;t.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="20" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="204" REF="119">
<HEAD>CHAP. XX. Concludes with &s;hewing, How the twelve Po&s;itions formerly handled in&s;truct us in our Turns and Changes.</HEAD>
<P>WE have opened twelve Po&s;itions, and divers things in them. I &s;hall conclude with a very breife in&s;tru|ction, teaching us what we may learne from every one of tho&s;e Po&s;itions con|cerning our <HI>pre&s;ent Turns.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">How the Po&s;itions formerly handled conclude about our pre&s;ent Turnes and Changes.</NOTE> Po&s;. 1. <HI>All power is in Chri&s;t;</HI> power to rai&s;e or depre&s;&s;e Kingdomes and Nations as well as particular per&s;ons; and its little le&s;&s;e then bla&s;phemy to exclude him from our Turns: If they be for good, he is the <HI>Author and pre&s;erver of them.</HI> If we have Plenty after &s;carcity, Liberty after bondage, Peace after war: Oh thank <HI>him, him</HI> I &s;ay for tho&s;e ble&s;&s;ed changes: But what if we experience the contrary, darkne&s;&s;e in&s;tead of Light, feare in&s;tead of Safety, evil in&s;tead of Good&punc; yet in the&s;e evils <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> is to be owned. <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 45. 7. <HI>I forme light and create darkne&s;&s;e, I make peace and create evil, I the Lord do all the&s;e things:</HI> and
<PB N="205" REF="119">
<HI>Amos</HI> 3. 6. <HI>Shall there be evil in the City and I the Lord have not done it? Chri&s;t</HI> then hath his work in City or National good or evil.</P>
<P>Po&s;. 2. <HI>All the Kings of the earth reigne by Chri&s;t.</HI> Kings are the greate&s;t per&s;ons of the earth, and cau&s;e the greate&s;t Turns and Changes, either to good or evil. How is our feare and &s;orrow turned into hope and joy, when righteous men are exalted to government? and what mour|ning when wicked ones? <HI>Prov.</HI> 29. 2. How much of the increa&s;e of wickedne&s;&s;e is abated, by their power, care, and ex|ample? and what great cau&s;e have Saints to ble&s;&s;e God, when he makes Rulers <HI>nur&s;ing fathers,</HI> and to rule <HI>for him</HI> as they rule <HI>by him?</HI></P>
<P>Po&s;. 3. <HI>Government is &s;et up for the good of the World,</HI> and nothing cau&s;eth more con&s;iderable changes then <HI>that</HI> doth: it reduceth lawle&s;&s;e ones to <HI>a rule;</HI> ruleth and boundeth exce&s;&s;ive de&s;ires and acti|ons; brings in trade and wealth, im|provement of creatures, and increa&s;e of peace.</P>
<P>Po&s;. 4. <HI>Government in the frame of it is apt to change,</HI> and doth not that reach us? Government is a comprehen&s;ive word, relating to Princes and people; and &s;o <HI>all change</HI> when Governments change; Laws, Places, Offices, Rewards, Times, and Per&s;ons, <HI>all change.</HI></P>
<P><PB N="206" REF="120">
Po&s;. 5. <HI>Kings and Princes have abu&s;ed their power;</HI> that is a &s;ad change, a change of what &s;hould be be&s;t, to wor&s;t, of power to abu&s;e of it: of Kings to Tyrants, of Princes to Oppre&s;&s;ors.</P>
<P>Po&s;. 6. <HI>Sins of Princes tend to break their power.</HI> Here is change upon change: Change of Manners by &s;in, and change of Wholne&s;&s;e and Soundne&s;&s;e to a breach. Power cannot break but many things break with it, and many things cannot break but it makes great altera|tion</P>
<P>Po&s;. 7. <HI>Princes being wicked, people grow wicked too;</HI> a woful change indeed, and much to be lamented; Princes that &s;hould rule, become &s;laves, and that to the wor&s;t of ma&s;ters, their <HI>own Lu&s;ts;</HI> people that &s;hould be under command, to become unruly, and unruly by them that &s;hould better order them.</P>
<P>Po&s;. 8. <HI>Abu&s;e of power and wickedne&s;&s;e of people adapt to Civil War.</HI> Tho&s;e in power complain of the people, and the people of them in power; and we have ju&s;t cau&s;e to complaine of both. Its a &s;ad ca&s;e, that turnes the &s;oul to a wearine&s;&s;e of the good it doth po&s;&s;e&s;&s;e, and to a loathing its own peace.</P>
<P>Po&s;. 9. <HI>Civil Wars cau&s;e fatal Turnes.</HI> They turne, and overturne; all Turnes are in the bowels of that <HI>one:</HI> our many years &s;ad experience hath taught us; we
<PB N="207" REF="120">
were full, but &s;oon emptied, we were high, but brought low; we were in &s;afety, but &s;oon rapt into feare. Oh that our hearts might turne after all the&s;e Turnes upon <HI>us.</HI></P>
<P>Po&s;. 10. We fall out one with another, and our neighbours fall out with us both. How do they laugh at us, and &s;eek to rai&s;e them&s;elves out of our ruines? Is it not hard when tho&s;e you thought would <HI>help</HI> you, at be&s;t are Neuters, &s;tand &s;till and look on? Truly, we may thank our &s;elves, for putting them on <HI>that</HI> tempta|tion. Had we kept together,</P>
<P>Po&s;. 11. They would have been as for|merly: But now they are in armes, their War-&s;hips rigged and manned, and now the Seas mu&s;t be as bloody by a <HI>Forreigne War,</HI> as our Land had been by a <HI>Civil:</HI> Dreadful Turns and Changes when both land and &s;ea are bloody; And &s;urely <HI>Chri&s;t</HI></P>
<P>Po&s;. 12. will inquire after all that blood, who&s;e blood, how much blood, for what cau&s;e, by whom, in what man|ner, and when it was &s;hed. <HI>The Judge of All</HI> &s;hall appeare in his righteous judge|ment, and then wo be to the wicked, craf|ty, cruel, great ones of the World.</P>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="21" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="208" REF="121">
<HEAD>CHAP. XXI.</HEAD>
<ARGUMENT>
<P>Shews the Turns that befal Nations from the con&s;ideration and working of Chri&s;t as King of Saints, in <HI>12.</HI> Sections. <HI>1.</HI> Je&s;us Chri&s;t is King of Saints. <HI>2.</HI> He hath this honour up|on his &s;ufferings. <HI>3.</HI> He puts forth his power as King of the World for his Saints, over whom he is King in a &s;pecial manner. <HI>4.</HI> He mu&s;t have more vi&s;ible glory in this World. <HI>5.</HI> All governments will prove bitter, that Chri&s;t may be embraced as &s;weet. <HI>6.</HI> Chri&s;t pours out a mighty &s;pirit of prayer on his people, which he will an&s;wer. <HI>7.</HI> He &s;hall have a willing people in the day of his power. <HI>8.</HI> Some of the Kings &s;hall be among that willing people. <HI>9.</HI> Chri&s;t having great works to do, will notably &s;tir up the &s;pirits of Princes and people. <HI>10.</HI> The great work of the la&s;t dayes &s;hall be to exalt holine&s;&s;e and righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e. <HI>11.</HI> Saints &s;hall have Conque&s;ts over their adver&s;aries. <HI>12.</HI> The&s;e Turns &s;hall be by degrees.</P>
</ARGUMENT>
<P><PB N="209" REF="121">
WE have &s;een <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> on the Throne, and the World under his feet, and what he works as being <HI>Lord paramount</HI> of the earth: Let us now rai&s;e our thoughts and hearts unto a farther con|&s;ideration, and behold the Turns of the World from <HI>Chri&s;t, as King of Saints;</HI> and that your thoughts may be more collect|ed, I &s;hall repre&s;ent you in this Chap. with twelve Sections.</P>
<DIV2 N="1" TYPE="section">
<HEAD><HI>Sect.</HI> I.</HEAD>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> Je&s;us Chri&s;t is King of Saints.</NOTE> <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t is King of Saints, as well as King of the World.</HI> God the Father glories in this, that he hath <HI>&s;et him his King upon his holy hill, P&s;al.</HI> 2. 6. Let the Kings &s;et again&s;t him, and &s;eek to break his cords; all their power and malice cannot in the lea&s;t un&s;etle him. <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 110. 4. <HI>He &s;weares and will not repent.</HI> God the Father is fully &s;atisfied in the great glory put on <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> &s;o as he will never have a recoy|ling thought concerning it. Its the ble&s;&s;ed burden of the <HI>Song of Mo&s;es and the Lamb, Rev.</HI> 15. 3. <HI>Ju&s;t and true are thy ways oh thou King of Saints.</HI> And let wi&s;e and holy <HI>Daniel</HI> tell you what work this makes, <HI>Dan.</HI> 2. 44. <HI>His Kingdome &s;hall break in pieces and con&s;ume all the&s;e King|domes, and it &s;hall be for ever.</HI></P>
</DIV2>
<DIV2 N="2" TYPE="section">
<PB N="210" REF="122">
<HEAD><HI>Sect.</HI> II.</HEAD>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> He is &s;o upon his &s;ufferings.</NOTE> Je&s;us Chri&s;t hath this high honour of being King of Saints upon his &s;ufferings. <HI>The 22.</HI> P&s;alm <HI>is a P&s;alm of</HI> Chri&s;t <HI>and his &s;uffe|rings, as appears from</HI> v. <HI>1. to 22.</HI> The meek &s;hall eate and be &s;atisfied, and the Kingdoms of the Nations &s;hall wor&s;hip; yea the fat ones upon earth, v. <HI>25.</HI> &s;hall eate and wor&s;hip: <HI>and the ground you have,</HI> v. <HI>28.</HI> The Kingdome is the Lords, and he is Governour among the Nations.</P>
<P><HI>Phil.</HI> 2. 7, 8, 9. <HI>He made him&s;elfe of no reputation</HI> (though he were in the forme of God) yet, he <HI>took on him the forme of a &s;ervant;</HI> thus he humbled him&s;elfe, but God highly exalted him: and upon this follows, <HI>a Name above every Name, the bowing of every knee to him, and the confe&s;&s;ion of every tongue, That he is Lord.</HI> It is a proper honour due unto him from the&s;e his &s;ufferings, that is, &s;uch an honour as had not accrewed to him if he had not &s;uffered.</P>
<P>Je&s;us Chri&s;t had experience of many Turnes in his &s;ufferings; Now his glory &s;hall corre&s;pond with his &s;ufferings, and not be in one &s;traine or &s;treame, but in diver&s;e Turnes and alterations.</P>
</DIV2>
<DIV2 N="3" TYPE="section">
<PB N="211" REF="122">
<HEAD><HI>Sect.</HI> III.</HEAD>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> He puts forth his power as King of the World, for his peo|ple to whom he is King of Saints.</NOTE> Je&s;us Chri&s;t puts forth His power he hath as King of the Nations, for his people to whom he is King of Saints. <HI>1</HI> Chron. <HI>16. 20, 21.</HI> When they went from Nation to Nation, from one Kingdome to another People; He &s;uffered no man to do them wrong, yea he reproved Kings for their &s;akes. <HI>He mu&s;t be King of the World, that he may be</HI> their King, <HI>that in their wanderings he might help them; and if Kings oppo&s;e them, he as King of Kings will reprove them.</HI> Rev. <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Rev.</HI> 12. 16.</NOTE><HI>12. 16.</HI> The earth helps the woman: <HI>The world helps the Church. Chri&s;t makes</HI> the Goths and Vandales <HI>break the</HI> Arrian faction, <HI>by which the Dragon &s;ought to carry away the Church.</HI> I&s;a. <HI>43. 14.</HI> Thus &s;aith the Lord your Redeemer, For your <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>I&s;a.</HI> 43. 14.</NOTE>&s;akes I have &s;ent to Babylon, and have brought down all their Nobles.</P>
<P>Jehovah, con&s;idered as the Redeemer, and holy One of <HI>I&s;rael,</HI> puts forth his power as he is King of Nations, and makes it &s;ub&s;ervient to that power he hath as he is the <HI>Redeemer of his people.</HI> He &s;ends <HI>to Babylon and brings down all their Nobles:</HI> there he appears King of Kings, but its <HI>for their &s;akes, for I&s;raels &s;ake:</HI> there he appears the holy One, and their Redeemer, the Redeemer of his holy ones.</P>
</DIV2>
<DIV2 N="4" TYPE="section">
<PB N="212" REF="123">
<HEAD><HI>Sect.</HI> IV.</HEAD>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> Chri&s;t &s;hall have more glory in this World.</NOTE> <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t &s;hall have more vi&s;ible glory in this world then ever hitherto he hath had,</HI> the glory of this relation, of being <HI>King of Saints.</HI> His Subjects appeare in this world as Saints; they here <HI>&s;hine as lights in a dark world,</HI> and the world hates them becau&s;e they are Saints, holy ones; be|cau&s;e by their holine&s;&s;e they convince and condemn the world: and do they ap|peare for Chri&s;t, and will not Chri&s;t ap|peare for them? They appeare for him vi&s;ibly upon earth before men; and Chri&s;t will take to him&s;elfe his great power; and <HI>Dan.</HI> 7. 22. <HI>Time &s;hall come when the Saints &s;hall po&s;&s;e&s;se the Kingdome.</HI> He had a government over <HI>I&s;rael,</HI> &s;o as he had not over other Nations, and the Na|tions knew it. <HI>Exod.</HI> 14. 25. <HI>Let us flee</HI> (&s;ay the Egyptians) <HI>from the face of I&s;rael, for the Lord fighteth for them. Deut.</HI> 32. 31. <HI>Their Rock is not as our Rock, even our ene|mies them&s;elves being judges:</HI> And &s;urely <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> &s;hall again appeare to have the government of Saints, and <HI>Saints</HI> &s;hall know it more, and their enemies too, when he &s;hall <HI>be revealed from heaven to take vengeance on them that know not God:</HI> and 2 <HI>The&s;.</HI> 1. 10. <HI>&s;hall come to be glorified in his Saints, and admired in all them that believe.</HI> Thus <HI>Rev.</HI> 15. when <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> &s;ends
<PB N="213" REF="123">
<HI>his la&s;t plagues, in which are filled up the the wrath of God</HI> on his Churches enemies, then is <HI>Chri&s;t honoured, v.</HI> 3. <HI>as King of Saints.</HI></P>
</DIV2>
<DIV2 N="5" TYPE="section">
<HEAD><HI>Sect.</HI> V.</HEAD>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>5.</HI> All Go|vernments have their bitterne&s;&s;e, that Chri&s;ts Govern|ment may be rendred de&s;irable.</NOTE> <HI>Bitterne&s;&s;e doth and &s;hall mingle with all Governments among all Nations, that &s;o Chri&s;ts Government may be rendred &s;weet.</HI> Look on Governments by &s;ingle Per&s;ons, or by Councils, in Kingdomes or in Common-wealths; look on this or that form of Government what&s;oever it be, you will finde &s;o much weakne&s;&s;e and wickedne&s;&s;e, &s;o much corruption, &s;elf-&s;ee|king, and undue exaltation of them&s;elves breaking forth, as that men will be weary of it. To maintaine their pride, you will finde men apt to oppre&s;&s;e; to main|taine their oppre&s;&s;ion, you will finde them dextrous either to &s;traine or new coyne Laws; and &s;o far from removing heavy burdens, that they will lay more on. Ob|&s;erve, ob&s;erve narrowly, and you will meet with &s;uch undue bia&s;&s;ings in them that rule, to their friends, kindred, re|lations and intere&s;ts, that due de&s;erving worth cannot mount to preferment: Look on the right or left hand, you will finde no helper: oh how wellcome will <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> be in &s;uch a conjunction of affairs? When he was to be borne into the world, he
<PB N="214" REF="124">
&s;tay'd till men had made <HI>void his Law,</HI> till the <HI>Phari&s;ees</HI> by their glo&s;&s;es and tradi|tions <HI>had made the word of God of no effect:</HI> and when he &s;hall come to take the King|dome to him&s;elfe, is &s;hall be when men have corrupted, and &s;o inbittered all rule and government. I&s;rael mu&s;t be un|der hard Task-ma&s;ters that <HI>make them &s;erve with rigour,</HI> before <HI>Mo&s;es</HI> and <HI>Aaron</HI> can be hearkned unto. <HI>Rev.</HI> 17. 13, 14. <HI>The ten Hornes,</HI> that is, the ten Kings of <HI>Europe, give their power and &s;trength to the Bea&s;t,</HI> and make war with the Lamb; that is the condition of Governours before Chri&s;t come: But the Lamb &s;hall come and overcome them, for he is <HI>King of Kings,</HI> and <HI>Lord of Lords,</HI> and they <HI>that are with him,</HI> as <HI>called,</HI> and <HI>cho&s;en,</HI> and <HI>faithful.</HI></P>
</DIV2>
<DIV2 N="6" TYPE="section">
<HEAD><HI>Sect.</HI> VI.</HEAD>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>6.</HI> Chri&s;t poureth on his people a &s;pirit of prayer.</NOTE> <HI>Chri&s;t pours out on his people a mighty &s;pirit of prayer which he in his government as King of Saints, returns a full an&s;wer to.</HI> The prayers of Saints are Chri&s;t his &s;pirit breathing in &s;i<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">hts and groanes, and making a <HI>voyce of &s;upplication.</HI> Now &s;ure|ly he under&s;tands his own voyce in them, and will heare his own &s;pirit: When God rejected <HI>Saul, Samuel</HI> is commanded <HI>not to pray for him,</HI> 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 16. 10. Its a &s;ad thing, when tho&s;e in authority fall out
<PB N="215" REF="124">
of Saints prayers, or when Saints pray again&s;t them, not for them. 1 <HI>Tim.</HI> 2. 2. <HI>We mu&s;t pray for Kings, and all that be in authority;</HI> and &s;urely it is fatal and omi|nous when Gods people ju&s;tly indite Princes, and plead as <HI>Ananias</HI> again&s;t <HI>Saul, Act.</HI> 9. 13. <HI>Lord, I have heard by many of this man, how much evil he hath done to thy Saints.</HI> When the <HI>&s;oules under the Al|tar cry, Rev.</HI> 6. 10. then <HI>v.</HI> 12. <HI>Behold a great Earthquake:</HI> little do you conceive what great Changes Saints prayers make. <HI>Rev.</HI> 5. 8. <HI>The four living creatures, and the four and twenty Elders,</HI> which is the re&s;em|blance of a Go&s;pel-Church; the <HI>four li|ving creatures</HI> repre&s;enting the Officers, and the <HI>four and twenty Elders</HI> the Bre|thren of the Congregation: now the&s;e are &s;aid, <HI>to have golden vials full of odors,</HI> which <HI>are the prayers of Saints.</HI> Now the&s;e <HI>via<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="2 letters"></HI> of prayers fill <HI>the vials of wrath, Rev.</HI> 15. 1. God a&s;&s;umes it as his high prero|gative to <HI>break the arrows that flie, and</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>P&s;al.</HI> 76. 3.</NOTE><HI>wound afar off;</HI> to break the <HI>&s;heild</HI> that &s;hould defend, <HI>the &s;word</HI> that wounds neer at hand: <HI>He breaks Arrows, Sheild, Sword, Battle, All;</HI> But <HI>where?</HI> Its in <HI>Salem, in Sion, where Judah knew God,</HI> and <HI>I&s;rael greatened his Name;</HI> Its <HI>there, there,</HI> where his people cry to him, <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 76. 3.</P>
</DIV2>
<DIV2 N="7" TYPE="section">
<PB N="216" REF="125">
<HEAD><HI>Sect.</HI> VII.</HEAD>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>7.</HI> Chri&s;t &s;hall have, a willing people.</NOTE> Je&s;us Chri&s;t &s;hall have a willing people in the day of his power, P&s;al. <HI>110. 3. Oh! &s;trange what a Turne will that be: oh how backward are men now, and to no|thing more backward then to holine&s;&s;e, and holy things, when they come forth in their beauty. I, but</HI> Je&s;us Chri&s;t &s;hall have the day of it, <HI>and it &s;hall be the</HI> day of his power, <HI>the day wherein his power &s;hall be gloriou&s;ly manife&s;ted, and &s;ub|jected unto.</HI> I&s;a. <HI>49. 19, 20, 21.</HI> The land &s;hall be too narrow, by rea&s;on of the inhabi|tants. The children &s;hall &s;ay, the place is too &s;traite for us: give place to us, that we may dwell; <HI>yea the Church &s;hall &s;ay in re|gard of the numerous addition of Mem|bers:</HI> who hath begotten me the&s;e? &s;eeing I have lo&s;t my children, who hath brought up the&s;e? Behold I was left alone.</P>
<P><HI>That is a remarkable Prophe&s;ie and Promi&s;e in</HI> Ezek. <HI>36. 37, 38.</HI> I will in|crea&s;e them with men like a flock, as the holy flock, as the fl<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ck of Jeru&s;alem in her &s;olemne Fea&s;ts: So &s;hall thy wa&s;te Cities be filled with flocks of men, and they &s;hall know that I am the Lord.</P>
</DIV2>
<DIV2 N="8" TYPE="section">
<PB N="217" REF="125">
<HEAD><HI>Sect.</HI> VIII.</HEAD>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>8.</HI> Some Kings &s;hall be among this wil|ling people.</NOTE> <HI>Some of the Kings of the Earth &s;hall be among this willing people.</HI> Oh wonderful! wonderful! Kings to become &s;ubjects, to be among the people, and the <HI>willing peo|ple,</HI> whom aforetime they mo&s;t hated; that is &s;trange, that tho&s;e who were the greate&s;t enemies, &s;hould now become friends; that tho&s;e who have done &s;o much again&s;t <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> &s;hall now be active for him. God had of old his <HI>David, He|zekiah, Jeho&s;aphat, A&s;a,</HI> and <HI>Jo&s;iah,</HI> good and godly Kings, and he will have &s;ome like them again; outward pomps and plea&s;ures &s;hall be no let to his call and working on them, and by them.</P>
<P>I&s;a. <HI>49. 7.</HI> Thus &s;aith the Lord the Re|deemer of I&s;rael, and his holy One; Kings &s;hall &s;ee and ari&s;e, Princes al&s;o &s;hall wor&s;hip becau&s;e of the Lord that is faithful, and the holy One of I&s;rael, and he &s;hall chu&s;e thee.</P>
<P>I&s;a. <HI>30. 21.</HI> Their Nobles &s;hall be of them|&s;elves, and their Governours &s;hall proceed from the mid&s;t of them; He will re&s;tore their Judges as at the fir&s;t, and their Coun&s;ellers as at the beginning; afterward thou &s;halt be called the City of righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e, the faithful City.</P>
<P><HI>I&s;a.</HI> 49. 23. <HI>Kings &s;hall be thy Nur&s;ing fathers, and Queens or Prince&s;&s;es thy Nur|&s;ing mothers.</HI> Tho&s;e who have been the
<PB N="218" REF="126">
per&s;ecutors, &s;hall be the pre&s;ervers; the de&s;troyers &s;hall prove nouri&s;hers; tho&s;e that did minde nothing but their pride, and plea&s;ure, they &s;hall now minde the Church and her intere&s;t; They that made the people of God bow down till they pa&s;&s;ed over them, they &s;hall come, and bow down to the Church with their faces toward the earth.</P>
<P><HI>I&s;a.</HI> 60. 16. The Prophet there &s;peaking of the &s;tate of the Jewi&s;h Church, after their general conver&s;ion to <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> promi|&s;eth: <HI>Thou &s;halt al&s;o &s;ucke the milke of the Gentiles;</HI> that now accur&s;ed people of the <HI>Jews</HI> &s;hall become ble&s;&s;ed; they are &s;till beloved for their father &s;ake, <HI>v.</HI> 10. <HI>They &s;hall &s;uck the brea&s;ts of Kings;</HI> none have been and are &s;o &s;queezed in all parts of the World where they are &s;cattered, as the poor <HI>Jews</HI> are; who, although they enjoy an Old-Te&s;tament ble&s;&s;ing, and become rich where they live; yet then tho&s;e who rule over them u&s;e them as we do a &s;punge that is full, wring it dry: So are they dealt withal; but now tho&s;e that &s;ucked from them, &s;hall give &s;ucke to them; yea, <HI>the &s;onnes of &s;trangers &s;hall build up thy walls, and their Kings &s;hall mini&s;ter unto thee; for in my wrath I &s;mote thee, but in my favour have I mercy on thee.</HI></P>
</DIV2>
<DIV2 N="9" TYPE="section">
<PB N="219" REF="126">
<HEAD><HI>Sect.</HI> IX.</HEAD>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>9.</HI> Chri&s;t &s;hall migh|tily &s;tir up his people to be active.</NOTE> <HI>That Chri&s;t having great works to do in the la&s;t dayes, he will mightily &s;tir up the &s;pi|rits of Princes and People.</HI> When Temple|work was in hand, when the &s;olemne and publick wor&s;hip of God was to be &s;et up, <HI>Hagg.</HI> 1. 14. <HI>God &s;tirs up the &s;pirit of Zoro|babel Governour of Judah, and the &s;pirit of Jeho&s;huah the high Prei&s;t, and the &s;pirit of all the remnant of the people:</HI> Marke, its par|ticularly &s;et down, <HI>the &s;pirit, the &s;pirit, the &s;pirit.</HI> God had particular work for the Governour, the high Prei&s;t, and the peo|ple; and therefore in particular he &s;tirs up their &s;pirits; oh &s;weet and ble&s;&s;ed work, and ble&s;&s;ed &s;pirits! <HI>Zorobabel, Jo|shua, People, all</HI> are <HI>&s;tirred,</HI> and <HI>&s;tirred in &s;pirit,</HI> and <HI>all work: Zorobabel</HI> doth not di&s;dain the work, nor &s;corne the people; The people are not cro&s;&s;e to <HI>Zorobabel,</HI> but all &s;weetly agree.</P>
<P>It was a great work to e&s;tabli&s;h the Kingdome in <HI>Davids</HI> hand, and then 1 <HI>Chron.</HI> 12. 18. <HI>The &s;pirit clothed Ama&s;a, and he &s;aid, Thine are we David, and on thy &s;ide thou &s;on of Je&s;se, Peace, peace be to thy help|ers, for thy God helpeth thee.</HI> Chri&s;t hath Temples now in Go&s;pel-times, as well as formerly; and there is a great deale of <HI>Temple-work, of Church-work to be done now,</HI> as well as <HI>then;</HI> and God will &s;tirre up
<PB N="220" REF="127">
the &s;pirits of Governours, Pa&s;tors, and People, <HI>now,</HI> as well as <HI>then,</HI> and they &s;hall work, and the work &s;hall pro&s;per in their hand. God the Father hath now the Kingdome of <HI>David,</HI> the Kingdome of his Son <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t</HI> to &s;et up, and it mu&s;t be &s;trengthened in his hand. God will now cloath many like <HI>Ama&s;a,</HI> with his &s;pirit, that &s;hall come forth to the <HI>help of the Lord again&s;t the mighty.</HI></P>
</DIV2>
<DIV2 N="10" TYPE="section">
<HEAD><HI>Sect.</HI> X.</HEAD>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>10.</HI> Righ|teou&s;ne&s;&s;e &s;hall be ex|alted in Kingdoms.</NOTE> The great worke of the latter dayes &s;hall be to exalt holine&s;&s;e and righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e, in Kingdomes and Common-wealths.</P>
<P><HI>Ezek.</HI> 37. 23. <HI>They &s;hall not defile them|&s;elves any more with their Idols, nor with their dete&s;table things, nor with any of their tran&s;gre&s;&s;ions: But I will &s;ave them out of all their dwelling places, wherein they have &s;in|ned, and will clean&s;e them; &s;o &s;hall they be my people, and I will be their God.</HI> This ble&s;&s;ed Covenant &s;hall be made good, both to Jews and Gentiles. <HI>Joel</HI> 3. 17. <HI>So &s;hall ye know that I am the Lord your God, dwelling in Sion my holy mountaine; Then &s;hall Jeru&s;alem be holy, and there &s;hall no &s;trangers pa&s;&s;e thorow her any more.</HI> The&s;e Promi&s;es have not received their full ac|compli&s;hment; I &s;ay, their <HI>full</HI> accom|pli&s;hment; but remaine yet to be fulfil|led according to what was laid down in
<PB N="221" REF="127">
the <HI>&s;econd Chapter;</HI> The holine&s;&s;e and purging &s;pok<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">n of in the&s;e Promi&s;es, &s;hall not be the portion of <HI>Jeru&s;alem</HI> one|ly&punc; &s;he alone is not to obtain this holi|ne&s;&s;e and righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e, and others left out: But it &s;hall be the portion of o|ther people, the <HI>Gentiles</HI> al&s;o according to the Prophe&s;ie of <HI>John</HI> in <HI>Rev.</HI> 22. 3. There &s;hall be no more <HI>Cur&s;e;</HI> then &s;urely there will not be that that cau&s;eth the cur&s;e, which is <HI>&s;in:</HI> &s;o far as the cur&s;e &s;hall not be, &s;in &s;hall not be: <HI>But the Throne of God, and the Lamb &s;hall be in it.</HI> Now the Thrones of men and of the Bea&s;t, the Thrones of prophane&s;&s;e and Idolatry, are &s;et up; but it &s;hall not be &s;o then, but <HI>his &s;ervants &s;hall &s;erve him.</HI> Now they &s;erve their own lu&s;ts, and the wills of men too much; but then they &s;hall &s;erve <HI>the Lamb Chri&s;t;</HI> and how, and wherein? <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 45. 6. <HI>The Scepter of his Kingdome is a right Scepter, v.</HI> 7. <HI>Thou love&s;t righteou&s;ne&s;se, and hate&s;t wickedne&s;se;</HI> and as Chri&s;t loves and hates, &s;o &s;hall his &s;ervants then emi|nently; they &s;hall have <HI>his minde and heart.</HI> 2 <HI>Pet.</HI> 3. 13. <HI>We according to his promi&s;e, look for new heavens and a new earth, where|in dwelleth righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e.</HI> When the <HI>new heavens</HI> and the <HI>new earth</HI> &s;hall be righte|ou&s;ne&s;&s;e, then <HI>&s;hall be no &s;tranger there,</HI> but a home dweller; it &s;hall abide there as in the proper &s;eat of it.</P>
</DIV2>
<DIV2 N="11" TYPE="section">
<PB N="222" REF="128">
<HEAD><HI>Sect.</HI> XI.</HEAD>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>11.</HI> Saints &s;hall have Conque&s;ts over their enemies.</NOTE> Saints &s;hall have notable conque&s;ts over their adver&s;aries.</P>
<P><HI>Nnmb.</HI> 24. 17, 18. <HI>The Star out of Jacob, and the Scepter that &s;hall ri&s;e out of I&s;rael, &s;hall &s;mite the corners of Moab: Edom &s;hall be a po&s;&s;e&s;&s;ion, and I&s;rael &s;hall do valiantly; out of Jacob &s;hall come he that &s;hall have do|minion, and &s;hall de&s;troy him that remaineth of the City.</HI> The names of Moab and E|dom and the City, hold out the enemies of the Church; <HI>I&s;rael</HI> and <HI>Jacob,</HI> are to be referred to the I&s;rael of God in the Go&s;pel, and his people <HI>now,</HI> as well as <HI>then:</HI> and pardon me, if I conceive our late dome&s;tick Wars and Triumphant Victories to look this way.</P>
<P><HI>Joel</HI> 3. 19. <HI>Egypt and Edom &s;hall be a de&s;olation for the violence again&s;t the chil|dren of Judah, becau&s;e they have &s;hed inno|cent blood in the land. Egypt</HI> and <HI>Edom</HI> comprehend the enemies of Gods people <HI>now,</HI> as well as formerly; and precious <HI>in the &s;ight of the Lord is the blood of his Saints.</HI> Tremble and be horribly a|fraid, France, Spain, Savoy, Germany, England, yea all Nations, on whom lieth the heavy guilt of <HI>Saints blood;</HI> he that hath a <HI>bottle for their teares,</HI> will certainly account for their <HI>blood;</HI> and who knows but he may now be upon his Circuit,
<PB N="223" REF="128">
and beginning to repay and to require blood for blood?</P>
<P>Obad. v. <HI>18.</HI> The hou&s;e of Jacob &s;hall be a fire, and the hou&s;e of Jo&s;eph a flame, and the hou&s;e of E&s;au for &s;tuble, and they &s;hall kindle in them, and there &s;hall not be any remaining of the hou&s;e of E&s;au, for the Lord hath &s;po|ken it.</P>
<P>P&s;al. <HI>149. 6, 7, 8, 9.</HI> The prai&s;es of God &s;hall be in the mouthes of Saints, and a two|edged &s;word in their hands to execute on them the judgement written; To execute vengeance on the Heathen, and puni&s;hment on the people; To binde their Kings in chains, and their Nobles in links of Iron: This honour have all his Saints: <HI>and this ruine &s;hall all his adver&s;aries have.</HI></P>
<P>Hag. <HI>2. 22.</HI> I will overthrow the Throne of Kingdomes, and I will de&s;troy the &s;trength of the Kingdomes of the Heathen, and I will overthrow the Charriots, and tho&s;e that ride in them; and the hor&s;es and their riders &s;hall come down every one by the &s;word of his Brother.</P>
</DIV2>
<DIV2 N="12" TYPE="section">
<HEAD><HI>Sect.</HI> XII.</HEAD>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>12.</HI> The&s;e things &s;hall be by degrees.</NOTE> This Holine&s;se and Righteou&s;ne&s;se, the&s;e glorious Conque&s;ts, and the&s;e great Changes shall not be all at once, but be brought on by degrees.</P>
<P>Thus <HI>Mo&s;es</HI> carries I&s;rael through the Wilderne&s;&s;e, but <HI>Joshua</HI> brings them in|to
<PB N="224" REF="129">
Canaan; <HI>Mo&s;es</HI> mu&s;t not do all, nor <HI>Joshua:</HI> both have their proper works: <HI>David</HI> provides for the Temple, but <HI>Solo|mon</HI> he mu&s;t build it.</P>
<P><HI>Deut.</HI> 7. 22. <HI>I will put out the&s;e Nations before thee by little and little, thou may&s;t not con&s;ume them at once.</HI> God works and performes his promi&s;es <HI>now</HI> in proportion to what he did formerly; and as it was by degrees then, &s;o <HI>now,</HI> though its po&s;&s;ible God may make more ha&s;te; God builds up his people as he de&s;troyes his enemies, and that is <HI>by degrees.</HI></P>
<P>By the <HI>&s;even Seals</HI> he de&s;troyes Hea|theni&s;h Rome, <HI>Rev.</HI> 6. By the <HI>&s;even Vials</HI> &s;ucce&s;&s;ively the Antichri&s;tian Romi&s;h party, <HI>Rev.</HI> 17. So by degrees he will rai&s;e his Church.</P>
</DIV2>
</DIV1>
<DIV1 N="22" TYPE="chapter">
<PB N="225" REF="129">
<HEAD>CHAP. XXII. Contains the &V;&s;es of the former Doctrine, namely, That Chri&s;t is King of Saints.</HEAD>
<P>HAving declared <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> in the former twelve <HI>Sections</HI> to be <HI>King of Saints:</HI> Give me leave now, to adde a word of application, and that
<LIST>
<ITEM>1. By way of an inviting <HI>In&s;truction.</HI></ITEM>
<ITEM><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> &V;&s;e of In&s;truction.</NOTE> 2. By way of <HI>Exhortation.</HI></ITEM>
</LIST></P>
<P>The inviting <HI>In&s;truction</HI> you &s;hall finde in the&s;e three pa&s;&s;ages, di&s;cove|ring
<LIST>
<ITEM>1. Chri&s;ts excellency.</ITEM>
<ITEM>2. The properties of his Kingdome.</ITEM>
<ITEM>3. The glory of his Saints.</ITEM>
</LIST></P>
<P N="1">1. To &s;hew you <HI>Chri&s;t's excellency,</HI> in that he is <HI>King of Saints:</HI> None &s;o glo|rious, and therefore none &s;o de&s;irable as <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t, Rev.</HI> 15. 3. where he hath that high and mighty Title of <HI>King of Saints</HI> a&s;cribed to him; he is al&s;o called <HI>Lord God Almighty, who&s;e workes are great and marvelous, and his wayes ju&s;t and true.</HI> Now to elevate your thoughts to his Ex|cellency, let me &s;et before you the&s;e four things.
<LIST>
<ITEM>1. His right and Title.</ITEM>
<ITEM>2. His Qualifications.</ITEM>
<ITEM>3. His Admini&s;trations.</ITEM>
<ITEM>4. His Communications.</ITEM>
</LIST></P>
<P N="1"><PB N="226" REF="130">
<NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> Chri&s;ts Title.</NOTE> 1. <HI>His <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ight and Title,</HI> which you &s;hall finde the ju&s;te&s;t and highe&s;t Title: He is no u&s;urper of his Kingdome; for he hath it by a fivefold right. 1. Of Election. 2. Of Donation. 3. Of Birth. 4. Of Pur|cha&s;e. 5. Of Conque&s;t.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> By Ele|ction.</NOTE> 1. His right is by <HI>Election;</HI> for He is <HI>cho&s;en</HI> to it by God the Father, <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 42. 1. <HI>Behold my &s;ervant whom I uphold, mine elect in whom my &s;oul delighteth.</HI> Gods ever|la&s;ting love is on him, and on him for the great work and &s;ervice of the Mediator|&s;hip; he hath pa&s;&s;ed by all in Heaven and Earth, and laid it onely on his &s;houlders. <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 2. 6. He hath &s;et his King on his holy hill: &s;et him <GAP DESC="foreign"> from <GAP DESC="foreign"> which &s;ignifies to pour out; I have <HI>annointed</HI> and &s;et him by my eternal coun&s;el and decree: yea the Father hath pa&s;&s;ed it with an oath, <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 110. His &s;wearing is to be extended not onely to his <HI>Prie&s;tly,</HI> but al&s;o to his <HI>Kingly</HI> Office; &s;o that he will never repent of his choice; His right is then by the be&s;t <HI>Election.</HI></P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> By Do|nation.</NOTE> 2. He hath right by <HI>Donation,</HI> and that is a right with the highe&s;t love: All power is <HI>given</HI> to him, <HI>Math.</HI> 18. <HI>in heaven and in earth: Aske of me, and I will give thee</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>P&s;al.</HI> 2. 8.</NOTE><HI>the Heathen:</HI> His Kingdome is all of love. The Father loves, and gives him the Kingdome; The Son loves the Fa|ther, and us, and gives him&s;elfe to us, with command to love him, and one an|other:
<PB N="227" REF="130">
he calls us his <HI>little flock,</HI> and a&s;|&s;ures us, <HI>It is the Fathers good plea&s;ure to give us the Kingdome al&s;o.</HI></P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> By Birth.</NOTE> 3. He hath his right by <HI>Birth;</HI> it is his <HI>Birthright;</HI> So he is <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>the Fir&s;t-borne of every creature, Col.</HI> 1. 16. &amp; <HI>v.</HI> 18. <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>the Fir&s;t-borne from the dead. P&s;al.</HI> 2. 7. <HI>Thou art my Son;</HI> and then follows the inheritance and po&s;&s;e&s;&s;ion, <HI>v.</HI> 8. <HI>I will give thee the Heathen for thine inheritance, and the uttermo&s;t parts of the earth for thy po&s;&s;e&s;&s;ion. Inheritance</HI> is the portion of a Son, and his inheritance hath pre&s;ent po&s;|&s;e&s;&s;ion with it, although his father live for ever.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> By Pur|cha&s;e.</NOTE> 4. Chri&s;t hath his right by <HI>Purcha&s;e;</HI> He layes down a con&s;iderable price for his Kingdome. <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 53. 10. <HI>He makes his &s;oul an offering for &s;in,</HI> and then follows: <HI>He &s;hall &s;ee his &s;eed and prolong his dayes;</HI> that is, having poured out his &s;oul, his blood, as a drink-offering to his Father, he &s;hall prolong <HI>the dayes of his Kingdome, and the good plea&s;ure of the Lord &s;hall pro&s;|per in his hand.</HI></P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>5.</HI> By Con|que&s;t.</NOTE> 5. La&s;tly, his <HI>Conque&s;t</HI> gives it him: 1 <HI>Cor.</HI> 15. 25. He mu&s;t reigne and put all his enemies under his feet, he mu&s;t reigne, and his enemies mu&s;t be <HI>de&s;troyed:</HI> yea he de&s;troyes that which de&s;troyeth <HI>all,</HI> namely <HI>Death:</HI> he then lives, and reignes, reignes and conquers, and ju&s;tly reignes,
<PB N="228" REF="131">
becau&s;e he ju&s;tly conquers. Equity is &s;urely attractive, and none hath more of <HI>that</HI> then <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> and therefore unto him &s;hould we look.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Chri&s;ts qualifica|tions great|e&s;t&punc;</NOTE> 2. Chri&s;t hath not onely right, but the mo&s;t incomprehen&s;ible <HI>qualification</HI> for his Government. Here on earth many have <HI>right,</HI> who have not wi&s;dome to <HI>rule: Chri&s;t</HI> hath &s;uperlatively all <HI>right,</HI> and all <HI>qualification;</HI> He is the <HI>wi&s;dome</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Col.</HI> 2. 9.</NOTE><HI>and power of God.</HI> 1 <HI>Cor.</HI> 1. 24. <HI>In him dwells all the fullne&s;&s;e of the Godhead bodily; All</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Col.</HI> 2. 3.</NOTE><HI>trea&s;ures of knowledge are hid in him;</HI> His anointing is with <HI>oyle of gladne&s;&s;e above his</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>P&s;al.</HI> 45. 7.</NOTE><HI>fellows:</HI> He hath the &s;pirit, but not by mea&s;ure, and that &s;pirit <HI>re&s;ting</HI> on him, <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 11. 2. all which &s;hew the <HI>per&s;on</HI> of <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> to be mo&s;t heavenly, and that with which we &s;hould mo&s;t be taken.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> Chri&s;ts admini&s;tra|tions high|e&s;t.</NOTE> 3. Chri&s;ts <HI>Admini&s;trations</HI> are the high|e&s;t and pure&s;t: <HI>Rev.</HI> 15. 3. <HI>His wayes are ju&s;t and true: P&s;al.</HI> 85. 10. Here <HI>mercy and truth meet together; righteou&s;ne&s;se and peace ki&s;&s;e each other.</HI> He is mo&s;t ab&s;olute, ac|countable to none but his Father. He rules by <HI>will,</HI> and ju&s;tly too&punc; becau&s;e, his will is a Law: what is <HI>Tyranny</HI> in the <HI>Creature,</HI> is <HI>Equity</HI> in <HI>Chri&s;t.</HI> His exal|ting his will to be our Law, is righteous in him, and good to us; for <HI>Men</HI> to do &s;o, is to intrench on his prerogative, and render them&s;elves obnoxious to his vin|dictive power. He <HI>makes</HI> the Subjects he
<PB N="229" REF="131">
<HI>rules</HI> over. <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 149. 2. <HI>Let I&s;rael rejoyce in him that made him, Let the children of Zion be joyfull in their King:</HI> Their King is their Maker; and therefore requireth the mo&s;t ob&s;ervance from them. 2 <HI>Cor.</HI> 10. 5. <HI>Every thonght is to be under a happy capti|vity to the obedience of Chri&s;t.</HI> Let Tyrants be never &s;o crafty and cruel, they may re&s;traine the body, and gag the tongues of men, but they cannot reach their <HI>thoughts:</HI> But <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> layes his dominion <HI>there,</HI> leaves us not <HI>one thought</HI> to be at our own di&s;po&s;al, but requires <HI>all</HI> to come under him.</P>
<P>It is for the poor low governments here to be tied to Time and Place; Chri&s;t rules over <HI>all,</HI> all per&s;ons and things all|wayes: He makes all, and pre&s;erveth what he hath made, and orders righteou&s;ly that which he hath pre&s;erved. He hath <HI>gladium ju&s;titiae,</HI> the &s;word of Ju&s;tice, by which he cuts up vice, and defends his own people: and he hath <HI>gladium belli,</HI> the &s;word of War, to de&s;troy his incorrigible enemies: Let them gather together, he will &s;catter them; let them make their ne&s;ts <HI>in the Stars,</HI> yet thence <HI>he will plucke them down;</HI> Let them lay their plots deep, and <HI>mag|nifie</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Joel</HI> 2. 20, 21.</NOTE><HI>them&s;elves to do great things:</HI> yet he will turn their wi&s;dom into fooli&s;hne&s;&s;e, and their plots to the advance of his own <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> Chri&s;t his commu|nications are large&s;t.</NOTE>de&s;ignes.</P>
<P N="4">4. Chri&s;ts <HI>Communications</HI> are the lar|ge&s;t,
<PB N="230" REF="132">
1 <HI>Joh.</HI> 5. 20. <HI>He hath given us under|&s;tanding to know him that is true.</HI> Men may propound &s;omething for your know|ledge, but they cannot <HI>give the under&s;tan|ding:</HI> but Chri&s;t triumphs in this; to give wi&s;dome to the &s;imple, and know|ledge to them that have no under&s;tan|ding. <HI>Phil.</HI> 1. 29. <HI>&V;nto you its given, on the behalfe of Chri&s;t, not onely to believe, but al&s;o to &s;uffer for his &s;ake.</HI></P>
<P><HI>Acts</HI> 5. 31. <HI>God hath exalted him to be a Prince and a Saviour, to give repentance to I&s;rael and remi&s;&s;ion of &s;in.</HI> When he left the World he bequeaths no wor&s;e legacy to his Di&s;ciples, then what him&s;elfe had enjoyed, <HI>Joh.</HI> 14. 27. <HI>Peace</HI> he leaves with them, yea <HI>his peace</HI> to relieve their troubled and fearful hearts.</P>
<P>Eph. <HI>4. 8.</HI> and <HI>1<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">.</HI> When he a&s;cends up on high, he led captivity captive, and gave gifts unto men: Ver&s;e <HI>12.</HI> He gave &s;ome Apo&s;tles, and &s;ome Prophets, &s;ome Evange|li&s;ts, &s;ome Pa&s;tors, and Teachers, for the perfecting of the Saints, for the worke of the Mini&s;tery, for the edifying of the body of Chri&s;t.</P>
<P>2 <HI>Tim.</HI> 4. 7, 8. <HI>To all that love his ap|pearance,</HI> and that have <HI>fought the good fight, and kept the faith; he as a righteous Lord and Judge, hath laid up, and will give a Crown of righteou&s;ne&s;se.</HI> Now &s;umme up all: to give knowledge and faith, and &s;o all other graces; to give repentance and
<PB N="231" REF="132">
remi&s;&s;ion of &s;ins, grace and gifts, gifts to men, and tho&s;e men to his Church, and hereafter a Crown of righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e: What are, if the&s;e are not large Com|munications? Every <HI>man is a friend to him that giveth gifts;</HI> and &s;hall not the con&s;ideration of Chri&s;t his bountiful gi|ing, make us de&s;irou&s;ly longing after that Title of true honour, to be called <HI>his friends?</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Properties of Chri&s;t's Kingdome.</NOTE> We have &s;een <HI>King Je&s;us</HI> upon the Throne, and his Throne all glorious; we have &s;een his Right, his Qualifica|tions, Admini&s;trations, and Communi|cations: Let us now in the &s;econd place, veiw the <HI>Properties of his Kingdome.</HI></P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> It is &s;piritual.</NOTE> 1. His Kingdome is <HI>&s;piritual, Rom.</HI> 14. 17 <HI>Not in meat and drinke, but righteou&s;|ne&s;&s;e and peace and joy in the holy Gho&s;t.</HI> Princes may beare rule over mens per&s;ons and e&s;tates; but <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t</HI> over mens <HI>con&s;ciences:</HI> He imprints his Law upon them, and gives them power to reflect both on <HI>that Law,</HI> and their <HI>own wayes</HI> by it; he accu&s;eth or excu&s;eth, lets terrour or peace into the con&s;cience, as &s;eemeth good to him.</P>
<P>His <HI>Commands</HI> and <HI>Promi&s;es</HI> carry a ble&s;&s;ed &s;piritualne&s;&s;e with them, and &s;o do his <HI>Rewards.</HI> When you &s;erve him, it mu&s;t be <HI>in &s;pirit and truth;</HI> when you <HI>pray,</HI> it mu&s;t be <HI>in the &s;pirit, Jude v.</HI> 20. and when you <HI>heare,</HI> it mu&s;t be <HI>what the</HI>
<PB N="232" REF="133">
<HI>&s;pirit &s;ayeth to the Churches, Rev.</HI> 3. 6.</P>
<P><HI>If you take on you to</HI> preach, <HI>it mu&s;t</HI> not be with the enti&s;ing words of mans wi&s;dome, but in demon&s;tration of the &s;pirit, and with power, Col. <HI>2. 4. and if you</HI> &s;ing, <HI>it mu&s;t be</HI> &s;piri|tual Songs, making melody with grace in the heart to the Lord, Col. <HI>3 16. In a word,</HI> you are as lively &s;tones built up, a &s;piritual hou&s;e, an holy prie&s;thood to offer up &s;piritual Sacrifices acceptable to God by Je&s;us Chri&s;t, <HI>1</HI> Pet. <HI>2. 5. and</HI> ver&s;e <HI>9.</HI> Ye are a cho&s;en ge|neration, a royal prie&s;thood, an holy nation, a peculiar people, that ye &s;hould &s;hew forth the prai&s;es of him that hath called you out of darkne&s;&s;e into his marvellous light. I be|&s;eech you therefore Brethren by the mercyes of God, that ye pre&s;ent your bodies a lively Sa|crifice, holy, acceptable unto God, which is your rea&s;onable &s;ervice, Rom. <HI>12. 1.</HI></P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Its &V;|niver&s;al.</NOTE> 2. His Kingdome is <HI>&V;niver&s;al</HI> over all Saints in all places and ages: <HI>He is ye&s;terday and to day and the &s;ame for ever;</HI> he ruled <HI>I&s;rael</HI> of old, and he rules his people now; his admini&s;tration was un|to them outward and vi&s;ible; and &s;hall it not be &s;o again in the latter dayes? <HI>Amos</HI> 2. 9, 10, 11. <HI>I de&s;troyed the Amorite before them, I brought them up from the land of Egypt, and led them forty years through the Wilderne&s;&s;e to po&s;se&s;se the land of the A|morits; and I rai&s;ed up of your &s;ons for Pro|phets, and of your young men for Nazarites,</HI> &s;aith the <HI>Lord. He</HI> brought up, he led,
<PB N="233" REF="133">
he de&s;troyed, he rai&s;ed, he did all <HI>then,</HI> and will do all <HI>hereafter. Rev.</HI> 11. 15. <HI>The Kingdomes of the world are become the Kingdomes of our Lord and his Chri&s;t:</HI> not now one Kingdome or Nation, as then; not <HI>this</HI> or <HI>that</HI> Kingdome, and <HI>no more:</HI> but the Kingdomes of <HI>the world</HI> are be|come <HI>his,</HI> he &s;hall not alwayes be crou|ded into a corner of the world, but as it is <HI>v.</HI> 1. 7. <HI>He &s;hall take unto him&s;elfe his great power, and reigne and reward his &s;ervants the Prophets, and the Saints that feare his Name, both &s;mall and great,</HI> here, and there, and everywhere.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> Its E|ternal.</NOTE> 3. <HI>Thy Throne oh God is for ever, and ever, Heb.</HI> 1. 8. <HI>the heavens peri&s;h and</HI> waxe old as a garment, and as a ve&s;ture &s;halt thou fold them up, and they &s;hall be changed: but thou art the &s;ame, and thy years &s;hall not faile. His Kingdome then is <HI>Eternal. Dan.</HI> 2. 44. <HI>The God of heaven hath &s;et up a Kingdome which &s;hall never be de&s;troyed, and the Kingdome &s;hall not be left to other people; but it &s;hall break in pieces, and con&s;ume all the&s;e Kingdomes, and it &s;hall &s;tand for ever:</HI> It &s;hall not be de&s;troyed by any adver&s;e power, nor &s;hall it decay of it &s;elfe, but it &s;hall break all adver&s;e power, and it &s;hall &s;tand for ever; and as it is an <HI>eternal</HI> Kingdome, &s;o it determineth men to an <HI>eternal &s;tate. Rev.</HI> 1. 18. <HI>I live for evermore, Amen; and have the keyes of Hell and Death;</HI>
<PB N="234" REF="134">
wherefore, <HI>Feare not them which kill the body, but are not able to kill the &s;oul: but rather feare him which is able to de&s;troy both &s;oul and body in hell, Math.</HI> 10. 28.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> Brings in perfect peace.</NOTE> <HI>4. La&s;tly,</HI> his Kingdome <HI>brings in perfect</HI> peace and liberty. I&s;a. <HI>9. 6.</HI> He is the ever|la&s;ting father and Prince of peace. I&s;a. <HI>24. 23.</HI> The Lord &s;hall reigne in mount Sion, and in Jeru&s;alem before the Ancients glori|ou&s;ly: <HI>not onely reigne in heaven, but in</HI> Sion, <HI>and that gloriou&s;ly.</HI> I&s;a. <HI>25. 8.</HI> He &s;hall &s;wallow up Death in Victory, and the Lord will wipe away teares from all faces, and the rebuke of the people &s;hall he take a|way from all the earth; for the Lord hath &s;poken it. <HI>Death, teares, rebuke, &s;hall be taken away; what &s;afety and hapine&s;&s;e mu&s;t then follow?</HI> I&s;a. <HI>52. 13.</HI> Behold my &s;ervant &s;hall dwell confidently, he &s;hall be exalted and extolled, and be very high.</P>
<P>I&s;a. <HI>60. 19. 20.</HI> The Sun &s;hall be no more thy light by day, neither for brightne&s;se &s;hall the Moon give light unto thee; but the Lord &s;hall be unto thee an everla&s;ting light, and thy God thy glory, and the dayes of thy mour|ning &s;hall be ended.</P>
<P>Rev. <HI>21. 4.</HI> There &s;hall be no more death, neither &s;orrow, nor crying, neiiher &s;hall there be any more paine; for the former things are pa&s;sed away.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> The ex|cellency of Saints.</NOTE> 3. The third and la&s;t thing that we learne from hence that Chri&s;t is King of Saints, is the <HI>excellency of his Subjects,</HI>
<PB N="235" REF="134">
and the glory of his holy ones.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> They &s;hall be more Saints.</NOTE> 1. Chri&s;t is King, and the holy One of God, and his Saints &s;hall be <HI>more Saints,</HI> &s;hall appear to be his holy ones; San|ctity &s;hall be more exalted in them, then ever yet our eyes have &s;een.</P>
<P>Joel. <HI>3. 17.</HI> Then &s;hall Jeru&s;alem be holy, and there &s;hall no &s;trangers pa&s;&s;e thorow her any more.</P>
<P>Zach. <HI>14. 20.</HI> In that day &s;hall there be upon the bels of the hor&s;es Holine&s;&s;e to the Lord, yea every pot in Jeru&s;alem and Ju|dah &s;hall be holine&s;&s;e to the Lord of Ho&s;ts; and there &s;hall be no more the Canaanite in the hou&s;e of the Lord of Ho&s;ts.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Saints &s;hall live &s;afely.</NOTE> <HI>2. They &s;hall live in &s;afety,</HI> I&s;a. <HI>60. 18.</HI> Violence &s;hall no more be heard in thy Land, wa&s;ting nor de&s;truction within thy borders: but thou &s;halt call thy walls &s;alva|tion, and thy gates prai&s;e.</P>
<P>Joel <HI>2. 18.</HI> In that day will I make a covenant for them with the bea&s;ts of the feild, and with the fowles of heaven, and I will breake the Bow and the Battel ou<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> of the earth, and will make them to lie down &s;afely.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> Their enemies &s;hall be ruined.</NOTE> 3. Saints enemies &s;hall be brought to ruine, <HI>Zach.</HI> 10. 11. <HI>The pride of A&s;&s;yria &s;hall be brought down, and the Scepter of Egypt &s;hall depart away.</HI> It is u&s;ual to expre&s;&s;e the enemies of the Church by the names of the old grand enemies, <HI>A&s;syria</HI> and <HI>Egypt,</HI> and you &s;ee what &s;hall be|come
<PB N="236" REF="135">
of them, they &s;hall be <HI>brought down</HI> and <HI>depart away.</HI></P>
<P>I&s;a. <HI>14. 2.</HI> The hou&s;e of I&s;rael &s;hall po&s;|&s;e&s;se &s;trangers in the land of the Lord for &s;ervants and for handmaids, and they &s;hall take them captive who&s;e captives they were, and they &s;hall rule over their oppre&s;&s;ors.</P>
<P>Rev. <HI>20. 7, 8, 9.</HI> Satan &s;hall goe out to deceive the Nations which are in the four quarters of the Earth, Gog and Magog, to gather them together to battel: But fire &s;hall come down from God out of heaven and de|vour them. The Lord will create upon every dwelling place of mount Sion, and upon their a&s;&s;emblies, a cloud and &s;moake by day, and the &s;hining of a flaming fire by night; for upon all the glory &s;hall be a defence. I&s;a. <HI>4. 5.</HI> Happy are the people that be in &s;uch a ca&s;e, yea, ble&s;sed are the people who&s;e God is the Lord.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> &V;&s;e of Exhorta|tion.</NOTE> 2. Now follows a word of <HI>Exhortation</HI> to provoke Saints to their <HI>dutie.</HI> All that Saints are, and have, mu&s;t be to, and for <HI>Chri&s;t:</HI> their gifts and graces, their offices, ordinances and di&s;cipline; they are <HI>from him,</HI> and &s;hould be <HI>for him.</HI> Can you ever &s;erve a better Lord? or be &s;ub|jects to a better King? give me leave then to call upon you,</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> To know him.</NOTE> 1. To <HI>know him,</HI> to entertaine him in all your thoughts; your apprehen&s;ions and notions can never be rai&s;ed <HI>&s;o high,</HI> and truely innobled, as when <HI>He</HI> is the
<PB N="237" REF="135">
object: mount your m<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ditations to the highe&s;t, you will meet with that in <HI>him</HI> which will &s;urpa&s;&s;e all your thoughts. How gladly &s;hould you follow tho&s;e Go&s;pel-&s;traines that make the death and re&s;urrection of <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> the Topick places for Faiths Logick; heads of argu|ments for the new creature to rea&s;on from, <HI>Col.</HI> 3. 1. <HI>Its eternal life to know him: Joh.</HI> 17. 3. and therefore &s;et this down as a conclu&s;ion in your minde, with that ble&s;&s;ed Apo&s;tle, who <HI>determined to know nothing but Je&s;us Chri&s;t, and him crucified,</HI> 1 <HI>Cor.</HI> 2. 2.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> To feare him.</NOTE> 2. Learn hence to <HI>feare him: Rev.</HI> 15. 3, 4. <HI>Oh King of Saints, who would not feare thee oh Lord, and glorifie thy Name?</HI> The greatne&s;&s;e and goodne&s;&s;e of <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> call for a reverential frame in our hearts. How thoughtful and con&s;iderate &s;hould we be, lea&s;t by our poor and low, and unbe|&s;eeming carriage <HI>he</HI> might fall &s;hort of his glory? Oh the highth and depth of his Wi&s;dome, Power, Mercy, and Ju&s;tice, who is King of Saints! and yet how few do honour him? It falls on Saints; a work it is, that lieth on their hands, <HI>to give him the glory due to his Name;</HI> and a&s;hamed &s;hould they be to be found &s;o backward in this work.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> Tru&s;t in him.</NOTE> <HI>3. Repo&s;e your</HI> tru&s;t in him: <HI>2</HI> Sam. <HI>22. 2, 3. He that is your King, is your</HI> Rock <HI>and</HI> Fortre&s;s, <HI>and</HI> Deliverer, <HI>your</HI>
<PB N="238" REF="136">
Sheild, horne of Salvation, high Tower, your Refuge, your Saviour, that &s;aveth you from violence; <HI>therefore</HI> tru&s;t in him. P&s;al. <HI>20. 7.</HI> Some tru&s;t in Chariots, and &s;ome in Hor&s;es; but we will remember the Name of the Lord our God.</P>
<P>I will not tru&s;t in my Bow, neither &s;hall my Sword &s;ave, <HI>&s;aith</HI> David, P&s;al. <HI>44. 6.</HI> How great is the goodne&s;s laid up for them that tru&s;t in him, before the &s;ons of men? P&s;al. <HI>31. 19.</HI> None of them &s;hall be de&s;olate.</P>
<P>P&s;al. <HI>34. 22.</HI> Tru&s;t in the Lord and do good; &s;o &s;halt thou dwell in the land, and verily thou &s;halt be fed; and he &s;hall bring thy wayes to pa&s;s, P&s;al. <HI>37. 3, &amp; 5.</HI></P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> Em|brace him with love.</NOTE> 4. Embrace him with the <HI>highe&s;t love,</HI> oh ye Saints; <HI>for the Lord pre&s;erveth the faithful, and plenteou&s;ly rewardeth the proud doer.</HI> He is the chiefe&s;t good, mo&s;t &s;ut|able, and mo&s;t communicative, and there|fore common love will not &s;uffice; it mu&s;t be a <HI>Jonathans love,</HI> 2 <HI>Sam.</HI> 16. <HI>won|derful, and pa&s;&s;ing the love of women.</HI> The Church compares the power of her love to the power a di&s;ea&s;e hath, that ma&s;ters the body, which all the to&s;&s;ing and tum|bling cannot &s;hake off. <HI>Cant.</HI> 2. 5. <HI>Stay me with Flaggons, and comfort me with Apples, for I am &s;icke of love.</HI></P>
<P>Remember your <HI>King</HI> is your <HI>Hus|band,</HI> and you mu&s;t tender him <HI>the love of your e&s;pou&s;als. Jer.</HI> 2. 2. He <HI>draws us with bands of love, and cords of a man.</HI>
<PB N="239" REF="136">
<HI>Ho&s;.</HI> 11. 4. and our love to him mu&s;t <HI>be con&s;training,</HI> carrying <HI>you up hill</HI> and a|gain&s;t <NOTE PLACE="marg"><GAP DESC="foreign">.</NOTE>the croud, 2 <HI>Cor.</HI> 5. 14.</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>5.</HI> We mu&s;t be like him.</NOTE> 5. We mu&s;t by <HI>like to him;</HI> Holy as he is holy: it &s;hould be like Prince and like people; he the King of Saints <HI>com|manding,</HI> and they Saints <HI>obeying.</HI> We mu&s;t con&s;ider him, who though he were Sions King, yet came in all meekne&s;&s;e, and hath left us this command, <HI>Learne of me, for I am lowly and meeke, and ye &s;hall finde re&s;t unto your &s;ouls, Mat.</HI> 11. 29.</P>
<P>It is written of him, <HI>Heb.</HI> 10. 7. <HI>Lo I come to doe thy will oh my God:</HI> And &s;ure|ly we &s;hould be as ready in our propor|tion to doe <HI>his will,</HI> as he was the Fathers; He came to his Crown by the cro&s;&s;e; and though he were the <HI>Captain of our &s;alva|tion,</HI> yet was he made <HI>perfect through &s;uf|ferings;</HI> and if we will be his <HI>Di&s;ciples,</HI> we mu&s;t <HI>deny our &s;elves, take up the cro&s;s and follow him:</HI> we mu&s;t chu&s;e as <HI>Mo&s;es</HI> did, <HI>to &s;uffer affliction with the people of God, and count it greater riches then the trea&s;ures of Egypt, Heb.</HI> 11. 24, 25.</P>
<P N="6"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>6.</HI> We mu&s;t glorifie him.</NOTE> 6. He is our King, and we mu&s;t <HI>glorifie him.</HI> Kings &s;tand much upon their ho|nour, but none &s;o much as <HI>Chri&s;t:</HI> This the P&s;almi&s;t well knew when he indited a <HI>Song of loves</HI> to prai&s;e him with <HI>a rea|dy heart and tongue, P&s;al.</HI> 45. 1. <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>P&s;al.</HI> 45. 1.</NOTE></P>
<P>He tells us of his beauty, and <HI>that he is fairer then the children of men;</HI> his lips are
<PB N="240" REF="137">
not <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ipped with grace, but grace is <HI>poured into his lips:</HI> well may we fall to ble&s;&s;e him whom <HI>God</HI> hath ble&s;&s;ed, <HI>and ble&s;sed for ever, v.</HI> 2. He is not onely faire, but <HI>valiant;</HI> not onely gracious, but <HI>mighty,</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>V.</HI> 3. 4.</NOTE>yea mighty <HI>with glory and maje&s;ty, v.</HI> 3. A rare Maje&s;ty, <HI>v.</HI> 4. <HI>Truth</HI> a hor&s;ebacke; Maje&s;ty illu&s;trious with <HI>meekne&s;s</HI> and <HI>righ|teou&s;ne&s;s;</HI> they that prai&s;e him, glorifie him; and they that <HI>glorifie him, order their conver&s;ation aright.</HI> You mu&s;t not barely <HI>&s;peak</HI> his <HI>prai&s;e,</HI> but <HI>live</HI> out his <HI>prai&s;e,</HI> and &s;hew your &s;elves to be his di&s;|ciples <HI>indeed,</HI> by bringing forth much fruit.</P>
<P N="7"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>7.</HI> Chri&s;t mu&s;t be o|beyed in his Laws.</NOTE> 7. La&s;tly, The King of Saints mu&s;t not want his <HI>obedient &s;ubjects; obedience</HI> is the performance of what is commanded; and tho&s;e commands are wrapped up in the Law. I have lately read of &s;ome <HI>Laws of Nature,</HI> which I conceive might be hand|led in a Go&s;pel-way: I &s;hall endeavour therefore to bring <HI>Scripture-light</HI> to them, and leave them upon your con&s;ciences to be ob&s;erved.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> Peace is to be &s;ought.</NOTE> 1. The fir&s;t of them is this, <HI>That peace is to be &s;ought. Rom.</HI> 12. 18. <HI>If it be po&s;|&s;ible, and as much as in you lieth, have peace with all men;</HI> there is an, <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>if it be po&s;&s;ible,</HI> and a <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>as much as lieth in you, live peaceably:</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, &s;till be <HI>peacing</HI> of it. How ill doth wrath, malice, envy, contention, fighting, and
<PB N="241" REF="137">
brawling become a man? and it wor&s;e becomes a Saint, a man of holine&s;&s;e, <HI>Heb.</HI> 12. 14. <HI>Follow peace with all men,</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>per&s;ecute</HI> peace; doe that with a good and rai&s;ed affection by the good &s;pirit of God, which wicked men doe a|gain&s;t you by a wicked &s;pirit; When they per&s;ecute you by a &s;pirit of malice, they are boyled up to a hight; &s;o &s;hould you be, and move with all your &s;trength after peace: He addes a word more that makes the rule compleat; follow peace and <HI>holine&s;s. No peace &s;ayth my God to the wicked,</HI> or with wickedne&s;&s;e: <HI>Abeat pax illa,</HI> &amp;c. away with that peace which de|files your con&s;cience, and breaks your peace with God. But follow peace and holine&s;&s;e, holy peace, and peaceful holi|ne&s;&s;e, which will render Church and State happy.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Stand to your Covenants.</NOTE> 2. <HI>Stand to your Covenants,</HI> is a &s;econd law of Nature in that Author, and its a law of <HI>grace too.</HI></P>
<P>I will be your God, I will write my Law in their inward parts; I will give them an heart of flesh: <HI>this is</HI> Gods <HI>Covenant,</HI> and he remembers his Covenant for his people, P&s;al. <HI>106. 45.</HI></P>
<P>And to be his <HI>people,</HI> to walk <HI>in his wayes and not depart from him,</HI> That is our Covenant. God is faithful in his, and it concerns us to be &s;o in our Covenants. The <HI>Church</HI> humbly and holily boa&s;teth
<PB N="242" REF="138">
of this, <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 44. 17. that although &s;he had met with hard mea&s;ure, yet <HI>&s;he had not dealt fal&s;ly in the Covenant; her heart was not turned backward, nor her &s;teps de|clined from his way.</HI> We have often made and renewed our Covenants in the dayes of our &s;orrow and &s;ickne&s;&s;e, our feare and trouble; the Lord grant we have not <HI>broken</HI> as oft as <HI>made</HI> them. We pro|mi&s;e to become new men, to turne over a new leafe, to watch more again&s;t the beginnings and occa&s;ions of &s;in, to op|po&s;e our &s;pecial corruptions, to be more in &s;ecret prayer and meditation: but how &s;oon do we forget our Covenants, and returne to our former mire and vo|mit, proving as bad as ever before; as worldly and &s;en&s;ual as ever, as uncleane as ever, as formal and hypocritical as ever before?</P>
<P>Its a brand on the <HI>&s;trange woman, Prov.</HI> 2. 17. <HI>She for&s;aketh the guide of her youth, and forgeteth the Covenant of her God.</HI> The Lord grant it be not true in us, and that we like <HI>men tran&s;gre&s;s not the Covenant, Ho&s;.</HI> 6. 7.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> You mu&s;t be thankful.</NOTE> 3. Its a great Law of Nature and grace too, that we <HI>&s;hould be thankful;</HI> If &s;o to men, much more to God. <HI>Rom.</HI> 1. 21. The Heathens <HI>glorified not God as God,</HI> neither <HI>were thankful, but became vain in their imagination, and their fooli&s;h heart was darkned.</HI> God forbid, that Chri&s;tians
<PB N="243" REF="138">
&s;hould become heatheni&s;h, become <HI>un|thankful; Ingratum &s;i dixeris, dixeris om|nia,</HI> you accumulate evil on the head of him whom you call <HI>unthankful.</HI> Tho&s;e who have <HI>the peace of God ruling in their hearts, and are called into one body, mu&s;t be thankful, Col.</HI> 3. 15. But of this I &s;pake before.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> We mu&s;t &s;erve one another.</NOTE> 4. I pa&s;&s;e on to the fourth Law, which is, <HI>That we mu&s;t &s;erve one another;</HI> and this we finde injoyned by that ble&s;&s;ed Apo&s;tle <HI>Gal.</HI> 5. 13. <HI>&V;&s;e not liberty for an occa&s;ion to the fle&s;h, but by love &s;erve one an|other</HI> Saints are creatures framed <HI>for So|ciety</HI> as well as men, and they have Saint-like love and Saint-like &s;ervice, by which they are to build up one another, <HI>Rom.</HI> 15. 2. <HI>Tho&s;e who are &s;trong are to beare with the infirmities of the weak, and not to plea&s;e them&s;elves; But let every one of us plea&s;e his neighbour for his good to edification.</HI> Is another burdened? he mu&s;t not beare his burden alone, but we mu&s;t beare a part with him, and &s;o <HI>fullfil the Law of Chri&s;t, Gal.</HI> 6. 2. A proud and vaunting &s;pirit &s;hould be far from us, that will make us domineere and not feare; we &s;hould conde&s;cend to low things, to a <HI>&s;er|vice</HI> for the good of another; and his ne|ce&s;&s;ity of our help, &s;hould have (as it were) the force of a command, and make us ambitious to bring in our help. How &s;weet are tho&s;e Corporations and
<PB N="244" REF="139">
<HI>Churches,</HI> in their Communions, that mo&s;t practice this &s;ervice? Nor is there any cau&s;e why men &s;hould conceive them&s;elves deba&s;ed by this way of &s;er|vitude; for you <HI>&s;erve another</HI> no more then he &s;erves you; and you may need <HI>him,</HI> as well as he <HI>you.</HI></P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>5.</HI> We mu&s;t be merci|ful and forgive.</NOTE> 5. The next Law that challengeth our obedience, is, <HI>That we mu&s;t be merciful, and forgive one another.</HI> That Law takes it for granted, that we are liable to mi|&s;ery, and to wrong one another; and to guide you in the&s;e ca&s;es, commands you mercifulne&s;&s;e and forgivene&s;&s;e. <HI>Luk.</HI> 6. 36. <HI>Be you merciful, as your heavenly Fa|ther is merciful&punc;</HI> a glorious patterne, no mercy like that of a fathers, no fathers mercy like that of Gods; and yet this is that coppy we are to write after, to be merciful as <HI>he</HI> is. <HI>Col.</HI> 3. 12. <HI>Put you on as the elect of God, holy and beloved, bowels of mercy, kindne&s;s, humblene&s;s of minds,</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>Vi&s;cerd mi&s;eri<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ordiae,</HI> bowels, that is, mercy from an inward di&s;|po&s;ition, and tender affection; and &s;uch merciful ones are pronounced <HI>ble&s;sed, and are promi&s;ed mercy, Math.</HI> 5. 7.</P>
<P>And as you mu&s;t be thus pittying the mi&s;ery of another, &s;o you mu&s;t be <HI>for|giving</HI> too. <HI>Eph.</HI> 4. 32. <HI>Be ye kinde one to another, tender-hearted, forgiving one an|other, as God for Chri&s;ts &s;ake forgave you.</HI> The &s;ame ble&s;&s;ed patterne again is pro|po&s;ed
<PB N="245" REF="139">
for <HI>forgivene&s;&s;e,</HI> as was to <HI>merciful|ne&s;&s;e:</HI> Another can never offend <HI>you,</HI> as you have offended <HI>God;</HI> we owe him more then ten thou&s;and talents, and have nothing to pay, and he freely for|gives us <HI>all,</HI> and delights to forgive; and &s;hould not we go and do &s;o al&s;o? It is in|&s;erted by our Saviour in his Doctrine of prayer, <HI>Math.</HI> 6. 12. <HI>Forgive us our debts, as we forgive our debtors.</HI> If ever you knew the mi&s;ery that the debt of &s;in brings on you, you would be full of breathings after forgivene&s;&s;e, and no<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> be quiet till you had it on your bo&s;ome: Con&s;ider well that you oblige your &s;elves to for|give others, when you beg forgivene&s;&s;e for your &s;elves; And if you ask how oft you mu&s;t forgive? <HI>Math.</HI> 18. 12. our Saviour makes an&s;wer; <HI>I &s;ay not unto thee until &s;even times, but until &s;eventy times &s;even.</HI></P>
<P N="6"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>6.</HI> Re|proach not one ano|ther.</NOTE> 6. The &s;ixth Law takes care about our names, and is this, <HI>Reproach not one an|other.</HI> Di&s;grace is a bitter death, it &s;layes a mans honour and repute. The Apo&s;tle bids <HI>Titus</HI> put <HI>men in minde, Tit.</HI> 3. 2. <HI>to &s;peak evil of no man:</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>to bla&s;pheme</HI> no man. Unju&s;t reproach is a kinde of bla&s;phemy, it &s;peakes ill of what is <HI>good</HI> in men, and &s;o of what be|longs <NOTE PLACE="marg">Which is when men&punc;</NOTE><HI>to God</HI> in them. There be eight wayes by which worthy and reverend writers lay this down; four of which
<PB N="246" REF="140">
re&s;pect evil, and four re&s;pect good. 1. <HI>Imponens.</HI> 2. <HI>Augens.</HI> 3. <HI>Manife&s;tans.</HI> 4. <HI>In mala vertens.</HI></P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> accu&s;e fa&s;ly.</NOTE> 1. When men <HI>accu&s;e us fal&s;ly,</HI> then they reproach us. This mightily afflicts an hone&s;t heart; and the rea&s;on is, becau&s;e he looks on <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> as intre&s;ted in his <HI>name,</HI> and he is really troubled to think <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> &s;hould &s;uffer. Of this you have the com|plaint of the &s;weet Singer of <HI>I&s;rael, P&s;al.</HI> 35. 11. <HI>Fal&s;e witne&s;&s;e did ri&s;e up, they laid to my charge things I knew not;</HI> and this you &s;hould be far from us.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Di&s;clo&s;e cau&s;le&s;ly.</NOTE> 2. When we cau&s;le&s;ly <HI>di&s;clo&s;e a fault</HI> that is &s;ecret. God in his riches of mer|cy, not onely covers our &s;ins in his love, when he forgives them, but hides them from men al&s;o: &s;hould men know all our faults, we &s;hould never live by them in quiet: yet &s;ome faults one or two may know; but when they divulge what they know, when its neither for the good of the offender, nor warning of others, this is detraction, and evil communica|tion, which the Apo&s;tle tels us corrupts good manners.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> Aggra|vating un|duely.</NOTE> 3. Suppo&s;e thy Brother &s;in, and his &s;in be open and know; yet when you <HI>ag|gravate</HI> that &s;in beyond mea&s;ure, aggra|vate it more then a greater &s;in in your &s;elves; when you meditate how to ren|der him odious and hated, rather then reformed and amended, yea though his
<PB N="247" REF="140">
&s;oul be humbled, you continue to hold &s;in and guilt upon him; is not this to reproach him?</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> Bla|ming the intention.</NOTE> 4. What meane you to blame the <HI>In|tention</HI> of any man, when you cannot blame the <HI>Action?</HI> Surely in this ca&s;e we go beyond our line, and <HI>make our &s;elves</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">We re|preach a|bout good.</NOTE><HI>judges of evil thoughts,</HI> and render our &s;elves condemned for want of love and Chri&s;tian affection.</P>
<P>Again, we may indirectly reproach an|other when we deal unduely with the good of another: <HI>Qui negat, aut tacu|it, minuit, laudatque remi&s;se.</HI></P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> When we deny it.</NOTE> 1. When we <HI>deny</HI> that good that is in them. God is bountiful in giving of his grace, and our duty it is to own his grace in others as well as in our &s;elves; now when we deny it, what do we but offer injury to God, and to tho&s;e who have his grace? to God who gave, and to them who have received it; we make by denying, as if he had not given, nor they received &s;uch grace from him.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Hiding the grace of others.</NOTE> 2. When we <HI>hide</HI> or <HI>cloud</HI> anothers gifts or graces. Its the due of grace to be <HI>tran&s;parent,</HI> that tho&s;e that have it may be <HI>honoured,</HI> and God in them, and others may be <HI>exampled:</HI> but when we draw a mi&s;t over it, and &s;eek to darken that which &s;hines, we di&s;cover our &s;elves too much unlike the <HI>children of light.</HI></P>
<P N="3"><PB N="248" REF="141">
<NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> When we le&s;&s;en them.</NOTE> 3. Gifts and graces are ofttimes &s;o great, and &s;o drawn out into action by Gods providence, that they cannot be hid. Now to go about to <HI>le&s;&s;en</HI> them in the e&s;teem of others, to render tho&s;e gra|ces low and weake which indeed are high and mighty; This I &s;ay, is a mo&s;t unworthy and unchri&s;tian practice. Thus they dealt with our Saviour; they could not deny but that a great miracle was wrought, but they envyed him the ho|nour of doing of it; and therefore they &s;ay, <HI>He ca&s;teth out Devils by Beelzebub the prince of Devils:</HI> But I hope God will teach us to abhor this devili&s;h &s;pirit.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> By cold|ly commen|ding.</NOTE> 4. When God cau&s;eth his grace given to others to &s;hine, we are not onely to prai&s;e <HI>him</HI> for it, but to prai&s;e his grace in <HI>them,</HI> and to prai&s;e <HI>them</HI> in whom God hath planted this grace; and our com|mendation &s;hould be according to the truth and highth of grace, with <HI>highe&s;t commendations.</HI> Now when the lu&s;tre of anothers gifts or grace is &s;uch, that it draweth forth prai&s;e from us, and we cannot but repre&s;ent it as worthy: yet when we prai&s;e it <HI>poorly</HI> with but's, and &s;topps, with ifs, and ands, with di&s;para|ging <HI>circumlocutions;</HI> God and wi&s;e men, cannot but accu&s;e us of reproaching in &s;uch a faint prai&s;ing.</P>
<P N="7"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>7.</HI> Law a|gain&s;t pride</NOTE> <HI>7. A &s;eventh Law of Nature is again&s;t</HI> Pride, <HI>again&s;t all undue exalting of our</HI>
<PB N="249" REF="141">
<HI>&s;elves, attributing too much to, and vaunting our &s;elves. Now &s;ee how much the Go&s;pel-Doctrine is an enemy to this</HI> pride: <HI>It tells you that</HI> pride of life is in the world, and not of the Father, <HI>1</HI> Joh. <HI>2. 26. That God</HI> &s;cattereth the proud from the imaginations of their hearts, Luk. <HI>1. 51.</HI> Be ye therefore cloathed with humility; for God re&s;i&s;teth the proud, and giveth grace to the humble; humble your &s;elves therefore un|der the mighty hand of God, and he &s;hall exalt you in due time, <HI>1</HI> Pet. <HI>5. 5, 6.</HI></P>
<P N="8"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>8.</HI> Law to be ju&s;t.</NOTE> 8. <HI>To be ju&s;t,</HI> to give every one their due, and not to re&s;pect per&s;ons in judge|ment, is &s;urely a loude &s;peaking Law, highly commanded and commended in the Go&s;pel. <HI>Rom.</HI> 13. 7. <HI>Render there|fore to all their dues; Tribute to whom tri|bute, honour to whom honour is due.</HI> I won|der how tho&s;e, who from their practice have procured the name of <HI>Quakers,</HI> can pretend &s;o much to ju&s;tice, as indeed they do, and yet deny honour to tho&s;e in au|thority. <HI>Re&s;pect</HI> is their due as well as <HI>obedience;</HI> reverent deportment, toward and before them, as well as performing their commands: and if they &s;ay they mu&s;t not gratifie the fle&s;h, in giving Titles to men; I may more truely &s;ay, they gratifie their <HI>own fle&s;h</HI> by not giving of them. <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>9.</HI> Deale well with the means of your peace.</NOTE></P>
<P N="9"><HI>9. It follows, as that conclu&s;ion which cannot be denied,</HI> That we mu&s;t
<PB N="250" REF="142">
deale well with them who are the meanes of our peace: Supplications, prayers, interce&s;|&s;ions, and giving of thanks, mu&s;t be for tho&s;e that are in authority, <HI>1</HI> Tim. <HI>2. 1, 2. and why? becau&s;e they are meanes of our quiet and peaceable living.</HI></P>
<P>The Elders that rule well, that labour in word and doctrine, mu&s;t be accounted worthy of double honour, <HI>1</HI> Tim. <HI>5. 17.</HI> We mu&s;t obey and &s;ubmit our &s;elves to them; for they watch for our &s;ouls, as they that mu&s;t give account, Heb. <HI>13, 17.</HI></P>
<P N="10"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>10.</HI> Ene|mies mu&s;t be oppo&s;ed.</NOTE> 10. Its a general conclu&s;ion that <HI>ene|mies mu&s;t be oppo&s;ed.</HI> There be &s;ome ene|mies are like the <HI>Amalekites,</HI> with whom we mu&s;t never make peace; we mu&s;t give our <HI>old man</HI> with its affections and lu&s;ts no quarter, we mu&s;t <HI>mortifie</HI> and <HI>crucifie</HI> them.</P>
<P>Eph. <HI>6. 12.</HI> You mu&s;t wra&s;tle again&s;t principalities and powers, the rulers of the darkne&s;se of this world, again&s;t &s;piritual wickedne&s;se in high places: Therefore be &s;trong in the Lord, and in the power of his might. V. <HI>10.</HI> Put on the whole armour of God, that ye may be able to &s;tand, and with|&s;tand in the evil day. V. <HI>11. &amp; 13.</HI> Stand therefore with your loynes girt about with truth, having on the bre&s;tplate of righteou&s;|ne&s;se, the &s;heild of faith, the helmet of &s;alva|tion, and the &s;word of the &s;pirit.</P>
<P>There be other enemies which we mu&s;t pitty, and pray for, do <HI>good</HI> to them al|though
<PB N="251" REF="142">
they deale <HI>ill</HI> with us. <HI>Math.</HI> 5. 44. <HI>Love your enemies, and do good to them that hate you,</HI> is a &s;weet Go&s;pel-&s;traine, and of a high nature; and there be many more &s;uch precious pa&s;&s;ages, which you &s;hall not meet with in the Naturali&s;ts; &s;ome of them we &s;hall gather together and now &s;et before you.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Joh.</HI> 3. 5.</NOTE> You are <HI>borne again of the &s;pirit,</HI> 1 <HI>Pet.</HI> 1. 3. you have union with Je&s;us <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> who is a &s;piritual living Principle, and <HI>hath life in him&s;elfe</HI> as the Father hath&punc; and hence flowes your &s;piritnal activity and joy, your <HI>lively hope by the re&s;urrection</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">1 <HI>Pet.</HI> 1. 3.</NOTE><HI>of Chri&s;t from the dead.</HI> The be&s;t the world can brag of, is but a <HI>dead</HI> hope; but your hope is <HI>lively;</HI> and the liveline&s;&s;e of your hope ari&s;eth from a life after death, a re|&s;urrection; yea from the re&s;urrection of Chri&s;t, and &s;o from his life and death. <HI>You are in Chri&s;t</HI> as branches in the Vine, and members in the head; one with him, as husband and wife are one fle&s;h, nay as he is one with the Father.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">2 <HI>Cor.</HI> 5. 17.</NOTE> Now 2 <HI>Cor.</HI> 5. 17. as many as <HI>are in Chri&s;t</HI> mu&s;t be <HI>new creatures;</HI> not new in &s;ome outward circum&s;tances, but in their whole frame; not new from ontward re|&s;traint, and pre&s;ent occurrences that mould them; but new from a new inward di&s;po&s;ition: and &s;o old thoughts, in|dulging of &s;en&s;e and appetite, unruli|ne&s;&s;e and unrea&s;onablne&s;&s;e of pa&s;&s;ion,
<PB N="252" REF="143">
unduene&s;&s;e of aims and ends; all the&s;e old things mu&s;t pa&s;&s;e away, and all be|come new.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">2 <HI>Pet.</HI> 1. 4.</NOTE> You are <HI>partakers of the Divine Nature,</HI> 2 <HI>Pet.</HI> 1. 4. He doth not &s;ay you are par|takers of Nature, for that is common to all creatures; nor of a rea&s;onable nature, for that is common to all men: But a <HI>Divine Nature,</HI> which is as far above the rea&s;onable, as the rea&s;onable Nature is above the bruti&s;h; its &s;uch a Nature as ari&s;eth from <HI>the great and precious Promi&s;es that are given to us,</HI> and by which, <HI>world,</HI> lu&s;t, and corruption, are e&s;caped.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Eph.</HI> 2. 10.</NOTE> <HI>You are Gods workman&s;hip, Eph.</HI> 2. 10. Tho&s;e upon whom God leaves and mani|fe&s;teth his &s;pecial power and grace; you are a <HI>created</HI> workman&s;hip an&s;werable to that work <HI>which called light out of darkne&s;s,</HI> and created <HI>in Chri&s;t,</HI> as well as by him; and therefore you mu&s;t an&s;wer Gods great ordination, by being dedicate <HI>unto good workes</HI> and <HI>walking in them;</HI> your motion mu&s;t be progre&s;&s;ion, and your progre&s;&s;e mu&s;t be continued.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Col.</HI> 1. 9.</NOTE> Your minds mu&s;t <HI>be filled with the know|ledge of his will, Col.</HI> 1. 9. The manife&s;ta|tion of his minde mu&s;t be imprinted on yours; his word is his will revealed, and <HI>his will</HI> is that which we mu&s;t <HI>know,</HI> yea know &s;o, as that there mu&s;t be no de|ficiency: you mu&s;t be <HI>filled with it,</HI> you mu&s;t not onely be rational, but <HI>wi&s;e,</HI> not
<PB N="253" REF="143">
onely under&s;tanding, but <HI>&s;piritual,</HI> yea <HI>filled with all wi&s;dome and &s;piritual under|&s;tanding.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Eph.</HI> 1. 17.</NOTE> <HI>Eph.</HI> 1. 17. makes mention of the <HI>&s;pirit of wi&s;dome and revelation: Of wi&s;dome,</HI> rai&s;ing you to exalt the be&s;t good as your highe&s;t end, and directing you to the apte&s;t meanes for obtaining that good, and what your natural power cannot reach unto, he <HI>reveals;</HI> and therefore it concerns you, not onely to have <GAP DESC="foreign"> but <GAP DESC="foreign">, knowledge, but the <HI>acknow|ment of his will;</HI> knowledge upon know|ledge, experimental approving know|ledge.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>V.</HI> 18.</NOTE> Your <HI>under&s;tanding</HI> mu&s;t be <HI>inlightned, v.</HI> 18. light upon light, &s;piritual upon natural light, and then you are &s;earching into, not the nicetyes and curio&s;ities of knowledge, but to know his call and the hope of it, his calling you out of dark|ne&s;&s;e into marvelous light, and laying up a Crown of glory for your hope; you have the exceeding <HI>greatne&s;se of his power working you to believe,</HI> and the <HI>glorious riches of the inheritance in the Saints,</HI> and all for you to know.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Rom.</HI> 12. 2.</NOTE> <HI>You mu&s;t be transformed by the renewing of your minde, Rom.</HI> 12. 2. Transforma|tion and renovation mu&s;t go together to make up this Chri&s;tian <HI>metamorpho&s;is;</HI> and then you will not be quarrelling and &s;narling at the word, as if it were a
<PB N="254" REF="144">
<HI>hard &s;aying</HI> not to be borne; but then you will prove the <HI>will of God</HI> to be <HI>good</HI> and <HI>perfect,</HI> and it will be exceeding <HI>ac|ceptable</HI> to you.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Eph.</HI> 3. 19.</NOTE> You mu&s;t <HI>know the love of God which pa&s;seth knowledge, Eph.</HI> 3. 19. A &s;trange paradoxe to know that which pa&s;&s;eth knowledge, and yet its mo&s;t true and mo&s;t &s;weet; for its a filling knowledge, a knowledge with a fullne&s;&s;e, yea the fulle&s;t fullne&s;&s;e; for it is <HI>with all the full|ne&s;&s;e of God.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Eph.</HI> 6. 24.</NOTE> Your hearts mu&s;t be abounding in &s;in|cerity of love to Je&s;us Chri&s;t, his truth and all Saints&punc; They are under the <HI>An|athema maranatha</HI> that <HI>love not the Lord Je&s;us Chri&s;t;</HI> and the <HI>power and deceitful|ne&s;&s;e of Satan works in them that receive not the love of the truth; loving</HI> is more then liking; its a deliberate act of will, clo&s;ing with a &s;utable good. Chri&s;t and his truth, his wayes&punc; and his Saints, are mo&s;t &s;utable and agreeable to us, when we are in love with him.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Math.</HI> 5. 6.</NOTE> Your de&s;ires mu&s;t not be faint and weak; but <HI>hungrings and thir&s;tings, and that after righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e;</HI> &s;trong de&s;ires for the apprehen&s;ion of the excellency of the object, and nece&s;&s;ity of enjoying: de&s;ires from an inward &s;en&s;e of want, and un&s;atisfied without the enjoyment of what is de&s;ired; and yet are you truely ble&s;&s;ed in your de&s;ire after tho&s;e things.</P>
<P><PB N="255" REF="144">
<NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Acts</HI> 9. 31.</NOTE> You mu&s;t be <HI>walking in the feare of the Lord, and comforts of the holy Gho&s;t, Act.</HI> 9. 31. Happy is the man that feareth alway, that is in the actual apprehen&s;ion of Gods greatne&s;&s;e and goodne&s;&s;e, and &s;o is trou|bled left his carriage &s;hould not an&s;wer them both. Holy comforts do not make men idle or wanton, but walking, and fearing, <HI>walking in the comforts of the holy Gho&s;t;</HI> and if &s;orrows and mournings overtake them, they have comforts in them; for its <HI>godly &s;orrow cau&s;ing repen|tance never to be repented of.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Acts</HI> 16. 31.</NOTE> The great duty of your heart is to <HI>be|lieve on the Lord Je&s;us Chri&s;t that you may be &s;aved;</HI> to &s;ee him in the excellency of his per&s;on, and that <HI>he is able to &s;ave to the uttermo&s;t;</HI> and that he is the onely one, there being <HI>no other name given whereby you can be &s;aved;</HI> &s;aved from &s;in and wrath, from guilt and power; hence you leane, re&s;t, and &s;tay on him, roule your &s;elves into his armes, and if you peri&s;h re&s;olve to peri&s;h there: and &s;o <HI>believing in hope again&s;t hope, are &s;trong in faith, and give</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Rom.</HI> 4. 18, 20.</NOTE><HI>glory to God, Rom.</HI> 4. 18. &amp; 20. and this <HI>faith mu&s;t purifi<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> your hearts;</HI> &s;o that when others are tran&s;ported with unruly pa&s;|&s;ions, you mu&s;t be &s;hewing forth all meek|ne&s;&s;e, kindne&s;&s;e, and gentlene&s;&s;e.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Phil.</HI> 4. 4.</NOTE> You mu&s;t <HI>rejoyce in the Lord allway, Phil.</HI> 4. 4. Your faith gives a &s;weet en|joyment of <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> and that enjoyment
<PB N="256" REF="145">
doth inlarge your heart with <HI>joy un&s;p eak|able and full of glory,</HI> which make up that <HI>peace that pa&s;&s;eth all under&s;tanding.</HI> It is no light or loo&s;e joy, but that which <HI>guards the heart and minde</HI> from the a&s;|&s;aults and in&s;ults of &s;in and Satan, and make up that <HI>new name that none can read but he that hath it.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Eph.</HI> 4. 29.</NOTE> Your mouths mu&s;t corre&s;pond with your hearts, and no <HI>corrupt communication is to proceed out of your mouth:</HI> our mouths are made in&s;truments to communicate our thoughts; but this communication mu&s;t not be corrupt in us, or tending in the lea&s;t to corrupt others; it mu&s;t be <HI>good,</HI> not corrupt, but u&s;eful and profita|ble, <HI>good to the u&s;e of edifying, that it may mini&s;ter grace unto the hearers:</HI> grace in <HI>you</HI> may draw forth grace <HI>in them,</HI> good communication in you may pro|mote good communication in them.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Eph.</HI> 4. 4.</NOTE> <HI>No fooli&s;h talking nor je&s;ting which are not convenient; that</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, which is a virtue with <HI>Ari&s;totle,</HI> is &s;et down by the <HI>Apo&s;tle</HI> as a thing <HI>not convenient.</HI> Talking is then <HI>fooli&s;h</HI> when it promotes not the feare of God, and the good ends we &s;hould pro&s;ecute: and mark how the Apo&s;tle joynes <HI>je&s;ting with fooli&s;h talking.</HI> I dare appeale to your experience that when you have garbled your je&s;ting, you have met with a mixture of too much folly and vanity in your mirth. <HI>Giving</HI>
<PB N="257" REF="145">
<HI>of thanks</HI> &s;hould be the language of Saints on earth, as it is of Saints and Angels in heaven, and then are your tongues your <HI>glory;</HI> and therefore its brought in with a <HI>&s;ed potius, but rather</HI> giving of thanks.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Col.</HI> 4. 6.</NOTE> <HI>Let your &s;peech be gracious, always &s;ea|&s;oned with &s;alt, Col.</HI> 4. 6. Mark how God comes to regulate your &s;peech: It mu&s;t be gracious; that is, (as you heard) <HI>mini&s;ter grace to the hearers,</HI> and it mu&s;t not be &s;o for a fit, or a &s;purt, but <HI>always.</HI> There are two notable arguments &s;et down to bridle your tongue. Fir&s;t that when your &s;peech doth not mini&s;ter grace to the hearers, <HI>you grieve the Spirit of God, Eph.</HI> 4. 29, &amp; 30. and how &s;ad &s;hould that fall upon us to grieve <HI>him, by whom we are &s;ealed unto the day of redemption?</HI> And a &s;econd argument is in this &s;ixth ver&s;e, <HI>that you may know how to an&s;wer every man.</HI> Men will be apt to object again&s;t you, and to object again&s;t you from your own words; and you cannot be in a capacity to <HI>an&s;wer them,</HI> except your &s;peech be gracious. It peirceth a godly tender &s;oul to heare the &s;wearing and cur&s;ing, the bla&s;phemy and railing, that your Streets &s;warme withal; to have their eares buffered with uncleane, rotten, filthy communications: But by how much you finde the &s;infullne&s;&s;e and care|le&s;&s;ne&s;&s;e of mo&s;t men, the more ought you
<PB N="258" REF="146">
to bridle your tongues, and a&s;pire to that <HI>perfection,</HI> not to <HI>offend</HI> in that <HI>unruly mem|ber,</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Jam.</HI> 3. 2. 1. 26, 27.</NOTE>and &s;o &s;hew forth <HI>that your Religion is not in vain.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Jam.</HI> 1. 22.</NOTE> You mu&s;t not onely be <HI>good &s;peakers,</HI> but <HI>doers of that which is good;</HI> you mu&s;t be hearers, but <HI>not onely hearers,</HI> but <HI>doers</HI> al&s;o: but mark what you mu&s;t be doers of; not your own will, or the lu&s;ts of men, <HI>but doers of the word;</HI> not praters, but practitioners; and there is a &s;trong argument added, <HI>that you may be ble&s;sed in your deed,</HI> not onely <HI>after</HI> but <HI>in your deed.</HI> Holine&s;&s;e carrieth happine&s;&s;e along with it, <HI>Rom.</HI> 6. 22. they have <HI>their fruit unto holine&s;&s;e,</HI> and <HI>the end everla&s;ting life;</HI> they have their fruit <HI>now,</HI> &amp; hereafter too; <HI>now</HI> in holine&s;s, <HI>herafter</HI> in life everla&s;ting.</P>
<P><HI>You mu&s;t deny your &s;elves, Matth.</HI> 16. 24. <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Mat.</HI> 16. 24.</NOTE>you mu&s;t <HI>undoe</HI> as well as <HI>doe,</HI> deny as well as grant; deny your own carnal rea&s;onings, affections, experience, and conver&s;ation.</P>
<P><HI>Tit.</HI> 2. 12. You mu&s;t <HI>deny</HI> not <HI>&s;ome,</HI> but <HI>all ungodline&s;&s;e;</HI> all beginnings, thoughts, occa&s;ions, meanes, &s;ignes, and mea&s;ures of ungodline&s;&s;e; and though the world &s;hould make large proffers to you of plea|&s;ure, or profit, yet you mu&s;t deny your <HI>worldly lu&s;t,</HI> your lu&s;t and de&s;ire after tho&s;e worldly things, and <HI>Mo&s;es&punc;like</HI> re|fu&s;e the <HI>plea&s;ures of &s;in which are but for a &s;ea&s;on;</HI> and account <HI>&s;uffering affliction with</HI>
<PB N="259" REF="146">
<HI>the people of God greater riches then the trea|&s;ures of Egypt;</HI> and as <HI>Mo&s;es &s;aw him</HI> by faith <HI>that was invi&s;ible,</HI> &s;o you mu&s;t deny ungodline&s;&s;e and worldly lu&s;ts upon a ground <HI>of faith and hope:</HI> for &s;o it follows, <HI>looking for the ble&s;&s;ed hope.</HI> The ble&s;&s;ed|ne&s;&s;e hoped for being duely looked on by an eye of faith, is the ready way to deny ungodline&s;&s;e and worldly lu&s;ts.</P>
<P>How contemptible will <HI>the world</HI> &s;eeme to us when we con&s;ider <HI>the glorious ap|pearance of the Great God and our Saviour Je&s;us Chri&s;t!</HI> Oh then look on <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> as <HI>appearing,</HI> and on his appearing as <HI>glo|rious;</HI> look on <HI>Je&s;us Chri&s;t</HI> as the <HI>Great God,</HI> and the Great God <HI>as your Saviour,</HI> and then you will abominate ungodli|ne&s;&s;e and worldly lu&s;ts, and &s;ay to them, <HI>Get you hence, what have I any more to doe with you? V.</HI> 14. <HI>Chri&s;t gave him&s;elfe that he</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Tit.</HI> 2. 14.</NOTE><HI>might redeeme us from all iniquity.</HI> How free &amp; full is that gift! who is able to expre&s;s the greatne&s;s of it? He <HI>gave him&s;elfe,</HI> laid a&s;ide his own glory and excellency, and though he were <HI>God, equal with the Father,</HI> was content to be in the <HI>form of a &s;ervant;</HI> and though he were the <HI>Lord of glory, to become of no reputation:</HI> and why all this? to <HI>redeeme us from all iniquity.</HI> Its much according to the heart of <HI>Chri&s;t,</HI> that you and your iniquity &s;hould be parted, and that <HI>&s;in</HI> &s;hould have <HI>no more dominion over you;</HI> that you &s;hould no more <HI>be</HI> to your
<PB N="260" REF="147">
own lu&s;t, or to <HI>the lu&s;ts of men,</HI> but <HI>a pecu|liar people to him&s;elfe,</HI> living <HI>&s;oberly, righte|ou&s;ly,</HI> and <HI>godly, in this pre&s;ent world;</HI> and not onely working what is good, but continually <HI>zealous of good works,</HI> work|ing good, although evil oppo&s;e you.</P>
<P>Being Saints, the Promi&s;es are yours, and you are the <HI>dearely beloved ones;</HI> and <NOTE PLACE="marg">2 <HI>Cor.</HI> 7. 1.</NOTE>therefore, 2 <HI>Cor.</HI> 7. 1. <HI>You mu&s;t clean&s;e your &s;elves from all filthine&s;&s;e of fle&s;h and &s;pirit.</HI> The love of God and the Pro|mi&s;es, are all &s;o clean&s;ing: Gods love cannot indure to &s;ee the &s;pots in his Spou&s;e; and therefore &s;tricks at <HI>all</HI> filthi|ne&s;&s;e, filthine&s;&s;e of fle&s;h and <HI>filthine&s;se of &s;pirit:</HI> ob&s;erve its <HI>clean&s;ing,</HI> not onely forbearing your lu&s;t for a while, but ta|king away the defilement of it. How ever men may conceit of their &s;ins, they come to pollute and defile them. Now its the imployment of a Saint to be pur|ging, and purging upon &s;piritual grounds, upon the ground of <HI>having the Promi&s;es,</HI> and being the <HI>dearely beloved ones.</HI> The <HI>being</HI> of a Saint lieth <HI>in holine&s;se;</HI> no holine&s;&s;e, and no Saint; and a Saints duty it is, to be &s;erious and con&s;tant in the <HI>perfecting of holine&s;se,</HI> and that in <HI>the feare of God.</HI></P>
<P>You mu&s;t be <HI>obedient, Phil.</HI> 2. 12. <HI>and</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Phil.</HI> 2. 12.</NOTE><HI>worke out your &s;alvation with feare and trembling. V.</HI> 13. <HI>Doe all things without murmuring. V.</HI> 14. <HI>That you may be the</HI>
<PB N="261" REF="147">
<HI>&s;ons of God. V.</HI> 15. that is, that you may appeare to be the &s;ons of God, <HI>Blamele&s;s:</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><GAP DESC="foreign">.</NOTE>not onely free from fault, but as he &s;aid of <HI>Cae&s;ars</HI> wife, <HI>Oportet uxorem Cae&s;aris non modo a culpa liberam e&s;&s;e, &s;ed a &s;u&s;pitione culpae:</HI> you mu&s;t be free from the very &s;u&s;pition of fault; not onely <HI>ab&s;taining</HI> from evil, but <HI>all appearance of evil:</HI> You <NOTE PLACE="marg"><GAP DESC="foreign">.</NOTE>mu&s;t be <HI>harmele&s;se,</HI> or el&s;e you cannot be blamele&s;&s;e; if you be fighting and quar|relling, &s;narling, and wrangling, you are as the men of the world, and not as the &s;ons of God. How ready will tho&s;e men be to reproach you <HI>without a cau&s;e?</HI> but if you give a cau&s;e, oh then what vaun|ting and triumphing is there! whereas it lies on you to walke &s;o, as to put to &s;ilence the carpings of malicious men. <NOTE PLACE="marg"><GAP DESC="foreign">.</NOTE>You are <HI>in the mid&s;t of a crooked and per|ver&s;e generation,</HI> in the mid&s;t of a <HI>darke world,</HI> and God hath made you as &s;o many <HI>Stars,</HI> to have light and to give light. Oh let not any league with any &s;inful lu&s;t darken your &s;ouls: If the <HI>light in you be darkne&s;se, how great is that dark|ne&s;se?</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Joh.</HI> 5. 35.</NOTE> You mu&s;t like <HI>John, be burning and &s;hining lights;</HI> not onely have the light of grace within you to guide you to hap|pine&s;&s;e, but this light mu&s;t be burning, and &s;hining, in clearne&s;&s;e of knowledge, and warmne&s;s of affection, &s;o as to help <HI>others</HI> when they are in the darke, and
<PB N="262" REF="148">
that <HI>your zeale may provoke very may.</HI></P>
<P>You mu&s;t <HI>hold out the word of life;</HI> you <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Phil.</HI> 2. 15.</NOTE>have not onely the word of <HI>light,</HI> but the word of <HI>life</HI> within you, which to you is a <HI>quickning word, dividing a&s;under be|tween the joynts and marrow;</HI> and this word of light and life, this <HI>living word</HI> you are to <HI>hold out;</HI> for <HI>your light mu&s;t</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Math.</HI> 5. 16.</NOTE><HI>&s;hine before men, that they may &s;ee your good works:</HI> before <HI>men;</HI> mo&s;t men are in dark|ne&s;&s;e, and &s;it in darkne&s;&s;e; carnal &s;en&s;u|al men <HI>cannot receive the things of God:</HI> and yet God requires &s;uch a &s;hining in you, that <HI>the&s;e men,</HI> the&s;e <HI>blind men,</HI> may &s;ome way <HI>&s;ee;</HI> and here again ob&s;erve, it mu&s;t be <HI>good works,</HI> and good works with light; not barely good words, or good profe&s;&s;ion, that will convince them; you may talke long enough, and the&s;e men will never &s;ee any good, unle&s;&s;e you <HI>worke</HI> it frequently and con&s;tantly.</P>
<P><HI>You mu&s;t</HI> glorifie your Father which is in heaven, and they by you. <HI>It was Chri&s;t his work upon earth, and its yours; and he fini&s;hed that work, and &s;o &s;hould you.</HI> Joh. <HI>17.</HI> Herein is my Father glorified that <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Joh.</HI> 15. 8.</NOTE>you bring forth much fruit, &s;o &s;hall ye be my Di&s;ciples. <HI>You mu&s;t be abounding, and</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">1 <HI>Cor.</HI> 15. 58.</NOTE>abounding alway in the work of the Lord, knowing your labour is not in vain; filled with <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Phil.</HI> 1. 11. 2 <HI>Pet.</HI> 1. 5, 6, 7.</NOTE>the fruits of righteou&s;ne&s;&s;e which are by Chri&s;t to the glory of the Father; giving all dili|gence, and adding to your faith virtue, and
<PB N="263" REF="148">
to virtue knowledge, to knowledge temperance, and to temperance patience, to patience god|line&s;se, and to godline&s;&s;e brotherly-kindne&s;se, and to brotherly-kindne&s;&s;e love: The&s;e things mu&s;t be in you, and abound in you, that ye may not be barren or unfruitful in the know|ledge of our Lord Je&s;us Chri&s;t. <HI>You have been the</HI> &s;ervants of &s;in <HI>long enough; now</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Rom.</HI> 6. 17.</NOTE><HI>it concerns you</HI> to obey from the heart the form of Doctrine into which you were deli|vered.</P>
<P>It lies upon you to rai&s;e common things by holy ends, and to turne out|ward objects into &s;piritual conver&s;e. If you do but <HI>eat</HI> and <HI>drink,</HI> walk or work, <NOTE PLACE="marg">1 <HI>Cor.</HI> 10. 31.</NOTE>work or recreate, what ever ye do in word or deed, it mu&s;t be <HI>all to the glory of God, in the Name of the Lord Je&s;us Chri&s;t, giving thanks to God the Father by him.</HI> Eat|ing <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Col.</HI> 3. 17.</NOTE>and drinking are but natural actions; but they mu&s;t have Gods glory as their end. Nature may teach you to give thanks; but its the Go&s;pel that teacheth you in your thank&s;giving to haverecour&s;e to <HI>God the Father in the Name of the Lord Je&s;us.</HI></P>
<P><HI>The meane&s;&s;e of your condition mu&s;t not hinder the rai&s;edne&s;&s;e of you</HI> holine&s;se. <HI>Suppo&s;e you are</HI> &s;ervants, <HI>the Go&s;pel teacheth you how to make your &s;ervice to become divine.</HI> Col. <HI>3. 22.</HI> Servants, <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Col.</HI> 3. 22. 23.</NOTE>obey in all things your Ma&s;ters, not with eye-&s;ervice as men-plea&s;ers, but in &s;inglene&s;&s;e of
<PB N="264" REF="149">
heart fearing God: and whatever you do, do it heartily as to the Lord, and not to men, knowing that of the Lord ye &s;hall receive a reward; for ye &s;erve the Lord Chri&s;t.</P>
<P>You mu&s;t <HI>obey your Ma&s;ters,</HI> but &s;o as you mu&s;t declare you are <HI>fearing God,</HI> while you are obeying them; you mu&s;t render them &s;ervice, but not <HI>eye-&s;ervice.</HI> God requires the heart for him&s;elfe, and when he requires your re&s;pect to another, he requires your heart <HI>thereto.</HI> How un|like is your complemental expre&s;&s;ion, of &s;aying, Your &s;ervant, your humble &s;er|vant Sir, to the <HI>&s;inglene&s;&s;e of heart</HI> here mentioned? You mu&s;t plea&s;e men, and yet not be <HI>men-plea&s;ers,</HI> but plea&s;e God in the plea&s;ing of them; you <HI>mu&s;t do,</HI> and <HI>do heartily,</HI> but as to <HI>the Lord,</HI> and not to <HI>men;</HI> and there's good rea&s;on for it; for <HI>of him you mu&s;t receive the reward, for ye &s;erve the Lord Chri&s;t:</HI> he tells you of &s;er|ving <HI>men,</HI> and &s;erving Chri&s;t, yea &s;erving Chri&s;t in &s;erving men; and thus you greaten little, and highten low things.</P>
<P>You &s;hould be per&s;ons of a rai&s;ed man|ner of behaviour, in all actions, &s;tates, and conditions, in all holy conver&s;ation and godline&s;&s;e: But mo&s;t of all when you come <HI>to wor&s;hip God, who will be &s;an|ctified in his nigh ones, and glorified before</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Levit.</HI> 10. 3.</NOTE><HI>all the people, Levit.</HI> 10. 3. To wor&s;hip God is to be <HI>neer</HI> to him; you are then under a promi&s;e of his &s;pecial pre&s;ence:
<PB N="265" REF="149">
But then <HI>he will be &s;anctified;</HI> either you mu&s;t &s;anctifie him, or he will &s;anctifie him&s;elfe; he mu&s;t be &s;anctified, either in and by you, in the holine&s;&s;e of your hearts, or upon you in the execution of his ju&s;t judgements. You mu&s;t not think to content your &s;elves with pretence to wor&s;hip God alone in your Clo&s;et or Family; but you mu&s;t wor&s;hip him al|&s;o <HI>before all the people;</HI> and that is a <HI>glo|rifying him.</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Joh.</HI> 4. 24.</NOTE> You mu&s;t <HI>wor&s;hip the Father, Joh.</HI> 4. 24. but it mu&s;t be <HI>in &s;pirit and truth.</HI> Go&s;pel-wor&s;hip hath le&s;&s;e outward pompe and ceremony then <HI>that</HI> under the Law; and therefore it mu&s;t have more of plaine&s;&s;e and purity; el&s;e God &s;hould be a lo&s;er.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Eph.</HI> 6. 18.</NOTE> You mu&s;t <HI>pray alwayes, Eph.</HI> 6. 18. <HI>with all manner of prayer and &s;upplication,</HI> not <HI>prate</HI> but <HI>pray;</HI> repetition of words in form of confe&s;&s;ions or petition, are not prayer; your praying mu&s;t be <HI>in the &s;pi|rit;</HI> your &s;pirits in prayer mu&s;t be drawn forth and acted by Gods &s;pirit, your affections mu&s;t be &s;piritual, or you can|not pray; it may be babling and how|ling, but praying it is not unle&s;&s;e it be <HI>in the &s;pirit;</HI> your heads may work, and your lips may move, but its no prayer if the heart lie &s;till: the voice of words is not the voice of prayer, but the <HI>&s;ighs and groans that cannot be uttered, Rom.</HI> 8. 26, 27. You mu&s;t <HI>lift up your &s;ouls</HI> in
<PB N="266" REF="150">
prayer, <HI>lay hold on the &s;trength of the Al|mighty</HI> and <HI>wra&s;tle</HI> with him, not <HI>letting him alone</HI> until he ble&s;&s;e you.</P>
<P>Je&s;us Chri&s;t <HI>hath &s;et up and &s;et open a</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Eph.</HI> 3. 12.</NOTE>Throne of grace, and given us a boldne&s;&s;e of acce&s;&s;e, Eph. <HI>3. 12. You mu&s;t come</HI> in his Name <HI>with confidence:</HI> Aske and you &s;hall bave, &s;eeke and you &s;hall finde, knock and it &s;hall be opened to you.</P>
<P>You mu&s;t <HI>watch and pray,</HI> yea <HI>watch</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Eph.</HI> 6. 18.</NOTE><HI>unto prayer with all per&s;everance and joy, Eph.</HI> 6. 18. You lo&s;e many &s;weet praying opportunities by not <HI>watching</HI> your &s;ea|&s;on: you lo&s;e the acting and improve|ment of many graces, and obtaining of many precious comforts, and &s;weet re|turnes, by not <HI>per&s;evering</HI> in prayer. Far be it from you to pray as a task, or as a work which you are &s;oon weary of, and glad when it is over; but you mu&s;t <HI>per|&s;evere in prayer,</HI> and <HI>pray with joy,</HI> and joy to pray.</P>
<P>You mu&s;t attend at <HI>the po&s;ts of Wi&s;domes door, Prov,</HI> 8. 34. <HI>Laying a&s;ide all malice,</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg">1. <HI>Pet.</HI> 2. 1. 2.</NOTE><HI>and all guile, and hypocri&s;ies, and envyes, and all evil &s;peakings; as new born babes de&s;ire the &s;incere milke of the word, that you may grow thereby:</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">, <HI>the &s;incere milke, the form of whole&s;ome words,</HI> not &s;ugared with <HI>the wi&s;dome of words,</HI> but coming in the <HI>demon&s;tration of the &s;pirit and with power.</HI> That word <HI>de|&s;ire,</HI> and de&s;ire <HI>as new born babes,</HI> out of a
<PB N="267" REF="150">
&s;piritual in&s;tinct, and inward inclination, &s;o as not to be &s;atisfied without you ta&s;te the &s;weetne&s;&s;e of it, de&s;ire it in the &s;ince|rity of it, and with the &s;incerity of de|&s;ire, that <HI>ye may grow thereby. Accretio e&s;t mutatio minoris quantitatis in majorem, u&s;que ad terminum praefinitum a natur&acirc;:</HI> Growth is the change of a le&s;&s;e quantity and degree of grace into a greater; when you pa&s;&s;e from your <HI>little</HI> knowledge, faith, and love, to a greater mea&s;ure, then you <HI>grow.</HI> God hath given his word for to <HI>&s;trengthen</HI> as well as to <HI>beget</HI> us, and the &s;incere word is the word that makes you grow, and that word for that end, &s;hould have our &s;trong fir&s;t born de&s;ires.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Act.</HI> 17. 11.</NOTE> <HI>The noble</HI> Bereans, Acts <HI>17. 11.</HI> received the word with all readine&s;&s;e of minde, and &s;earched the Scriptures daily whether tho&s;e things were &s;o. <HI>And it will be no le&s;&s;e noblene&s;&s;e in you to receive and &s;earch, to receive with readine&s;&s;e and retaine with gladne&s;&s;e the</HI> word of truth. <HI>This will argue the</HI> hone&s;ty <HI>and</HI> goodne&s;&s;e <HI>of your hearts,</HI> Luk. <HI>8. 15. thus to</HI> heare <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Luke</HI> 8. 15.</NOTE><HI>and</HI> keep, <HI>and</HI> bring <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">orth fruit with pati|ence. <HI>You mu&s;t like</HI> Mary ponder Chri&s;ts &s;ayings in your hearts, giving more earne&s;t <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Heb.</HI> 2. 1.</NOTE>heed to the things which you have heard, le&s;t at any time you &s;hould let them &s;lip. Heb. <HI>2. 1.</HI></P>
<P><HI>Coming to the Lords Table you mu&s;t examine your &s;elves,</HI> and &s;o eate of that
<PB N="268" REF="151">
bread and drink of that cup, <HI>which is no le&s;&s;e th en</HI> the Communion of the body and blood of the Lord; and thus judging your &s;elves, you are di&s;cerning the Lords body, and are not condemned with the world: <HI>you being thus entertained in Chri&s;ts bo&s;ome as gue&s;ts at his Table, you mu&s;t not for|get your poor Brethren that be in want.</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Heb.</HI> 13. 16.</NOTE><HI>This</HI> communicating <HI>is</HI> doing good, <HI>and a Go&s;pel</HI> Sacrifice wherewith God is well plea&s;ed; <HI>it is exten&s;ive</HI> to all, <HI>but e&s;pecially to tho&s;e who are of the</HI> hou&s;hold of faith.</P>
<P><HI>The ble&s;&s;ed Go&s;pel teacheth us not onely to</HI> do, <HI>but</HI> &s;uffer. <HI>This is a &s;pecial</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Phil.</HI> 1. 29.</NOTE><HI>gift,</HI> Phil. <HI>1. 29.</HI> To you its given on the be|halfe of Chri&s;t, not onely to believe but &s;uf|fer. <HI>Suffering makes way for patience, and patience mu&s;t not onely work, but</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Jam.</HI> 1. 4.</NOTE><HI>have</HI> a perfect worke, Jam. <HI>1. 4. You mu&s;t</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Rom.</HI> 5. 3.</NOTE><HI>not onely be patient, but</HI> glory in tribu|lation, knowing that our patience worketh experience, and experience hope. <HI>What although men &s;hould revile you, and &s;ay all manner of evil again&s;t you? let it</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Math.</HI> 5. 11. 12.</NOTE><HI>be fal&s;lely and for Chri&s;ts &s;ake, and then</HI> rejoyce and be exceeding glad, for great is your reward in heaven, <HI>who are now</HI> <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>Col.</HI> 1. 11.</NOTE>&s;trengthened with all might&punc; according to his glorious power unto all patience and long-&s;uffering with joyfullne&s;&s;e; <HI>So that</HI> if you &s;uffer as Chri&s;tians for Chri&s;ts <HI>cau&s;e, and with the &s;pirit of</HI> Chri&s;t, <HI>you &s;hould</HI>
<PB N="269" REF="151">
not be a&s;hamed, but glorifie God on that <NOTE PLACE="marg">1 <HI>Pet.</HI> 4. 16.</NOTE>behalfe; counting your &s;elves happy to be reproached for the Name of Chri&s;t; for the &s;pirit of glory and of God re&s;teth up|on you.</P>
</DIV1>
</BODY>
<BACK>
<DIV1 TYPE="appendix">
<PB N="270" REF="152">
<HEAD>Here followeth the Appendix mentioned in the Fifth Chapter of this Book.</HEAD>
<P>_IT was laid down in the fifth Chapter,</P>
<P>That when <HI>Chri&s;t</HI> works great changes in Kingdomes and Common-wealths, he &s;heweth <HI>&s;ignes in the heaven above, and in the earth beneath;</HI> and that occa&s;ioned this Que|&s;tion,</P>
<P>Que&s;t. Whether tho&s;e <HI>&s;ignes in heaven</HI> which Chri&s;t &s;heweth, do not favour or counte|nance <HI>A&s;trological Predictions?</HI></P>
<P>An&s;. To which I an&s;wer negatively. Tho&s;e Signes that Chri&s;t &s;heweth, do <HI>not</HI> in the lea&s;t favour their Predictions.</P>
<P>Now that you may more fully take in the compa&s;&s;e and meaning of this an&s;wer, we &s;hall fir&s;t &s;hew you what we <HI>grant</HI> con|cerning the Stars, and then what we <HI>deny.</HI></P>
<P>Now we grant the&s;e five things.</P>
<P N="1">1. That the Stars have a powerful ru|ling <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> Stars have a ruling ex|cellency.</NOTE>excellency by their light, heat, and motion. They are not like the paints in a Chamber, which we look on, but they work not on us. The &s;eat and &s;ta|tion
<PB N="271" REF="152">
of the Stars tell us that they are not placed there to di&s;grace the Heavens; but that they have that in their being which an&s;wers &s;o high a place, and work to their ends. So <HI>Job</HI> 38. 31. <HI>Can&s;t thou binde the &s;weet influences of the Pleiades?</HI> Stars have their influences; that is, their virtue, and power extended to others.</P>
<P>P&s;al. <HI>8. 3.</HI> When I con&s;ider the Heavens the work of thy fingers, the Moon and the Stars which thou ha&s;t ordained. <HI>The Stars then are Gods</HI> Ordinances, <HI>creatures or|dained by him, and by him for us to con&s;ider of.</HI></P>
<P><HI>Luke</HI> 21. 26. <HI>The powers of heaven &s;hall be &s;haken.</HI> The powers of heaven, <GAP DESC="foreign">, are &s;ure &s;uch as are not weake, but &s;trong in their operation; therefore, <HI>P&s;al.</HI> 136. 9. <HI>The Moon and the Stars are &s;aid to rule the night.</HI></P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Stars worke al|teration in the Aire.</NOTE> 2. We grant that the Stars by their light, heat, and motion, do work great alteration in the Aire, the fir&s;t heaven, as being neere&s;t to it; God hath placed the creatures neer one another, that they might act conjoynedly. The clearne&s;&s;e or cloudine&s;&s;e of the Aire may relate to the Stars; the Stars al&s;o are con&s;iderable in the moi&s;ture, or dryne&s;&s;e of the Aire. If the wind be <HI>Aer motus,</HI> the <HI>Aire moved;</HI> I know not but that motion may &s;ome what relate to the virtue of the Stars.</P>
<P N="3"><PB N="272" REF="153">
<NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> Stars affect di|ver&s;ly the compound bodies.</NOTE> 3. We deny not but that the Stars having this power over the Aire, they do by the aire diver&s;ly affect compound bodies that breath in this aire. This our experience teacheth us; In faire weather we are more Frollick, our &s;pirits are up, we are more apt to &s;ing, to move cheer|fully, our phanta&s;ies are more bu&s;ie, and our motion more plea&s;ant; whereas in thick foggy weather, our brains are clouded, and we are heavy and dull of Action.</P>
<P>Heat, cold, moy&s;ture, and dryne&s;&s;e, are the four principal qualities of compoun|ded bodies; and &s;urely the temperature of the Aire works much on the&s;e, as is ob&s;ervable when we are &s;ick.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> Stars are for Times and Sea&s;ons.</NOTE> 4. Scripture &s;peakes plainly, <HI>That they are for times and for &s;ea&s;ons, for days and for years, Gen.</HI> 1. 14. <HI>The lights in the firma|ment are to divide the day from the night, and to be for &s;ea&s;ons, for days and years.</HI> Sea&s;ons are &s;uch times as are proper and peculiar to &s;ome actions and bodies; <HI>He appointeth the Moon for &s;ea&s;ons, and the Sun knoweth his going down, P&s;al.</HI> 104. 19. Sea|&s;ons are &s;uch portions of time, as if a man come forth to act in, he &s;hall finde an advantage to his work from <HI>the time;</HI> which advantage he will mi&s;&s;e if he go not forth <HI>then.</HI> Thus in <HI>&s;owing,</HI> the growth and fruit depends not onely on the commiting of the &s;eed to the ground,
<PB N="273" REF="153">
but committing it to the ground in a certaine time, which is therefore called <HI>&s;owing Sea&s;on:</HI> &s;ow before or after that time, and your labour will not thrive; and this &s;heweth the goodne&s;&s;e of that promi&s;e, <HI>Gen.</HI> 8. 22. <HI>While the earth re|maineth, Seed-time and Harve&s;t, and Cold and Heat, Summer and Winter, Day and Night, &s;hall not cea&s;e.</HI> Thus learned Mr. <HI>Ayn&s;worth</HI> explaines <HI>Job</HI> 9. 9. concer|ning the four Sea&s;ons of the year: <HI>Which maketh Arcturus, Orion, and Pleiades, and the Chambers of the South: Arcturus ari&s;eth in September, and beginneth</HI> Autumne; <HI>Orion</HI> ari&s;eth in <HI>December,</HI> and beginneth <HI>Winter; Pleiades</HI> ari&s;eth in the Spring; and the <HI>Chambers of the South</HI> he inter|prets of the Southerne Stars, which are for the mo&s;t part hidden from us, as in Chambers; but &s;ome ari&s;e &s;o as in <HI>Sum|mer, as the Dog-&s;tar.</HI></P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>5.</HI> There may be &s;om e pre&s;ent pre|dictions.</NOTE> 5. We readily yeild that there may be &s;ome pre&s;ent Predictions about weather, and things contemperating therewith; &s;uch as Mariners, Phy&s;itians, and Hus|bandmen make: of which we read, <HI>Luke</HI> 12. 54, 55. <HI>When ye &s;ee a cloud ri&s;e out of the We&s;t, &s;traitway you &s;ay, there cometh a &s;hower, and it is &s;o: and when you &s;ee the South winde blow, you &s;ay there will be heat, and it cometh to pa&s;&s;e.</HI> Mariners at Sea have many u&s;eful &s;ignes of winde or &s;torme to follow, and &s;o accordingly
<PB N="274" REF="154">
prepare to avoid the danger. Phy&s;itians by the temper of the Aire, and the body of the Patient, foretel what inten&s;ion or remi&s;&s;ion of the fit there may be.</P>
<P>Husbandmen (who&s;e labour ca&s;ts them to be much abroad) are not unskillful concerning the Sea&s;ons, and &s;o accor|dingly to order their Cattel. But the&s;e are va&s;tly different from tho&s;e things which men pre&s;ume to an&s;wer from the Stars, although the Stars be altogether &s;ilent concerning them: As about Marriage, Trade, Health, or Sickne&s;&s;e, manner of Living and Dying. The confident con|clu&s;ions about the&s;e things, are the darke vi&s;ions of mens wicked hearts, which the Stars give no light unto.</P>
<P>Thus ye &s;ee what we grant. 1. That Stars have a ruling power. 2. Make great alterations in the Aire; and &s;o, 3. On compound bodies. 4. They make times and &s;ea&s;ons. And 5. That men may from the pre&s;ent con&s;ideration, make pre|dictions of times and &s;ea&s;ons from them.</P>
<P>That which we deny, we &s;hall lay down in two Propo&s;itions.</P>
<P N="1"><HI>1.</HI> The Stars have no power over the Rea&s;on <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> Stars have no power over the Rea&s;on or Will.</NOTE>or will of men to nece&s;&s;itate or inforce them to this or that way or object.</P>
<P>Stars cannot act immediatly on the minde to pre&s;ent this or that thing to its con&s;ideration or <HI>apprehen&s;ion.</HI></P>
<P>They cannot fixe or tye down the mind to <HI>Meditation.</HI></P>
<P><PB N="275" REF="154">
They cannot &s;ugge&s;t that which is for <HI>argumentation.</HI></P>
<P>They cannot make the <HI>conclu&s;ions</HI> which the minde &s;hall a&s;&s;ent unto, or cau&s;e that a&s;&s;ent.</P>
<P>They cannot directly incline the <HI>will</HI> to this or that good, to pa&s;&s;e by this, and pitch upon that, or &s;u&s;pend from either.</P>
<P>Angels are creatures in their make and being more excellent then the Stars, acting by rea&s;on and will as we doe, and &s;o are neerer to us: yet they have no &s;uch power over us: How much le&s;&s;e the Stars? We &s;ay &s;econdly,</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> Men can not from Stars make Predictions about con|tingent</NOTE> <HI>2.</HI> That no man can pretend rightly to foretel from the Stars things that in their production depend on the will of man, or are otherwi&s;e contingent: <HI>And that the pre|tences to &s;uch Predictions, and under|takings therein, are frivolous and impi|ous, as may appeare by the&s;e &s;even Argu|ments.</HI></P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Arg. <HI>1.</HI> Its derogatory to Gods providence.</NOTE> 1. Such a way of prediction is <HI>deroga|tory to Gods prerogative,</HI> who onely knows all things in him&s;elfe, and not from without him&s;elfe as we do; he knows all things, and all the circum&s;tances of things, not by di&s;cour&s;e or &s;ucce&s;&s;ion as we do, but altogether and at once, pa&s;t, pre&s;ent, and to come.</P>
<P>Its a high pre&s;umption for any crea|ture to pre&s;ume to know tho&s;e things which God hath hidden. Now God hath
<PB N="276" REF="155">
hidden all contingent things from us: The rea&s;on is, becau&s;e our knowledge of things is by their <HI>cau&s;es: Scire e&s;t per cau&s;as rem cogno&s;cere.</HI> To know, is to un|&s;tand a thing by its cau&s;es; but contin|gent things to come have not now their determination in their cau&s;es; <GAP DESC="foreign"> <HI>non habent in cau&s;a &s;ua determinationem:</HI> Things contingent are more undetermi|ned then other future things. <HI>Contin|gentia vera e&s;t indeterminata potentialitas ad plura:</HI> True contingency is an unde|termined <NOTE PLACE="marg">Things con|tingent what</NOTE>potentiality to more things. There be two things in Contingency.</P>
<P N="1">1. It makes a thing liable to this or that way, this or that hand, this or that being; it hath a po&s;&s;ibility to this or that.</P>
<P N="2">2. That this po&s;&s;ibility is not deter|mined to this &s;o as <HI>not</HI> to that, or to that &s;o as not to this; and &s;o no man knows where, or when it will fall: That is Gods prerogative thus to know contin|gencies.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Agr. <HI>2.</HI> From Gods word.</NOTE> 2. This manner of prediction is dia|metrically oppo&s;it to the <HI>word of God.</HI> Heare the voyce of the third Command, <HI>Thou &s;halt not take the Name of the Lord thy God in vain.</HI> Now A&s;trological Pre|dictions do take his Name in vain. Gods creatures are his workes, and &s;o <HI>his Name,</HI> becau&s;e they make him known, as a name doth the thing whereof it is a
<PB N="277" REF="155">
name, when they are applyed to that end that he hath &s;et out for them. But now A&s;trology in the&s;e Predictions is a gro&s;&s;e abu&s;e of the Heavens and the Stars; for they wre&s;t them to &s;erve their wicked lu&s;ts and phanta&s;ies, boa&s;tings, and cove|tou&s;ne&s;&s;e. God never appointed them to foretel &s;uch things as they would make them &s;peak about, as will farther appeare in the next rea&s;on.</P>
<P><HI>Levit.</HI> 19. 26. <HI>Ye &s;hall u&s;e no inchaunt|ments, or ob&s;erve times:</HI> It is &s;o much a|gain&s;t his will, that when the holy Gho&s;t would &s;et out &s;omething notably cro&s;&s;e to him, its &s;aid to be as <HI>witchcraft,</HI> 1 <HI>Sam.</HI> 15. 23. But I know they will deny their Predictions to be witchcraft; but if they be not from natural cau&s;es, or from di|vine revelation, I know not what el&s;e to refer them to.</P>
<P>Deut. <HI>18. 9, 10.</HI> Thou &s;halt not learne to do after the abominations of tho&s;e Nations; There &s;hall not be found among you one that u&s;eth Divination, or an ob&s;erver of times. <HI>Take notice.</HI></P>
<P N="1"><HI>1. They</HI> are an abomination to the Lord.</P>
<P N="2">2. They are &s;uch abominations <HI>as the Nations u&s;ed.</HI></P>
<P N="3">3. Such as for which <HI>God drave them out.</HI> Its remarkable, the vile&s;t of Men and Nations, and the bittere&s;t enemies of the Church, are branded with this &s;in.</P>
<P>Pharaoh <HI>King of Egypt,</HI> Exod. <HI>7. 11.</HI>
<PB N="278" REF="156">
Pharaoh called the Wi&s;e men and the Sor|cerers. Nebuchadnezzar <HI>King of Baby|lon,</HI> Ezek. <HI>21. 21.</HI> The King of Babylon &s;tood at the parting of the way, at the head of the two wayes to u&s;e divination. I&s;a. <HI>2. 6.</HI> Thou ha&s;t for&s;aken thy people becau&s;e they are South&s;ayers like the Phili&s;tines. <HI>Now E|gyptians, Babylonians, and Phili&s;tines, were the noted enemies of Gods I&s;rael. God will be</HI> a &s;wift witne&s;se again&s;t &s;uch, Mal. <HI>3. 5.</HI> He for&s;ooke his people the hou&s;e of Jacob becau&s;e they were South&s;ayers. Ezk. <HI>13. 9.</HI> My hand &s;hall be upon them that di|vine lyes, they &s;hall not be in the a&s;sembly of my people. I&s;a. <HI>41. 25.</HI> God fru&s;trateth the tokens of lyars, and maketh Diviners mad.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Arg. <HI>3.</HI> from the nature of the Stars.</NOTE> 3. We &s;hall rea&s;on from the Nature of the Stars.</P>
<P>The fixed Stars are not to be numbred, <HI>Gen.</HI> 15. 5. Its the &s;peech of God to <HI>A|braham, Tell the Stars if thou be able to number them:</HI> that is, he was <HI>not able</HI> to number them; and as their numbers, &s;o <HI>their virtues are not known.</HI> There may be as many contrary a&s;pects which men know not, as which they pretend to know; and the unknown contrary a&s;|pects may hinder the a&s;pects they know.</P>
<P>Mathematicians &s;ay the Heavens are whirled about with &s;o rapid and &s;wift a motion, that in a &s;mall moment of time, the &s;tate of the &s;tars is changed from the
<PB N="279" REF="156">
diver&s;e &s;tations, whereof the Predictions are.</P>
<P>Now, how can they declare that, when it is uncertaine in what temperament the Stars be?</P>
<P>Be&s;ide the virtue of the Stars is ming|led together in the &s;ubject whereon they work: They do not work &s;ingly and apart on the &s;ubjects; as for example; <HI>Jupiter</HI> doth not worke alone without <HI>Mars,</HI> nor <HI>Mars</HI> without <HI>Jupiter,</HI> but all the Stars put forth their force and virtue together: <HI>Sol, Luna, Mercury,</HI> and the re&s;t work together on the Aire, and &s;o on compound bodies, and &s;o they are common cau&s;es; that is, their cau&s;ing power is &s;uch as is not proper and pecu|liar to one con&s;tellation, &s;o as other Stars and con&s;tellations do not &s;hare in it; but what they put forth its common to other Stars together with them, and &s;o the&s;e Stars with the&s;e Stars; and it being &s;o, how can they a&s;cribe this or that con&s;e|quent to one Star &s;o as not to another, &s;ince they all cau&s;ed together the effect?</P>
<P>A&s;trologers make the Stars particular cau&s;es, cau&s;ing particular effects, or el&s;e they can foretel nothing by them.</P>
<P>Surely the Stars <HI>groane</HI> to be thus a|bu&s;ed, to be diverted from the end they were appointed to; and put under this bondage to &s;erve the phanta&s;ies of men,
<PB N="280" REF="157">
and not tho&s;e proper ends a&s;&s;igned them by God.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Argu. <HI>4.</HI> From the Nature of Art.</NOTE> 4. We rea&s;on from <HI>the Nature of Art: Ars e&s;t &s;apientia Dei in Creaturis refracta:</HI> Art is the wi&s;dome of God refracted in the creatures. All wi&s;dome and knowledge is incomprehen&s;ively centered and mee|ting in God, but there it is too high for our reach; but its &s;evered and broken in the creatures, that &s;o we may under|&s;tand it in them.</P>
<P>I deny not but there is an Art of the Stars, which Art God hath made, and its a beame of his wi&s;dome &s;hining on them, which is called <HI>A&s;tronomy;</HI> that is, the Law of the Stars, or that rule that God hath &s;ubjected the Stars unto, and our rea&s;on findes out. But that is not the wi&s;dome of God whereby he knows and foretels things to come; that wi&s;dome, that foreknowledge, that foreknowing wi&s;dome God never placed in the Stars, nor &s;hall we ever finde it there.</P>
<P>All Art is that which by our <HI>medita|tion, arguing, ob&s;ervation,</HI> and <HI>experi|ence,</HI> we take up out of the Creature whereof it is an Art; as in the Art of Mu&s;icke: no man makes the Art of <HI>Mu|&s;icke,</HI> that is a creature of Gods making: onely men finde out and di&s;cover what God hath made; as namely, God hath made this or that proportion in &s;ounds
<PB N="281" REF="157">
which cau&s;e Harmony, men have not made the&s;e proportions; men indeed finde them out to be there where God hath put them: <HI>Omnis applicatio ratio|nis rectae ad aliquid factibile pertinet ad artem,</HI> &s;aith <HI>Aquinas:</HI> that is, All the application of right Rea&s;on unto any thing that is to be done pertains to Art; &s;o the application of our right rea&s;on unto &s;ounds, findes out God wi&s;|dome there, and belongs to the Art of it.</P>
<P>Study, yea &s;tudy again and again the nature of the Stars, you &s;hall never finde any &s;uch progno&s;ticative virtue placed in the Stars.</P>
<P><HI>Parentes di&s;ciplinarum &s;unt Experientia &amp; Inductio.</HI> Experience and Induction, are the Parents of Arts. <HI>Experience</HI> is the gathering of many ob&s;ervations, and applying them to certaine proper u&s;es: But if men gather true ob&s;ervations, and apply them rightly, they &s;hall never make up their predictions, but that which &s;hall come forth far different from them.</P>
<P><HI>Induction</HI> is the gathering together of many experiences: Now if they can make no experience, they cannot make <NOTE PLACE="marg">Argu. <HI>5.</HI> From that part of A|&s;trology that con|cerns wea|ther.</NOTE><HI>Inductions</HI> which is out of many experi|ences; and if neither experience, nor in|duction, then no Art.</P>
<P N="5">5. We argue from that part of A&s;tro|logy
<PB N="282" REF="158">
concerning Predictions about al|teration of the Aire, about faire or foule weather. How gros&s;ly are they mi&s;taken there, and how is that contradicted and condemned by our daily experience? So that I am more then three quarters per&s;waded, that if one take an Almanack calculated for this pre&s;ent yeare, 1655. and where it is written fair weather, write foule, and where its written <HI>foule,</HI> write <HI>faire;</HI> where its written <HI>&s;tormes,</HI> write <HI>calme;</HI> and your <HI>writing,</HI> as to the event and &s;ucce&s;&s;e, &s;hall fall out as right as that which was fir&s;t calculated. Part of the rea&s;on that induceth me into this opinion is this.</P>
<P>Much, yea very much of weather de|pends upon the <HI>winde:</HI> Now who knows twelve months before, where the winde will be twelve months after? nay who knows this day, where the winde will be to morrow?</P>
<P>God hath not left the <HI>windes</HI> in the keeping of the <HI>Stars;</HI> but he holds them in <HI>his fi&s;t, and rides upon the wings of them, P&s;al.</HI> 104. 3.</P>
<P>Millions of men live and trade in the great deeps, they have their &s;everal ways; &s;ome Ea&s;tward, &s;ome We&s;tward, &s;ome outward, &s;ome homeward bound: God knows all their wayes and occa&s;ions, and who &s;tands in mo&s;t need of winde and weather, and he &s;erves all their
<PB N="283" REF="158">
turnes in his &s;ea&s;on; and &s;o turnes wind and weather as he thinks good, without acquainting the Stars with it.</P>
<P>Now if they mi&s;take &s;o wofully in this one thing, which &s;eemes to be mo&s;t within their Sphere: and if God have &s;o ordered it, that although Mariners, Phy&s;itians, and Husbandmen, can by the pre&s;ent face and po&s;ture of the skie, tell &s;omewhat of winde and weather in&s;uing, but they are limited that they cannot do this fourteen dayes before; nor then when they do it, any farther then by a likely conjecture. How can we imagine A&s;trologers &s;hould take upon them rightly the foretelling of things contin|gent many years after?</P>
<P N="6"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Arg. <HI>6.</HI> from the excellent frame of Man.</NOTE> 6. The&s;e Predictions are derogatory to that excellent frame that God hath made <HI>man in.</HI></P>
<P>Its the noblene&s;&s;e of his make, that where he acts like him&s;elfe, acts as a man, he acts by <HI>wit and will:</HI> He is <HI>agens con&s;ilio,</HI> &s;uch an Agent as acts by <HI>Coun&s;el;</HI> that is, by dictate and principle of Rea&s;on and will; and the&s;e two are lockt up from the powers of all creatures, that they cannot act on them immediatly; and &s;o from the power of the Stars. I meane, that it is in the Nature of Man, when the&s;e creatures have done their uttermo&s;t, yet for him to ri&s;e up, and act contrary to all their actings.</P>
<P><PB N="284" REF="159">
I know A&s;trologers u&s;e frequently this &s;aying;&mdash;<HI>Sapiens dominabitur A&s;tris:</HI> A wi&s;e man &s;hall beare rule over the Stars. Yet how unduely and im|periou&s;ly do they incroach upon the Queen and Ca&s;tle of the &s;oul? I meane <HI>the will of man,</HI> and pre&s;cribe wicked Laws for <HI>hope and feare:</HI> Alas, how ma|ny, too many are in&s;laved by them?</P>
<P>The&s;e A&s;trologers make their ne&s;ts above the Stars, and <HI>Lord</HI> it over their weake di&s;ciples, a&s;&s;uming more right over them then the Stars have; for many times they take away their <HI>re&s;t,</HI> and <HI>wea|ken the quiet of their minde</HI> by their dayly expectation of &s;uch &s;ucce&s;&s;es as <HI>they pre|&s;umptuou&s;ly &s;peak of,</HI> and &s;hall never come to pa&s;&s;e.</P>
<P>For &s;hame, for &s;hame, let us redeem our &s;elves from this Captivity. God hath not &s;ubjected your rea&s;on and will to <HI>Angels;</HI> then &s;urely not to Stars or Star-gazers: <Q>Angelus non pote&s;t aliquam formam imprimere in imaginatione ni&s;i me|diante &s;en&s;u extrin&s;eco, nec pote&s;t voluntatem no&s;tram mutare: <BIBL>Aquin.</BIBL></Q> An Angel can|not imprint any forme upon our ima|gination, but by the interpo&s;ition and mediation of the &s;en&s;e, which is outward, neither can an Angel change our will. Let us blu&s;h to attribute that to Stars and men, that Angels have not.</P>
<P N="7"><PB N="285" REF="159">
<NOTE PLACE="marg">Argu. <HI>7.</HI> From the nature of Contin|gent things.</NOTE> 7. The la&s;t argument we &s;hall name taken from the nature <HI>of things contingent:</HI> Now there we have this rule, <HI>Futurorum Contingentium non e&s;t determinata veritas;</HI> that is, the <HI>Truth of future contingent things is not determined;</HI> and yet how peremp|torily doe they conclude concerning the&s;e things? As about <HI>marrying</HI> a wife, about what kinde of life or imploy|ment this or that man &s;hall be of; whe|ther he &s;hall dye by war, or by water; that in &s;uch a yeare of his life he &s;hall be &s;icke, that he &s;hall be deare to Princes, and &s;uch like. Now the&s;e are things that are undetermined; that is, they may fall out this or that way: how can they have any knowledge of them? <HI>Con|tingens dicitur quod aliter e&s;&s;e pote&s;t.</HI> A thing is &s;aid to be contingent, that might have been otherwi&s;e then it is; that although in time it come to pa&s;&s;e in this or that &s;hape; yet as to the cau&s;es producing, it might as well have been in another &s;hape.</P>
<P>God retains the determination of the&s;e things in his own will, and there|fore he knows them, but men can|not.</P>
<P>Things are &s;aid to be contingent
<LIST>
<ITEM>inwardly, or</ITEM>
<ITEM>outwardly.</ITEM>
</LIST></P>
<P>The actings of the will of man, make that contingency that is called <HI>inward: Outward contingency</HI> ari&s;eth from &s;ome
<PB N="286" REF="160">
outward help or impediment: Now that God hath removed the&s;e acts of the will from the Stars, we heard before; and no le&s;&s;e removed are the helps or hinderances that doe fall out in the pro|ducing of particular effects, to which the Stars can give you no light, but leave you in the darke.</P>
<P>But doe not many things they &s;peake <NOTE PLACE="marg">Obj. What they foretel comes to pa&s;&s;e.</NOTE>of come to pa&s;&s;e and fall out as they foretel? and doth not this mightily commend their way? You &s;ay that Experience is the mother of Arts, and they have many experiences; and how will you, or can you an&s;wer them?</P>
<P>I an&s;wer diver&s;e wayes.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">Sol. <HI>1.</HI> They have not &s;o ma|ny experi|ences.</NOTE> 1. I deny that they have &s;o many ex|periences as they brag of; Somewhat that &s;eemes to favour their proceedings, may be taken notice of by tho&s;e who affect and admire &s;uch a way; and no marvel then, if it be commended far be|yond what it was; for the commenda|tions follow the affection of the com|mender, and not alwayes the nature of the thing commended. And what if men to &s;pread their lyes farther will <HI>print them,</HI> mu&s;t they be true becau&s;e they are in print? And what if &s;ome things reported be of &s;ome antiquity, will that make them authenticke? They have not &s;o much to brag of as they pretend; for mauy things are &s;aid
<PB N="287" REF="160">
to come to pa&s;&s;e that did not.</P>
<P N="2"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> They come not from any cau&s;ing virtue in the Stars.</NOTE> 2. Suppo&s;e &s;uch and &s;uch things doe come to pa&s;&s;e, its not from any cau&s;ing virtue in the Stars: If you could heare their voice, you would have them di&s;|claming of their influences to &s;uch ef|fects. They come to pa&s;&s;e, tis true; but are there no other cau&s;es then the Stars? are there not other things that are neerer to which they may be a&s;cri|bed? &s;urely there are.</P>
<P N="3"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> They may have their doubt|ful termes applied to &s;ome events.</NOTE> 3. Blind men &s;ometime hit the white, and dreames &s;ometime &s;ute with what after falls out: and &s;o many <HI>A&s;trologers</HI> among many fal&s;hoods, &s;peake &s;ome|thing that may prove true; and no mar|vel, &s;eeing their Predictions are like the dubious an&s;wers of the <HI>Oracles,</HI> which may admit a diver&s;e &s;en&s;e, and &s;peake in general termes, which credulous men apply as they think fit.</P>
<P N="4">4. The coming to pa&s;&s;e is the &s;tron|ge&s;t argument again&s;t them; It comes to pa&s;&s;e, but not by any thing in the nature of the Stars foretelling it, nor by any Art, nor by any revelation from God. Then may you not ju&s;tly feare, that &s;uch di&s;coveries ari&s;e from him who is the enemy of God, and your &s;ouls? <HI>the lyar,</HI> and <HI>the father of lyes, the prince of darkne&s;se and of the power of the aire, who workes effectually in the children of di&s;|obedience:</HI> and were you not much bet|ter
<PB N="288" REF="161">
to want &s;uch Predictions, then take them up by &s;uch a hand?</P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>5.</HI> It may come to pa&s;&s;e in vengeance.</NOTE> 5. It may come to pa&s;&s;e in a way of Judicial vengeance; your mindes are &s;et upon lyes and vanities, and God may an&s;wer you according to the vi&s;ions of your own heart. <HI>Ezek.</HI> 14. 4. <HI>Every man that putteth the &s;tumbling blocke of his iniquity before his face, and cometh to the Prophet; I the Lord will an&s;wer him that cometh according to the multitude of his Idols.</HI> If God an&s;wer him that comes to <HI>his Prophet</HI> according to the iniquity of his heart; How much more will he an&s;wer them that come to A&s;trologers, Satans Prophets, according to their ini|quity?</P>
<P><HI>2</HI> The&s;&s;. <HI>2. 9. Antichri&s;t cometh after the working of Satan,</HI> with all power and &s;ignes and lying wonders. <HI>Now</HI> ver&s;. <HI>10.</HI> Becau&s;e they receive not the truth in love, Ver&s;e <HI>11.</HI> God &s;ends them &s;trong delu&s;ions that they &s;hould beleeve a lye: <HI>or it may be God comes to try you.</HI></P>
<P>Deut. <HI>13. 1, 2, 3. See how the ca&s;e is there &s;tated.</HI> If there ari&s;e a Prophet that giveth thee a &s;igne or a wonder, and the &s;igne or the wonder come to pa&s;se, where|of he &s;pake unto thee, &s;aying, let us goe after other Gods; Thou &s;halt not hearken to the words of that Prophet or dreamer of dreams; for the Lord your God proveth you, whether you love the Lord your God with
<PB N="289" REF="161">
all your Heart and with all your Soul.</P>
<P>A word of Application.</P>
<P N="1"><NOTE PLACE="marg">&V;&s;e <HI>1.</HI> To profe&s;|&s;ors of the Mathema|ticks.</NOTE> 1. To tho&s;e who are profe&s;&s;ors and teachers of the <HI>Mathematickes.</HI> I have one word to you; and would to God it might finde acceptance with you. I honour all Art; if not too much, I am &s;ure enough: and I hate not that plea|&s;ing and profitable &s;tudy of the <HI>Mathema|ticks,</HI> although I confe&s;&s;e my &s;elfe no proficient therein. I would humbly intreate you to keep to what is Art, and the wi&s;dome of God in the creature, and that will render you wi&s;e, not <HI>Cunning</HI> men. Surely <HI>Piety</HI> is the be&s;t Policy, and <HI>the feare of the Lord, the beginning of wi&s;dome.</HI> I appeale to your own con|&s;ciences: &s;hould you not tremble when in your Predictions you a&s;pire to what i<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> proper to God, and not communi|cable to man?</P>
<P>Its enough for our narrow compa&s;&s;e, and to keep us humble, to recall a little of what is pa&s;t&punc; and to know <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">ot very much of what is pre&s;ent before us, but lea&s;t of all what is to come.</P>
<P>The Apo&s;tle <HI>Paul</HI> would not have the Corinthians &s;hould <HI>thinke</HI> 1. <HI>Cor.</HI> 4. 6. <HI>above what is written</HI> <GAP DESC="foreign">&punc; Be not angry with me if I wi&s;h you &s;o well, that I would not have you to think, or write above what God hath written in his word or workes.</P>
<P><PB N="290" REF="162">
There be &s;ome things in all Arts that God hides from men, as Sympathys and Antipathies in natural Philo&s;ophy, the returnes of Agues by &s;et fits in Medici|nal practice; and in your own way, the cau&s;e of the ebbings and flowings of the Sea: You are not infallible in what you think you know: you are apt enough to erre as you are men; <HI>Huma|num e&s;t errare;</HI> but how much more apt if you proceed by <HI>erroneous principles</HI> and doctrines?</P>
<P>Is it nothing to you that God hath &s;tirred up the &s;pirits and pens of tho&s;e who are godly and wi&s;e to appeare a|gain&s;t your way? I &s;hould much &s;u&s;|pect my &s;elfe to be in the way of <HI>Balaam,</HI> when I &s;hould meet with &s;o many <HI>Angels,</HI> (Mini&s;ters, Me&s;&s;engers, of God) <HI>com|ing again&s;t me.</HI> You may mi&s;take, and &s;o mi&s;peake, as that Divination may ea&s;ily turn into a lye, <HI>I&s;a.</HI> 44. <GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter">5. and God may bla&s;t that rea&s;on into madne&s;&s;e that is &s;o abu&s;ed: and then how &s;ad will your ca&s;e be, when you mu&s;t be ranked with tho&s;e <HI>who are without, who&s;e property is de&s;cribed&punc;</HI> to be &s;uch <HI>who love and make a lye, Rev.</HI> 22. 15.</P>
<P>Oh remember how unduely and nn|worthily you have perplexed, and re|joyced the hearts of people: you have put them in feare where no feare was, and rejoyced them when you had no
<PB N="291" REF="162">
good ground for it. You have rai&s;ed up hopes in them like &s;piders webbs, which a little time hath ea&s;ily &s;wept a|way; and you have driven many to de&s;paire, when God gave no cau&s;e for &s;uch de&s;peration.</P>
<P>How infectious have your principles and practices been? How many have been mi&s;led by you? Think on your Schollers whom you have trained up to follow your &s;teps; if you walke awry, how can they walke right? Doth it not, or may it not pitty your heart to &s;ee &s;o many, young, ingenious, hopeful Gentlemen, to be corrupted by you? It may be God may give you repen|tance, which I heartily wi&s;h; but they may be hardned in their vanity, and never returne; and will not that fall &s;ad on you, when you &s;hall remember that you have a generation in the pit beneath, whom your fal&s;e teaching and corrupt example hath begotten?</P>
<P>You cannot be &s;o inob&s;ervant in your own way, but you doe know that God from heaven doth beare witne&s;&s;e again&s;t your weather-wi&s;dome; making that prove faire that you foretel to be foul, and foule to be fair. Now if you are &s;o much out in that which is lowe&s;t in your way; may you not much more mi&s;take in higher pretences?</P>
<P>Surely &s;ince you are &s;o confident of
<PB N="292" REF="163">
things to come, which yet God and Na|ture hath not actually determined, you might be more bold to call up things <HI>pa&s;t;</HI> if you can tell a per&s;on what <HI>&s;hall befal him,</HI> you may as well tell what <HI>hath befallen him.</HI> Why doe you not bend your thoughts that way, and not this? is it not becau&s;e it would not be &s;o taking with men, and withal it would decry your skill?</P>
<P>Remember, and forget not, you mu&s;t give account of your wayes and workes; thinke &s;eriou&s;ly of it: Will your pro|ceedings be owned by Chri&s;t another day? will he &s;ay to you, <HI>Euge bone &s;erve, Well done thou good and faithful &s;ervant?</HI> thou ha&s;t been faithful in thy Predi|ctions, I will make thee Lord of ten Cities; <HI>enter into thy Ma&s;ters joy.</HI></P>
<P>Will he not rather accu&s;e you for a|bu&s;ing your &s;elves and others? for mi&s;|pending your parts and paines, and &s;narling at tho&s;e who reproved you? Your &s;ins are great, but not unpardon|able: Oh that God would give you repentance unto life, like tho&s;e we read of in <HI>Acts</HI> 19. 19. Many believed, and among tho&s;e, <HI>Many that u&s;ed curious Arts, brought their Bookes together and burned them before all men.</HI> If you will &s;tile your dealings Arts; others, and rightly too, will call them <HI>Curious:</HI>
<PB N="293" REF="163">
Now there was cau&s;e enough to burne their <HI>Books</HI> then: May there not be as much in your <HI>Books</HI> now? I &s;hall adde no more, onely leave it to God and your con&s;ciences; and de&s;cend to give a word to your di&s;ciples.</P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">&V;&s;e to tho&s;e who are learners of A&s;trology.</NOTE> I cannot but from my &s;oul pitty you, to &s;ee your youth and ingenuity &s;o dan|gerou&s;ly intangled. A&s;trological Pre|dictions are fine cobwebs to catch young wits. Give eare to a plaine word.</P>
<P>Its po&s;&s;ible you may meet with &s;ome|thing that is and may be called <HI>Art:</HI> But is there nothing el&s;e? is there not &s;omething far wor&s;e? No evil was ever &s;o audacious at fir&s;t, as to appeare unmasked, and in its own colours; the wor&s;t of things &s;ometimes put on the be&s;t of names and pretences. I &s;hould be too impu|dent in writing again&s;t what is <HI>Art,</HI> and &s;o Gods wi&s;dome in the creature; and you would be too negligent and gro&s;&s;e, if you e&s;pou&s;e <HI>mens phanta&s;ies and wicked|ne&s;se</HI> for Art, <HI>for Gods wi&s;dome in the creature.</HI></P>
<P>All men de&s;ire to know, and tho&s;e that know &s;omething, de&s;ire to know more: <HI>Scienti<GAP DESC="illegible" RESP="apex" EXTENT="1 letter"> non habet inimicum ni&s;i ignorantem.</HI> I blame not your de&s;ire of knowledge, but wi&s;h you to goe on in it, and that your de&s;ires may end in attain|ment: but take heed what, and how you know. All knowledge of excel|lent
<PB N="294" REF="164">
objects innobles the minde, <HI>Excellens objectum intellectum perficit.</HI> I be&s;eech you weigh, whether &s;uch principles as you are taught and have &s;ucked in, will make your minde one jot better, and not rather much wor&s;e.</P>
<P>I know they in&s;inuate not barely by pretending to augment your knowledge, but knowledge in relation to your practice; of &s;omething to be done by you, and that hereafter; nay of what God will doe by you, and to you; and the&s;e con&s;iderations are taking and &s;naring.</P>
<P>To pretend&punc; to advance knowledge onely, without practice would be <HI>vaine &s;peculation:</HI> to know onely what con|cerns other men, would &s;eeme a <HI>bu&s;ibodi|ne&s;&s;e;</HI> to tell you what is pa&s;t is but to recall what you had &s;ome knowledge of before; but to tell you what is to come, and to come from God, this takes much with you.</P>
<P>But (deare hearts) be not deceived: How came the &s;pirit of God to them, that they can reveale &s;o much to you? <HI>They goe,</HI> but <HI>God &s;ent them not;</HI> and <HI>they declare, but what? the vi&s;ions of their own heart.</HI></P>
<P>I am not ignorant that there is &s;ome|what of &s;ingularity by which they ingraciate them&s;elves; men affect to be and doe &s;omething more then others:
<PB N="295" REF="164">
to be as all men are, to know as all men know, is but a <HI>common being and know|ledge;</HI> but to be of higher &s;traines and extract, to be of more accompli&s;ht per|fection is that which men &s;trive for, and they pretend to bring you unto.</P>
<P><HI>Bona verba:</HI> The&s;e are good words indeed; but looke well to it, le&s;t while you aime to be higher then other men, you fall not beneath the lowe&s;t Chri&s;tians; and while you &s;trive to know what you &s;hould not, you grow ignorant of what you &s;hould.</P>
<P>The knowledge of God and a mans &s;elfe, are the greate&s;t Sciences, and they make faire to in&s;truct you in both, but lead you aright in neither. The Word, the Go&s;pel, the Word of truth, will give you the knowledge of God and your &s;elves, which they and the Stars can never do.</P>
<P>Tis true, they maintaine their way in a kinde of maje&s;ty with great, &s;ounding, &s;trange words: As the <HI>Luminary of the time, the Sun angular po&s;ited in this or that hou&s;e; the Moon in this or that Sextile, to Mercury Lord of his a&s;cendant,</HI> and &s;uch like termes. But how weake is it to be carried away with words, and &s;ad to be <HI>worded into wickedne&s;&s;e?</HI></P>
<P><NOTE PLACE="marg">Again&s;t figure-ca&s;t|ing.</NOTE> Above all, give me leave to warne you of ca&s;ting your own <HI>Nativities,</HI> or the Nativities of others, or &s;uffering others
<PB N="296" REF="165">
to ca&s;t them for you: And here take <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>1.</HI> Its hard to know the mo|meut of Birth.</NOTE>notice of the&s;e &s;ixe things. Fir&s;t,</P>
<P N="1">1. They mu&s;t know the moment in which you were borne; and who can readily tell them that? I am &s;ure you your &s;elves cannot remember it; and truely I think your mother and the good women then pre&s;ent were &s;o bu&s;ie about you and her, that they did not tell the clocke: but &s;uppo&s;e &s;ome heard it &s;tricke; it may be the clocke was wrong &s;et, might goe an hour too fa&s;t, or too &s;low. How will, or can you know the direct time? and the heavens change in a moment, what worke can you make <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>2.</HI> They make an Image of heaven in a table, &amp; hou&s;es for the Stars.</NOTE>of it?</P>
<P N="2">2. They make an Image of the Heaven in a Table and the hou&s;es for the Stars: but what if the&s;e hou&s;es and tables are creatures of their own braine, and never of Gods making? what &s;orry creatures will they prove, and the workings upon them as &s;orry as they?</P>
<P>The twelve Hou&s;es are made of the feigned Signes of a &s;uppo&s;ed Zodiacke. Now what worke can you make of things feigned and &s;uppo&s;ed? May we not conclude &s;afely that what is <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>3.</HI> They pretend to &s;hew in what hou&s;es the Stars are.</NOTE>wrought upon &s;uch &s;uppo&s;itions is little better then &s;omething feigned or &s;up|po&s;ed?</P>
<P N="3">3. They undertake to &s;hew you what hou&s;es the Stars were in when you were
<PB N="297" REF="165">
borne; as what hou&s;e <HI>Jupiter, Sol,</HI> and <HI>Venus,</HI> were in, which they account the be&s;t Planets; <HI>Saturne,</HI> and <HI>Mars,</HI> the wor&s;t; <HI>Mercury</HI> and <HI>Luna,</HI> varying ac|cording to the places they re&s;ide in, and &s;uch like &s;tuffe. That there be places and motions of the Stars I que&s;tion not: but as for <HI>the&s;e Hou&s;es</HI> and the Stars being at &s;uch a moment in this <HI>hou&s;e,</HI> or at another moment in that hou&s;e; I doe more then &s;uppo&s;e, He &s;hall not be damned that believes no &s;uch mat|ter.</P>
<P N="4"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>4.</HI> To tell you who reigned when you were born.</NOTE> 4. They pretend to tell you who reigned when you entered into the world. It is more then ever they can prove, that there is &s;uch a <HI>Monarchical virtue and order in the Stars;</HI> that is, that this, or that particular Star hath its virtue and influence apart from other Stars; that it rules and hath power which the other Stars have not, and puts forth this power in a way of rule, without them, and di&s;tinct from them.</P>
<P>And it would be as hard to give a rea&s;on why the con&s;tellation at the time of the birth mu&s;t be calculated and not as well the con&s;tellation at the <HI>time of the conception,</HI> or while it was an Embrio.</P>
<P>I confe&s;&s;e I am altogether in the darke, and I thinke you have not much light with you, &s;o much as to &s;hew me why you &s;hould not calculate <HI>Conceptions</HI> as
<PB N="298" REF="166">
well as <HI>Nativities,</HI> or the &s;tate of a childe in the wombe, as well as the <HI>birth of it.</HI></P>
<P N="5"><NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>5.</HI> What a&s;pect the other plan|ets have.</NOTE> 5. They pretend to tell you in what de|gree, and with what a&s;pect the other Planets did temper or inflame.</P>
<P>You mu&s;t blame my ignorance if I apprehend it very hard to under&s;tand the particular influence of the Stars, much more the degrees of that influence. I know not how to under&s;tand one Star regent and another <HI>&s;ub&s;ervient:</HI> my faith tells me they worke together and at once, in common, according to that nature and motion that God hath given to them.</P>
<P N="6">6. But to pretend to read from them, <NOTE PLACE="marg"><HI>6.</HI> Hence pretend to &s;trange Predicti|ons.</NOTE>from the Heavens, Hou&s;es, Planets, A&s;|pects, Influences, and the like, what is decreed concerning you, as that the Stars incline a man to atcheive great prefer|ment, declare a fit capacity to this or that thing, promi&s;e a &s;matterring of it; di&s;|cover whether a man &s;hall attaine the thing de&s;ired, or the like. This I &s;ay is to me unlikely and ungodly: which that it may appeare to you, weigh the argu|ments before alledged.</P>
<P>What although they tell you of good things? I be&s;eech you abu&s;e not your faith to believe them; It will be your happine&s;&s;e if God be&s;tow&punc; &s;uch and &s;uch good things on you; but you &s;hall never come the more to enjoy them; becau&s;e of
<PB N="299" REF="166">
the Stars or their Predictions; and you doe but abu&s;e them and abu&s;e your &s;elves, and your ble&s;&s;ings to take them up from their hand.</P>
<P>Suppo&s;e they tell you of &s;omething cro&s;&s;e and darkely &s;poken; let not that affright you: let me &s;peak to you as our Saviour to his di&s;ciples, <HI>Joh.</HI> 14. 1. You <HI>believe in God, believe al&s;o in Chri&s;t:</HI> Men or their me&s;&s;ages you are not obli|ged to believe; nor will it ever be char|ged on you as a &s;in of infidelity, to give no a&s;&s;ent to the&s;e their A&s;trological Predictions.</P>
<TRAILER>FINIS.</TRAILER>
</DIV1>
</BACK>
</TEXT>
</EEBO>
</ETS>
